E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT

AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.1 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION

PART 1 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION

1.01 GENERAL

This Specification covers the design, manufacture, supply, installation, coordination with
other sub-contracts and designated contracts, testing, commissioning and maintenance
of the Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning (MVAC) Installation, Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) and Building Management System (BMS) Installation as
described herein and shown on the Drawings. The intent of this Sub-Contract is to
provide for the construction and completion in every detail of the Works.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Works to be carried out under this Sub-Contract are as described in the
Specifications and / or indicated on the Drawings. Any unspecified, undesigned
and non-indicated works that are necessary in the course of works to complete
the installations are deemed to be included.

B. This Sub-Contractor shall fully understand that the Drawings only indicate the
design intents of the Works and act as a guideline to show the minimum
requirement on the installations. This Sub-Contractor shall explore the concept
and carry out detailed design on the services provisions in order to satisfy the
actual site conditions and design intents. The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to
have allowed in the tender sum of costs for such an arrangement and no
additional claim will be considered at any circumstance.

C. This Sub-Contractor is deemed to have carried out site investigation and fully
acquaint himself with the existing site conditions before the submission of this
Tender. This Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to allow in his Tender sum all
costs for the MVAC, ATC and BMS installation and the associated builder’s works
including opening forming, backfilling, pipe sleeves, and alike.

D. The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system and Building Management

System (BMS) shall be included in this Sub-contract. This Sub-contractor shall
take-up full responsibility and shall be responsible to ensure that the automatic
temperature control system and building management system are fully
compatible with the MVAC system offered by them.

PART 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

2.01 Description of Work Area

This project calls for the proposed commercial development at New Kowloon Inland Lot
No. 6557, with total gross area of around 101,900m2. The development consists of twin
towers. Tower A consists of 5 floors of office, 1 floor of skygarden, 3 floors of F&B, 1
floor of sport hall, 10 floors of SOGO department store and 4 floors of basement. Tower
B consists of 5 floors of office, 1 floor of skygarden, 3 floors of F&B, 2 floors of cinema,
1 floor of sport hall, 9 floors of retail and 4 floors of basement

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.02 Description of System

A. Chilled Water System

1. District Cooling System (DCS)

NKIL 6557 is covered in the district cooling system (DCS) of Kai Tak
Development and District Cooling System (DCS) will be adopted. Tower A
and Tower B will be equipped with its own DCS substation. The size of the
DCS substation would take into account of the peak summer cooling load
as well as the seasonal cooling load profile. Chilled water pipes from the
DCS distribution network are connected to the plate type heat exchangers
installed inside the substation. Variable speed chilled water pump will be
provided for distribution of chilled water from the DCS substation to the
development. Building management system (BMS) will be used to control
the speed of the chilled water pumps.

Tower A and Tower B are equipped with their independent district cooling
substation at B2. District cooling pipework will be leaded in from the
Concord road near Tower A, while pipework connection to Tower B will be
teed-off from the district cooling pipes inside DCS substation of Tower
A. No separated DCS pipelines are allowed from Muk Chui Street to Tower
B. The block load for Tower A and Tower B is estimated as 11,000kW and
11,000kW respectively.

2. Chilled Water Distribution System

Variable speed chilled water pumps with differential pressure control

pumps will be adopted. A bypass modulating valve connecting the chilled
water supply and return mains will be installed such that when the
consumer side chilled water return temperature is below 14°C, the
modulating damper will be opened to re-circulate the returned chilled water
back to the system.

Chilled water supply and return temperature will follow EMSD’s technical
guidelines with 6 C supply temperature and 14 C return temperature.

Each heat exchanger (supplied and installed by EMSD) will be provided

with one matching chilled water pump to simplify the control algorithm.
One standby chilled water pump will be provided to enhance the reliability
of the chilled water system. The chilled water pump will be connected to
common header such that each pump can be served as the standby unit
for others. To allow night load / light load operation, one duty and one
standby chilled water pump with lower handling capacity are provided.

The level of topmost floor (UR/F) is +126.70m whereas the lowest floor
(B4/F) is -15.80m, and the overall vertical height of the development is
+142.5m. Therefore, a 16-bar chilled water system would be marginal to
withstand the hydrostatic pressure. In order to allow the application of 16
bar system, chilled water system is provided from B2/F (-5.80m) to UR/F,
whereas split type air conditioning system are provided to B3/F and B4/F.

Direct return chilled water piping system is adopted. Commissioning

valves will be installed at main branch-off located at each floor for water
system balancing. Balancing valves will also be provided at the boundary
of retail shops, light F&B and F&B to facilitate balancing of chilled water
supply.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Chilled water is circulated through, FCUs, AHUs, PAUs and CRACs by the
chilled water pumps and pipework. The distributed water flow will be
varied in direct response to load demand where motorized modulating
control valves will be employed for the CRACs, AHUs and PAUs.
Motorized two-way on/off valves will be used for FCUs.

For staging of chilled water pumps, a direct digital controller (DDC) will be
installed to adjust automatically the system outputs by switching on/off
pumps to match with the load demand. This controller will be interfaced
with the Building Management System to monitor and control the system
efficiently. Override manual control will also be provided for emergency
operation or when the system is under maintenance.

3. Other Requirements for Piping System

The piping route for the water side system shall be allocated smoothly to
reduce the energy cost and air trapping. Automatic air vent (AAV) shall be
provided for the main header pipes, top of risers, and any localized highest
point as per actual site conditions. Adequate drain point shall also be
provided at the main header, the bottom of risers, branch off from main
pipe, cooling coil for each of major A/C equipment, the main supply for a
group of small A/C equipment (such as fan coil unit). Wherever possible,
the AAV and drain shall be allocated at the A/C plant room complete with
proper drainage. If not possible, this Sub-Contractor shall provide piping
extension from the AAV / drain up to the nearest drainage point.

B. Air Conditioning System for Major Areas

The air-side system for major air-conditioning areas shall be provided for various
air-conditioning areas as described as below:-

a) SOGO Department Store, Supermarket, Gallery, Sport Hall,

Tower A Arcade, Tower A Department Store Passenger Lift Lobby

Single-duct, all air system will be provided to serve these areas.

Temperature sensor shall be provided at the return air duct of AHU
to control the space temperature. AHU shall be equipped with EC
plug fans and variable speed drive (VSD) to enable low airflow
operation for energy saving.

The fresh air intake for the arcade AHU shall equip with modulating
damper and airflow sensor to enable control and monitoring of the
fresh air rate based on the CO2 sensor at return air duct or inside
space.

The design in entrances door will be targeted to minimize the hot air
ingress in order to improve energy efficiency and cooling
performance at entrances. Extra cooling capacity will be allowed.

Central exhaust system shall be adopted for the general toilet

exhaust for the retail/department store floors. One no. of variable
speed central exhaust fan with EC plug fan is located at 11/F to tally
with the primary air supply arrangements. Booster toilet exhaust fan
shall be provided to ensure good control of air extraction rate and
reduce the leakage through main exhaust riser.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

b) Tower B Arcade, Tower B Passenger Lift Lobby

Fan coil system with pre-treated primary air supply shall be

employed. The fresh air shall be centrally pretreated, and distributed
to the tenant area. The primary air handling unit (PAU) shall equip
with EC plug fan and variable speed drive (VSD) to enable low
airflow operation for energy saving.

DC Fan Coil Units with variable speed drive (VSD) shall be used for
Tower B Arcade and Tower B Passenger Lift Lobby. Fan on/off and
variable speed shall be controlled by Direct Digital Control (DDC)
controller.

c) Retail Unit and F&B

Fan coil system with pre-treated primary air supply shall be

employed. The fresh air shall be centrally pretreated, and distributed
to the tenant area. The primary air handling unit (PAU) shall equip
with EC plug fan and variable speed drive (VSD) to enable low
airflow operation for energy saving.

Room thermostat with 3-speed fan coil control switch shall be

provided for each fan coil unit for temperature and supply air volume
control. Fixing and installation of fan coil unit and the associated
pipework, ductwork, control and etc. shall be carried out by tenant to
suit their fitting out works. This sub-contract shall call for supply and
handover of fan coil unit and room thermostat with 3-speed control
switch as specified on the Drawings to the Employer as landlord’s
provision to tenant.

d) Light F&B Unit

Light F&B on Tower A Department Store are provided with chilled

water connection and condensate drain connection. Air side system
for light F&B shall adopt AHUs system, which shared with the AHUs
system of the arcade / department store. No room thermostat, 3
speed fan coil control switch and fan coil units are provided.

Light F&B on Tower B shall adopt fan coil system with pre-treated
primary air supply. The fresh air shall be centrally pretreated, and
distributed to the tenant area. The primary air handling unit (PAU)
shall equip with EC plug fan and variable speed drive (VSD) to
enable low airflow operation for energy saving. Room thermostat
with 3-speed fan coil control switch shall be provided for each fan
coil unit for temperature and supply air volume control. Fixing and
installation of fan coil unit and the associated pipework, ductwork,
control and etc. shall be carried out by tenant to suit their fitting out
works. This sub-contract shall call for supply and handover of fan
coil unit and room thermostat with 3-speed control switch as
specified on the Drawings to the Employer as landlord’s provision to
tenant.

e) Office and Office Passenger Lift Lobby

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

he
space air shall be re-circulated back to AHU via air ducting.

During normal operation, the pre-treated primary air shall be

supplied to each AHU room via vertical ductwork system and CAV
terminal units. Two groups of PAUs equipped with EC plug fan and
variable speed drive are located at 11/F mechanical plant rooms to
control the overall fresh airflow rate. The fresh air provision to office
shall be modulated in accordance with the setpoint of CO2 sensor
located at the return air duct.

Central exhaust system shall be adopted for the general toilet

exhaust and panty exhaust for the office floors. One no. of variable
speed central exhaust fan with EC plug fan is located at 11/F to tally
with the primary air supply arrangements. Booster toilet exhaust fan
shall be provided to ensure good control of air extraction rate and
reduce the leakage through main exhaust riser.

Enthalpy recovery wheel integrated with the central PAUs and

exhaust fans shall be provided to recover the cooling effect of the
exhaust air and pre-cool the fresh air before entering the cooling coil
of PAU. Pre-filter, bag filter and adequate access /maintenance
facilities shall be allowed to maintain the operation efficiency of the
enthalpy wheel.

f) Cinema

Single-duct, all air system will be provided to serve these areas for
having better temperature and humidity control as well as
minimizing maintenance works. Temperature sensors at the main
return air duct will be provided to control the space temperature.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Variable air volume (VAV) air handling unit complete with EC plug
fan and VSD shall be provided for energy saving during part load.

The fresh air damper will be modulated in accordance with the set
point of CO2 sensors located at return air duct or inside space.

In order to provide better noise isolation, independent AHU will be

provided for each cinema box.

C. Mechanical Ventilation and Air-conditioning for Back of House

Mechanical ventilation shall be provided to the toilets, pantries, major E&M

plantrooms, kitchens, carparks, drop-off area, podium garden, loading and
unloading areas and refuse chamber.

a) Carparks

Ductless carpark ventilation system shall be utilized at carpark

spaces. Exhaust air grille and fresh air grilles are located at high
level and low level respectively to enhance the air circulation. Jet
fans shall be installed and strategically located to induce the air
movement at the surrounding areas without creating stagnant zone.
The selection of jet fans shall be justified by CFD simulation by this
sub-contractor.

Make up air will be 80% of exhaust air to maintain negative pressure

in the Carpark Areas. CO and NO2 sensors shall be provided to
monitor the containments level and to control the main carpark
exhaust / fresh air fans which located at opposite end to enable
cross ventilation. The fans shall be equipped with high/low speed
drive. When the concentration of containments is low, the fans shall
be operated in low speed mode automatically to achieve energy
saving.

b) Loading / Unloading Areas

Mechanical ventilation employing high level exhaust grilles shall be

provided within the loading and unloading areas. Exhaust air shall
be discharged via the ventilating fans and exhaust duct/shaft to the
aboveground level. Fresh air make-up via the ventilating fans shall
be provided at low level. Make up air will be 80% of exhaust air to
maintain negative pressure in the Loading / Unloading Areas.

CO and NO2 sensors shall be provided to monitor the containments

level and to control the ventilation fans. The fans shall be equipped
with high/low speed drive. When the concentration of containments
is low, the fans shall be operated in low speed mode automatically to
achieve energy saving.

c) Refuse Storage & Material Recovery Chamber

Mechanical ventilation shall be provided to extract the foul air via an

air duct. Duct mounted carbon filters and wall mounted ionizers shall
be provided to filter and remove the unpleasant odour the exhaust
air before discharge to outdoor. Make up air will be 80% of exhaust
air to maintain negative pressure in the refuse Storage & Material
Recovery Chamber.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Individual vehicle exhaust fan with low level exhaust outlet shall be
provided at refuse collection vehicle load bay. VRV system shall
also be provided for the refuse storage & material recovery chamber
to control the temperature, reduce the smell and slow down the
decomposition process of the organic waste.

d) Grease Trap Room

Mechanical ventilation shall be provided to extract the foul air via an

air duct. Duct mounted carbon filter shall be provided to filter and
remove the unpleasant odour of the exhaust air before discharge to
outdoor. Make up air will be 80% of exhaust air to maintain negative
pressure in the central refuse holding area.

VRV system shall be provided for the grease trap room to control the
temperature and reduce the smell.

e) Toilets / Baby Care Rooms / Cleansing Rooms

Toilet exhaust shall be provided for toilet adjacent to air-conditioning

area. Secondary air from the adjacent air conditioned space for air
make-up. DC fan coil unit shall be provided for retail toilets, office
toilets (except disable toilets) as shown on the drawings.

f) F&B / Light F&B Kitchen

Fresh and exhaust ductwork up to the tenant’s shop boundary will be

provided. Exhaust ductwork shall be completed with kitchen exhaust
fan located inside the shop boundary. Make up air are 80% of
exhaust air to maintain negative pressure inside the kitchen areas.
Kitchen local exhaust hood system with air treatment equipment in
compliance with EPD’s requirements shall be provided and installed
by tenant.

For light F&B from 2/F to 10/F, make-up air louvres are located at
each floor, whereas kitchen exhaust louvres are located at 11/F
mechanical floor.

For F&B located at 12/F, 14/F and 15/F, both make up air louvre and
kitchen exhaust louvres are located at the corresponding floors.

g) District Cooling Substation / Chilled water pump room

Mechanical ventilation controlled by temperature sensing devices

completed with local manual on/off and timer will be provided.

h) Fire Control Centre

Air-conditioning by fan coil units shall be provided for the fire control
centre. To enhance the system reliability, split A/C system
completed with essential power shall be provided as a standby
provision.

i) Security Control Room

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Air-conditioning by fan coil units shall be provided for the fire control
centre. To enhance the system reliability, VRV system completed
with essential power shall be provided as a standby provision.

j) Lift Machine Room

Air-conditioning shall be provided for all lift machine room to

enhance the reliability of the computerized lift control equipment.
Fan coil units shall be adopted to remove the heat dissipation of
equipment. Mechanical ventilation system shall be provided
according to BD’s requirement.

k) TBE Room

Mechanical ventilation system of 20ACH shall be provided to TBE

rooms in accordance with HKT requirements to remove the heat
dissipation of equipment.

l) LV Switch Room

Air-conditioning by AHU shall be provided for the LV Switch Rooms.

To enhance the system reliability, VRV system completed with
essential power shall be provided as a standby provision.

m) Fuel Tank Room

Natural ventilation shall be provided for the fuel tank room as per
FSD’s requirements. The fire dampers shall be completed with
electro-thermal link (ETL), such that the fire dampers shall be
triggered to close-off the supply and exhaust louvres during fire
scenario.

n) Transformer Room

Mechanical ventilation shall be provided as per CLP’s requirements.

The ventilation equipment and the fan control box shall be supplied
and installed by this Sub-Contractor. This Sub-Contractor shall be
responsible to coordinate with CLP’s to acquire and handle the
equipment up to completion of works and handover to CLP.

o) Server Room

Air-conditioning by Computer Room Air Conditioning (CRAC) units

will be provided for the computer room to remove the heat
dissipation of equipment and maintain the humidity inside the room.
To enhance the reliability of the AC provision, N+1 CRAC units shall
be provided. CRAC units will be provided with essential power.

p) Other Major Plant Rooms

Mechanical ventilation completed with thermostat / temperature

sensor control or air conditioning shall be provided for all major plant
rooms to remove the heat dissipation of equipment as shown on the
drawings.

D. Smoke Control System

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Provision of dynamic smoke extraction system and staircase pressurization

system shall be generally followed the Building Regulation, the Code of Practice
of FSD and Fire Engineering Approach.

E. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) System

ATC system shall from the integral part of MVAC system so that accurate, reliable
and flexible operation, easy maintenance and management of the MVAC and
ATC system can be achieved.

The central monitoring system shall be located at Security Control Room. The
system shall perform the following functions:-

To provide remote start/stop and status monitoring of all major equipment

such as AHUs, PAUs, CRACs, VRV, CHWPs, EAFs, heat wheels, etc.

To provide remote control for provision of “air-conditioning” to individual

tenants including office, F&B, light F&B and shops.

To advise the plant status and in particular fault conditions so that immediate
remedial actions can be taken to clear the fault, hence minimize the
interruption and/or the down time of equipment and plants. Preventive
maintenance can also be planned according to the total running hours of the
equipment recorded.

To monitor the energy consumption of chilled water plant system by

electromagnetic (EM) flow meter and temperature sensor at the chilled water
header.

To monitor necessary operating parameters of MVAC equipment such as

inverter’s frequency, flow rate, temperatures, relative humidity and system
operation hours/status, etc.

The ATC system for chilled water system shall be designed to avoid single point
of failure of controller causing total interruptions of the sensors.

DC fan coil unit with pre-treated fresh air system shall be controlled by (a)
individual on-off and temperature control for retails, F&B and light F&B by tenants
or (b) centralized remote on-off control via BMS and thermostat re-setting
depending on operation requirement. The ATC system shall be able to control
each VAV box independently and remotely allow individual monitoring and
programming for adjustment of service hours, temperature and air flow.

The ATC system for MVAC shall be high-level integrated with the Building
Management System (BMS).

The ATC system shall be based on a Gigabit Ethernet Network System provided
by EL & ELV Installation Contract.

F. Building Management System (BMS)

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

The BMS shall provide an overall central monitoring and control facility for
the operation and maintenance staff, under a wide variety of operating
conditions – normal, abnormal and emergency operations. The system shall
provide monitoring and/or control facilities for all identified building services
and E&M plant equipment located within the development, for example
power supply system, lighting, FS pumps, MVAC etc. requirement are shown
on more detail on the tender drawings and stated in this Sub-Contract.

The BMS system shall consist of duty and redundant BMS server, BMS
workstation, Direct Digital Control (DDC) controllers, Network
Communication Module, etc., requirement are shown more detail on the
tender drawings and stated in this Sub-Contract.

The Building Management System shall be capable of controlling and

monitoring all building services plants and facilities through standalone
intelligent direct digital control (DDC) controllers installed in E&M plant
rooms. These standalone intelligent controllers shall be interconnected to
form a local area network (BACnet/MS/TP) and connected to Network
Communication Module to the BMS server and workstations via Ethernet.

The duty and redundant BMS server and BMS workstation shall be provided
in the Server Room and Security Control Room for remote control and
monitoring of building services system.

The system shall support the open protocol standard BACnet, Lonworks,
Modbus to control and monitor other systems.

The system shall be provided 30 minutes UPS to maintain the normal

operation for the central equipment installed in Server Room and Security
Control Room in case of power supply failure.

The BMS system shall be based on a Gigabit Ethernet Network System

provided by EL & ELV Installation Contract.

G. Air Quality Control

Pre filter and main filter with MERV 13 rating shall be provided for all AHU and
PAU. Indoor air quality test as per Hong Kong Environmental Protection
Department’s IAQ standard shall be provided after completion of the MVAC, ATC
and BMS installations.

H. Water Treatment

Engage an approved water treatment specialist to supervise system piping

flushing and cleaning and perform all necessary chemical tests.

I. Electrical System

All electrical works associated with the MVAC systems as specified including
interconnecting cables, motor control panels, starters, and isolators, etc. for all
electrical equipment necessary for proper functioning of the system.

J. Noise and Vibration Control

Noise and vibration control measures, such as sound attenuators (silencer), duct
lining, lagging, isolators, flexible joints, etc. shall be provided to control the room

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

acoustic performance. The resultant noise level arising from simultaneous

operating equipment as well as regenerated aerodynamic noise, whether it is duct
borne, structural borne, or air borne, shall not exceed the criteria as stated in this
specification.

The external noise generated by the MVAC system shall be fully complied with
EPD requirements. In addition, the external noise level generated by the MVAC
plants and equipment measured at the nearest exposed noise sensitive receiver
(NSR) as per EPD’s Technical Memorandum shall satisfy the following
requirements.

1. 5 dBA below the Acceptable Noise Level (ANLs) for ASR of “B”.

2. Not exceed the background noise level if the background being 5 dBA
lower than ANL for ASR of “B”.

This Sub-contractor shall employ acoustic specialist to prepare and submit the
calculation to demonstrate the compliance prior to the equipment ordering. Noise
measurement shall be arranged after completion of works.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.03 Internal Design Condition

Temperature °C db A/C Provisions

Functional Area Summer Winter Summer Winter

Retail Shop 22 ± 1 - Pre-treated air with fan coil -

system

Department 22 ± 1 - Variable speed AHU system -

Store /
Supermarket /
Gallery / Sport
Hall / Cinema

F&B / Light F&B 22 ± 1 - Pre-treated air with fan coil -

seating area system

Arcade 22 ± 1 - Variable speed AHU system -

Office 23 ± 1 - Variable speed AHU with VAV -

box system

Office Lift Lobby 23 ± 1 Variable speed AHU with VAV

box system

Toilets / baby 26 ± 1 - Fan coil system -

care rooms /
cleansing store

LV Switch Room 28 ± 1 - Variable speed AHU system -

with back up Variable
Refrigerant Volume (VRV)

Lift Machine 28 ± 1 - Fan coil system -

Room

Security Control 24 ± 1 - Fan coil system with back-up -

Room Variable Refrigerant Volume
(VRV)

FS Control Room 24 ± 1 - Fan coil system with back-up -

Split A/C

Refuse Storage 21 ± 1 - Variable Refrigerant Volume -

& Material (VRV) system or Fan Coil
Recovery System
Chamber,
Grease Trap
Rooms

TBE Room 24 ± 1 - Mechanical Ventilation System -

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/12 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

PART 3 SCOPE OF WORKS

3.01 Scope of Works

This Sub-Contract shall include the supply and installation of Works described herein
and as shown on the Drawings. These Works shall be fully commissioned, tested and
handed over in running order and shall include, inter alias, the following, together with
all necessary ancillary equipment. This Sub-Contractor shall furnish all labour,
superintendence, materials, tools, equipment storage, certificates, drawings, temporary
work, inspection, testing, insurance and incidentals necessary to complete the Works in
a proper, thorough and skilful manner.

In addition to the requirements called for in the Specification Preliminaries, this Sub-
Contract shall include but not be limited to providing the Works described hereunder.

A. Complete chilled water reticulation system including the circulation chilled water
pumps with matching capacity with the chilled water supplied from DSC plant,
chilled water pipework, valves, fittings and accessories, chilled water make up
tanks, feed and expansion tanks and all necessary sundry items. This Sub-
Contractor shall coordinate with EMSD’s DCS Contractor to complete the chilled
water connection. The exact work demarcation with EMSD’s DCS Contractor shall
refer to the Contract drawings and the Technical Guidelines for Connection to
District Cooling System and Guideline for Excavation Works near the District
Cooling System at Kai Tak Development issued by EMSD.

B. Complete air conditioning system for office which shall include all primary air
handling units, air handling units, VAV control boxes, VAV control boxes with
electric heater, CAV control boxes, fan coil units, direct expansion units, split type
AC units, VRV units, etc.

C. Complete air conditioning system for retail and department store areas, which
including all primary air handling units (PAUs), air handling units (AHUs),
computer room air conditioners (CRACs), fan coil units (FCUs), Split Type Air
Conditioning Units, Variable Refrigerant Volumes (VRVs), etc.

D. Complete air conditioning system for other air conditioning areas as shown on the
drawings.

E. Complete mechanical ventilation installation including ventilation fans, air

ducting, air dampers, air balancing devices, air diffusers, grilles and louvers, air
filters, etc for the entire development, including toilets, pantries, car parking
ventilation, pump rooms, transformer rooms, generator rooms, refuse rooms and
other electrical and mechanical plant rooms as shown in the drawings and
described elsewhere in this specification.

F. Complete dynamic smoke extraction system as shown on the Contract drawings,

including the fans, dampers, ductwork, power supply, control, and interfacing with
F.S. system.

G. Complete staircase pressurization system for Fire Fighting and Rescues Staircase
(FRS) as per the drawings and F.S. Notes, including the fans, dampers, ductwork,
power supply, control, and interfacing with F.S. system.

H. Complete VAC control with the tripping method as approved by the Fire Services
Department, which shall include but not limited to complete wiring & conduits
accessories, probe type duct mounted smoke detectors, manual override in Fire

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/13 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Control Centre, interfacing with F.S. system, power supply, control

instrumentation to achieve fail-safe operation, etc.

I. Complete air distribution accessories, including air ducting and air flow balancing
control devices, air dampers, air filtration equipment, supply and return air
diffusers, light troffer diffusers, grilles and louvers, air plenums/boots, motorized
dampers, etc to form a complete system. This Sub-contractor shall ensure that
the equipment selected shall meet all operational and energy code requirements
and shall be fully co-ordinated.

J. Complete condensate drainage system for the air conditioning system as shown
on the drawings.

K. Complete electrical supply for the MVAC installation including starters, switch
gears, cables, conduits, trunkings and all necessary accessories from the power
source provided by others up to and terminated onto incoming switch within the
motor control centre / local motor control panel of the isolator of the MVAC
equipment, DDC, BMS switch and related equipment or adjacent to the
equipment as specified.

L. Complete power supply for VAV boxes, CAV boxes, electric heaters, heat wheels,
motorized smoke and fire dampers, motorized / modulating control dampers /
valves, ionizer, UV light, Direct Digital Control (DDC) controllers, etc. connecting
from single sources provided by the LMCP of the corresponding system.

M. Complete automatic control system including all necessary control valves, valve
and damper actuators, sensors, indicators, computerised based controllers, etc for
an accurate and effective control of the entire MVAC installation. The automatic
control works, including automatic control valves, actuators, sensors, thermostats,
controllers, etc. and building management system works shall be under this Sub-
contract.

N. Complete design and construction for cable containments for normal power for
equipment, essential power for equipment, VAC control, main ATC backbone,
building management system, main plant control cable, SES, SPS, and other
cable containments in related to the installations by this Sub-Contractor.

O. Complete acoustic treatment and vibration isolation system for the entire MVAC
installations to achieve the specified acoustic performance both internally and
externally as specified in this specification, whichever the stringent. The relevant
equipment and material submission shall be submitted to the Architect, Engineer
and Acoustic Consultant for approval. Special attention shall be paid to ensure
that the noise control requirements of Environmental Protection Department are
complied with. This Sub-Contractor is responsible for on-site sound level
measurement for every single space to ensure the noise criteria can comply with
specification requirements.

P. Complete thermal insulation for the chilled water system, condensate drainage
system, integrated solar dehumidification system, air distribution system,
refrigeration system, A/C equipment, F&E tanks, associated valve and damper
accessories, conditioned supply air system, the toilet transfer/exhaust air system,
drain pans / drip trays and all other installation which is subject to condensation
risk. Aluminium cladding enclosure shall be provided for the applications in plant
rooms, areas exposed to view, and other locations as specified.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/14 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Q. Design and construction of complete water treatment equipment installation and

services for the chilled water system shall be provided to minimize corrosion and
fouling to the pipework and equipment. The water quality control and treatment,
including the allocation of drain off point and instruction plate for dead-leg
prevention, shall be designed and constructed to the satisfactory of the EMSD
and WSD requirements.

R. Supply of fan coil unit including room thermostat with 3-speed controller, etc. for
shop units as shown on the drawings. This Sub-Contractor shall supply and
handover of fan coil unit with all associated accessories to future tenants /
Employer for their future fitting out works.

S. Supply and installation of fire dampers c/w fusible link at compartment walls. The fire
damper for fuel tank room or across fire shutter shall be complete with electro-thermal
link system. All necessary power supply and control for the electro thermal link shall be
by this Sub-Contractor.

T. Supply and installation of motorized fire and smoke damper complete with all
necessary power supply, fire rated cables, controls, conduits and accessories for
the applications, including ventilation ceiling plenum, FCU at protected lobby,
smoke extraction system, staircase pressurization system and other applications
as shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise stated, the detection system for the
actuation of the damper shall be provided by this Sub-Contractor. The motorized
fire and smoke damper shall be arranged in fail-safe design.

U. Supply and installation of control panels includes control cable and conduit for smoke
extraction system and staircase pressurization system inside Fire Control Centre for
status indication and control of equipment as stipulated in FSD COP.

V. Supply and Installation of the mechanical ventilation system for Refuse Storage &
Material Recovery Chamber, including carbon filtering system, air-conditioners, bio-
oxygen generator, air purifier, as well as vehicle exhaust system.

W. For VRV and split type air-conditioners, it shall include thermal insulation,
refrigerant pipe & fittings, power and control metal conduit & wiring between
outdoor and indoor units completed with electrical isolators, hanger and support
frameworks, providing refrigerant charge to the a/c machine up to factory
standard, wired remote thermostat & fan speed switch, ductwork, condensate
collection piping and any necessary accessories.

X. Provide Local Control Panel in the central chilled pump rooms for control and
monitoring of the A/C main plants including chilled water pumps, heat exchangers
etc. The Local Control Panel shall consist of indication panel and control panel.
The indication panel shall provide with mimic coloured schematic diagram of such
main plants and complete with indication lamps showing the operation status of
such main plants and their associated motorized valves and flow switches. The
control panel shall provide with a key switch for change over from automatic
control mode (via ATC) to manual control mode (via this Local Control Panel).
The panel shall consist of ON/OFF switches for control of these main plants and
associated valves when manual mode is triggered. The entire design of Local
Control Panel shall be submitted to the satisfaction by the Architects and
Engineer.

Y. Blank-off any unused parts of louvre / grilles openings in related to MVAC system by
galvanized steel sheet and matt black painting.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/15 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Z. Provide baked matt black architectural cover for dummy diffuser and light troffer
slots in the office areas, which as served as return air purpose.

AA. Design and construct thermal expansion joints for the A/C pipework to avoid
excessive pipe stress due to thermal expansion.

BB. Supply and installation of movement joints for the pipework running across the
building movement joints, no matter if they are shown or not on the drawings.

CC. Provide BMS interfacing in accordance with the point schedule.

DD. Provision of equipotential bonding for all metallic parts.

EE. Supply and delivery of fan coil units together with the associate temperature
control accessories for tenants as shown on the Drawings.

FF. Providing refrigerant and charging refrigerant to the air-conditioning system and their
units up to factory standard.

GG. Paint all exposed installation of MVAC equipment, conduits, cable trays, trunking,
pipework whether insulated or not, etc. and all exposed steel works in connection
with the installations equipment under this Sub-Contract.

HH. Provide labeling marking & directional arrow etc. to entire installation equipment.

II. Sample floor and mock up for any part of the installation as per the contract
preliminary.

JJ. Complete testing and commissioning to be carried out in a professional way for all
the equipment and system installed under this Sub-Contract.

KK. Coordinate with Main Contractor and other relevant sub-contractors for the T&C
works and invite Architects, Engineers and Employer’s Representative to witness
the test. Submit the T&C procedure for approval prior to the test and submit the
proper testing and commissioning report in the approved format after the test.

LL. Provide 100% air leakage test for smoke extraction duct and kitchen ventilation
system, with providing air leakage test for 25% selected ductwork with operating
static pressure over 750Pa in accordance with the Building Energy Code.

MM. Carry out the full load test for entire air conditioning plant when building load is
available.

NN. Supply and Installation of the hot-dipped galvanized / galvanized steel / stainless
steel grade 306 anchor fixing, hanger, support and steel support framework for all
equipment and all systems components installed in indoor.

OO. Supply and Installation of the stainless steel grade 316 anchor fixing, hanger, support
and steel support framework for all equipment and all systems components installed in
outdoor.

PP. Design and provide all necessary mounting details of the MVAC installation. The
mounting details together with the structural calculation and the stress calculation
shall be endorsed by Registered Structural Engineer and shall be further
submitted to the Architect and the Structural Engineer for approval before
commencement of the works.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/16 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

QQ. Carry out works to comply BEAM Plus (Gold) requirements as stated in Appendix
7 of this specification.

RR. Provision of grouting / sealing to gap inside sleeves, chase, recesses, etc after fixing
of sleeves and installation work.

SS. Supply of G.I. sleeves through structural and masonry floors and walls. Supply of
puddle flanges and inlet / outlet connections for A/C make-up water tanks. Recycle
tanks, F&E tanks, and arrange subsequent checking for correct size and locations of
the sleeves, puddle flange, holes opening or boxing out by Main Contractor before
concrete casting.

TT. Supply and install fire rated ductwork / fire rated enclosure for dynamic smoke
extraction system and staircase pressurization system in fully compliance with
FSD COP requirement.

UU. Supply and install fire rated sealant between pipework/ductwork and sleeve.

VV. Coordinate with the Main Contractor for their installation of complete fire-rated
enclosure to suit the requirements of various Authority for all pipework, ductwork,
and equipment inside the protected lobby outside the pipe duct and other location
as specified in the drawings and the specification, except the fire-rated enclosure
for Dynamic Smoke Extraction System and Staircase Pressurization System
which shall be supplied and installed by this Sub-contractor.

WW. Construct the steel frame of pump inertia block(s). Coordinate with Main Contractor for
provision of plinth, reinforcement and concrete for inertia block, and floating slabs as
required.

XX. Proper provisions shall be allowed in the equipment and switch gears of the
MVAC installation for interfacing with the other Sub-contractors including
electrical, fire services and BMS, etc.

YY. The MVAC, ATC and BMS installation covered by this Sub-Contract have been
designated to the best of knowledge in accordance with Codes of Practice and
statutory requirements. Nevertheless, it is the responsibility of this Sub-Contractor to
ensure that the final installation is in full accordance with the requirements and
regulations of relevant Government Authorities and any other requirements and
regulations. This Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to obtain the relevant
Certificates and Permits of Government Authorities for the complete MVAC, ATC and
BMS installation undertaken by them.

ZZ. Submission of working drawings, as-built drawings, equipment calculation,

programme, schedule, samples, sample boards, method of statement, technical
proposal, etc., for approval prior to the installations.

AAA. Coordinate with Electrical, ELV, Plumbing and Drainage and Fire Services, etc.
Trades to complete the composite BMS system.

BBB. Coordination with Main Contractor and all other Contractors / Sub-Contractors
including the preparation of Combined Services Drawings, Combined Builder’s
Works Drawings, and Building Information Modeling (BIM). Provide all necessary
information and to assist Main Contractor in developing a BIM Model. Please
refer to Appendix 6 – BIM Specifications for details.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/17 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

CCC. Submit the access and maintenance requirements for the MVAC system and
coordinate with the Main Contractor for provision of maintenance facilities such as
access panel, maintenance platform, I-beam and eye bolts as necessary. This
Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to submit the location and size, and weight
for the maintenance facilities for approval.

DDD. Coordinate with all other Sub-Contractors related to this Sub-contract Work.

EEE. Provide necessary information to facilitate Hong Kong Energy Efficiency

Registration Scheme for Building, BEAM Plus and other relevant environmental
certification submission. The systems’ unit power density, offered equipment
efficiency (such as chilled water pumps, AHUs, PAUs, Fans, pump motor, etc.)
shall comply with latest version of Building Energy Code (BEC) requirements.

FFF. This sub-contractor shall prepare the required submission materials including, but
not limited to, equipment parameters, drawing, equipment catalogues, technical
information, site measurement, document, manuals, survey and technical report,
etc. to facilitate application on Stage One and Stage Two of Certificate of
Compliance Registration (COCR) according to Building Energy Efficient
Ordinance (BEEO). This sub-contractor shall employ a Registered Energy
Assessor (REA), who is duly qualified and registered under the relevant legislation
of HKSAR relating to Building Energy Efficiency Ordinance, to check the design
of the works to be in full compliance with the standards as set out under the
Building Energy Efficiency Ordinance and also to collect, review and endorse for
Stage 2 COCR submission before submitting to the Project REA. The full Stage
2 COCR submission shall arrive to the Project REA 2 months after the issuance
of Occupation Permit. The submission materials shall be well organized with
proper and clear index in format accepted by EMSD and the Project REA. The
REA shall observe and comply with the requirements of the relevant codes of
practices and instruction/ circulars issued by the Electrical and Mechanical
Services Departments.

GGG. Fully complete the relevant submission forms for the BEC submission.

HHH. Preparation of and sign all submission documents, forms and drawings to the Fire
Services Department, Environmental Protection Department, Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department, Water Supplies Department, Labour
Department, Buildings Department, Food and Environmental Hygiene
Department, Drainage Services Department, Lands Department and other
government departments required for satisfactory completion of the project for
approval and endorsement.

The drawings, calculations and report shall include but not limited to the dynamic
smoke extraction system (SES), staircase pressurization system (SPS), T&C
records, method of statement, water sampling test, the ventilation / air-
conditioning control system (VAC), dangerous good stores ventilation system, ,
water supply system for the A/C system, etc. All submission shall be in
accordance with the format as agreed by the Architect and in accordance with the
requirements issued by the relevant authorities.

III. Submissions to the Government Authorities and utility companies, and arranging
the Government Authorities and utility companies for inspection and connections.
Qualified personnel shall be engaged to sign all the relevant forms, documents
and/or drawings as and required by the Architect for the submission to the
relevant Authorities and utility companies.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/18 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

JJJ. This Sub-contractor shall be responsible for all relevant submissions to Authorities and
attendance to authorities/utilities inspections including power company’s inspections,
EMSD inspection, F.S. inspections, and T.O.P. / O.P. inspections, water authority’s
inspections, etc.

KKK. This Sub-Contractor shall fully complete and submit the relevant submission forms
and documents for BEAM Plus (Gold) to Sustainability Consultants for their
submission to statutory authorities. The works of this Sub-Contractor shall fully comply
with BEAM Plus (Gold) requirements specified in the specification prepared by
Sustainability Consultants attached in Appendix 7 of this technical specifications.

LLL. Coordinate and arrange rehearsal for statutory inspections for MVAC systems,
such as smoke extraction system (SES), staircase pressurization system (SPS),
and ventilation air-conditioning (VAC) system, ventilation for DG rooms, hot
smoke test, etc.

MMM. Operation and providing attendance as specified, and to FSD/O.P. inspection.

NNN. Take up the liaison role with EMSD for the application and approval of District
Cooling System and District Cooling Services.

OOO. All necessary submission to EMSD, FSD, WSD, BD, DSD, CLP.

PPP. Submission of WR1 and WR1A form after completion of electrical work.

QQQ. Include all costs for early sectional completion, handover and occupation permit as
stipulated in the contract.

RRR. Supply and delivery of spares and special tools as stipulated in this specification to any
designed location in HK as advised by the Architect/Engineer.

SSS. Submit full sets of as-built drawings, energy management manual and O & M manuals
both in hard copy & electronic format before handover. The energy management
manual shall meet the requirements of BEAM Plus NB Section 8.5.7 as a minimum.
The O&M manual shall be in both English and Chinese. Format and content shall
comply with the requirements of BEAM Plus.

TTT. Training and instructing the Employer's staff including training in the software
houses or control companies so that the Employer’s staff is competent and
familiar all the control and operation of the entire MVAC, ATC and BMS systems
and installations. The training program shall cover as a minimum the items listed
in BEAM Plus NB Section 8.5.8.

UUU. Coordinate with Commissioning Authority for all T&C aspects to meet the T&C
requirements, which include but not limited to vetting T&C documentations,
witness of site test, review T&C results and commissioning program, training
arrangements, format and content of O&M manual, etc.

VVV. Free maintenance of the Works during the Defects Liability Period (DLP). The
DLP is stated in the Condition of Main Contract.

WWW. Tenderer shall submit their proposed maintenance services contract for the entire
MVAC, ATC and BMS installations after DLP, together with the returned tender.
Scope shall be superior to the minimum requirements stated in this specification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/19 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

XXX. Submission of all relevant certificates and statutory documentation at the time for
project handover.

YYY. This Sub-Contractor shall employ approved specialist to conduct the following test
after completion of work:-

(i) IAQ test as per Hong Kong Environmental Protection Department’s IAQ
standard.
(ii) External noise test for M&E system as per EPDs TM to demonstrate the
compliance with the specified requirements.

ZZZ. Attendance of statutory inspections and assist the tenants to obtain relevant FS
certificates during the DLP if so required by the Architect.

AAAA. Attendance of site visit, site inspection and on-site measurement during DLP for
any certifications, assessment schemes, and completions in related to the
building design and construction.

BBBB. Renewal of all relevant certificates such as FS system certificates, ventilation

certificates, etc. before the end of the DLP.

CCCC. The scope of the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) installation, which shall
be included in this Sub-Contract, shall be as below :-

i.) Supply of the following control devices for both air and water system and
deliver to site for installation by this Sub-Contractor :
- Temperature sensors, humidity sensors, thermostats with fan speed
control for fan coil units (Note: Other thermostats such as plant
room ventilation and anti-condensation heater etc. shall be
responsible by this Sub-Contractor);
- Pressure sensors, differential pressure sensors/ transmitters;
- Airflow sensors, airflow meters, water flow switch, water flow meters;
- Gas sensors (e.g. CO2, CO, NO2, Refrigeration, etc.)
- Actuator for air flow modulating control damper, controller and
actuators for VAV box;
- Modulating or on-off type chilled water flow control valves for the
AHU’s, FCU’s, and pressure maintenance bypass system (exclude
motorized isolating valves / zone valves which shall be supplied by
this Sub-Contractor);
- Other items as described.
ii) Supply and installation of the following:-
- All DDC controllers;
- Enthalpy meters;
- Patch panels;
- Interfacing units
- All ELV cables between the sensors, controllers and actuators,
including conduits, trunkings and wiring accessories;
iii.) Software and hardware engineering and programming words;

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/20 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

iv.) Co-ordinate with the VAV Box Manufacturer / AHU Manufacturer / other
equipment manufacturers for off-site installations; and arrange to deliver
the control equipment to the factory to install such device onto the MVAC
equipment in the manufacturer’s factory;

v.) Provide all necessary power supply for all the controllers/ actuators where
appropriate;

vi.) Provide sufficient dry contact, transducer, interfacing units, termination

points, current transformers, etc. to enable the complete interfacing
between MVAC, ATC and BMS system to for a complete and full operating
MVAC system.

vii.) Provision of current transformer and the programmable electrical network

analyzer for measurement of power consumption, current, power factor,
voltage for the MVAC equipment as specified.

viii.) Testing and commissioning of the entire MVAC installation, ATC and BMS
system.

ix.) Submission of the O&M manual and as-built drawings on the Automatic
Temperature Control System.

x.) All incidental and necessary works required for full incorporation of the
automatic temperature control system.

DDDD. The scope of the Building Management System (BMS) installation, which shall be
included in this Sub-Contract, shall be as below :-

i.) Building Management System (BMS) will be capable of complete

integration of local loop and direct digital controllers (DDC) to control and
monitor various building services, and also by high-level interface with
other individual self-control systems. The systems central equipment will
be installed at Server Room and Security Control Room of the building.
ii.) The system will adopt a distributed intelligence concept. All the DDC and
central computer will communicate via the Ethernet Communication
Network using TCP/IP communication protocol.
iii.) The design of the system shall be based on the open protocol BACnet.
iv.) 25% spare capacity will be allowed in the BMS system for both hardware
and software.
v.) UPS will be provided for the servers and workstation to facilitate the
operation during power failure. To enhance the system reliability, UPS will
also be provided for the Network Controller of the Ethernet communication
network.
While DDC controller will be back-up by internal battery to 72 hours for
only protection the programme/operation data backup. UPS will provide
30 minutes backup for entire BMS under full load condition.
vi.) The system shall be incorporated with web-based access provision.
vii.) M&E Systems Interface:-
The system shall interface with MVAC, Electrical, Plumbing and Drainage,
Fire Services, Vertical Transportation System and ELV Systems to carry
out the functions described as follows:-

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/21 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Systems Interface Monitor Control

MVAC System (ATC System) H/L -
Electrical System H/L & L/L -
Lighting System L/L
Plumbing & Drainage System L/L -
Fire Services System L/L -
Vertical Transportation System H/L -
Security & CCTV System L/L -

EEEE. In the event that ceiling return system is adopted in MVAC design, all materials
provided by this Sub-contractor inside false ceiling shall be compliance with FSD
circular letter 4/96 Part XI and BS 476 : Part 4 or equivalent national or
international standards, and approved by recognized testing authorities. All pipes
and conduits within the void shall be metallic. All internal & external insulation for
pipeworks and ductworks shall be complied with BS 476 : Part 6 and Part 7
respectively.

FFFF. Raised floor inside server room would be used as a means for surveying air. All
materials provided by this Sub-contractor inside raised floor shall be compliance
with FSD circular letter 4/96 Part XI and BS 476 : Part 4 or equivalent national or
international standards, and approved by recognized testing authorities. All pipes
and conduits within the void shall be metallic. All internal & external insulation for
pipeworks and ductworks shall be complied with BS 476 : Part 6 and Part 7
respectively.

GGGG. Factory test shall be carried out for Chilled Water Pumps, Motor Control Centres
(MCC), Local Motor Control Panels (LMCP) and AHU/PAU in the presence of
max. 1 main contractor representative, max. 1 design engineer and max. 1
client’s representatives. This sub-contractor shall include all relative expenses
and arrangement on transportation from Hong Kong to the factory within or
outside Hong Kong. Accommodations and meals shall also be provided for the
main contractor representative, design engineer and client’s representatives if
factory tests are carried out outside Hong Kong at this sub-contractor’s own cost.

HHHH. Supply and install sensors and associated control wirings to fulfill measurement
and verification requirements.

IIII. Programming, control logic and sequencing of Automatic Temperature Control

(ATC) system and Building Management System (BMS) shall fully satisfy
Landlord’s operation requirements.

JJJJ. This sub-contractor shall perform a complete and thorough flushing of the chilled
water pipe work using cleaning chemicals and potable water as recommended by
the water treatment specialist to ensure that at the time of supply of DCS services,
the piping system is clean and suitable for connection with DCS. Before
connecting to DCS, this sub-contractor consumer shall install a temporary bypass
pipe at consumer installation for the purpose of allowing the flushing water to
recirculate in the consumer’s chilled water pipe work so as to reduce the water
demand and wastewater discharge. The consumer side cleaning method including
flushing and chemical treatment details shall be submitted by this sub-contractor
to EMSD or the operator for comment and approval, prior to commencement of
each activity.

KKKK. The approved consumer shall submit flushing, cleaning and water treatment
reports to EMSD or the operator for comment and approval before supply of DCS

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/22 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Services with a view to ensure that the quality of chilled water of the consumer’s
air conditioning installation will not adversely affect the DCS equipment and the
operation of DCS. However, EMSD’s or the operator’s comment and approval
shall not relieve this sub-contractor of the responsibility of ensuring industry
standard procedures for flushing, cleaning and water treatment.

LLLL. This sub-contractor shall submit water treatment report for the consumer side air
conditioning installation to EMSD or the operator on a monthly basis. The
minimum standard to be maintained shall refer to the requirements as stipulated
in EMSD’s technical guidelines for connection to district cooling system.

MMMM. The sub-contractor is responsible to coordinate with BMU sub-contractor for the
BMS interfacing, and provide the necessary BMS interfacing points to suit the
operation requirements, including but not limited to on/off status, on/off control,
power healthy, power failure, etc.

NNNN. This Sub-Contractor shall submit to Architect and Engineers the revised shop
drawings every 6 months after the 1st submission to reflect the updated
coordinated results among different parties and the as-fitted on-site installation.

OOOO. Optional item: Providing hot smoke test for the dynamic smoke extraction system
according to FSD’s requirements. This sub-contractor is responsible for providing
all necessary statutory submissions, method statements, test reports, any on site
or off site rehearsal and mock up as required by FSD, site protection material,
equipment, etc. for performing hot smoke tests of the smoke extraction systems
to the satisfaction of FSD, Architect and Engineers. This sub-contractor shall also
be responsible to coordinate the tests with all relevant parties

The Works shall also fully comply with all statutory ordinances, regulations, standards,
codes of practice, circular letters relevant to the above MVAC installation and Systems
together with any amendments made thereto as required by the relevant Authorities for
the safe and proper operation of the Works. This Sub-Contractor shall arrange for all
submissions and allow for all costs relating to all statutory inspections and certificates
and for sectional completion as appropriate and as necessary.

3.02 Building Provision

A. Certain provisions have been made in the Building for the accommodation of the
MVAC, ATC and BMS installations. These provisions include space allocation,
openings through the slabs and beams and concrete equipment plinths. This
Sub-Contractor shall check on-site to ensure the provisions are suitable for their
installations.

B. Before proceeding with the Works, this Sub-Contractor shall confirm in writing
that the provisions are satisfactory for the Works, and where necessary, he shall
provide additional information requiring additional provisions, openings, plinths,
supports etc.

C. This Sub-Contractor shall within 30 days after receipt of this Contract Drawings
confirm to the Architect all details that could affect the shape or strength of main
structures, including access requirements. If at any time after confirmation of the
details referred to above, this Sub-Contractor finds that variations to the same
cannot be avoided, he shall immediately submit full information concerning such
variations to the Architect.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/23 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. It is this Sub-Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all builder’s works, holes,

openings, plinths, etc. are provided and correctly located during the construction
of the building. Any additional building provisions after the confirmation shall be
at this Sub-Contractor’s own cost.

3.03 Coordination and Cooperation with Other Parties

A. Make all necessary preparations, documentation and arrangements for liaising

with the Main Contractor, other contractors / sub-contractors, Employer’s
representative, Architect and Engineer and for rendering complete cooperation in
the areas of interface between contracts.

B. Prior to the commencement of actual installations, ensure the works of all trades
are well coordinated with his installation works and ensure satisfactory completion
of the project. This Sub-Contractor shall also provide all materials, equipment
and labour to ensure the satisfactory operation at the interface of the installation
and the proper sequencing of the works for which he is responsible. During all
stages of the works, the interfaces shall be discussed, coordinated and agreed
between this Sub-Contractor and other contractors.

C. This Sub-Contractor shall provide drawings showing detailed setting out of

penetrations prior to the Main Contractor carrying out that part of construction
works or provisions of openings. This Sub-Contractor shall ensure all the
openings are suitable for his installation. Penetrations missed out or incorrectly
positioned because of this sub-contractor’s failure to check the works or provide
details in time shall be performed by the Main Contractor at this Sub-Contractor’s
expense.

D. In view of the fast track nature of this project, this Sub-Contractor shall employ a
Coordinator full time resident on site responsible for the overall coordination of all
MVAC, ATC and BMS installation. This Coordinator shall take a leading role in
coordinating with respective nominated Sub-Contractors of other development
packages, Main Contractor / Builder for all builder’s work construction and
coordination with all utilities companies. This Coordinator shall hold a Higher
Certificate or above in Building Services, or Mechanical Engineering or Electrical
Engineering with at least 10 years of site experiences in projects of similar nature
and scale. The resume of the proposed Coordinator shall be submitted in the
tender return as part of the tender assessment. In order to meet the project
programme, the proposed Coordinator shall be on-board full time resident on site
within two months upon the award of the Sub-Contract.

3.04 Coordination Works and Related Work by Others

A. Works by Main Contractor

1. All patching and making good of the building structure and ceilings for the
installation of ductwork, air terminal fittings, piping and conduits provided
for all building services installation will take place in accordance with the
programme. Where these are not carried out in accordance with the
programme due to the Main Contractor delay, then all associated costs
shall be borne by the Main Contractor.

2. Underflashed penetration with kerbs in the roof slab for ventilation shafts /
dog houses / E&M services.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/24 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. The Main Contractor shall coordinate with all relevant parties with detailed
drawing setting out penetrations prior to carry out that part of the works.
Penetrations missed out due to the Main Contractor’s failure to check the
works or perform inbuilding time shall be made good or rectified at the Main
Contractor’s expense.

4. Removable tile ceilings, access panels in fixed ceilings and access

openings in walls and at other positions as required for adjustment and
maintenance access. Locations shall be coordinated and agreed with the
MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors prior to work commencing. Details of all
access provisions shall be subject to the Architect's Approval.

5. Provision of required concrete plinths complete with reinforcement in the

plant rooms graded and shaped to MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors’
details. Metal formwork for all plinths shall be provided by Main Contractor.
Metal formwork and concrete works for inertia blocks of pumps shall be
provided by Main Contractor.

6. Provision of plant room floor topping properly graded to floor drain.

7. Building-in of pipe sleeves, conduits, puddle flanges, pipes and brackets

where necessary to details submitted by MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors
and approved by the Architect.

8. Provision of door grilles, undercut doors, etc., for relief air as shown on the
Drawings.

9. After MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors’ works, seal-up and make good any
gaps between wall / floor openings up to the outer skin of sleeve.

10. Provision of all external weatherproof louvers except where specifically

designated as being provided by MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors

11. Provision of concrete kerbs at all slabs penetration in plant rooms.

12. All handling of ceiling tiles during plant commissioning provided that the
commissioning is carried out within the Main Contractor's programme.

13. Provision and fixing of builder’s works for load-bearing support for building
services installation.

14. Coordinate with others for the water proofing and drainage interfacing
details of smoke vent and submit for Architect’s approval.

15. Clear openings through the building structure for the passage of ductwork,
pipes, trunkings, cables, etc.

16. Provision of fire rated masonry shafts through the building complete with
airtight fire rated access doors where shown for vertical distribution of
ductwork and pipework. Penetrations for ducts and pipes in these shafts
shall be sealed airtight by the Main Contractor after installation of
equipment. The Main Contractor shall supply and install fire rated materials
in between all pipe sleeves and openings.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/25 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

17. Provision of fire rated enclosure for towngas pipeworks, whether shown on
drawings or not. The Main Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate
with utility companies on the exact routings of the pipeworks.

18. Normal making good after this MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors’

installation works.

19. for M&E services within

protected areas and other specific locations. The exceptions are the smoke
extraction duct and staircase pressurization duct, which shall be provided
by MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors

20. Provision of any concrete services trench complete with steel cover. Details
shall be submitted by MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors’ to Architect for
approval.

21. Design and provision of hot dipped galvanised maintenance platform and
access, including but not limited to high level ventilation equipment, valves,
panels, and alike, to comply the maintenance requirements. The Main
Contractor shall coordinate with MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors to
develop the design details and structural calculation to comply the
functional requirements, statutory requirements, and safety requirements of
Labour Department. The Main Contractor shall employ Registered
Structural Engineer and certified Safety Officer to check and endorse the
platform design. Details shall be submitted to the Architect / Engineer for
approval.

22. Design and provisions of lifting I-beams, lifting eye bolts and hooks or RSJ
with survey certificate for hoisting and maintenance. Design and provisions
of these hoisting equipment shall also fulfil the provision requirements from
utility companies / government authorities, whether or not as shown in
Drawings. Loading details and locations of hoisting facilities shall be
provided by MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors

23. Provision of non-combustible false ceiling to suit the FSD’s requirements

for the use of false ceiling as air duct.

24. Design and install crash barriers for low level air duct / pipework inside
carpark, loading and unloading dock.

25. Provision of adequate temporary power supply for Testing and

Commissioning Works and installation works.

26. Coordination and provision of full dimensioned Combined Services

Drawings, Combined Builder's Work Drawings, and Combined Building
Information Modelling for Architect/Engineer’s approval. MEP Nominated
Sub-Contractors shall provide all necessary information to the Main
Contractor for the preparation of submissions.

27. Site temporary works as stated in the Contract Preliminaries.

28. Provision and installation of lead-in ducts, cable draw pit, puddle sleeves,
puddle flanges, etc. for CLP, EMSD, government authorities and other
utility companies, whether or not as shown in Drawings.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/26 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

29. To facilitate and allow sufficient power capacity and spaces for future tenant
to apply temporary meters and power supply.

30. All FS equipment and installation of Fire Protection in Construction Sites as

required by FSD.

31. Design, coordination, and provision of basement screen wall penetrations to

enable building-in of puddle sleeves of MEP Nominated Sub-Contractors
for lead-in MEP services. Approximate locations shall refer to the drawings.
The exact quantities, locations and level of the utility lead-in services shall
be subject to further coordination and confirmation with the utility
companies and government authorities by the Main Contractor.

32. Evacuation, rock cutting, trenching and backfilling for underground pipe
laying work.

33. Painting of all exposed or non-exposed installation of MEP Nominated Sub-

Contractors outside plant rooms, including but not limited to equipment,
ductworks, conduits, cables trays, trunking, pipeworks whether insulated or
not, etc. and all steel works in connection with the installations under the
MEP Nominated Sub-Contract.

34. Provision and installation of steel cabinets for gas storage bottle of total gas
flooding system. This Contractor is responsible to coordinate with MEP
Nominated Sub-Contractor on the exact size and locations of the cabinet.
Locations, size and details of the cabinet shall be submitted to the
Architect's and Engineer’s Approval.

35. The Main Contractor shall be responsible for transporting, moving and/or
relocating all CLP materials and equipment between ground floor
(unloading area) to 11th floor designated location by CLP in order to
facilitate CLP’s power supply installation works. The exact unloading areas
at G/F and 11th floor shall be subject to further coordination with CLP by the
Main Contractor. All the works including vertical and horizontal transporting,
relocating, insurance and other related costs shall be allowed. This
Contractor shall bear all losses, damages, costs, claims and liabilities
incurred or to be incurred by CLP or in connection with this Contractor’s
failure arising from this plant delivery process.

36. Provision and installation of all related builder’s works, including but not
limited to louvres, structural frames, steel hooks, hoisting beams with
trolley, double slab, cable trenches with covers, railing, etc. for Transformer
Rooms, HV Switch Rooms and LV Switch Rooms in accordance to the
latest version of CLP 101 requirements.

37. The Main Contractor shall be responsible to provide temporary facilities for
EMSD’s or the operator’s installation and T&C works at the DCS substation
in accordance with the requirements as stipulated in EMSD’s technical
guidelines for connection to district cooling system. The Main Contractor
shall liaise with EMSD’s or the operator’s further agreement on the details
of such provisions before handover of the DCS substation and
commencement of works.

38. Provision and installation of all related builder’s works to facilitate EMSD’s
installation of DCS services. These builder’s works included but not limited
to verifying the existing condition of the as-built DCS pits and diaphragm

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/27 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

wall, breaking through the existing basement wall and DCS pit for
installation of puddle flanges, sealing up of the openings after the
installation of puddle flanges, backfilling the DCS pits with sand, liaison with
EMSD for the inspection and handover, etc.

39. The Main Contractor shall be responsible to attend all the Factory
Acceptance Tests (FAT) within or outside Hong Kong which are specified in
the Lift and Escalator NSC specifications and MEP NSC specifications.
Representative from the Main Contractor shall be responsible to witness the
test and endorse the testing results during the Factory Acceptance Test.

B. Interface with Fire Services (FS) Trade

1. For Ventilation / Air Conditioning Control System (VAC) using Method A

and Method D, the FS Trade shall provide volt-free contacts in the PAU
room, AHU room, Fan Room, etc. for the respective systems to cut-off the
ventilation equipment in zone basis when the smoke detector is triggered.
Other VAC control provisions such as manual override control, the interlock
trip with other ventilation fans, other VAC tripping methods, etc., shall be
under this Sub-Contractor’s scope.

2. For the Dynamic Smoke Extraction Systems (SES) and Staircase

Pressurization Systems (SPS), the FS Trade shall provide volt-free
contacts in the respective Fan Rooms to activate the ventilation equipment
when the smoke detectors or fire alarms in the compartment are triggered.
This Sub-Contractor shall prepare the control description and logic based
on FSD’s requirements and issue to the FS Trade to enable FS Trade’s
AFA programme work. The fan control panel adjacent to the fire control
panel together with necessary wiring shall be under this Sub-Contractor’s
scope.

3. For fuel tank rooms, the FS Trade shall provide volt-free contacts adjacent
to the LMCP of the mechanical ventilation fans to cut-off the ventilation
equipment as well as activate the electro-thermal link (ETL) for fire
dampers.

4. For the air ducts passing through the fire shutters, this Sub-Contractor shall
provide the fire damper c/w ETL. The FS Trade shall provide volt-free
contacts adjacent to the ETL to close-off the fire damper when the
respective fire shutter is activated by fire signal.

5. For all E&M plantrooms protected by total flooding system, the FS Trade
shall provide volt-free contacts adjacent to the motorized fire and smoke
damper to close-off the damper as it is activated by fire signal.

6. Sprinkler protection under ductwork shall be provided by the FS Trade,

where the ductworks are installed above the ceiling in accordance with the
FSD’s requirement. This Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate
with FS Trade for the ductworks and equipment layout to facilitate their
installations.

7. This Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with the FS Trade for the spatial
requirements and setting-out for the SES, SPS and VAC Control Panels
inside the Fire Control Centre.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/28 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

8. For all the interfacing as described above, the power supply to trip off or
activate the fans and ETL fire dampers shall be provided by this Sub-
Contractor. The interfacing relay box for housing of the volt-free contracts
shall be provided by FS Trade. The location of the interfacing relay box
shall be located adjacent to the LMCP of the ventilation equipment and this
Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with FS Trade for the
exact interfacing points through written information.

9. The interfacing points provided by the FS Trade shall be indicated on the

drawings. This Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to provide necessary
control circuities, wring, and accessories to complete the VAC control to
comply with FSD’s requirements.

10. Marshalling / interfacing boxes c/w all electrical contacts for monitoring of
the status of the fire services signals shall be provided by FS Trade and
located adjacent to the fire control panel for interfacing with FS equipment
monitored by BMS specified in Appendix 4 – ATC & BMS Point Schedule.
This Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with FS Trade for
the exact location of marshalling / interfacing boxes
through written information.

11. This Sub-Contractor shall provide all necessary cables and conduit facilities
from Direct Digital Control (DDC) controller to marshalling / interfacing
boxes.

C. Interface with Plumbing and Drainage (P/D) Trades

1. The Plumbing and Drainage Trade shall provide water meter position and
piping connection for the A/C make up as shown on the Drawings. The
application of water meter and the pipework beyond the water meter shall
be responsible by this Sub-Contractor.

2. The Plumbing and Drainage Trade shall provide recycle water supply for
A/C makeup and the control interfacing points as stipulated on the
drawings and the specifications.

3. This Sub-Contractor shall provide the vertical condensate down pipe for
discharge water to rain water last manhole and sump pit provided by the
Plumbing and Drainage Trade. This Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to
coordinate with P/D Trade for the exact connection / interfacing points
through written information.

4. The Plumbing & Drainage Trade shall provide the water points and drain points
at the MVAC plant rooms for maintenance. This Sub-Contractor shall be
responsible to verify the adequacy of the water and drainage points in early
construction stage before commencement of P/D installation.

5. Marshalling / interfacing boxes shall be provided by Plumbing and Drainage

Trade beside of P/D LMCPs for interfacing with the P/D equipment controlled
and monitored by BMS specified in Appendix 4 – ATC & BMS Point Schedule.
The connections between the marshalling / interfacing boxes and the P/D
LMCPs and outgoing wiring of the P/D LMCPs shall be responsible by the
Plumbing and Drainage Trade. This Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to
coordinate with P/D Trade for the exact location of marshalling / interfacing
boxes and the interfacing detail method through written information.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/29 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

6. This Sub-Contractor shall provide all necessary cables and conduit facilities
from Direct Digital Control (DDC) controller to marshalling / interfacing boxes.

E. Interface with Electrical and ELV Trades

1. For major MVAC equipment, Electrical and ELV Trade shall provide
electrical power supply to the MVAC installation and shall terminate at the
main isolation switch of each Local Motor Control Panel (LMCP) or Motor
Control Center (MCC) provided by this Sub-Contractor, unless otherwise
stated. Beyond the terminations, this Sub-Contractor shall be responsible
for complete design and installation for all downstream equipment to suit
the MVAC installations, including cabling, electric motors, starters,
actuators, controls, cable containment, etc. The electrical power supply to
all control equipment shall be provided and terminated by this Sub-
Contractor. This Sub-Contractor’s design shall fully comply with Supply
Rule and other relevant regulations.

2. The essential power supply for the Fire Services Installation (FSI) under the
MVAC discipline, including staircase pressurization system and dynamic
smoke extraction system, shall be provided and terminated by Electrical
and ELV Trade to the main switch of each LMCP as shown on the drawing.
The LMCP and the outgoing feeders to each FSI shall be responsible by
this Sub-Contractor.

3. Not used.

Not used.

Trade

Wiring
connection onto the switches and provision of power supply to indoor unit
and control shall be responsible by this Sub-Contractor.

Trade

Wiring connection onto the termination and provision of power distribution

and control shall be responsible by this Sub-Contractor.

Trade

Trade

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/30 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Trade

Trade

Trade

Trade

13. Beyond the electrical terminations by Electrical and ELV Trade as specified,
this Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for complete design and
installation for all downstream equipment to suit the MVAC installations as
specified. The Sub-Contractor’s design shall fully comply with Supply Rule
and other relevant regulations, including preparation and submission of
form WR1A to the Electrical and ELV Trade.

The sizes of incoming cables, terminals and rating of main circuit breaker
must be rechecked before construction against the approved drawings of
the Electrical and ELV Trade in terms of cable sizes and switchgear ratings.
This Sub-Contractor shall also provide all necessary information and
coordinate with the Electrical and ELV Trade to ensure that the electrical
characteristics of the switchgear provided by the Electrical and ELV Trade
shall match with the starting and running characteristics of the motor-driven
equipment.

15. Marshalling /
Trade
specified in Appendix 4 –
ATC & BMS Point Schedule.

Trade This Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to

coordinate with Trade for the exact location of
marshalling / interfacing boxes through
written information.

16. Marshalling / interfacing boxes shall be provided by

Trade for shop front lighting control . This Sub-
Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with Electrical and ELV Trade
for the exact location of marshalling / interfacing boxes for shop front
lighting. The connections between marshalling / interfacing boxes and
contactor box for shop front lighting shall be responsible by
Trade.

17. This Sub-Contractor shall provide all necessary cables and conduit facilities
from Direct Digital Control (DDC) controller to marshalling / interfacing boxes.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/31 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

18. Electrical power supply comprising socket outlets, connection units,

isolators, switches, MCB board, etc. shall be provided by Electrical and ELV
Trade. This Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with Electrical and ELV Trade
for the exact location of power supply.

19. A Gigabit Ethernet Network System shall be provided by EL & ELV Trade.
This Sub-Contractor shall provide the ATC and BMS installation based on
and using this Ethernet Network System.

20. This Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with EL & ELV Trade
for the location of RJ 45 outlets, the interfacing details and VLAN setting
when using the Ethernet Network System.

F. Interface with Lift and Escalator Sub-Contractors

1. This Sub-Contractor shall liaise with various lift and escalator system
sub-contractors to confirm the heat dissipation of each lift machine and the
exact locations of the air duct for effective cooling of ventilation of the lift
and escalator systems.

G. Interface with Interior Fitting-out Sub-Contractors

1. This Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with various interior fitting-out sub-

contractors to ensure that this Sub-Contractor’s installation of the air
distribution equipment and the air supply plenum are full coordinated with
the ceiling and the finishes installed by the fitting-out sub-contractors in
order to comply the technical performance as specified and other
architectural requirements.

2. This Sub-Contractor shall prepare the shop drawings incorporating with the
maintenance access requirements for entire MVAC system and submit the
Main Contractor for consolidation and further coordination with the Architect.

H. Co-ordination with Other Sub-Contracts

1. This Sub-Contractor is required to co-ordinate with other services provided

under other Sub-Contracts. This Sub-Contractor shall provide all materials,
equipment and labour to ensure the satisfactory operation at the interface
of the installation and the proper sequencing of the works for which he is
responsible. During all stages of the work, the interfaces shall be
discussed, coordinated and agreed between this Sub-Contractor and other
sub-contractors / contractors.

Any further interfaces which may be identified during detailed design shall
be incorporated in these discussions.

2. It is the responsibility of this Sub-Contractor to ensure that the Main

Contractor is informed of all holes, penetrations and recesses required in
the structural and non-structural elements of the building. Where additional
holes and recesses are required after the construction of these building
elements, they shall be provided at this Sub-Contractor's expense, unless
they are covered on a duty authorized basis by the Variation Order issued
by the Architect.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/32 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. It is also the responsibility of this Sub-Contractor to ensure that all builder's

works, holes, openings, etc. are provided and correctly located during the
construction of the building.

4. Notwithstanding the above, all necessary co-ordination, provision of shop

drawings and other information necessary for the satisfactory execution of
the Works shall be carried out and furnished at the correct time and in the
prescribed manner by this Sub-Contractor.

I. Co-ordination Meetings

1. This Sub-Contractor shall attend all site meetings to be chaired by the

Architect and any other coordination meetings called for by the Architect,
Employer, Engineer or Main Contractor.

2. The coordination meetings shall be held at regular interval or ad-hoc basis

as informed by the Architect.

3. This Sub-Contract’s representatives at any one of the above meetings shall

be fully authorised to represent and commit as this Sub-Contractor in
respect of programmes and coordination with Main Contractor, other
contractors or sub-contractors employed by the Employer.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.1(AC)/33 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.2 PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of water pumps.

1.02 General Requirements

A. The pump heads specified in the Schedules are for tendering purpose only, and
are calculated based on assumed equipment pressure drops. The exact pump
head required according to the pressure drops of fan coil units, primary air units
and air handling units etc. being offered shall be re-calculated and submitted for
review. No modification to the piping system shall be allowed. Any additional
cost on the modification of the system (pumps, motors, switchgears, cables, etc)
necessary to meet the schedule duties, space conditions and the offered values
and equipment shall not be entertained.

B. Cover the inlet and outlet openings of the pump. Store pumps in a dry space and
well cornered and protected until ready to install. Special rust preventive
measures to protect the internal parts of pumps shall be applied if the equipment
must be stored for an extended period of time. Such provisions shall be removed
completely before final installation and the bearings should then be re-lubricated.

C. Protect pumps from mechanical damages and corrosion during construction.

Damaged equipment shall not be accepted.

D. The testing pressure shall be 1.5 times of the actual working pressure or
1,600kPa, whichever is higher unless otherwise specified.

E. Provide all necessary equipment and material for delivery, hoisting and proper
installation of pumps.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products shall be furnished by manufacturer who

normally supplies this type of equipment and can show evidence of having
furnished such equipment that have been in successful operation for a period of
at least five years.

B. Pumps shall be ‘Type-tested’ in accordance with the requirement of BSEN ISO

9906 Test certificates with performance comes shall be submitted for review.

C. Nameplate: Securely attached on each pump set showing manufacturer’s name,

serial and model number and data of manufactures.

D. The pumps supplied for this project shall conform to relevant codes and
regulations of the jurisdictional Authorities, BS, EN Specification’s, or the ANSI,
ASTM, DIN, Australian standard or other acceptable equivalent.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit shop drawings showing plant room details plans, elevations, sections,
dimensions and operation weights of equipment, electrical wiring and control
diagram, pipe work connections and flange details, mounting and fixing details.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Shop drawings for mounting and fixing details shall include details and
dimensions of pump bases, fixing bolts, flexible connections, vibration isolators
and any other builder’s work requirement.

C. Submit certified characteristic curve to show total kW loading against pressure

head at specified operating speed.

D. Submit calculation to indicate the exact pump head required according to the
pressure drops of fan coil units, primary air units and air handling units etc, being
offered for review.

E. Pump characteristic submitted shall be plotted over the entire range from shut off
to free discharge as static pressure in kPa, total efficiency and operating kW
against water flow in l/s at the specified speed.

F. Submit complete manufacturer’s printed catalogue and complete material

specification.

G. Submit manufacture’s operation and maintenance manual.

H. Submit factory test certificate in accordance with the requirement of BSEN ISO
9906.

I. Submit spare parts list as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. Pump capacities, heads, working pressures, minimum efficiencies and motor kW

are indicated on the Drawings, but submission for review before ordering is
required for all pump duties and horsepower against the requirements of the
systems as finally installed.

B. The pumps selected shall have a relatively flat characteristic pumps with for
pumps in parallel operation at and particular the pumps selected shall have a
steep characteristic for single pump operation at any particular time, curve
indicating excessive shut-off head shall not be used.

C. Select the pumps with speed not exceeding 1,450 rpm unless otherwise specified.

D. Select the pumps of construction meeting the maximum required working

conditions, water temperature test pressure, and nature of the liquid to be passed
as specified.

E. Capacities of each pump and motor, shall not be less than indicated, and be
designed for all conditions of parallel operation. Each motor shall be of sufficient
capacity to operate over the entire head capacity range of its respective pump
without exceeding nameplate power rating.

F. Pump characteristic curve shall rise continuously from maximum capacity to

shutoff. Shutoff head shall be approximately 20% greater than design head.
Pumps shall operate at or near point of peak efficiency and permit operation at
capacities of approximately 25% beyond design capacity without exceeding break
off point. Design impeller diameter shall not be more than 90% of difference
between minimum and maximum of impeller diameters published for respective
pump.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

G. Alignment : At the time of start-up, use dial indicator with accuracy of plus or
minus 0.05mm. It shall be certified in writing that alignment work has been
performed by his personnel and that pumps are operating in accordance with
design requirement.

H. All pumps and motor shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during
operation.

I. Additional vibration isolator and sound attenuator shall be provided as required by

the Architect/Engineer with no additional cost to the Employer if the noise level is
found excessive and not within the acceptable standard.

J. Each complete pump unit including motor and drive shall be supplied from a
single manufacturer. All guarantee, test certificate shall be deemed to apply to
the entire assembly.

K. All pumps shall be factory painted in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Any damages to finishes due to transportation storage,
installation or otherwise shall be made good in the manner recommended by the
manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.

2.02 Horizontal Split Casing Centrifugal Pumps for Fresh Water System
(Chilled Water, hot water, heating water, condensing water and auxiliary cooling
water pump)

A. Horizontal split case single stage, double suction, single volute, centrifugal type.
The casing shall be split on the horizontal centre line with the suction and
discharge nozzles and casing feet cast integral with the lowercasing half. The
interior of the pump shall be easily inspected by removing the upper half of the
casing without disturbing the pipe connections or pump alignment.

B. Pump and flanges designed for working pressure as specified in ‘Testing and
Commissioning’ Section of this Specification tested and guaranteed to withstand
1-1/2 times specified working pressure.

C. Unless otherwise specified, the materials of construction of the pump shall be as

follows :

1. Shaft: shall be of grade 316 stainless steel to BS 970: part 1

2. Pump casing: shall be of cast iron, BSEN 1561 grade 260 or ISO 185.

3. Enclosed impeller : shall be of bronze to BSEN 1982 LG2, statically,

dynamically and hydraulically balanced. Non-overloading and correctly
designed for all conditions of service. Impeller shall be machined to a high
degree of surface finish and shall be securely fixed to the shaft and
protected by shaft sleeves of compatible materials.

4. Wearing rings : shall be provided on both casing and impeller, renewable

type, made of dissimilar bronze metals and of hardness to insure
maximum protection against galling.

5. Renewable shaft sleeves shall be grade 316 stainless steel to BS970: part1,
unhardened for use with mechanical seals.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

6. Bearings shall be self-aligning, radial thrust type, oil lubricated designed

and rated at L10 life of not less than 50,000 hours. Bearing housing shall
be separate from pump case and bolted and doweled to pump case. Top
half of bearing housing removable. Bearing housing with overflows holes
to prevent flooding of bearings. The bearing shall be packed in the factory
with high-quality bearing grease on lithium-soap base, free of resin and
acid, not liable to crumble and brittle.

7. Mechanical seals shall be specifically designed for pump pressures as per

schedule. Seals shall be of stainless steel construction with stainless steel
springs, tungsten carbide and Babbitt carbon seats. Provide one extra
complete set of mechanical seal assemblies for each seal furnished with
pump.

8. Pump and motor shall be assembled on base plate of cast iron or rolled
steel, of sloping channel type, with tapped drain connection at pump end.
The base plate shall be designed and supplied by the same pump
manufacturer.

9. Flexible and spacer coupling: self-aligning all metal type, of acceptable

design, between pump and motor, to enable removal of impeller without
disturbing the driving motor or its mounting.

10. The casing feet shall be integrally cast with the lower casing and be
immediately adjacent to suction and discharge flanges in order to transmit
any pipe strain loads to the base and foundation.

2.03 Horizontal Split Casing Centrifugal Pumps for Well water/Sea Water System
(Condensing water and seawater cooling pumps)

A. The requirements as specified for fresh water pump in clause 2.02 of this Section
of this Specification shall apply with the following exceptions.

Parts Material

Casing Ni-resist cast iron SNiCr 203 to BSEN 13835

Impeller/shaft sleeve/ Duplex stainless steel to ASTM A477/A477M CD-4MCu

wear ring

Shaft Stainless steel 316 S31 to BS 970 part 1

Coating All internal surfaces of pump casing shall be coated with

glass filled polyester resin

Glass Coatings

Glass coatings required for protective purposes on the pump casing shall be
applied after fabrication of the casing is completed, including all punching,
welding, drilling, grinding, chipping, trimming, filling screw tapping, cutting and
bending, and after the removal of surface defects. Tapped holes and all
machined mating surfaces shall be blanked off or masked before the glass
coating is applied.

All sharp edges shall be carefully and evenly rounded by grinding or similar
means.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Grit blast cleaning shall be to 2nd quality to BS 7079. Residues shall be removed
by vacuum cleaning or blowing external surfaces with dry oil free compressed air.
The first glass coating shall be applied within 4 hours of grit blast cleaning.

The glass coating shall be glass filled polyester resin. It shall have the following
properties:

high resistance to abrasion;

good adhesion properties;

machinable; and

high resistance to sea water.

The finished coating shall have:

bond strength of at least 26.5 MPa;

abrasion resistance in mg/m loss of at least 400; and

Brinell hardness number of at least 40.

An established and well proved and tested coating system by a manufacturer

shall be used, and details shall be submitted for review.

The preparation and coatings shall be applied by the specialist manufacturer of

the coating system.

The minimum dry film thickness of the coating shall be 1.5mm achieved by multi-
layer method.

After completing all coatings, the surfaces shall be spark tested at 2.5kV using a
holiday detector rated at 0-10kV for detection of pin holes and pores.

The glass coatings shall have a life of at least 10 years of normal pump operation
without break down, failure or substantial loss of the coating layers.

The coatings shall not adversely affect the efficiency or performance of the
pump.

2.04 Horizontal End-Suction Pumps (Fresh water/seawater)

A. Horizontal end suction, single stage volute casing centrifugal type. Facility shall
be provided for dismantling pump rotor including bearing block without disturbing
the piping arrangement and the motor.

B. Casing shall be radically split, generally with vertical discharge nozzle and axial
suction nozzle. Pump feet shall be integrally casted on the casing so that all
thrust shall be transmitted onto the foundation. For discharge orientation other
than vertical as required or indicated, provide integrally cast additional support to
withstand thrust in directions other than vertical.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Impeller shall be of single-entry type with double curvature vanes, and back
vanes balancing holes to achieve an optimum reduction of axial thrust at the
operating point. Impeller shall be machined to a high degree of surface finish and
dynamically balanced. The impeller shall be securely fixed to the shaft which
shall be protected by shaft sleeves of compatible materials.

D. Bearings shall be self-aligning, radial thrust type, oil lubricated designed and
rated at L10 life of not less than 50,000 hours. Bearing housing shall be separate
from pump case and bolted and doweled to pump case. Top half of bearing
housing removable. Bearing housing with overflows holes to prevent flooding of
bearings. The bearing shall be packed in the factory with high-quality bearing
grease on lithium soap base, free of resin and acid, not liable to crumble and
brittle.

E. Mechanical seals shall be specifically designed for pump pressure as per

schedule. Seals shall be of stainless steel construction with stainless steel
springs, tungsten carbide and Babbitt carbon seats. Provide one extra complete
set of mechanical seal assemblies for each seal furnished with pump.

F. Pump and motor shall be assembled on base plate of cast iron or rolled steel, of
sloping channel type, with tapped drain connection at pump end. The base plate
shall be designed and supplied by the same pump manufacturer.

G. Flexible and spacer coupling, shall be of self-aligning all metal type, of

acceptable design, between pump and motor, to enable removal of impeller
without disturbing the driving motor or its mounting.

H. Material of Construction

Fluid Handled Fresh Water Sea-Water

Service Cold & Hot water Flush Water / Cooling Water

Material:

Casing Cast iron to BSEN 1561 Ni-resist cast iron

Grade 260 SNiCr 203 to BSEN 13835

Impeller Bronze to BSEN 1982 Zinc-free bronze to

BSEN 1982 Grade PB1

Shaft Stainless steel to Stainless steel to BS 970: Part 1

BS 970, grade 431 S29 grade 316 S31

Shaft Stainless steel to Zinc-free bronze to

Sleeve BS 970, grade 431 S29 BSEN 1982

Wear Bronze to BSEN 1982 Stainless steel to BS 970: Part 1

Rings PB1 grade 316 S31

2.05 Sump Pumps

A. Sump pumps shall be single stage, submersible centrifugal pumps of close-

coupled construction. The impeller shall have a completely free and unrestricted
passage of 100mm capable of pumping fluid containing solids of sizes up to
32mm diameter and shall achieve a steepness of characteristic curve rendering
non-overloading characteristic to the pump.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Provide facilities for raisin and lowering pump regardless the liquid level of the
sump. The pump when lowered into the pits shall automatically be connected to
the discharge piping. There shall be no need for the maintenance or operation
personnel to enter the pit to carryout the work. Each pump shall be complete with
guide bass cable supports and stainless steel lifting chains.

C. Common shaft for pump and motor shall be supported on maintenance-free

deep-grooved ball and roller bearings, lubricated for life.

D. The motor shall be sealed off against the water by two mechanical seals in series
with oil filled pre-chamber between seals. High grade metal carbide seal ring
shall be provided at the pump end to minimize wear. Carbon and stainless steel
seal rings at the motor end.

E. Motor shall be squirrel cage floodable type.

F. Material of Construction:

Fluid Handled Blackish Water/Sewage

Service Drainage Sewage collection

Material:

Casing Cast iron to BSEN 1561 Cast iron to BSEN 1561

Impeller Cast iron to BSEN 1561 Stainless steel grade 316

S16 to BS 970: Part 1

Shaft/Shaft Sleeve/ Stainless steel grade 316 Stainless steel grade 316
Wear Ring S16 to BS 970: Part 1 S16 to BS 970: Part 1

G. Provide zinc sacrifice anode bar attached to the pump casing inlet for catholic
protection.

2.06 Portable Submersible Pumps

A. Portable submersible pump of construction shall be similar to that specified in

Clause 2.05 B to F of this Section of the Specification.

B. Pump shall have polypropylene casing, polyamide impeller and polyethylene

pump foot.

C. Suction strainer basket shall be provided.

D. Pump shall be complete with plug (with safety switch) ready and suitable for
plugging into the main supply. Furnish a 20m long connecting cable and a 20m
long PVC flexible tube of diameter suitable for connection to the pump.

2.07 In-line Centrifugal Pump

A. In-line, single stage, centrifugal type.

B. Bearing, lubrication and mechanical seals shall be as specified in Clause 2.02 of

this Section of the Specification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Material or Construction:

Casing : Cast iron to BSEN 1561 Grade 260

Impeller : Bronze to BSEN 1982
Shaft : High tensile steel to BS 970 grade 430 S29
Shaft Sleeve : Stainless steel to BS 970 grade 316 S16
Wear Rings : Bronze to BSEN 1982 LB1

2.08 Pneumatic Booster Pump Set (for Fresh Water)

A. The pump set shall be factory assembled package type and shall comprise
duplicated pumps, pressure vessels, motor control panel and all necessary
controls including starters, isolators, overload relay, lead-lag selector switch, low
level cut-out and pressure switches for pump control. The complete control panel
shall be mounted on the common steel bed. Locally assembled pump set will not
be accepted.

B. The pumps shall be as specified in Clause 2.02 to 2.04 of this Section of the
Specification as appropriate. Pump performance curve shall have a steep slope
characteristic such that the head produced at duty point and the head produced
when flow is reduced to 25% of specified flow shall exceed 10m to minimize the
number of pump start/stop.

C. The pump set shall be complete with inter-connecting pipe work, isolating an non-
return valves, flexible connectors and with flanged connection ready for
connection to the pipe work system.

D. Pump set for hot water service shall be suitable to work with 100oC water.

E. One or more pressure vessels shall be provided and installed on the same
mounting. The vessels shall be of adequate capacity to accommodate a
considerable fluctuation in water demand by the system and shall minimize the
start/stop cycles of the pumps.

F. The vessels shall be constructed of steel plate built to ASME Standards for
Unfired Pressure Vessels. Vessels shall be lined with a minimum of 20mm of
aluminium silicate cement applied in 2 coats. All ancillary internal parts shall be
made of copper or bronze.

G. A rubber diaphragm shall be provided in the pressure vessel separating the fluid
and the gas therein. The life of the diaphragm shall be at least 15 years.

H. The vessels shall be pre-charged with nitrogen at factory at a pressure to suit the
systems. The pre-charge pressure shall be adjustable and a charging port with
non-return device shall be provided in each vessel.

I. Provide automatic change-over facility for the duplicated pump sets.

J. The operation of the working pumps shall be initiated by the pressure

sensors/switches in sequence. If the pressure in the system drops to the pre-
determined level, the working pumps shall cut in automatically. The difference
between the cut-in and cut-out pressure shall be 10m unless otherwise specified.
Pump start/stop frequency shall not be more than 6 times per hour at the rate
output.

K. Appropriate Test Certificate shall be provided as required by the Authorities.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.09 Pneumatic Booster Pump Set (for Sea Water)

A. The pump set shall be as specified in Clause 2.02 to 2.04 of this section of the
specification as appropriate.

B. Pump construction materials shall be as specified in Clause 2.03/2.04 for pumps

for sea-water use.

C. All internal metal parts exposed to sea-water inside the pressure vessel shall be
made of grade 316 stainless steel.

D. All pipe work shall be ductile iron and all valves, and ancillary equipment shall be
as specified in ‘Pipework’ and ‘Valves and Fittings’ Section for sea-water use.

E. Appropriate instruments and control equipment shall be corrosion resistance

against sea-water.

2.10 Multi-Stage Pump (Boiler Feed Water Pump)

A. Multi-stage, centrifugal type, casing and cover shall be grained cast iron to the
BSEN1561.

B. Construction shall be as specified for end-suction pump in Clause 2.04 of this

Section of the Specification.

C. Boiler feed water pump shall be supplied by the Boiler manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit pumps and appurtenances to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

B. Provide steel framework, inertia blocks, hangers, stainless steel anchor bolts for
pumps.

C. Horizontal mounted pumps shall be installed with the pump and complete drive
assembly located on a common cast iron bedplate which shall be machine-
finished and accurately aligned.

D. Pump base mounted on the inertia block shall be fixed on the provided concrete
plinth by means of acceptable spring isolators. Details of inertia block and spring
isolators shall refer to ‘Vibration Control’ Section of this specification and the
Drawings.

E. Provide flanges and flexible pipe connectors to the suction and discharge
connections of pumps.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. Provide supports to both sides of the flexible connection to prevent undue strain
on pumps. Such supports shall be mounted so as not to transmit vibration to the
building structure.

G. Each pump shall be fitted with air cocks, drain plugs and a pressure gauge on
both side of the pump. The gauges shall be mounted on a hardwood gauge
board on the wall or else where as review without objection.

H. Except in the case of glandless pumps, provision shall be made for collecting
gland leakage via a copper drain pipe fitted from the pump to the nearest gully or
drain point. A copper funnel shall be used to collect the drips at the gland
packing.

I. Provide guards of galvanized angle iron and wire mesh to all exposed shafts,
couplings and moving parts. The guard shall be strongly constructed easily
removable and completed with lifting handles.

J. Supply and advise the location of holding bolts and fixings for incorporation in the
concrete work. Drilling and cutting to the concrete plinth shall not be allowed.

3.02 Site Testing

A. Test pumps in actual operating conditions to verify compliance with the

Specification. Check all wiring for connection and continuity. Test performance
of all relays and logic.

B. Promptly repair excessive vibration, noise, rattles or other objectionable factors

or replace the defective item and retest the system.

C. Check controls in the presence of the control manufacturer's authorized

representative and make all necessary adjustments to secure proper control.

D. Perform all tests in the presence of the Architect/Engineer.

3.03 Testing at manufacturer’s Works

A. The pump shall be tested over the full range of its capacities that is from closed
valve condition to a point corresponding to a discharge of 15% in excess of the
maximum discharge in the specified range of duties to determine output, power
absorbed and mechanical efficiency. Copies of the NPSH design curve shall also
be provided.

B. Head/quantity curves, pump efficiency/quantity curves, overall efficiency/quantity

and power/quantity curves shall be drawn. The curves produced shall be used to
demonstrate that the pump will be capable of meeting the full range of operating
conditions at site.

C. All pump components subject to pressure shall be hydraulically tested to a

pressure of 1.5 times the sum of the closed valve head plus the maximum
suction pressure for 5 minutes.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.2(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.3 AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, supply and installation of factory-built air
handling units with cabinet, fan, coil and filter sections; prefabricated insulated casings
and associated accessories for built-up air conditioning systems.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Provide air handling units with the sensible and latent loads, chilled water flow,
water temperature rise/drop, maximum water pressure drop shown in the Equipment
Schedule and/or Drawings.

B. Protect the complete unit properly during transportation and storage until ready for
installation. Any damage to finishes which may have occurred during transit,
installation or otherwise shall be made good in the manner recommended by the
manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.

C. Protect fins and casing from mechanical and corrosive damages during installation.

D. Provide covers for all pipe inlets and outlets until pipe connections are made.

E. All factory applied acoustical and thermal insulation, including facing and adhesive
shall be fire-resistant and conform to requirements of NFPA and FSD.

F. The fan resistance given in the Schedules/Drawings have been calculated on

assumed resistance figure for equipment and are for guidance only. The final Fan
resistance based on the actual duct run and the offered equipment shall be carefully
checked and re-assessed before ordering the equipment. Any modification of the
system (fan, water, switchgear, cables, etc.) necessary to meet the schedule duties
and space conditions shall be carried out at the the Sub-Contractor’s expense. Type
of fan shall be provided as shown in the Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings.

G. Temporary filters shall be required for testing and commissioning of equipment

before site cleaning.

H. Provide all necessary equipment and materials for delivery, hoisting and installation
of the unit.

I. It is the responsibility of this Sub-contractor to ensure the selected AHU/PAU shall

be fitted into the plantroom or space allocated for installation and proper
maintenance without dismantle any equipment / ductwork / pipework. Should the
space allocated is not able to allow proper maintenance, the Sub-contractor shall
draw the attention of the Architect/Engineer and re-select or replace the AHU/PAU
to suit at its own cost.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Air conditioning units, ventilating units, coils and

casing shall be furnished by a manufacturer who normally supplies this type of
equipment and can show evidence that such equipment have been in successful
operation for a period of at least five years.

B. Reference Codes and Specification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.3(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1. Codes and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Requirements of FSD.

3. ASTM, ARI Standard 410 and 430.

4. ISO 9001

C. Nameplate: Securely attach plate to each air conditioning unit and ventilating unit
showing manufacturer's name, serial, model number and tag number. This plate
shall be securely fixed to the air handling equipment casing in prominent position.

A. In addition, each equipment shall have a specification plate which shall show full
details of, as appropriate, the fan size, r.p.m., amperes, voltage, phase, impeller
diameter, fan characteristics, lubricants, air flows at specified duty, air flow direction,
pulley and belt sizes, coil duties, filter media, water flow rates, design flow
temperatures and any other information as may be required by the
Architect/Engineer. This plate shall also be securely fixed to the air handling
equipment casing.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit shop drawings showing plans, elevations, sections, physical

dimensions, operating weights, electrical wiring diagram, controls,
piping connection arrangement, mounting and fixing details, floor
requirement.

B. Manufacturer’s shop drawings shall clearly indicate the construction and assembly
of all air handling equipment components, including accessories, and overall sizes,
static and operating weights of equipment.

C. Mounting and fixing details shall include details and dimensions of air handling
equipment bases, fixing bolts, flexible connections, vibration isolators, operating
weight and any special builder’s work requirements.

B. Submit certified manufacturer's data and performance rating

indicating sound power level, capacities at specified
conditions/criteria, water pressure drop, available external static
pressure, working and testing pressure.

C. Submit ‘type’ test certificate for each type of AHU/PAU and a

complete material list.

D. Submit a complete list of all spares and accessories as

recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Submit copies of installation, operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Submit manufacturer's quality requirements and quality control

program for the entire manufacturing process.

G. Submit calculation of insulation thickness and maximum allowable

system fan motor power according to Building Energy Code for
review. The calculation shall show the compliance of the Building
Energy Code.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.3(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

H. Submit calculation to indicate the exact fan head required according

to the pressure drop (external and internal) or the A/C equipment
being offered for review.

I. Fan characteristic curves shall also be provided by plotting over the

entire range from shut-off to free delivery, with static pressure in Pa,
total efficiency in percentages and operating kW, against the air flow
in m 3/s at the specified speed, and shall have the operating points
been clearly indicated in each case.

J. The Sound Reduction Index shall be certified by the air handling unit
manufacturer and submitted for review.

D. The Sub-Contractor shall note that all fans and blowers shall have operating points
not deviated by more than 10% from their respective design maximum efficiency
operating points with low noise levels and with stability.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. Provide complete factory fabricated assembly including centrifugal fans, coils, filters,
cabinet, insulation, drain pan, drive and accessories.

B. Unless otherwise specified, units shall be draw-through type and complete with
mixing boxes, dampers as shown on Drawings or specified elsewhere.

2.02 Air Handling Unit (AHU)

A. AHU assemblies shall be of rigid double skin, fully modular construction with each
section having matching cross sectional dimensions and same construction type.

B. Air handling equipment and all parts thereof shall be capable of satisfactorily
withstanding the effect of all temperatures, stresses and loads under starting and
operating conditions, for the installations as shown on the Drawings. These
capabilities shall be verified by submission of performance curves and tested
records for all components and the complete air handling equipment assembly to
the Architect/Engineer for review.

C. Each air handling equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced to

minimize any vibrations or noise in operation. The equipment framework, casing,
and components shall be of sufficient strength and stiffness to withstand any
pressure of air flow and vibration that may arise. The equipment shall also be
properly constructed, sized and adjusted to reduce any noise production to the
possible minimum.

D. Casing shall completely enclose the coils, fans and filter sections.

E. Casing shall be of panel construction, double wall type packed with insulation
between the walls. Casing framework shall be of modular pentapost double skin
construction. Outer skin shall be minimum 1.2mm galvanized steel sheet while
inner skin shall be minimum 0.8mm galvanized steel sheet. The construction of
infill panels shall be not thinner than 50mm and shall be selected to match both the
specified sound reduction index of the casing and to prevent condensation on the
exterior surfaces under the extremes of operation and ambient conditions. The infill
insulation shall be of CFC-free, vermin and rot-proof, non-flammable, sound-
absorbing and thermal insulating type. The minimum thickness of insulation for
AHU/PAU casing shall comply with the requirements as stipulated in the Building

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.3(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Energy Code. The insulation shall be adequately supported to prevent collapse and
to eliminate the formation of cavities. All unit panels, including the floor panels,
pentapost and framework shall be of double skin and insulated at factory. Frames
shall be specially locked so that there will be no direct metal contact to form
condensation.

F. Each module shall be supported by rigid galvanized steel post frame or extruded
aluminium alloy framework. Framework of all AHUs sections shall be of thermal
break design to avoid from thermal bridging leading to condensation.

G. The whole construction shall be hygienically designed and the internal surface shall
be smooth to avoid any framework protrusion inside the casing.

H. Entire panel casing shall be self-supporting and shall withstand a positive or

negative pressure differential of 2055 Pa. At 1500 Pa differential, the casing shall
be air tight and shall not deflect more than 1/200 of span. The removal of the side
panel shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit.

I. The panels shall fit within the framework and shall be sealed at the jointed edges
with a waterproof and air tight gasket.

J. All panels shall be removable from the air handling units. Panels not designated as
quick access panels may be of lift off type with handles where they are below 1.0m2.
Larger sizes shall be hinged unless plant access is restricted. Quick access panels
shall have a locking device which gives a secure seal between frame, gasket and
panel.

K. Main access panels shall be provided for the coil sections, fan sections, filter
sections, energy recovery sections, and mixing boxes and elsewhere as necessary
and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. The entire unit shall be mounted
on a galvanized steel / aluminium alloy channel base frame.

L. Galvanized steel bolts, screws and washers shall be used.

M. Electric air heaters shall consist of a number of sheathed heating elements of the
enclosed type mounted in a sheet steel casing. The elements shall be so installed
that they can be readily removed for cleaning or renewal. The surface temperature
of the elements shall not exceed 400oC when measured in an airflow of 2.5 m/s at
ambient temperature. A high temperature limit cut-out device with hand reset
button shall be incorporated such that the limit device sensor is nearest to and
above the heating elements which are energized by the first control step. The
device shall operate within two minutes at a temperature of 68.5oC. The control of
electric air heaters, shall be interlocked with the fan motor starters and an air flow
control of the pressure or sail switch type so that the heaters cannot operate unless
the fan is running.

N. Frame members shall be bonded/mechanically fixed together to provide strength

equal to welding. All metal surfaces shall be properly treated and suitably painted.
The design of the entire unit shall be free from cold bridges. All metallic screws and
fasteners shall not penetrate the panels.

O. Finish exterior surfaces with factory applied enamel coating in addition to the
standard shop applied paint.

P. Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials and assembly

methods shall be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against galvanic
interaction.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.3(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Q. Unless sealed-for-life bearing is provided, grease fittings shall be provided and

mounted directly on bearings unless the latter are not readily accessible. Where
equipment bearings are not visible or are inaccessible, the unit shall be provided
with easily accessible extensions to bearing lubrication fittings.

R. All components shall be arranged to permit expansion without strain on tubes,

headers or casings and be complete with all guides and supports necessary to
ensure proper alignment and unimpaired drainage.

S. Each component of the air handling equipment shall have matching cross sectional
dimensions so as to ensure equal internal area for continuous and even airflow and
to give a neat overall external appearance. There shall be no framework
protrusions, unless otherwise required for the proper design as specified in this
Specification.

T. All rotating components shall be mounted on a chassis fully isolated on

spring/neoprene anti-vibration mountings from the framework and casing.

U. All holes for instruments (manometers etc.) or test purposes shall be carried out at
the maker’s works and shall be strengthened at the inner and outer skins and tapped
or threaded as required.

V. Drain pan under coil and fan section shall be:

1. Double wall of galvanized steel / aluminium alloy construction. Insulate

interior same as fan and coil sections.

2. With drain connection.

3. Water shall not be carried over from the cooling coil into the reminder of the
system and an eliminator section shall be provided, wherever necessary or
as indicated in the Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings.

4. Drain pipework shall include a water trap of minimum 50 mm deep depends

on the maximum fan pressure at the rated speed to prevent entry or exit of
air to or from the system.

5. A separate drain pan shall be provided for each 1.2 m depth of coil. On
stacked coil, intermediate drain troughs shall be provided.

6. All drain pans shall be adequately insulated with durable, non-smell and
non-peeling under cooling/heating and air flow design conditions.

W. Fan section shall be in accordance with “Fan” section of this Specification and shall
be mounted on structural steel base with vibration isolators. Fan motor shall be
supplied together by the AHU manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

X. Sealing devices shall be provided at tops and bottoms of coils to minimize air by-
pass and water carry-over.

Y. Coil and filter section shall be in accordance with “Water Coil” and “Air Filter”
section of this Specification. Units may be delivered to site in fan section and coil
sections and field assembled.

Z. Factory standard section shall be provided for UV sterilizing, ionizer, heat recovery
unit, heat pipe, desiccant wheel, etc. as shown in the Equipment Schedule and/or
Drawings.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.3(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

AA. The entire construction of the casing of the air handling unit shall comply with
DW144 Class B or BSEN 1886:2007 Class B.

BB. All cables installed inside and exposed to the air stream shall be contained in
flexible metal conduit.

CC.Valid test reports shall be made available to demonstrate that other non-metallic
components / materials, if any, installed inside the air stream are in compliance with
FSD’s requirements.

2.03 Primary Air Handling Unit

A. The primary air handling unit (PAU) as indicated in the Equipment Schedules and/or
Drawings shall be similar in construction to those air handling units in general areas,
except that they shall be designed and sized for pretreating and delivering 100%
fresh outside air to individual fan coil units as indicated on the Drawings.

2.04 EC Plug Fan

A. Electronically communted (EC) plug fan shall be provided as indicated in the

Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings.

B. EC plug Fan shall be single inlet, direct drive, airfoil blades with aerodynamically
optimized blade channel, high-performance radial impeller with circumferential
diffuser mounted on an electronically commutated external-rotor motor with
integrated control electronics

C. Impeller shall be made of aluminium with backward curved, continuously welded

blades and aerodynamically optimised inlet nozzle made of zinc-coated sheet steel
with bleeder connection for pressure relief.

D. Complete plug fan unit shall be statically and dynamically balanced in two planes as
per DIN ISO 1940 to balancing grade G 6.3

E. EC external-rotor motor efficiency shall be class IE4 without “rare earth” magnets
being used, with maintenance-free ball bearings and permanent lubrication with
built-in AC to DC conversion.

F. Voltage input shall be 1~200-277 V, 50/60 Hz respectively 3~380-480 V, 50/60 Hz

and unit can be operated on all standard Electricity Board networks at identical air
performance.

G. Optimised motor technology, soft start, integrated current limitation and extremely
compact electronics, with adjustable PID controller shall be designed and meets all
relevant EMC directives and all requirements as to circuit feedbacks and requires
no complicated installation with shielded cables.

H. EC plug fan shall be very low-noise commutation logic and 100 % speed-
controllable. EC plug fan gateway shall be supplied with same manufacturer of EC
plug fan.

I. EC plug fans inside each AHU / PAU shall be of N+1 configuration.

L. The following build-in protective and fault identification features shall be provided:

1. Alarm relay with zero-potential change over contacts (250V AC/2A, cosØ = 1)

2. Locked-rotor protection

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.3(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. Soft start of motors

4. Over-temperature protection of electronics and motor

5. Phase failure detection

6. Main under-voltage detection

7. Short-circuit protection

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

B. Provide supporting steelwork, hangers, spring isolators, legs, anchor bolts required
for the proper installation of equipment as recommended by manufacturer and
shown on the Drawings.

C. Install units on vibration isolators where shown and as specified in other Sections.

D. After installation, adjust fans to operate without noticeable vibration.

E. For centrifugal type fan, arrange belt guards to permit the use of tachometer, oiling
and testing with the guards in place. Properly guard belts, pulleys, chains, couplings,
projection set screws, keys and other rotating parts so that any person can safely
come in close proximity thereto.

F. Thoroughly clean the entire system before installing filters or operating the fans.

G. For systems containing filters, install filters and permanently seal the filter frame air-
tight before operating the fans. Replace all dirty filters and filter media before hand
over of the system to the Employer.

H. Install adequate bracing or supports to eliminate any distortion, vibration or change

in shape of the unit when the systems are operating or under tests.

I. Pulleys must be concentric.

J. All AHU/PAU serving scheduled premises shall be equipped with filter clog
indicators and hour running meters.

K. All water pipes shall not be run over the LMCP of the AHU/PAU and water
protective cover or drip trays shall be provided for the LMCP and below the
pipework respectively at its own cost and to the satisfactory to the
Archtiect/Engineer if it is unavoidable.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.3(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.4 WATER COILS

1 GENERAL

1.1 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, supply and installation of chilled and heating
water coils in the field erected and factory-built air handling units (AHUs), primary air
handling units (PAUs) and fan coil units (FCUs).

1.2 General Requirements

A. Provide covers for the inlet and outlet of the coils.

B. The resistance to air flow through the coil bank shall not exceed 125Pa for AHUs
and PAUs taking into account of wet air and the face velocity shall not exceed
2.3m/s.

C. Protect coils and fins from mechanical damages and corrosion during construction.
Fins with minor damage shall be combed straight. Units with extensive damage
to fins shall be rejected.

1.3 Quality Requirements

A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Water coils shall be furnished by a manufacturer

who normally supplies such equipment and can show evidence that such
equipment has been in successful operation for a period of at least five years.

B. Reference Codes and Specifications :

1. ARI Standard 410.

2. Codes and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Nameplates: Securely attach plate to each coil showing manufacturer’s name,

serial and model number.

D. Source Quality Control: Factory test water coils at 1,553kPa for low pressure
system as specified for system operating pressure less than 1,035kPa; and at
2,588kPa for high pressure system as specified for system operating pressure
less than 1,725kPa.

1.4 Submittals

A. Submit shop drawing indicating plans, elevation, physical dimensions, operating

weight, connection details.

B. Submit certified characteristic curve showing cooling or heating capacity, pressure

drop, temperature rise at different flow rate.

C. Submit operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Submit factory pressure test certificates.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.4(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Water Coil Fabrication

A. Seamless deoxidized 15.9mm outside diameter copper tubes for AHUs and PAUs
and 9.5mm for FCUs with minimum 0.634mm wall thickness brazed copper return
bends shall be used.

B. Aluminium plate fins mechanically bonded to the tubes or aluminium helical fins
mechanically bonded to the tubes shall be used. Minimum thickness of fins shall
be 0.13mm.

C. Headers shall be seamless steel or heavy gauge copper tube with supply and
return connections, drain and vent on each header.

D. For AHUs and PAUs, coil casing shall be flanged with minimum 1.6mm
galvanized steel. Top and bottom casing flanges shall be formed into a
reinforced galvanized steel channel.

E. Coils shall be designed with no bypass between coil sections.

F. For AHUs and PAUs, coil with 1.0 to 1.8 meter tube length shall be provided with
one center tube support, for longer coils up to 3 meter tube length shall be
provided with two intermediate supports and over 3 meter long tubes shall be
provided with three intermediate supports.

G. Maximum fin spacing shall be 12 fins per 25.4mm of tube. Coil shall be of 6 rows
deep maximum. However for FCU, Coil shall be of 4 rows deep maximum.

H. Water velocity shall be minimum 0.60 meter per second and maximum 1.80
meter per second throughout the tube length. Chilled water coils shall be selected
so that counter flow remains turbulent at 40% of the design flow rate.

I. Design with continuous circuit from one header to the second header shall be
adopted.

J. Coil shall be self-drain type with inter-drain headers.

K. For built-up coil bank, intermediate drain pan shall be galvanized steel. Main
drain pan shall be 2mm steel sheet formed by all welded construction and be hot
dipped galvanized after fabrication. Main drain pan shall be properly reinforced
and underside insulated with 25mm foil faced fibre glass or other acceptable
material to prevent condensation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.4(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. Mount and arrange components to permit expansion without strain on tubes,

headers or casing and with all guides and supports necessary to insure proper
alignment and unimpaired drainage.

B. Do not support piping connection from water coil.

C. Make supply and return connections to headers to give counter flow of air and
water.

D. Pitch coil at 12.7mm per meter towards outlet for drainage.

E. For stack coil, provide separate drain pan below coil. Drain condensate from
upper coil to drain pan below.

F. Support stack coils so that each coil can be removed without disturbing remaining
coils.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.4(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.5 HEAT RECOVERY WHEEL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, supply and installation of heat recovery wheels.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Store the heat recovery wheels in crates and well cover and protect them until
ready for installation

B. Protect the fins from mechanical damages and corrosion during construction.

C. Provide all necessary equipment and structural steel for delivery, hoisting and the
proper installation of the units.

D. Provide the heat recovery wheels with capacity and duty shown on the Equipment
Schedule.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualification of manufacturer: Furnish heat recovery wheels which are the

product of a manufacturer who can show evidence of having furnished such
equipment that has been in successful operation for at least five years.

B. Nameplates: Securely attached on each wheel showing manufacturer's name,

serial and model number and data of manufacturer.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit complete catalogue, technical information and shop drawings for material
and equipment. Shop drawings shall show plans, elevations and section;
dimensions of equipment; floor loading requirements, ducting connection
arrangements access opening for maintenance, mounting and fixing details.

B. Submit manufacturer’s printed operation and maintenance instructions in bound

form, and describe operating procedures and maintenance sequences.

C. Submit manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list in maintenance instruction.

D. Submit report of factory and field tests and certificates and show results of
operating tests.

E. Submit complete material list.

F. Mounting and fixing details shall include details and dimensions of bases, fixing
bolts supporting steel work and any special builder's work requirement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

Each heat recovery wheel shall be a complete factory fabricated assembly including
wheels, casing, purge sector, drive, etc.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.5(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.02 Wheel

A. The wheel shall be made of stiff alternating layers of flat and corrugated untreated
aluminium foils, bonded together into a rigid transfer media forming a multitude of
narrow flutes in the axial direction of the wheel. All surfaces shall be coated with
a solid silica gel desiccant or acceptable equal, which under all conditions must
maintain a non-deliquescent state, thereby, alleviating the risk of desiccant
migration and degradation of the latent efficiencies. The flow through the wheel
shall be laminar and dry soil particles up to 500 microns in size shall pass through
the wheel.

B. The transfer media shall exchange sensible and latent heat with equal
effectiveness and shall not support the growth of bacteria. The transfer media
shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 84 and the resulting performances
shall be presented for the range of local weather conditions under consideration
as suggested by ARI.

C. The rotor media shall be provided in an individually segmented fashion and

reassembled into a rigid supporting spoke system arrangement to insure structural
longevity and to allow the replacement of one segment only or the entire wheel
without removing the spoke system, side panels, or air ducts. The transfer media
shall, when operated in accordance with specified performance, run dry and not
require a condensate drain. The transfer media shall be cleanable by
compressed air or vacuuming without affecting the latent recovery.

2.03 Casing

The casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and be equipped with air-tight
removable side panels to provide easy access to internal parts. All steel parts shall be
coated with a zinc chromate primer and two finish coats of enamel. The rotor shall be
supported by two grease lubricated sealed ball bearings with external grease fittings to
allow maintenance as required.

2.04 Purge Sector

The unit shall be equipped with a purge sector allowing a maximum cross contamination
of 0.1 percent of the exhaust volume when the unit is operated under the specified
conditions.

2.05 Seals

The unit shall be equipped with radial and peripheral seals made of extruded neoprene
rubber. The seals shall be attached by fastening clips for easy field adjustment.
Provide labyrinth seal to insure minimum leakage and long life.

2.06 Drive

The rotor shall be belt driven by a constant speed motor mounted on a self-adjusting
motor base to provide precise belt tension. Lock-off stop button shall be provided.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit equipment and appurtenances to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.5(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Provide structural steel, necessary equipment, materials and hangers required for
the proper installation of equipment.

C. Install units on neoprene pads and ensure units operating without vibration and
shaft misalignment.

D. Provide 2 nos. portable air compressors and receiver sets and 2 nos. vacuum
cleaners with all necessary fittings to all heat recovery wheel plantrooms for
equipment cleaning purposes.

3.02 Lubrication

A. Lubricate all parts prior to running the machinery and equipment. Use the proper
lubricants and hydraulic fluids in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and lubricate all machinery and equipment in strict accordance
with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Furnish all lubricants. Prepare
an itemized list of required lubricants and hydraulic fluids, including quantities
required. Submit the itemized list sufficiently in advance of the need for
lubricants.

B. Protect bearings at all times against the possible entrance of foreign matter.
Thoroughly clean with solvents and relubricate bearings into which foreign matter
has penetrated.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.5(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.6 FAN COIL UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies manufacture and installation of factory-built fan coil units with
cabinet, fan, coil and filter sections.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Provide fan coil units with the specified sensible and latent cooling loads, chilled
water flow, water temperature rise/drop, maximum water and air pressure drop as
shown in the Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings.

B. Manufacturer’s information for fan coil unit selection shall be correctly rated to the
duties specified. Specified cooling capacities shall be achieved based on medium
fan speed unless otherwise stated.

C. The operating and testing pressure of water coil shall be 1600kPa and 2400kPa
respectively unless otherwise specified.

D. Protect the complete fan coil unit properly against damage, inclement weather etc.
during transportation and storage until ready for installation.

E. During installation, protect fins and casing from damages.

F. All pipe inlets and outlets shall be properly covered until pipe connections are
made.

G. Base depth of horizontal unit and width of vertical unit shall not exceed 250mm.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. The equipment furnished shall be a product of a manufacturer who has made

these units for a period of at least five years.

B. All capacity and noise data shall be in accordance with the ARI Standard 440.

C. All materials used shall comply with the requirements of FSD.

D. Securely attach nameplates on each fan coil unit showing manufacturer name,
serial number, model number, etc.

E. Applicable Codes and Standards:

1. ARI, ASHRAE, BS, BSEN, ISO, NFPA and UL

2. Codes and Regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit shop drawing showing plans, elevations, sections, physical dimensions,

operating weights, electrical wiring diagrams, controls, piping connection
arrangements, mounting and fixing details.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.6(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Submit certified manufacturer's data and performance rating indicating sound

power level, capacities at specified conditions/criteria for various fan speeds,
water pressure drops, available external static pressure, working and testing
pressure.

C. Submit complete material list.

D. Submit a complete list of all spares and accessories as recommended by

manufacturer.

E. Submit copies of installation, operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Submit manufacturer's quality requirements/quality control program for the entire

manufacturing process.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01 General

A. All fan coil units shall be selected based on performance of the units including the
required external static pressure, at medium fan speed.

B. Provide factory fabricated fan coil units complete with fans, coils, motors,
insulated condensate drain pan, manual air vent and accessories. Provide also
cabinet and insulated return air plenum with air filter where indicated.

C. Unit shall be horizontal furred-in recessed blow-through type, unless otherwise

specified or indicated.

D. In selecting fan coil units, the resistance imposed on the air flow of the units due
to ducts and special grilles shall be allowed. This external resistance shall be
applied to all fan coil units where shown to have ducts connected. Fan coil units
shall have external static pressure of 50Pa minimum, even though no duct is
connected, or as specified in the Equipment Schedule and/or on the Drawings.

E. All fan coil units shall be of minimal vibration and noise level during operation.
Should the vibration and noise level be excessive and not within normal
acceptable standards, adequate vibration isolation and sound attenuation devices
shall be provided.

F. All fan coil units shall be of the highest commercial standard and the noise level
shall be rated and tested in accordance with local government recognized or
certified independent testing authority.

G. The maximum sound power level (dB) of the following types of fan coil units at
high and medium speed with reference to 10-12 watt shall be as follows:

Unit Size Sound Power Level (High Speed/Medium Speed),

dB
or Nominal Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)

Capacity (m3/s) 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K

0.19 35/31 47/42 45/39 46/40 44/39 39/33 31/24 36/22

0.28 38/31 50/44 45/39 46/41 45/39 41/34 32/25 25/22
0.38 40/34 52/47 47/43 49/45 48/41 44/37 36/26 31/22
0.47 38/35 51/46 46/42 48/44 47/42 42/36 33/27 27/21
0.57 40/37 52/48 46/43 49/46 47/42 42/37 36/28 30/23

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.6(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.02 Fans

A. The fan shall be of double inlet double width, forward curved centrifugal flow type
and of metal construction impeller mounted to a solid steel shaft. The fan shall be
direct driven and designed for smooth quite operation.

B. The fan motor shall have sleeve bearings or ball bearings factory lubricated for
life.

C. The fan and motor shall be mounted on a detachable mounting chassis that can
be removed from the fan coil enclosure as one assembly (with extended cables)
to facilitate fan and motor cleaning. The fan impeller scroll casing shall also be
easily removed to clean the fan blades.

D. Fan and motor assemblies shall be complete with neoprene rubber anti-vibration
mounting.

E. DC Fan Coil Units shall be driven by permanent magnet motor, and shall be
provided with energy saving, variable fan speed control, automatic temperature
control and program customization.

F. DC Fan Coil Units shall possess with certificate of recognized product conformity
programme, such as CE marking, in the area of product safety and EMC
conformity.

2.03 Filter

A. Minimum (Nominal) 25mm thick, permanent, flameproof, dry type washable,

expanded aluminium foil filter shall be used.

B. Exposed type fan coil units shall be complete with the manufacturer's standard air
filter.

C. The filter shall have a minimum average arrestance efficiency of 60% to ASHRAE
52.1-1992. Initial air resistance shall not be more than 15Pa at fully rated flow
condition at high speed.

2.04 Motors

A. Fan motors shall be suitable for single phase electricity supply.

B. Motor shall be resiliently mounted to the fan tray or scrolls. Motor and fan
assembly shall also be resiliently mounted to the casing structure.

C. Motor shall have 3 fan speeds and shall be of adequate capacity to prevent over-
loading at any speed and duty of the fans.

D. Motor shall be of "Permanent split-capacitor" type for direct-on-line starting, and

factory wired to a terminal block inside a factory installed junction box. Motor shall
be provided with thermal overload protection

E. Motor windings and electrical components shall be impregnated or protected to

prevent damages from condensation.

F. A connection unit will be provided near each fan coil unit. Location of the
electrical power point shall be properly coordinated so that the connection unit
shall be positioned within 1m from the fan coil unit.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.6(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

G. Electrical wiring connection including cables and wiring accessories between the
connection unit and the fan coil unit shall be provided.

H. Electrical cables or wirings installed outside the casing and inside the air stream
shall be protected by metallic flexible conduits.

I. For DC Fan Coil Unit, motors shall be provided with brushless direct current
(BLDC) permanent magnet motor with variable speed control function. Motors
shall consist of a wound stator and a permanent magnet rotor. Rotation of motors
and rotating speed shall be controlled by electronic circuitry using electronic
commutation.

2.05 Coils

A. Coils shall be constructed from seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to

aluminium fins.

B. Each coil shall be provided with motorized 2-way solenoid control valve, and
isolated valves as well as flexible pipe connectors. The connector shall be
galvanised steel braided polymer tubing with insulation.

C. Each cooling coil shall be minimum three-row and shall include an air vent cock
and drain valve.

2.06 Drain Pans

A. Drain pan shall be situated beneath the cooling coil and arranged so that all
condensate will be collected in the pan. The pan shall extend under the entire
length and width of the coil including all headers and bends.

B. Drain pans shall be constructed from galvanized steel sheet of not less than
1.2mm thick. Drain pans shall be painted internally and externally with two coats
of bitumastic paint and insulated with a minimum of 13mm thick flexible closed
cell elastomeric insulation.

C. Drain pans shall have copper male connectors for connection to the condensate
drain pipes.

D. A second or additional larger stainless steel, not less than 0.8 mm thick, insulated
drain pans shall be provided for each fan coil unit installed inside electrical plant
rooms or on top of electrical equipment within non-plant room areas. The
drainage pipe shall be exposed to a conspicuous position to be determined on site.

2.07 Casings/Plenums

A. Each unit shall be complete with plenum and factory manufactured casing to
enclose the entire coil, fan, motor, and filter sections.

B. Casings/plenums shall be provided with supply and return ducts connections.

Casing/plenum shall be of galvanized steel construction of at least 1.2mm thick.

C. Return air duct connections shall be provided at the rear or the bottom of the unit
to suit the installation. The design and construction of the plenum shall be such
that the bottom and rear panel can be interchanged to facilitate duct connection
on site.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.6(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Casings/plenums shall have sufficient access door for inspection and

maintenance of filters, coils, fans, etc. Access to filters for cleaning shall
generally be achieved by opening the hinged central core of the return air grille.

E. Where mounted above false ceilings and in other areas concealed from view, fan
coil units shall be of galvanized mild steel and shall be corrosion resistant. All
edges of the casings/plenums that have been cut during its manufacture shall be
wire brushed and cleaned free from rust, and shall be given one coating of
chromate oxide paint.

F. Where mounted in a position exposed to view in non-plant room areas, fan coil
unit shall be generally as specified above but finished with an acceptable
decorative casing and neatly painted with at least one coat of anti-rust paint and
two top coats in colour. All painting shall be factory applied. Standard decorative
casing as per manufacturer's standard for exposed fan coil unit may be
acceptable.

G. Exposed fan coil unit shall be complete with factory manufactured supply and
return air grilles.

2.08 Casing/Plenum Insulation

A. The interior of casings/plenums shall be thermally insulated with 10mm coated

fibre glass which shall comply with the requirements as specified in the
“Insulation” section of this Specification. The casings/plenums shall be sealed to
prevent any condensation.

B. The fibre glass shall have a maximum k-factor of 3.25x10-2 W/m°C at 25°C mean
temperature and shall have a minimum density of 48 kg/m 3. The fibre glass shall
be surface treated to prevent erosion due to air movement and the surface colour
shall be black.

C. Alternative equivalent insulation method as recommended by the manufacturer

may be acceptable.

2.09 Electric Heaters for Fan Coils

A. Unless otherwise specified, the electric heater shall be of 2kW capacity of the
black heat sheathed element type, plain or finned, and shall be provided with a
safety temperature cut-out set to operate at 50°C.

B. Sail switch shall be fitted for each heater battery and shall be connected in series
with the safety cut-out thermostat to switch off the heater in the event of reduced
air flow.

C. This Contractor shall submit the mounting arrangement and terminals etc. for
review before execution.

2.10 Controls, Dampers and Grilles

A. Each fan coil unit shall have a combined room/duct type remote thermostat
complete with an ON-OFF switch, a 3-speed controller (High-Medium-Low).

B. Where indicated, fan coil units shall have connections for both fresh and
recirculated air and shall include an adjustable damper at the fresh air inlet able to
give fresh air up to 25% of the fan capacity.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.6(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Return air grilles shall be arranged such that the central core of the grille is hinged
and demountable for access to the filter for cleaning.

D. For DC Fan Coil Unit, the programme shall be capable for temperature settings
and fan speed settings motors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

A. Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

B. Provide hangers required for the proper installation of equipment.

C. Do not support piping connections from water coil.

D. Make supply and return connections to headers to give counter flow of air and
water.

E. Provide spare filters as specified in other sections.

F. The room thermostat shall be positioned at an acceptable location and level.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.6(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.7 FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, supply and installation of all ventilation fans as
shown in the Drawings and Equipment Schedules.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Provide fans with quantity and duty shown on the Drawings and Equipment
Schedule.

B. Protect the complete set of fans during transportation and store the fans in crates
and well cover and protect them until ready for installation.

C. Protect the fans from mechanical damages and corrosion during construction.

D. The fan resistance given in the Schedules/Drawings was calculated on assumed

resistance figure for equipment and are for guidance only. The final resistance
based on the actual duct run and the offered equipment shall be carefully
checked and re-assessed before ordering the equipment. Any modification of the
system (e.g. motor, switchgear, cables, etc.) necessary to meet the schedule
duties and space conditions shall be carried out at the Contractor’s expense.

E. Allowances shall be made for the effects on fan performance of all installation
conditions including coils, eliminators, attenuators, filters, plenum enclosures and
inlet and discharge arrangements so that actual installed fan performance equals
that specified.

F. All fans shall be selected with outlet velocities of maximum 10 m/s unless
otherwise specified in order to keep the noise level to a minimum.

G. The system fan motor power, fan efficiency and motor efficiency shall comply
with ASHRAE 90.1 2007 and BEC 2015.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualifications of manufacturer: Furnish fans which are the product of a

manufacturer who has made fans of similar types and duties for a period of at
least five years.

B. All fans, drives and accessories shall be designed, constructed, rated and tested
in accordance with the recommendations and standards of the AMCA.

C. Fan tests shall conform to the requirements of AMCA Standard 210, latest edition
or to an acceptable equal standard.

D. Sound ratings shall conform to AMCA standard test code for sound rating for air
moving devices, and comply with the latest requirement of EPD.

E. Material shall comply with the various BS, or other acceptable international
standards and the requirements of FSD.

F. Nameplates: Securely attached to each fan showing manufacturer’s name, serial

and model number and data of manufacture.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit shop drawings showing plans, elevations, dimensions of equipment,

electrical wiring diagrams, control, operating weights ductwork connections and
flange details, fixing and mounting details.

B. Submit Manufacturer’s data and characteristic curves indicating total kW, air flow
rates against total and static pressure, fan efficiency, sound power ratings.

C. Submit complete material lists.

D. Submit reports of factory and field tests and certificates and show results of
operating tests.

E. Submit a complete list of all spares and accessories as recommended by the

manufacturer.

F. Submit manufacturer’s printed operation and maintenance instructions in bound

form, and describe maintenance sequences.

G. Certified performance curves for each fan shall be plotted over the entire range
from shut-off to free delivery with static pressure in Pa, total efficiency in
percentages and operating in kW, against the air flow in m 3/s at the specified
speed and shall clearly indicate the operating point for each fan operating
separately, and additionally, in the case of parallel operation fans, the parallel
operation characteristics and operating points.

H. Plotted curves or tables of the Octave band sound-power-level at static pressure

corresponding to specified capacity with decibels (db re 10-12 watt) as ordinate
versus octave-band center frequency from 63Hz to 8000Hz as abscissa.

I. Mounting and fixing details shall include details and dimensions of fan
connections, vibration isolators, hangers and any other builder's work
requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01 General

A. Fans shall have non-overloading characteristic over their entire operating range
and the characteristic curves shall be such that the fan operating point falls
between the no flow static pressure and the maximum mechanical efficiency, and
15% increase in static pressure and not more than 15% reduction in air volume of
the specified figures and does not affect the stability of fan operation.

B. Each complete fan unit including motor and drive shall be supplied from a single
manufacturer and all guarantees, test certificates, etc. shall be deemed to apply
to the entire assembly.

C. All fans shall be constructed to a fully developed design and shall be capable of
withstanding the pressures and stresses developed during continuous operation at
the selected duty. Additionally, all belt driven fans shall be capable of running
continuously at 10% in excess of the selected duty speed.

D. Lifting eye shall be provided on all centrifugal and axial fans.

E. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. All centrifugal fan shafts shall have the ends drilled to receive a tachometer.

G. Motor speed shall not exceed 1450 rpm unless otherwise specified.

H. Nominal motor nameplate rating shall be a minimum of 20% higher than the
motor operating input at design conditions unless otherwise specified.

I. All fans and motors offered shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during
operation. Should these be excessive and not within normal acceptable
standards, adequate or additional vibration isolation and sound attenuation shall
be provided without extra cost.

2.02 Propeller Fans

A. The impeller shall be designed to give maximum volume with minimum noise
level and minimum power consumption and made of steel. Hub shall be steel
with grey / black stoved epoxy finish. Fan shall be completed with anti-vibration
mount.

B. Motor shall be of dust and moisture protection to IP54 and of totally enclosed
construction with permanently lubricated ball bearings suitable for running in
temperatures up to 50°C ambient temperature and 100% relative humidity.

C. Wire guards made of heavy gauge steel wire or rod with all joints and crossings
welded and galvanised after manufacture shall be fitted to impeller side or motor
side or both where appropriate.

D. Propeller fans shall be diaphragm mounted on 2mm thick mild steel mounting
plate with stoved epoxy grey / black finishes.

2.03 Window Fans

A. Fans shall be of all plastic construction.

B. All fan motors shall be totally enclosed in aluminium alloy cases and be protected
by a thermal overload cut-out.

C. Back draught shutter shall be provided and the fans shall be operated through an
‘ON/OFF’ switch.

2.04 Axial Flow Fans

A. Provide axial flow, direct drive aerofoil fans where shown on the Drawings and in
the Equipment Schedules.

B. Casing

1. Casing shall be of the ‘L’ type enclosing the motor and impeller, and hot-
dip galvanized after manufacture.

2. Fan casings shall be fitted with matching flanges on the inlet and discharge
ends with spigots for attachment of flexible connections.

3. Inspection doors or sight ports to enable direction of rotation to be

established shall be provided.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

4. Terminal boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical

connection to fan motor complying with BS EN 60034-5 for dust and
weatherproof conditions.

5. Grease nipples (if any) shall be brought to the outside of the casing in the
most accessible position and fitted with a lubricator.

C. Impeller

1. Impeller shall be of die-cast in aluminium alloy.

2. Blades shall be manually adjustable without removing the wheel.

3. Positive locking shall be provided for securing the impeller blades into the
hub. Spun aluminium hub caps shall be fitted.

4. The blades and hubs shall have index marks which show the design
operating blade setting and a minimum of three increments of stagger
angle both larger and smaller than the design operating blade setting and
stops at hub to prevent overload of the motor.

5. The blades shall be counter-balanced and mounted on a thrust / ball

bearing.

D. Drive motors to BSEN 60085 class F insulation shall be totally enclosed and rated
for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 40°C. Degree of protection
shall be to BSEN 60034-5 with protection to IP 44.

E. Fans shall be fitted with bell mouth inlets and discharge evase where indicated.

F. Unless ductwork connections are provided, galvanized wire guards shall be

applied on fan outlet/inlet and shall be made freely accessible to personnel.

G. Fans shall be supplied with mounting feet and spring isolators.

H. Fan bearing shall be supplied for a L10 life of at least 50,000 hours.

I. Stationary, curved guide vanes as indicated shall be located on the discharge

side of the wheel to straighten the motion of the air leaving the blades.

2.05 Axial Flow Fans (belt drive)

A. The fan shall deliver the volume and pressure specified in the schedule of fan
duties when tested to BS 848 or AMCA standard 210.

B. Casing

1. The fan casing shall be manufactured from mild steel to BS 1449-1, with
integral rolled flanges and mounting feet. The flange holes for duct
connection shall be as detailed in BS 6339. The bearing support and guide
vane unit shall be fitted with mounting studs allowing centralisation of the
assembly when fitted into the casing.

2. Casing and bearing supports shall be hot-dip galvanised in accordance with

BSEN ISO 1461 after manufacture.

3. Grease nipples (if any) shall be brought to the outside of the casing in the
most accessible position and fitted with a lubricator.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Impeller

1. The impeller shall be of die cast in aluminium alloy.

2. The supplier shall be able to provide laboratory evidence that the impeller
has been adequately stressed for running at the highest speeds supplied.

3. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced and has a non-overloading

characteristic.

4. The impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and keyway.
Axial location shall be provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft
together with a retaining washer and screw fitted into a tapped hole in the
end of the shaft. The screw shall be locked in position.

D. The motor when supplied by the Manufacturer shall be squirrel cage induction
type, continuously rated to BSEN 60034-1 foot mounted with enclosure to IP44.
The motors fitted shall have ball or roller bearings with a L10 life of at least 50,000
hours.

E. The terminal box (when supplied) shall comply with BS 4999 and may be fitted on
the motor itself, or on the fan casing when the motor is enclosed.

F. Impellers shall be driven by V-belts with the pulleys keyed to the shafts and
retained by taper-bushes. Belts shall be rated to have a service factor of over 1.3.

G. Motor mounting plate, of galvanised mild steel shall be supported on four

threaded rods to provide belt tensioning.

H. Belt tunnel to enable the belt to be changed externally shall be sealed from air-
stream and belt guards shall be provided.

I. Where indicated, fans shall be fitted with bell mouth inlets and discharge evases.

J. Provide galvanised wire guards on fan outlet/inlet.

K. Fans shall be suitable for handling wet and oily air at temperatures ranging from
10 - 82 deg. C.

L. Provide spring isolators to the whole unit.

2.06 In-line Centrifugal Fans (Cabinet Fans)

A. Casing shall be rigidly constructed of heavy galvanized sheet steel.

B. Impellers shall be of forward / backward curved centrifugal design and

constructed of galvanized steel.

C. Impellers shall be both statically and dynamically balanced and direct driven by
external rotor motors.

D. The fans installed at any angle shall not affect the fan performance.

E. Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary for bolting to a base or supports.

F. Fan casing shall be fitted with flanges on the suction and discharge side for
connection of flexible joints and ducting.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

G. An access panel with purpose made air seal shall be provided and shall be sized
and so positioned to facilitate maintenance.

H. Provide spring isolators to the fans.

2.07 Mixed Flow Fans

A. Fan shall be directly driven by a motor with a mixed flow impeller. The
construction of the impeller shall be such that the air is drawn approx. 45°
diagonally through the impeller.

B. Casing shall be of circular type and rigidly constructed of galvanized steel or

aluminium alloy stiffened and braced where necessary to obviate drumming and
vibration.

C. Casing shall be vertical split axial type provided with guide vane. Stator vanes
shall be of galvanized steel or aluminium alloy.

D. The fan performance shall not be affected irrespective of where the fans are to be
installed such as on floor, ceiling, horizontally or vertically.

E. Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary for bolting to a base or supports.

F. The unit shall be designed to facilitate access to the impeller.

G. Flanges shall be provided for impeller size over or equal to 400mm diameter.

H. Drain socket with caps shall be provided on casing.

I. Fans shall be 100% speed controllable (optional).

J. Motor shall be totally enclosed to insulation Class F BSEN 60085 and rated for
continuous operation at ambient temperature 40°C.

K. Provide spring isolators to the fans.

2.08 Centrifugal Fans

A. Provide class I or II non-overloading forward/backward curved fans as specified

on the Drawings and elsewhere in the Specification.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, centrifugal fans consuming more than 7.5 kW at the
fan shaft shall be of the backward bladed type having a fan total efficiency of not
less than 75%.

C. Casing:

1. Casings shall be of heavy galvanized sheet steel construction adequately

stiffened and braced and shall be entirely free from vibration or drumming
during normal operation.

2. All fans with an inlet eye diameter exceeding 300mm shall have a bolted
access door on the scroll for access purposes. The sizes of access panels
shall be sufficient to facilitate cleaning and maintenance of the impeller.

3. Drain sockets or holes with copper drain pipe (if any) shall be brought out
to an accessible point and valved and plugged shall be provided.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

4. Fan casings shall be fitted with flanges on the outlet connection suitable for
connection of discharge ductwork and flexible connections, as shown on
the Drawings.

5. Where the suction side of the fan is connected to ductwork, then matching
flanges shall also be provided.

6. Inspection doors or sight ports to enable direction of rotation to be

established shall be provided.

D. Fan Impellers

1. Impellers shall be double inlet double width or single inlet single width as
shown on the Drawings mounted on substantial hubs.

2. Fan impellers shall be backward/forward sloping blades as shown on the

Equipment Schedule.

3. Impellers shall be rigidly fixed to solid bright steel shafts adequately sized
and proportioned to ensure that the maximum operating speed shall not be
more than 60% of the first critical speed.

4. Impellers shall be of electro-galvanized steel (or aluminium where

indicated) of riveted or welded construction, with spiders or hubs robust
design, and shall be capable of running continuously at 10% in excess of
normal speed.

E. Unless otherwise specified, drive motors to Class F insulation (BSEN 60085) shall
be totally enclosed and rated for continuous operation in ambient temperature of
40°C. Performance and rating shall be to relevant parts of BSEN 60034 or an
acceptable equal.

F. The fan and motor shall be mounted on rigid mild steel channel base. Provide
slide rails for adjustable mounting of motors.

G. Drive fan by V-belt shall be rated at 150 percent of the operating motor power
input. Furnish adjustable sheaves on the motor, capable of 20 percent
adjustment in fan speed, with the design fan capacity settling at approximately the
midpoint of the adjustment. Belt speed shall not exceed 25m/s.

H. Beltguards shall be fabricated of heavy gauge steel framing with expanded metal
mesh screen.

I. All belt guards shall have access openings to the shaft ends to enable tachometer
readings to be taken.

J. Vibration isolators shall be provided and as specified in vibration control section.

K. The shafts shall be carried in ring lubricated self-aligning sleeve bearings for
shafts of 150mm diameter and larger. Each bearing shall have large oil capacity
to ensure efficient lubrication. On shafts of sizes smaller than 150mm diameter,
grease lubricated self-aligning ball bearings resiliently mounted to reduce noise
transmission shall be used.

L. The shafts shall be extended beyond the drive-side bearing and keyed for
overhung pulley in all cases.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

M. Construct shaft either solid or hollow of SAE 1035 or 1040 ground and polished
steel.

N. Apply one coat of corrosion-proof plastic coating to all nonworking surfaces of

shafts at the factory.

O. Fan bearing shall have a L10 life of at least 50,000 hours.

2.09 Mechanical Roof Extract Units

A. Units shall be of side discharge type with direct driven motors suitable for
continuous running in a ambient temperature.

B. Weather cap and base shall be moulded in ultra violet stabilised polyester resin,
glass reinforced, rendered fire retardant to BS 476-7, Class 2.

C. The unit shall be load tested to ensure a generous structural factor of safety
enabling the units to withstand all normally encountered weather conditions. The
cowl shall be secured to the mounting brackets by stainless steel screws.

D. Casing shall be formed to facilitate a weather proof fixture to the building structure.

E. Anti-backdraught shutters constructed of aluminium shall be provided. Shutter

shall be opened by air movement and closed by gravity. Synthetic rubber buffers
shall be provided to ensure quiet operation.

F. Impellers shall be of propeller, backward curved centrifugal or mixed flow type as

indicated on the Equipment Schedule. Material shall be pressed sheet steel for
propeller fan and aluminium alloy for centrifugal and mixed flow type fan. All
material shall be of corrosion proof.

G. Fan support arms shall be of mild steel, finished with stoned powder or zinc
coating and resiliently mounted to the base.

H. The units shall be designed to operate efficiently when mounted horizontally or on

a pitched roof up to an angle of 30° from the horizontal.

I. Units shall be suitable for curb or purlin mountings as indicated.

J. Bird entry preventer guards of not greater than 25mm mesh shall be provided as
an integral part of the unit.

K. Motor shall be of totally enclosed, ball bearing, squirrel cage induction type to
BSEN 60085, Class F insulation Rating.

L. Non-hinged cap fixing shall be provided for access and servicing.

2.10 Kitchens and Food Preparation Areas Ventilating Units

A. Fans shall be as specified in Clause 2.8 of this Section of the Specification except
for the modifications as stated below.

B. The centrifugal fan shall be housed in a cabinet with motor and bearing outside air
stream. The cabinet shall be constructed of not less than 1.0mm galvanized steel
sheet.

C. Protective guards shall be provided for belt driven fans so that the oily, hot and
humid exhaust will not damage the bearings and belts.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Exhaust air units shall be equipped with grease filters and shall be suitable for
handling air at temperature up to 80°C.

E. Quality Requirements shall cope with local Ventilation of Scheduled Premises By-
laws.

2.11 Smoke Extraction, Air Releaes and Pressurization Fans

A. Provide smoke extraction, air release and pressurization fans as detailed in the
Drawings and in the Equipment Schedules.

B. In addition to the aforesaid requirements stipulated in this Specification, the

smoke extraction and pressurization fans shall comply with additional
requirements specified in this Section.

C. Smoke extraction fans and air release fans shall be able to deliver the designed
flow rate and pressure for at least one hour at 250°C.

D. Fans shall have non-overloading characteristic.

E. Centrifugal fan bearing, pulley and belt shall be located outside the air stream.

F. For smoke extraction fan and air release, all finishes shall be factory-applied and
shall be certified by the respective manufacturer that the finishing materials are
capable of withstanding exposure continuously to an ambient temperature of
250°C for a period of not less than one hour without producing smoke or any toxic
fumes.

G. For smoke extraction fan and air releae fan, motor winding shall be insulated to
permit the motor operation at design conditions for a period of one hour in an air
stream temperature of 250°C. The fans shall be factory tested for the
performance and operating condition before delivery. Type test certificates shall
be submitted for review.

H. For pressurization fans fitted with duplicated motors, devices that sense the
effective operation of the pressurization fans shall be provided. An adjustable
time delay control in the range of 30 seconds to 2 minutes in steps of 1 second
shall also be provided for changeover to standby motor when the duty motor
cannot be actuated after a predetermined time interval as governed by the time
delay control.

I. All equipment electrical wiring, controls, starters, relays etc. provided shall comply
with FSD’s requirements.

2.12 Flameproof/Explosion Proof Fans

A. In addition to the aforesaid requirements stipulated in this Specification, all fans

used in DG stores and battery rooms shall comply with the additional
requirements specified in this Section.

B. Fan motor shall be of explosion proof, tested to BSEN 60079 and designed for
operation in appropriate hazardous areas for dangerous goods stores or other
areas as indicated on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings. Certificates of
conformity shall be submitted for review.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Motors shall be provided with motor mounted electrical terminal box in

accordance with EExd category for dangerous goods stores or other areas as
indicated on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings. The electrical
installations shall be of explosion proof type to BSEN 60079.

D. Motors for battery rooms shall be of totally enclosed fan cooled type and certified
to BSEN 60079 suitable for use in appropriate gas groups and temperature class.

2.13 Multi-Stage Axial Fans

A. Provide multi-stage axial fans as specified on the Equipment Schedules and/or

Drawings.

B. In addition to the requirements stipulated in Clause 2.4 of this Specification, multi-

stage axial fans shall comply with the additional requirements specified in this
Clause.

C. The number of stages shall be in accordance with the Equipment Schedules

and/or Drawings.

D. Each single stage fan shall have its own motor and terminal box. The terminal
boxes shall be mounted externally on the corresponding fan casing.

E. The static pressure developed by a two-stage axial fan shall be of minimum three
times the static pressure developed by the corresponding single stage fan.

2.14 Carpark Air Conducting Jet Fans

A. The complete installation shall comply with all FSD’s requirements.

B. The jet fans and the jet fan system for carpark area shall be the proprietary
system manufactured, and tested at factory by the manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall have at least three years experience in providing such
systems.

C. The selection of air conducting jet fan shall be accomplished with a performance
simulation using Computation Fluid Dynamic (CFD) technique or other equviant
such that the selection can be justified.

D. The CFD analyzer shall include the simulation for different parameters (e.g. CO &
NO2 concentration, air velocity and temperature) at different horizontal and
vertical plan. The simulation shall demonstrate that the CO and NO2 level shall
not exceed 100 ppm and 1 ppm respectively as per the EPD’s recommendation.
Heat island or hot spot shall not appear in the design while adequate air
movement shall be provided.

E. The fan casing shall be composed of corner piece, profile and panel. The corner
piece shall be made of reinforced plastic or metal. The profile shall be made of
aluminium extruded and finally polished to its surface.

F. All the side panels shall be with powder coating.

G. Each wall of casing shall consist of minimum 20mm thickness of glass wool panel.
The insulation material shall be of granular type and provide 0.9W/m 2°C of heat
transmission coefficient and also offer good sound attenuation. Thickness of the
side plate and scroll shall be 1.0mm minimum.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

H. Jet fans shall be of centrifugal type, single inlet, and direct driven
forward / backward curved impeller. The impeller shall be made of galvanized
sheet steel.

I. The Jet fan shall be a proprietary made unit and shall consist of hanging bracket,
inlet protective screen, and minimum Ø80mm universal nozzle.

J. The outlet velocity of the jet fans shall not be less than 12m/s. The terminal
velocity at 17m from the jet fan shall not be less than 0.5m/s.

K. The terminal box shall be equipped with fuse, emerging stop, capacitor, indicating
light and casing.

L. The noise level for the multi-nozzle jet fan unit shall be not greater than 53dB(A)
at 2m distance.

M. Jet fans shall be connected to the VAC control panel located inside the Fire
Services Control room for shut down of the ventilation system to comply with
FSD’s requirement.

N. Jet fans of direct drive axial type shall be complete with silencers at inlet and
outlet sides to reduce the noise level. Details shall be submitted for review.

N. The fan bearing shall have a L10 life of at least 40,000 hours.

2.15 Air Curtains

A. Casings shall be rigidly constructed of mild steel, plastic, or aluminium alloy

stiffened and braced where necessary to obviate drumming and vibration.
Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary for bolting to a base or support.

B. Type of fan for air curtain shall be centrifugal fan.

C. Air curtains shall jet flow pattern cater for min. 3.5m height operation and with
casing body for exposed to view installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Properly guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting set screws, keys
and other rotating parts so that a person can safely come in close proximity
thereto.

B. Fit fans and appurtenances to the space provided and make readily serviceable.

C. Provide support beams, support legs, platforms, hangers and anchor bolts
required for the proper installation of equipment as shown on the Drawings or
recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Provide permanently attached lifting eyes of sufficient number for on site

assembly and disassembly of fan units.

E. Provide factory inlet bells, evases and other accessories for fan units as shown on
Drawings or otherwise required for a complete and efficient assembly.

F. Refer to ‘Electrical Works’ Section of the Specification for electrical connection.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

G. Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion resistance materials and

assembly methods shall be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against
galvanic interaction.

H. Thoroughly clean the entire system before installing filters or operating the fans.

I. For system containing filters, install filters and permanently seal the filter frame
air-tight before operating the fans. Replace all dirty filters and filter media before
handling the systems over to the Employer.

J. Starting method of motor fans shall be in accordance with the Power Company’s
supply rules and this Specification.

K. Means of protection against overcurrent in the motor shall be incorporated in the

control equipment when the motor rating exceeds 0.37 kW.

L. A hole in the blanking off plate shall be provided for the cables leading to the fans.
The hole shall be sealed around the cables with material suitable for sealing the
hole effectively and continuously exposed to an air stream temperature of 250°C
for not less than one hour rating if the fans are used for smoke extraction.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.7(AC)/12 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.8 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of vehicle exhaust extraction
systems, the associated electrical supply and control wiring system at the Refuse
Storage & Material Recovery Chamber.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Provide fans with quantity and duty as shown on the Equipment Schedule.

B. The entire design and materials of the systems shall be carried out to withstand
high temperature and corrosive nature of the exhaust gases and shall be of high
industrial quality.

C. The fan resistance given in the Equipment Schedule have been calculated on
assumed resistance figure for equipment and for guidance only. The final
resistance based on the actual duct run and the offered equipment shall be
carefully checked and re-assessed before ordering the equipment. Any additional
cost on the modification of the system (fan, motor, switchgear, cables, etc)
necessary to meet the scheduled duties and space condition shall not be
entertained.

1.03 Quality Assurance

A. Qualification of Manufacturers: Products shall be furnished by a manufacturer

who normally supplies this type of equipment and can show evidence that such
equipment of a similar capacity as specified in the equipment schedules of this
specification have been in successful operation for at least five years.

B. All equipment supplied shall conform to the British Standard or the ASTM
equivalent and the requirement of FSD.

C. Submit certificates that the equipment supplied is in conformance to the standard

set out above.

D. The entire systems shall comply with EPD and FEHD's requirements.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit a complete list of all spares and accessories as recommended by the

equipment manufacturer for future maintenance. This list shall be certified by the
manufacturer.

B. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's data of all equipment, shop drawing
shall show plans, elevations, sections, dimensions, control, electrical wiring
diagram, piping connection arrangement and type of materials for all equipment.

C. Submit manufacturer's data indicating working temperature and pressure, test

certificates and complete catalogue information of all equipment.

D. Submit copies of installation operation and maintenance manual.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.8(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

The vehicle exhaust extraction system shall consist of centrifugal fan, electric driven
hose reel, exhaust hose, exhaust nozzle and a mixing box.

2.02 Centrifugal Extraction Fan

A. Fan impeller shall be specially designed for handling vehicle exhaust fume
discharged from the refuse collection vehicles directly.

B. Fan impeller shall be connected directly to the motor shaft and shall be made of
silumin / non-sparkling aluminum to prevent building up of static electricity.

C. The fan casing shall be manufactured from zinc-coated steel, painted and baked.

D. Bearing shall be of sealed for life type.

E. The fan shall be able to handle high temperature corrosive gas up to 80 deg C.
continuously.

2.03 Hose Reel

A. The hose reel shall be electric motor driven. Unwinding and winding shall be
controlled from a hand-held switch.

B. The drum shall consist of an aluzinc-lined metal cylinder bolted to two metal ends.

C. Flexible aluminium pipe of not less than 150mm diameter shall be provided inside
the drum to link between the hose and the swivel.

D. The stand shall consist of two aluzinc-lined supports and two zinc-plated steel
tubes.

E. Motor shall be fully enclosed with IP54 and insulation Class B.

F. Planetary gear shall be quiet, maintenance free with reduction ratio of 10:1.

G. Brake mechanism shall be provided to lock the drum automatically when hose
feed stops.

H. Hose guide shall be provided to guide the hose on the drum during the first coil.

2.04 Exhaust Hose

The exhaust hose shall be capable of withstanding temperature of up to 125 C without

deterioration of the entire hose. It shall be semi-crushproof, manufactured from high
temperature resistant material, reinforced with coil for shape and strength. The hose
length shall be of minimum 7m and the diameter shall be of 125mm minimum.

2.05 Exhaust nozzle

A. The exhaust nozzle shall be of metal or rubber and the size shall suit the size of
the exhaust stacks of the refuse collection vehicles used by FEHD and other
private waste collection companies in HK.

B. Cover shall be provided.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.8(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.06 Mixing Box

A. Mixing Box shall be provided between the hose reel and extraction fan to cool
down the high temperature exhaust fume discharged from the vehicle.

B. The mixing box shall consist of an adjustable damper and locking device.

C. The mixing box shall be constructed of at least 1.2mm thick sheet steel with
corrosive and high temperature resistant coating.

2.07 Control panel

Control panel shall be provided with IP65. Construction of the panel shall refer to
relevant sections of this Specification.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

B. Equipment and components shall be installed in a manner which will ensure

proper operation and as recommended by the manufacturer's installation
instructions.

C. Insulation shall cover the perimeter of the whole plate pack including the carrying
bars. Detailed insulation construction shop drawings shall be submitted to the
Architect for approval before execution.

D. Install fan and extraction unit on vibration isolators as recommended by the

manufacturer and specified elsewhere in this Specification.

D. After installation, adjust fans to operate without noticeable vibration.

E. Properly guard projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts so that a
person can safely come in close proximity there to.

F. Means of protection against overcurrent in the motor to be incorporated in the

control equipment when the motor rating exceed 0.37kW.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.8(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.9 SPLIT-TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, supply and installation of air-cooled, split-type
air conditioning units consisting of an indoor evaporator unit, filter and outdoor air
cooled condensing unit, control unit and the inter-connection wiring, piping and
accessories.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Provide covers for the inlet and outlet of the units.

B. Store the units in crates and well cover and protect them until ready for
installation.

C. Protect the units from mechanical damages and corrosion during transit and
installation. Fins with minor damage shall be combed straight. Units with
extensive damage shall be rejected.

D. Provide all necessary equipment and structural steel for hoisting and the proper
installation of the units.

E. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears and other rotating parts shall be properly guarded.

F. Units shall be of minimum vibration and noise levels during operation. Should
these levels be excessive and not within normal acceptable standards, the
Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of adequate vibration isolation
and sound attenuation.

G. All acoustical and thermal insulation including facings and adhesive shall be fire-
resistant and conform to the latest requirements of FSD.

H. Provide split type air conditioning units with capacity and duty shown on the
Equipment Schedule.

I. The split type air conditioning unit under the scope of Mandatory Energy
Efficiency Labelling Scheme shall fulfil the Energy Efficiency requirements as
specified in the Scheme and BEC.

J. Each unit shall be a complete factory assembly, piped, wired, leak tested.

K. Provide hot-dipped galvanised steel support frame works, hangers, bracket,

washer screw, bolt and nut for the outdoor unit and all systems components
suitable for outdoor application.

L. Provide stainless steel grade 316 support frame works, hangers, bracket, washer
screw, bolt and nut for the outdoor unit installed in outdoor.

M. Provide remote wired controller as specified.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.9(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Split-type air conditioning units shall be furnished

by a manufacturer who normally supplies such equipment and can show evidence
that such equipment have been in successful operation for a period of at least
five years, for similar application conditions as this project.

B. Reference Codes and Specifications:

1. Codes and regulations of jurisdictional authorities.

2. ARI Standard 210/240.

3. UL Requirements.

C. Nameplates shall be securely attached to each unit showing manufacturer’s name,

serial number, model number and data of manufacture.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit shop drawings showing plans, elevations and sections, dimensions of

equipment, electrical wiring and control diagram, piping connection arrangements,
floor requirements, mounting and fixing details.

B. Submit manufacturer’s data indicating total kW loads, compressor motor,

electrical characteristic, sound power rating, installation and testing procedures.

C. Submit manufacturer’s printed operation and maintenance instruction and

describe operation procedures and maintenance sequences.

D. Submit detailed calculation and product data sheets to demonstrate and justify
that the actual corrected cooling capacity of the proposed / selected split-type air-
conditioning units shall be not less than the required cooling capacity specified in
the Equipment Schedule under the most adverse installed condition as shown on
the Drawings.

E. Submit a complete list of all spares and accessories as recommended by the

manufacturer.

F. Submit reports of factory and field tests and certificates to illustrate the split-type
air conditioning unit can satisfactorily perform the minimum coefficient of
performance (COP) as stipulated in the Building Energy Code.

G. Submit acoustic calculation to counter check the noise generated by all indoor
and outdoor units do not exceed the acceptable noise level set by the local
authority or in this specification before ordering of equipment.

H. Submit complete material list.

I. Mounting and fixing details shall include details and dimensions of bases, fixing
bolts, supporting steelwork and any special builder's work requirement.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.9(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. Units shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during operation. Additional
vibration isolators and sound attenuators shall be provided without extra cost if
noise and vibration are found excessive and not within the normal acceptable
standards.

B. Pump down system shall be arranged.

C. Provide units completely piped, wired, charged, and factory tested as a package.

D. Design capacities shall be as shown on the Drawings.

E. All components dehydrated, sealed and shipped with holding charge/refrigerant.

2.02 Split-type Evaporator Unit

A. Construct welded cabinet of 1.6mm or heavier, die-formed, electro-galvanized

steel.

B. Containing junction boxes, polarized sockets and plugs for chassis electrical
connection.

C. Front panels and return air grilles shall be assembled to be removable for
cleaning and access.

D. The unit shall be provided with an insulated condensate drain pan.

E. Line interior casing with moisture, vermin and rot-proof mat-faced 25mm thick
fibre glass.

F. Discharge grilles where required shall be adjustable blades type in four directions.

G. Insulate discharge plenum.

H. Provide metal constructed return air grille in louvre form with frame for holding
filters. Provide frame work for installing filters externally to the units in case
ducted return system is adopted. Details to be submitted for review.

I. Finish cabinet with a high quality backed-on enamel paint. Colour shall be
reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Proper primer and undercoat shall be applied
prior to applying finish coats.

J. Provide removable panels or access door for all accessories.

2.03 Split-type Condensing Unit

A. Weatherproof for outdoor installation.

B. Fabricated of 1.6mm minimum galvanized steel.

C. Paint exterior surfaces with weather-resistant enamel coating.

D. Provide removable panels for access to all accessories.

E. Galvanized screws, bolts and units shall be used for panel fixing.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.9(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. Provide a stainless steel drain pan with drain pipe under each indoor condensing
unit for collection of condenser coil cleansing water.

2.04 Compressor

A. Reciprocating, scroll, hermetically or semi-hermetically sealed type, refrigerant

cooled.

B. High/low pressure cut-outs with manual resets.

C. Compressor motor protected by means of overload relays and internal winding

thermostat and low oil pressure contact.

D. Mounted on rubber isolated spring mounting.

E. Recycling guard timer and control circuit.

F. For compressor having a refrigeration duty in excess of 35kW, capacity control at

partial load operation for compressor shall be operated by means of automatic
unloader or staging of compressor.

G. Compressors operated with duty above 15kW shall be complete with the following:

1. Crankcase heater.

2. Suction and discharge shut off valves.

3. Crankcase sight-glass.

4. Oil strainer

5. Manual reset oil failure switch with time delay.

H. Start on no load condition.

I. For multi-compressors with individual crankcase and motor, the following shall be
incorporated:

1. Timer shall be provided so that only one compressor can start at a time.

2. Crankcase pressure equalizer.

3. Oil equalizer.

4. Separate wiring and refrigerant piping shall be provided for each

compressor.

5. Controls and accessories for no-load starting.

2.05 Refrigerant Circuit

A. Provide thermostatic expansion valve, remote bulb and equalizer direct

expansion coil.

B. Provide refrigerant filter for expansion valve.

C. Provide dryer-filter.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.9(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Provide liquid receiver with automatic release valve where necessary.

E. Provide solenoid valve for each evaporator coil.

F. Provide hot gas muffler on the discharge side where necessary.

G. Provide service valves in liquid and hot gas lines.

H. Provide pressure gauges to indicate suction and discharge pressure.

I. Provide pump down control with automatic valve where necessary.

J. Refrigerant shall be of zero ozone depletion potential type.

K. Refrigerant shall be of non-CFC type.

2.06 Evaporator Coil

A. Direct expansion type, fabricated of seamless copper tubing with aluminium fins,
mechanically bonded to tubing.

B. Maximum fin spacing: 14 fins per 25mm.

C. Cooling capacity selection based on the following conditions:

1. Entering wet bulb temperature at the evaporator.

2. Entering ambient temperature at the condenser coil.

D. Factory-installed thermal expansion valve for refrigerant control.

E. Leak test at minimum 2500kPa gas pressure shall be carried out with all devices
isolated.

2.07 Condenser Coil

A. Air cooled type fabricated of seamless copper tubing with mechanically bonded
aluminium plate fins.

B. Maximum fin spacing 12 fins per 25mm.

C. Capable of a total heat rejection based on minimum 35°C ambient temperature,

unless otherwise specified.

2.08 Evaporator Fan and Motor

A. Centrifugal fan shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet for licensed area or
scheduled premises.

B. Fan wheels dynamically and statically balanced.

C. Fan belt drives designed for 150 percent of required fan motor power.

D. Fan and motor having permanently lubricated type ball bearings with L10 life
expectancy of 50,000 hours.

E. Motor mounted on adjustable base.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.9(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. Motors equipped with built-in automatic reset device for protecting against over-
loading and overheat.

G. Brake kW selected to drive the fan at the air volume and static pressure as shown
on the Drawings.

H. Electrical characteristics: 380V, 3 phase 50Hz / 220V, 1 phase 50Hz

I. Motor sized 20% (minimum) greater than the fan shaft power requirements.

2.09 Condenser Fan and Motor

A. Direct-driven propeller type fan of corrosion resistant construction.

B. Fan dynamically and statically balanced.

C. Motor shall be protected by built-in automatic reset device for protecting against
overloading and overheat.

D. Brake horsepower selected to drive the fan at the air volume and static pressure
as shown on the Drawings.

E. Electrical characteristics: 380V, 3 phase 50Hz / 220V, 1 phase 50Hz

F. Fans and motors: Permanently lubricated type ball bearing suitable for outdoor
application.

G. All components dehydrated, sealed and shipped with bonding charge.

H. Complete with contactors and start relays.

I. Fans shall be protected with heavy gauge welded wire fan guards galvanized
after fabrication.

2.10 Filters

Washable type as specified in ‘Filter’ section of this Specification.

2.11 Condensate Drain Pan

A. Drain pan shall be extended under complete coil section.

B. For short coil section, drain pan shall be extended under complete fan and coil
section.

C. Drain pan shall be constructed from 1.2mm galvanized steel together with:

1. Insulated with 25mm (minimum) thick fiberglass insulation faced with

additional aluminium foil vapour barrier.

2. Both internal and external pan surfaces and points shall be coated with
corrosion-resistant elastomeric base material.

3. Joints shall be brazed water-tight.

4. 25mm diameter (minimum) drain coupling shall be brazed onto the drain
pan if the size is not specified by the manufacturer. Metal clamps and drain
pipe coupling shall be insulated.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.9(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Drain pan shall be installed in a pitch position towards the drain coupling.

E. Drain pipe shall be of minimum diameter 25mm if size of pipe is not specified by
the manufacturer and connected to nearest suitable floor drainage system.

2.12 Electric Controls

A. Factory installed and wired.

B. Compressor and fans contactors.

C. Compressor motor running and start contactors and start relay.

D. Manual changeover selector switch for either ventilation or air conditioning.

E. Thermostat for desired temperature setting: 10°C to 29°C.

F. Interlock for condenser and evaporator unit with compressor circuit.

G. Fan speed selection: High/Medium/Low/Off

H. Thermostat Control for both comfort cooling and heating should be capable of
providing a dead band of at least 2°C within which the supply of heating and
cooling to its serving space is shut off or reduce to a minimum except for a
temperature control device that requires manual changeover between heating
and cooling mode.

2.13 Split-type Air Conditioning Unit Efficiency

A. The maximum coefficient of performance (COP) shall be based on the following

parameters unless stated otherwise.

1. Condenser ambient specified temperature (cooling): 35°C Dry Bulb.

2. Condenser ambient specified temperature (heating): 7°C Dry Bulb / 6°C Wet Bulb.

3. Room air entering equipment temperature (cooling): 26.7°C Dry Bulb / 19.4°C
Wet Bulb.

4. Room air entering equipment temperature (heating): 21°C Dry Bulb.

B. The minimum COP of the split-type air conducting unit shall be in compliance with
the latest requirements as stipulated in the Building Energy Code.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

B. Provide all galvanised steel support beams, galvanised legs and hangers, anchor
bolts, vibration isolators, ductworks, silencers, etc., for the proper installation of
the units as recommended by the manufacturer and shown on the Drawings.

C. Provide guards for belts, pulleys, chains, gears and other rotating parts so that
any person can safely come in close proximity thereto.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.9(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Supply all condensing units holding bolts and handover for setting into the plinth.
Future cutting and drilling into the plinth shall be avoided.

E. After completion of testing on piping and accessories charge the system with
refrigerant in accordance with the manufacturer's published data.

F. Make unit operate without noticeable vibration after installation.

G. Provide temperature and pressure gauges at the suction and discharge pipe of
compressor and at the evaporator coil in accordance with the manufacturer
installation details. The gauges shall be mounted on a hardwood gauge board on
the wall or elsewhere as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

H. Provide emergency stop button for all package split-type condensing units. The
stop button shall be mounted onto the units for the purpose of equipment
maintenance. Weather proof stop button shall be provided for outdoor units
exposed to weather.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.9(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.10 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV) SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacturer, supply, installation and testing of air-cooled
VRV air conditioning system which shall consist of indoor evaporator units, outdoor air
cooled condensing unit, protection devices, control and the inter-connection wiring,
piping and accessories. The ductworks and air grilles connecting to indoor units shall
also be included.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears and other rotating parts shall be properly guarded.

B. Units shall be of minimum vibration and noise levels during operation. Should
these levels be excessive and not within normal acceptable standards, the
Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of adequate vibration isolation
and sound attenuation.

C. All acoustical and thermal insulation including facings and adhesive shall be fire-
resistant and conform to the requirements of HKFSD.

D. Each unit shall be a complete factory assembly, piped, wired, leak tested.

E. Provide hot-dipped galvanised steel support frame works, hangers, bracket,

washer screw, bolt and nut for VRV outdoor unit and all systems components
suitable for outdoor application.

F. Provide wired remote controller as specified.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Furnish equipment which are the product of a

manufacturer who normally supplies this type of equipment and can show
evidence that such equipment have been in successful operation for a period of
at least three years, for similar application conditions as this project.

B. Reference Codes and Specifications:

1. Codes and regulations of jurisdictional authorities.

C. Provide completely matched combination among the indoor evaporator units and
outdoor units.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit complete catalogue information and shop drawings for materials and
equipment including layout plans, schematic drawings, installation details, wiring
and control diagrams.

B. Submit copies of operation and maintenance manual.

C. Submit certified performance data and sound power level of each unit.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.10(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Submit noise level emissions of the indoor and outdoor units in terms of dB re 10-
12
watts (dB SWL) from 125Hz to 4000Hz inclusive for all available fan speeds,
and submit calculation and measurements to verify that, at all possible noise
sensitive receiver locations, the noise level and sound pressure level generated
by all indoor and outdoor units do not exceed the acceptable noise level set by
the local authority or in this specification before ordering of equipment.

E. Submit reports of factory and field tests and certificates to prove that the VRV unit
can satisfactorily perform the minimum coefficient of performance (COP) as
stipulated in the Building Energy Code.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. Provide units completely piped, wired, charged, and factory tested as a package.

B. Design capacities shall be as shown on the Drawings/Equipment Schedules. The

cooling capacities given on the Drawings/ Equipment Schedules are net cooling
capacities and allowance shall be made for the frictional loss of pipe length,
fittings, accessories and etc.

C. Produce only the latest models of its kind.

D. If power supply to indoor unit is required, other interconnecting cables and

conduits between condenser unit, indoor evaporator and control switch shall also
be provided.

E. Refrigerant shall be of zero ozone layer depletion potential and non-CFC type.
The system shall be “Inverter” type to allow variable refrigerant volume for energy
saving capabilities.

F. Each compressor shall be equipped with inverter controller, and capable of

changing the rotating speed to follow variations in cooling load.

G. Outdoor unit shall be suitable for one type or even mix-match connection of
different type of indoor units.

H. Standard Provisions

The unit shall be complete with the following features:

Three speed fan control switch (High, Medium, Low)

Cooling speed control

Adjustable thermostat control

Automatic cool/heat change-over control (for heat pump type only) for both
comfort cooling and heating should be capable of providing a dead band of
at least 2°C within which the supply of heating and cooling to its serving
space is shut off or reduced to a minimum.

Automatic air swing (up and down)

Horizontal airflow adjustment

Slide out washable air filter

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.10(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Display of return air temperature and error code during all normal operation

The wired remote controller shall be able to perform the following functions:

LCD display

On/off control

Three speed fan control (High, Medium, Low)

Cooling speed control

Automatic cool/heat change-over control (for heat pump type only)

Temperature control

Air-swing on/off control

24-hour on/off real setting timer

Self-diagnosis function

I. Both indoor and outdoor units shall be able to interface with Intelligent Building
Management System (IBMS) or alike as required.

This Contractor shall modify the unit to feed back ON/OFF status signal to the
IBMS or the like for ON/OFF control and to enable the adjustment of the
temperature setting by receiving signal from the IBMS or the like. This Contractor
shall provide all necessary wiring works and interfacing devices from the
marshalling box located near to the VRV units (marshalling box shall also be
provided by this Contractor) to the actuator/sensor of the VRV work. All wiring
works after the marshalling box shall be provided by others.

J. Control wiring between indoor/outdoor units shall be in a form that only two pairs
of signal lines are to be connected for wiring both inside and outside for link up
the whole system. Signal wiring cable shall be polarity-free cable and of length
up to 1000m. All power and control cables between the indoor and outdoor units
shall be installed in concealed galvanised steel conduits.

K. Radio Interference Suppression

The units shall be supplied with appropriate radio interference suppressor to meet
the requirements prescribed in the Telecommunications (Control of Interference)
Regulations.

L. Installation in General

All installations shall be materially, structurally, electrically and otherwise safe and
shall be carried out to ensure satisfactory operation of the units, under all
conditions and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended method
unless otherwise directed by the Architect/Engineer. All on-site installations
including refrigerant pipes, insulation, cables etc. shall comply with the relevant
British Standards, power company supply rules, electricity ordinance, IEE wiring
regulations, Building Energy Code, FSD and EPD requirements.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.10(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

M. Nuisance

Every unit shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent the spraying or

dripping of moisture to areas beneath the unit and shall meet every requirements
of Public Health and Municipal Services Ordinance.

For the indoor unit of split type air conditioner, the drip tray shall be an integral
part of the whole unit provided by the same manufacturer. No separate drip tray
shall be allowed. Condensate shall be drained to the building drains by insulated
galvanised steel drain pipes and erected properly to give sufficient gradient fall so
that no condensate will be accumulated inside the indoor unit.

Noise generated from any components of each unit shall not cause any nuisance
to the public. The units shall comply with the requirements as stipulated in the
latest Noise Control Ordinance. This Contractor shall be responsible for all
necessary acoustic controls to fulfil the requirements as stated in the Noise
Control Ordinance and specified by EPD.

N. Defects

The Contractor shall be required to make good or rectify entirely at his own cost
any defects or faults in the installation that may develop or come to light within in
a period of at least 12 months from the date of acceptance, or any other defect
liability period as specificed elsewhere in this specification, whichever the longest.

O. Earthing

Provide earth bonding for extraneous conductive parts which shall include but not
be limited to the metal cage, platform, supporting frames, mounting rods,
brackets and the window frames in accordance with the Code of Practice issued
by EMSD and the Power Company Supply Rules.

2.02 Outdoor Unit

A. The outdoor unit shall be a factory assembled unit housed in a sturdy

weatherproof casing constructed from rust-proof mild steel panels coated with a
baked enamel finish.

B. Casings of condensing units shall be constructed of sheet steel and suitably

reinforced with channels and sections to form a robust cabinet. Casing for
outdoor installation shall be of weatherproof finish & painted. Removable panels
shall be provided to give access to all working components, parts, and connection
for installation and service. The compartment housing the compressor shall be
treated for effective sound insulation to ensure that the noise emitted is within the
limits specified.

C. In situation where limited space is allowed for the outdoor unit installation, the
outdoor unit shall be suitable for modular in design and should be allowed for side
by side installation. The aggregate noise level contributed for all the outdoor units
should comply with Noise Control Ordinance, or any specified limit as stated
elsewhere in this specification, whichever the stringent.

D. The outdoor unit shall be capable of being connected up to 8 numbers of indoor

unit in one refrigerant circuit having a total capacity up to 130 percent of nominal
capacity of the outdoor unit.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.10(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. Compressor

The compressor shall be of highly efficient hermetic scroll type (or acceptable
equivalence) and equipped with inverter control capable of changing the speed in
accordance to the cooling load requirement. The inverter shall be efficient and
quiet. The outdoor unit shall have several steps of capacity control to meet load
fluctuation and indoor unit individual control.

F. Refrigerant Circuit and Cooling Coil

1. Cooling coil shall be of the direct expansion type and constructed with
copper tubes and aluminium fins to give high heat transfer performance
with sufficient number of rows & tubes. An adequate collecting tray for run
off and removal of the condensate shall be provided. Each coil or circuit
shall be controlled by a separate thermal electronic expansion valve.

2. The refrigerant circuit shall include factory assembled accumulator,

electronic expansion valves, oil separators, receivers, filter driers, sight
glass and all necessary shut-off valves, etc. for operation of unit in each of
the operating modes.

3. Pipework for the refrigerant system shall be of copper pipe to refrigerant

quality (i.e. material to BS EN 1057), and internally degreased and
cleaned. Joints in copper pipe shall be flared or brazed.

4. Refrigerant piping shall be arranged and sized as recommended by

manufacturer, and all joints and heaters with insulators in the system shall
be factory supplied.

5. The VRV-system shall be equipped with an effective oil recovery system to

automatically control the return of refrigerant oil due to the significance of
long refrigerant piping.

6. For system having two compressors, the outdoor unit shall be equipped
with an oil equalized system to avoid any unbalanced flow of lubricant
between them.

7. All refrigerant piping shall be fixed on cable trays.

8. Where refrigerant has to be filled in after installation, the unit shall be

vacuum dried properly and no refrigerant shall be filled until reviewed
without objection is given by the Architect.

G. Condensing Fans

Fans shall be of propeller type arranged for vertical discharge unless otherwise
reviewed without objection. The fans shall be capable of handling an external air
resistance of minimum 50Pa.

2.03 VRV Indoor Unit

A. In selecting the VRV indoor units, actual resistance imposed on the air flow of the
units due to fresh air intake, filters, dusts, grilles and diffusers shall be allowed.
This additional resistance shall be applied to all duct type indoor units and shall
be taken as a minimum of 50 Pa (external to the unit). This Contractor shall
calculate, verify and submit the estimated air flow resistance for review.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.10(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. The VRV indoor units shall comprise cooling coil and direct electric motor driven
fans.

C. The VRV indoor unit shall be equipped with an electronic expansion valve and a
microprocessor type thermostat to control the refrigerant flow individually.

D. The units shall be suitably sized to meet the duty required, matching well with the
corresponding condensing unit. The fan speed shall be in the lower range of
selection to ensure quiet operation and vibration free.

E. Each cooling unit shall be completely fabricated and assembled in factory as the
corresponding condensing unit. All of its components and accessories shall be
designed and selected to match in characteristic, function and duty with the
respective condensing unit so as to achieve an overall optimum system
performance under all operation conditions.

F. Coils

For dry expansion type cooling coil, aluminium plate fins shall be coolers drawn,
belted and firmly bonded to copper tubes by mechanical expansion of tubes. No
soldering or tinning shall be used in bonding process. Galvanized steel casings
shall be provided for the insulated coil section and be mounted pitched. Coil
headers and U-bends shall not be exposed. Refrigerant distributors shall be
provided and connections to the tubes shall be designed to ensure an equal flow
of refrigerant to each tube.

G. Fans

Each indoor unit shall be provided with one or more statically and dynamically
balanced aluminium blade forward / backward curved centrifugal supply air fans,
which shall be direct driven from a permanent split capacitor motor. Motor shall
be at least three speeds, of ball bearing types, with accessible extended oil tubes
and oil reservoirs, and shall incorporate thermal overload operation. The fan
casing shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet.

H. Motors

1. Indoor unit fan motors shall be of the ‘split-capacitor’ type suitable for
single phase electrical supply. The motor shall be resiliently mounted to
the fan tray or scrolls. The motor/fan tray assembly itself shall be also
resiliently mounted to the casing structure. The tray shall be easily
withdrawn for inspection and cleaning after disconnecting from the mains
supply and ancillaries with the plugs and sockets provided.

2. The motor shall be capable of providing at least three fan speeds (plus
on/off) and shall be of adequate capacity to prevent overloading at any
speed and duty of the fans.

I. Filters

1. Filters shall be provided for all VRV indoor units.

2. Filters shall be of removable washable type.

2.04 Drain Pans

A. Insulated drain pans shall be provided for all indoor units and heat pump type
VRV outdoor units. Drain pan shall be of heavy galvanized steel construction.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.10(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Drain pans shall be painted internally and externally with two coats of bitumastic
paint and insulated with a minimum of 25mm foamed plastic or equivalent.

C. Condensate pipe from indoor unit shall be connected to the nearest drain stack in
the building by insulated galvanised steel pipe. U shape trap shall be provided
whenever connection is made to the drain stack.

2.05 VRV Unit Efficiency

A. The maximum coefficient of performance (COP) shall be based on the following

parameters unless otherwise specified:

1. Condenser ambient temperature (cooling): 35°C Dry Bulb

2. Condenser ambient temperature (heating): 7°C Dry Bulb / 6°C Wet Bulb

3. Room air entering equipment temperature (cooling): 26.7°C dry bulb /

19.4°C wet bulb

4. Room air entering equipment temperature (heating): 21°C dry bulb

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Provide complete refrigerant charge and guarantee refrigerant charge for one
year after system acceptance.

B. Provide air filter to wall mounted type split indoor unit by the same manufacturer.

C. Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

D. Provide foundations, platforms, hangers and supports required for the proper
installation of equipment.

E. Make unit operate without noticeable vibration after installation.

F. All supporting brackets, metal works and frames for holding and supporting the
outdoor unit, necessary fixing and accessories, opening through walls or
structures for passage of refrigerant piping and condensate drain pipe, resealing
of openings afterwards, making good and reinstatement to match the surrounding
of the area where the opening is made and any other work necessary for a proper
installation of units shall be provided by this Contractor.

G. All refrigerant pipes (liquid and gas) between the evaporator and condensing units
and drain pipes shall be insulated and fixed with brackets at intervals not
exceeding one metre in straight run. At corners, bracket shall be provided on
either side of the corner with spacing between adjacent bracket not exceeding
300mm.

H. Control & power cables between evaporator and condenser shall be run in
concealed galvanised steel conduit, whenever possible. Final cable connection to
the outdoor unit, irrespective of running inside or outside the building, shall be
enclosed in flexible steel conduit with PVC outer-sheath and with length as
practicably short as possible.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.10(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3.02 Test

A. The refrigerant pipework when completed shall be pressure tested by nitrogen gas
to a test pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure of refrigerant for at least 24
hours. Prior to charging additional refrigerant as necessary into the system, it
shall be properly vacuum dried.

B. Start-up and field test the units until ready for proper operation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.10(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.11 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, supply and installation of Variable Air Volume
(VAV) Terminals and the associated supply air diffusers.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Provide variable air volume terminals with quantity and duty shown on the
Drawings and Equipment Schedule.

B. Store the terminals in crates. Well cover and protect the terminals until ready for
installation.

C. Protect the terminals from mechanical and corrosive damages during transit and
installation.

D. All factory applied acoustical and thermal insulation including facing and adhesive
shall be fire-resistant and to conform to the requirements of HKFSD.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualification of Manufacturers: VAV Terminals shall be furnished by a

manufacturer who normally supplies this type of equipment and can slow
evidence that such equipment have been in successful operation for a period of at
least five years.

B. Carry out factory performance test to demonstrate compliance with specified

requirements:

1. Terminal leakage rates

2. Terminal air volume control performance

3. Terminal minimum pressure drop at nominal air volume

4. Supply air diffuser performance at various air volumes

5. Supply air diffuser pressure drop at nominal air volume

6. NC level of overall set up based on 8 dB room effect.

C. Reference Codes and Regulations:

1. ASHARE Standard 62.1.

2. Air Diffusion Council Test standard 1062R4

3. Codes and Regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.11(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1.04 Submittal

A. Submit Factory Performance Test Certificate for tests as specified in the above
clause 1.3B.

B. Submit complete catalogue information and shop drawings for material and
equipment. Shop Drawings shall show method of fixing of terminal and diffusers,
connections between terminal and diffusers, thermal insulation.

C. Submit control schematics and wiring diagram for the terminals. Submit control
equipment and fixing details.

D. Submit diffuser sample for review before ordering.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Variable Air Volume Terminals

A. All terminals shall be preset at factory for the specified design duty but shall be
capable of site adjustment to vary the capacity.

B. All terminals shall be single duct VAV, totally shut-off type, suitable for horizontal
mounting inside the ceiling void.

C. Terminal Casing

1. Casing shall be constructed from min. 0.8 mm (minimum) galvanised steel

sheet.

2. Casing shall be sealed to limit the leakage of air to less than 2% of the air
volume handled at a working pressure of 125 Pa.

3. Casings shall be lined internally with thermal and acoustic insulation which
shall be lined / coated to prevent erosion. Insulation shall comply with
relevant section of this Specification.

4. Locally made casing shall be complete with insulated distribution chamber

(where required or indicated) and of the same material as the terminal to
serve the requisite number of outlet. Integral outlet shall be connected with
factory provided and installed butterfly dampers, and with position locating
handles for balancing air to remote diffusers.

D. Single Duct Terminal Volume Control

1. Terminals shall be of pressure independent type with a thermostatically

controlled pneumatic control device with integral actuator to vary the
supply volume in accordance with the controlled room temperature.

2. Volume regulator shall be a thermostatically reset velocity controller which

controls air devices independent of changes in system static pressure. Air
volume controlled shall be accurate within ±5% from full flow down to 35%
of full flow. Factory calibrated field adjustable set points shall be provided
to set maximum and minimum l/s ranging from full flow to zero flow.

3. Provide factory built-in flow taps and calibration chart on terminals.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.11(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

4. When volume control device is fully 'shut off', leakage across device shall
not exceed 4% at 750 Pa air inlet pressure. Terminal shall be normally
open.

5. When main control air is off, inlet damper shall be fully open.

6. Volume control actuator shall be factory assembled.

7. Thermostat for VAV control shall be capable for site recalibration and
maintain the desired room temperature with ±1 deg. C accuracy. One
thermostat shall control several actuators, if necessary, as indicated on the
Drawings.

E. Sound Attenuation

1. The terminals together with the ductwork and air diffuser shall achieve
maximum sound pressure level, unless otherwise specified when operating
at normal rate, not exceeding NC35.

2. If such levels as stated in the above clause 2.1E.1 are exceeded,

secondary attenuators shall be provided to the satisfaction of
Architect/Engineer without additional cost.

F. Electric Heater

1. If the terminals are to be completed with electric heater, all sections within
one metre of the heating elements shall be constructed by double skin
casing. The internal insulation shall be lined with minimum 0.7mm thick
galvanized steel sheet.

2. The heater shall be easily withdrawn from the casing for inspection,
servicing and maintenance.

3. Heating element shall be of the sheathe and black heat type. The heater
shall be controlled by contactor and step controller fully interlocked with a
sail switch and duct type overheat thermostat with fail safe feature and
manual reset.

4. The heating element shall be switched off when the mean temperature
inside the air duct exceeds 50 ±10% and within 90 seconds upon reaching
this temperature.

5. The electric heater shall be controlled to switch on at minimum supply air

flow while the room temperature cannot maintain the specified room
temperature.

6. The minimum supply air flow should be no greater than 30% of peak
supply volume.

7. The provision shall comply with FSD’s requirements.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.11(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit terminals and diffusers and appurtenances to the space provided and make
readily serviceable. Particular attention shall be given in selecting the terminals to
the space constraints.

B. Provide adequate supports to terminals and diffusers of attachment to suspension

hangers.

C. Installation of variable air volume terminals should be fully coordinated with other
parties, any additional cost due to insufficient coordination shall not be entertained.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.11(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.12 CONSTANT AIR VOLUME TERMINALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, supply and installation of Constant Air Volume
(CAV) Terminals.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Provide constant air volume terminals with quantity and duty shown on the
Drawings and Equipment Schedule.

B. Store the terminals in crates. Well cover and protect the terminals until ready for
installation.

C. Protect the terminals from mechanical and corrosive damages during transit and
installation.

D. All factory applied acoustical and thermal insulation including facing and adhesive
shall be fire-resistant and to conform to the requirements of HKFSD.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualification of Manufacturers: CAV Terminals shall be furnished by a

manufacturer who normally supplies this type of equipment and can show
evidence that such equipment have been in successful operation for a period of at
least five years.

B. Carry out factory performance test to demonstrate compliance with specified

requirements:-

1. Terminal leakage rates

2. Terminal air volume control performance

3. Terminal minimum pressure drop at nominal air volume.

C. Equipment shall meet Codes and Regulations of jurisdictional authorities.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit Factory Performance Test Certificate for tests as specified in the above
clause 1.3.B.

B. Submit complete catalogue information and shop drawings for material and
equipment. Shop drawings shall show method of fixing of terminal, ductwork
connections and thermal insulation.

C. Submit control schematics and wiring diagram for the terminals. Submit control
equipment and fixing details.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.12(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. All terminals shall be preset at factory for the specified design duty but shall be
capable of site adjustment to vary the capacity.

B. CAV terminals shall be capable of totally shut-off, suitable for horizontal mounting
inside plantrooms as indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 Terminal Casing

A. Casing shall be constructed from min. 0.5 mm (minimum) galvanised steel sheet.

B. Casing shall be sealed to limit the leakage of air to less than 2% of the air volume
handled at a working pressure of 125 Pa.

C. Casings shall be lined internally with thermal and acoustic insulation which shall
be coated / lined to prevent erosion. Insulation shall comply with relevant section
of this Specification.

2.03 Terminal Volume Control

A. Terminals shall be of a field proven design and shall be calibrated at the factory
for specified air volume but shall permit simple external adjustment for future
changes.

B. Air volume shall remain constant at any setting, regardless of static pressure
variations ahead or after the air volume regulator.

C. Air volume shall be indicated by a calibration dial without requiring any flow
measurements and calibration chart shall be provided on units.

D. When volume control device is fully ‘shout off’, leakage across device shall not
exceed 4% at 750 Pa air inlet pressure.

E. The air volume regulator shall be normally closed and self-regulating under
normal operating condition. Terminals shall be capable of remote ON/OFF
control.

2.04 Sound Attenuation

A. The terminals together with the ductwork and fan coil units shall achieve
maximum sound pressure level, when operating at normal rate, not exceeding
NC35.

B. If such levels as stated in the above clause 2.04A are exceeded, secondary
attenuators shall be provided to the satisfaction of Architect/Engineer without
additional cost.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit terminals and appurtenances to the space provided and make readily
serviceable. Particular attention shall be given inselecting the terminals to the
space constraints.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.12(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Provide adequate supports to terminals and for attachment to suspension hangers.

C. Installation of the constant air volume terminals should be fully coordinated with
other parties. Additional cost due to insufficient coordination shall not be
entertained.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.12(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.13 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This section specifies the manufacture, supply installations and testing of plate type
heat exchangers.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Cover the inlet and outlet openings of the heat exchangers. Store exchangers in
crates and well covered and protected until ready for installation.

B. During construction, protect plates from damages.

C. The plate heat exchangers offered shall have the minimum heat transfer capacity
shown in the schedule.

1.03 Quality Assurance

A. Qualification of Manufacturers: Heat exchangers shall be furnished by a

manufacturer who normally supplies this type of equipment and can show
evidence that such equipment of a similar capacity have been in successful
operation for a period of at least five years.

B. Reference codes and standard : ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes
(Section VIII Division 1) or approved equivalent.

C. Nameplates: Securely attached to each exchanger showing manufacturer's name,

serial and model number and data of manufacturer.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit a complete list of all spares and accessories as recommended by the

equipment manufacturer for future maintenance. This list shall be certified by the
manufacturer.

B. Submit complete catalogue, complete material specification and manufacturing

shop drawings.

C. Submit certified factory unit pressure test report for each of heat exchanger and
provide manufacturer’s guarantee for 5-year performance free from leakage.

D. Submit copies of installation operation and maintenance manual.

E. Submit certified technical data/information including, but not limited to the

following:

(a) Working and test pressure

(b) Water pressure drops

(c) Certified heat transfer performance at specified conditions/criteria

F. Submit manufacturer's Quality Assurance/Quality Control program for the entire

manufacturing process.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.13(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

G. ubmit comprehensive method statement for installation of heat exchanger.

H. Submit detailed calculation for the surface area of heat exchange plates required,
water temperature in and out on both sides of the heat exchanger as directed by
the Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. The heat exchangers shall be completely factory assembled/manufactured and

consist of metal plates pressed into a "herring bone" pattern and securely
clamped between nitrite rubber gaskets by the pressure end plates of the mild
steel framework. A strainer shall be provided to make cleaning and inspection
possible without dismantling the pipes. Its length shall be adapted to the number
of plates.

B. The plates shall be suspended from the top bar of the framework and located on
the bottom guide bar. Bar shall be made of high strength steel, electro-
galvanised.

C. No part of the mild steel framework shall be in contact with the heat transfer fluids.

D. The heat exchangers shall be sized for the duties indicated in the Equipment
Schedules with a minimum allowance for additional plate capacity of up to 20% to
allow for possible future requirements. The manufacturer shall guarantee
availability of plates for a period of at least 15 years.

E. Heat exchanger shall be designed to give a high heat transfer efficiency to

achieve close approach temperatures as low as 1oC.

F. Inlet and outlet connections of both the primary and secondary fluids shall be on
the same side of the heat exchanger.

2.02 Framework

A. The heat exchanger frame shall be of mild steel and shall be suitable for bolting
to a horizontal deck. The frames shall be arranged such that when the tie bars
are loosened, full access to all plate surfaces is provided for cleaning and
maintenance.

B. Inlet and outlet ports shall be rubber / stainless steel lined, constructed on the
fixed pressure plate only, and shall be flanged to suit the scheduled working
conditions. Provide isolating flanges where required to eliminate the possibility of
electro-chemical corrosion between the dissimilar metals of the heat exchanger
ports, framework and connecting pipework and bolts. Flanges shall be suitable for
direct connection to the relevant pipework as specified in Pipework Section of this
Specification.

C. The entire framework, and all parts of the units, except the plates, shall be factory
treated to prevent corrosion and provided with two coats of finished paint to colour
acceptable to the Architect.

D. All fixing bolts and units shall be of high strength steel and electro-galvanised.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.13(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.03 Plates

A. The heat transfer plates shall be of AISI 316 stainless steel with a minimum
thickness of 0.6mm.

B. Double gaskets shall be provided around the bypass ports on each plate, with a
drain hole between the gaskets to facilitate leak detection.

C. The nitrile gaskets shall be so designed as to lend rigidity of the individual plates
to facilitate handling.

D. Provide 10% oversurfacing of plates to allow for fouling.

2.04 Pressure Rating

The heat exchanger units shall be pressure tested in the factory and on site as specified
in Testing and Commissioning Section of this Specification and shall be suitable for the
working pressure specified.

2.05 Protection

A. All parts not otherwise protected or manufactured in corrosion resisting materials

shall be thoroughly cleaned, primed and painted in the factory to the following
standards:

1. Blast Cleaning - SIS-Sa2

2. Paint System - Polyurethane/Epoxy with high

weather resistance

3. Coats - Minimum 2 coats (including finish

top coat)

4. Total Dry Film Thickness - Minimum 150 micron

B. Any damage to finishes in transit (or otherwise) shall be made good in the manner
recommended by the Manufacturer and to the Architect's satisfaction.

2.06 Backwashing

Backwashing of plate heat exchangers shall be by remote switching under the control of
programmable logic control (PLC) system to operate backwashing motorized valves.
During backwashing period, in-line motorized valves in/out of each heat exchanger shall
be closed and at the same time, motorized valves for backwashing of each heat
exchanger shall be opened. Valves shall be reverted back to ‘normal’ position when
backwashing is completed.

2.07 Tools and Cabinet

Provide a complete set of tools of servicing and maintenance unit in metal cabinet with
proper label.Part 3 Execution

2.08 Installation

A. Install heat exchangers where shown on the Drawings and make readily
serviceable. All installation procedures shall be in accordance with
Manufacturer's recommendation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.13(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Insulate the heat exchangers as specified in Insulation Section of this

Specification.

C. Insulation shall cover the perimeter of the whole plate pack including the carrying
bars. Detailed insulation construction shop drawings shall be submitted to the
Architect for approval before execution.

D. Provide one layer of 20mm thickness neoprene pad and mount the heat
exchanger on concrete plinth with one layer of such pad between the equipment
base and concrete surface. All mounting bolts (including washers and nuts) shall
be of high strength steel and electro-galvanised.

E. Paint and label the heat exchanger as specified in the 'Painting and Labelling'
Section of this specification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.13(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.14 PIPEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, installation and testing of pipework.

1.02 General Requirements

A. All pipework delivered to site shall be new and colour banded to identify different
grades.

B. Install all pipe runs generally in accordance with the Drawings.

C. Install pipework with correct falls to ensure adequate venting and draining.

D. Pipework installed in trenches, ducts, voids and inaccessible plants shall have
welded joints except where screwed or flanged joints are necessary for connecting
to valves etc. or where a particular type of joint is specifically called for.

E. No pipe joints shall be permitted within the thickness of walls or floors etc.

F. Provide GI pipe sleeve for pipes when passing through walls, floors or ceilings.
Alternatively, where pipes pass through walls, floor, or ceilings rendered liquid-
tight, puddle flanges shall be provided. Material of puddle flanges shall be same
as the pipework material.

G. All pipework shall be free from rust, burrs, scales and other defects. Pay
particular attention to removal of millscales. Thoroughly clean all pipes before
erection.

H. No welding is permitted on galvanized steel pipe under any circumstances.

I. All pipes passing through building expansion/movement joints shall be provided

with appropriate pipe expansion joints whether it is shown or not on the Drawings.

J. Locate and install all pipe sleeves or puddle flanges for pipes passing through
walls, floors, or ceilings. Provide adequate information for the satisfactory
execution of Works at the correct time and in the prescribed manner.

K. Thermal insulation for pipework shall be fabricated off-site. Detailed requirements

shall refer to the “Insulation” section of this spectification.

L. Provide stainless steel grade 316 support frame works, hangers, bracket, washer
screw, bolt and nut for the pipeworks installed in outdoor.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. All personnel engaged on welding operations must possess a certificate of

competence issued by an acceptable organisation.

B. Pipe fitters and equipment installers shall have had a minimum of three years
experience in their trade.

C. All pipes and fittings supplied for this project shall conform to the BS specification,
or the ASTM, JIS, DIN, ISO or Australian Standard or Equivalent.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Submit certification that the pipe supplied is in conformance to the standard set
out above.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer’s data. Shop drawing shall show plans,
elevations and sections of piping layout, and shall show locations of valves,
strainers, pipe hangers, and equipment to which the piping connects.

B. Submit pipe support and anchor details for review.

C. Submit structural calculation and pipe movement analysis endorsed by Registered

Structural Engineer for review.

D. Submit pipe testing and cleaning procedures for review.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Pipework Materials

Pipework specification for the various services shall be in accordance with the following
tables:

Table 1 - Pipework Materials

Services/Piping System Nominal Min. Wall Specification

Bore (mm) Thickness Refer Table 2
(mm)
15-150 -- A (Black Mild
Steel)
Chilled water ) 200 4.9 B (Carbon steel)
Heating water ) 250-300 6.3
Steam /Steam condensate ) 350-400 8.0
Boiler equipment drain, blow ) 450-550 8.8
down and vent
Fuel oil ) 600 9.5
Auxiliary cooling water ) 650 10.0
) 700 11.0
750-800 12.5
850-950 14.2
1000-1200 16.0

Fresh condenser water 10-150 -- C (Galvanised

mild steel)
200 and H (Ductile iron)
above

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Services/Piping System Nominal Bore Min. Wall Specification

(mm) Thickness Refer Table 2
(mm)

Chilled/heating/condenser/auxili 10-150 -- C (Galvanised

ary cooling water systems drain mild steel)
pipes connected to equipment,
overflows and vent
Drain pipes passing through
floor slabs and fire
compartment walls
Drain pipes installed in plant
rooms or areas without false
ceiling
Air-conditioning condensate
drain down pipes (internal)
Air-conditioning condensate
drain pipe
Town gas/L.P. gas
Compressed air for industrial
use
Air-conditioning condensate 10-150 -- D (UPVC)
drain down pipe (external)
Water treatment
Sea water chlorination and
backwashing
Bleed-off system
Compressed air for pneumatic 6-76 -- E (Copper tube)
control
Domestic hot water 15-300 -- F (Copper tube)
Cold water
City water make-up
Solar hot water pipe
Refrigerant 6-159 -- G (Copper pipe)
Sea water 80 and above -- H (Ductile iron)
A/C make-up up-feed pipe from
sump tank to roof tank and to
cooling tower

2.02 Pipe Supports

A. Provide hangers, supports, guides and anchors. All designs shall allow expansion
and contraction within stress limits of code for pressure piping, Section 1, Power
Piping, ANSI B-31.1.

B. Provide structural steel required for proper installation or as indicated in the

Drawings.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

All pipe supports shall be stainless steel 316 for outdoor services and galvanized
steel for indoor services, adjustable for height and prime coated and finish coated
with anti-corrosion paint. Ferrous pipes shall have ferrous brackets and copper
pipes shall have brass brackets. Pipe brackets for copper pipes and PVC/PE
pipes shall be wrapped with PVC.

C. Provide additional supports adjacent to valves, fittings etc., and other large pipe
line mounted items to prevent undue strain on adjoining pipework.

D. Provide additional supports to pump connections etc. to prevent undue strain on

Plant.

E. Provide supports at spacing not exceeding the centres given below unless
otherwise indicated.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Pipework Nominal Bore Intervals for Intervals for

Specification (mm) Horizontal Runs Vertical Runs (m)
(m)
Bare Lagged
A, B, C, I 15 1.8 1.8 2.4
20 2.4 2.4 3.0
25 2.4 2.4 3.0
32 2.7 2.4 3.0
40 3.0 2.4 3.7
50 3.0 2.4 3.7
65 3.7 3.0 4.6
80 3.7 3.0 4.6
100 4.0 3.0 4.6
125 4.5 3.7 5.5
150 5.5 4.5 5.5
200 8.5 6.0 8.5
250 9.0 6.5 9.0
300 and 10.0 10.0 10.0
over
D 15 0.75 1.5
22 to 28 1 1.8
28 to 35 1 2
42 1.2 2.4
53 to 65 1.4 2.8
76 1.8 3.5
108 and 2 4
over
Bare Lagged
E, F, G 15 and 1.2 1.2 1.8
below
22 1.2 1.2 1.8
28 1.8 1.5 2.4
35 2.4 1.8 3.0
42 2.4 1.8 3.0
54 2.7 1.8 3.0

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Pipework Nominal Internals for Internals for

Specification Bore (mm) Horizontal Runs Vertical Runs (m)
(m)
65 3.0 2.4 3.7
76 3.0 2.4 3.7
108 3.0 2.4 3.7
133 3.7 3.0 3.7
159 and 4.5 3.7 3.7
over
H 80 and 100 3.0 4.5
150 4.5 5.5
200 and 6.0 8.0
over

2.03 Pipe Sleeves

A. Where pipes pass through fire compartment walls or floor slabs, a metal fire stop
in the form of a 6mm thick flanges welded around the pipe and located in the
centre of the slab/wall thickness shall be provided. The flange shall be of the
same diameter as the internal bore of the pipe sleeve.

B. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to allow free movement of pipes and shall not
be used as pipe supports. Where pipes penetrate external walls, the space
between pipe sleeves and the pipes or insulation shall be completely caulked with
a soft, non-setting waterproof mastic compound to give an air and water tight seal.

C. All cast-in sleeves shall be of galvanized steel.

2.04 Expansion Loops

Provide expansion loops of either U or L shape or change in direction of pipe route for
allowing expansion and contraction of pipework wherever possible and necessary.

2.05 Bellows Expansion Joints

A. Provide bellows expansion joint (axial, hinged and gimbal type) wherever
expansion loops or change in direction of pipework for allowing expansion and
contraction of pipework is not feasible.

B. At building expansion joints, and wherever else, additional allowance shall be

made by the provision of stainless steel articulated bellows type expansion
compensators complete with all necessary guides etc., as recommended by the
manufacturer to give a working life of not less than 20 years. Each compensator
shall maintain at least the same cross-sectional area as adjoining pipework for its
entire length.

C. Ensure the expansion joints are adequately tied, anchored or removed to avoid
damage to the bellows during sectional testing.

D. Expansion joints shall be of bellows type having stainless steel membrane and
carbon steel fittings or an acceptable alternative.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. Design working pressure is specified in the Testing and Commissioning Section of

the Specification.

2.06 Pipe Anchor

A. Provide anchor points constructed from channel iron secured to the building
structure.

B. Anchors shall be positioned in association with pipework change in direction,

expansion joints and loops so as to absorb stresses due to pipework expansion
and internal pressures by transmission of such forces to the ground or structure at
appropriate points.

C. Anchors shall be constructed to withstand the higher thrust during piping hydraulic
pressure testing.

D. All details and sizes of anchors shall be submitted for review prior to installation.

2.07 Pipe Guides

Pipe guides shall be provided for all horizontal and vertical piping for proper control of
thermal movement and proper performance of expansion loops and expansion joints.
Spacing for intermediate pipe guides shall be as recommended by expansion joints
manufacturers. Furnish shop drawings indicating guide locations and construction
details for review.

2.08 Gaskets for Pipe Separation

A. Gaskets shall be suitable for temperature, service and pressure of system,

installed in accordance with manufacture’s recommendations. Make up flanged
joints with one-piece ring gaskets, 1.5mm thick, neoprene rubber.

B. Flanged joints between dissimilar metals: insulating gaskets, sleeves and washers
between flanges, bolts and nuts respectively.

C. Gaskets shall comply with ANSI B16.21 and the following ASTM Specification :-

Hardness D2240

Tensile Testing D412

Compression D395

Heat Aging D573

D. Gasket for grooved joints shall be of Grade “E” EPDM compound conforming to
ASTM D-2000 and shall be molded t and provided by the grooved coupling
manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Protection

Protect all piping work during and at the end of each day’s work to prevent entrance of
moisture or dirt or contamination of the system.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3.02 Piping Installation

A. Install piping parallel to walls, clear of obstructions, preserving head room and
keeping passageways clear.

B. Should structural difficulties or other work prevent running of pipes or setting of

equipment at locations indicated on Drawings, necessary minor deviations
therefore will be allowed with prior review.

C. Cut pipe in a neat and workman like manner without damage to the pipe. Unless
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, cutting shall be done with an
acceptable type mechanical cutter. Use wheel cutters when practicable. Ream
pipe ends to remove burrs.

D. Place drains at each low point of each water pipe.

E. Place manual air vents at each high point of each water line. Terminate
discharge pipe 150mm above finish floor at the nearest floor drain, unless
otherwise specified on the Drawings.

F. Automatic air vents with isolation valves shall be installed at the high level of
each pipe riser. Terminate discharge pipe 150mm above finish floor at the
nearest floor drain, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.

G. As soon as the water lines have been installed, cover openings to prevent
entrance of materials that would obstruct pipes. Leave cover in place until
removal is necessary for completion of installation.

H. Attach supports only to structural framing members. Where supports are required
between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal framing.

I. Install piping with sufficient pitch to insure adequate drainage and venting.

J. Screw joints shall be made with tapered threads properly cut. Joints be made
right with a stiff mixture of litharge and glycerin, or polytertra-fluoroethylene tape,
or other acceptable thread joint compound applied to the male threads only. Not
more than three threads shall show after the joint is made up.

K. Welded joints: fusion-weld in accordance with ANSI B31.1, unless otherwise

required. Use welding fittings in changing direction of piping. Branch connections
shall be made with welding tees of forged welding branch outlets.

L. Field and shop bevels shall be in accordance with the recognized standards and
shall be done by mechanical means or flame cutting. Where beveling is done by
flame cutting, clean surface of scale and oxidation prior to welding.

M. Before welding, align the component parts to be welded so that no strain is placed
on the weld when finally positioned. Align the height so that no part of the pipe
wall is offset by more than 20 percent of the wall thickness. Flanges and
branches shall be set true. Preserve alignment during the welding operation.

N. Removing and replacing defective welds shall be at the Contractor's sole cost and
expense. Repairing of defective welds by adding new material over the defects or
by peening will not be permitted.

O. Store electrodes in a dry area and keep free of moisture of dampness during
fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their coating.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

P. Flanges and unions shall be faced true. Provide flanges with acceptable gaskets,
and make square and tight. Provide union, grooved or flange joints in each line
immediately preceeding the connection to each piece or equipment or material
requiring maintenance such as pumps, control valves, and other similar items.

Q. Install pipe grooving and coupling in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and supervisions. All grooved components and grooving tools
shall be supplied from one manufacturer.

R. Install valves in horizontal lines with stems horizontal or above. Install isolation
valves at any other points indicated or required for draining, isolation, or
sectionalizing purposes. Identify each valve as hereinafter specified.

S. Support piping independently at all equipment so that equipment is not stressed

by piping weight or expansion.

T. Provide unions, screwed, grooved or flanged, as required to facilitate

maintenance, repair and replacement.

U. All floor-mounted drain pipes inside plant rooms shall be properly protected.

3.03 Welding

A. Preparation for welding:

1. Piping, mill-beveled on both ends before welding, beveled 37.5 degrees.

2. Weld spacing on all butt welds shall comply with the following table :-

Nominal Wall Thickness Pipe Spacing Bevel

6.35 mm or less 3 mm 37.5°

Over 6.35 mm 5 mm 37.5°

3. Use backing rings on all butt-welded joints.

4. Before starting any welding, remove all corrosion products and other
foreign material from surfaces to be welded by scraping, brushing, chipping
and swabbing.

B. Welding Process : Perform welding by either manual shielded metallic arc

process or automatic submerged arc process. All pipeline welding shall conform
to Chapter 4, Section VI, “Welding of Pipe Joints”, of ANSI code for Pressure
Piping, ANSI, B31.1, and in accordance with latest accepted practice applicable to
particular service. Proposed welding procedure specifications shall be submitted
for review.

C. Welding Operation : Size of electrodes, voltages, current, thickness and number

of passes or beads, as previously specified. After deposition, clean each layer of
weld metal to remove all slag and scale by wire brushing and grinding, then clip
where necessary to prepare for proper deposition of next layer. Welded
reinforcement shall be not less than 1.6mm nor more than 3mm above normal
surface of joined sections. Reinforcement shall be crowned at centre and taper
on each side of surfaces being joined. Exposed surface of weld shall present
workman like appearance and be free of depression below surface of joined
member.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Thoroughly fuse weld metal with base metal at all sections of weld. Penetration of
weld shall include unbeveled portion and extend to inside walls of pipe.

E. Inspection : All production welds shall be inspected visually by the Contractor’s

supervisory personnel and when necessary by the Architect/Engineer. The
Architect/Engineer reserves the right to order at random to inspect 2% of the weld
joints for inspection and ultrasonic examination to BS 3923:Part 1 / BSEN 1714.
For pipe thickness less than 6mm, magnetic particle inspection shall be carried.
Should any one of the above welds prove faulty in materials or workmanship,
further tests may be ordered up to a total of 4% of the welded joints. If the
number of welds failing the tests within the above 4% is sufficient to suggest that
an operative is not consistent in standard, the Architect/Engineer may order any
number of that operative’s welds to be removed. The cutting out and repair of all
such welds for inspection shall be at no extra cost to the Employer. All ultrasonic
welded joint tests shall be carried out by specialist and the testing report shall be
prepared and certified by HOKLAS accredited laboratory. All testing method
statement shall be submitted for review.

F. Weld Joints on UPVC :

1. Solvent or hot air welded UPVC pipework as recommended by the

manufacturers and as detailed in this Specification.

2. Where solvent welding is used, particular attention must be paid to

preparation. Abrasive paper and spirit cleaner must be used. When
applying solvent, avoid heat in order to prevent the cement drying before
the chemical bond between the two surfaces is completed. Turn mating
surfaces for even spread of the solvent. Wipe off excess cement quickly.

3. On UPVC pipework, hot air welded joints shall be made where standard
fittings are unavailable. The welding using a jet of hot air and PVC filler
rod shall only be carried out by a welder qualified in plastic fabrication.
Ensure complete fusion by applying from 3 to 6 runs of weld. Do not clean
off weld. Any fabrication performed on site shall be similar in strength to a
manufacturer's item.

G. Brazing of copper tubing :

1. Silver brazed joints shall be made with 95-5 tin antimony or 95-5 tin-lead
solder.

2. The outside of the tube and the inside of the fitting shall be tinned at the
point of contact before joining. Overheated tubes shall be cleaned and
fittings shall not be overheated before joining. Solder type valves shall be
disassembled before silver brazing and valve bodies shall be kept cool by
use of damp cloths.

3. Refrigerant suction lines shall be pitched towards compressor.

4. Traps for all refrigerant line suction risers shall be installed.

3.04 Installation of Pipe Hangers and Supports

A. Submit shop drawings showing hangers and supports as specified or as required for
the system.

B. The necessary hangers and supports, including rods, angles, channels and plates,
as well as any changes from indicated design, shall be submitted for review.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Vertical piping shall be guided or supported in the centre of each riser but not over
6m on centres, with acceptable steel brackets to prevent swaying, sagging, vibration
and resonance. Avoid strains that cause lines to snake or buckle between supports
or anchors.

D. Pipe hangers of same size, or nearest manufactured size available, as pipe or

tubing on which they are to be used shall be provided.

E. Install a gasket between clamp and pipe or dissimilar material.

F. Furnish anchors and guides for all horizontal and vertical piping for proper control of
thermal movement, to prevent undue strain on branches, to provide proper
performance of expansion loops and to avoid overloading of hangers and supports.

3.05 Testing

A. Provide all materials, supplies, labour and power required for hydrostatically
testing all piping except refrigerant piping. Make preliminary tests and prove work
satisfactory. Notify Architect in ample time to be present for final testing of all
piping. Repair defects disclosed by tests or, if required, replace defective work
with new work without additional cost. Make tests in stages if so ordered by
Architect/Engineer to facilitate work of others. Use of wicking in tightening leaking
joints is not permitted.

B. This Contractor is responsible for work of other trades disturbed or damaged by

tests and/or repair and replacement of his work and shall cause work so disturbed
or damaged to be restored to its original condition at his own expense.

C. All water pipework shall be hydraulically pressure tested to the pressure listed for
a period not less than twelve hours without leakage or loss of pressure.

D. All refrigerant pipework shall be pressure tested by nitrogen gas up to 28 bars and
maintained for a period of not less than six hours without leakage or loss of
pressure.

E. All pipework shall be tested in accordance with the testing pressure specified in
the Testing and Commissioning Section of the Specification.

3.06 Cleaning - Procedure

A. Exercise every precaution to avoid introducing foreign matter such as welding

beads and slag or dirt into piping system. Hammer completed welds to loosen
debris. All piping, valves and fittings shall be internally cleaned of oil, grease or
dirt, prior to assembly into system, by use of wire brush and swab.

B. Following fabrication and erection, clean all piping 150mm and smaller by flushing
with clean water and run to waste until thoroughly free of all dirt, oil and cuttings,
etc. Generally, each size of pipe shall be flushed separately before being joined
with larger size piping.

C. Clean piping 200mm and larger by pulling through steel brush for entire length of
each pipe size, followed by fiber brush or swab, brushes and swabs slightly larger
than inside diameter of pipe being cleaned.

D. All cleaning operations, continuous throughout piping system, except at joints

required for final joining of various sections of cleaned piping.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

After cleaning and until above final joints are made, end of sections of piping shall
be adequately and tightly sealed off to prevent any dirt, water or other foreign
matter from entering ends of pipe.

E. Before submitting piping systems for acceptance, all strainers shall be inspected
and thoroughly cleaned. Temporary strainers shall be provided where required for
cleaning and flushing operation.

F. Prior to start-up, perform final cleaning out of water systems by circulation with
alkaline detergent solution as follows:

1. Fill entire system with clean water and add while filling a special
nonfoaming alkaline detergent. Alkaline detergent shall be sodium silicate,
sodium phosphate, a mixture of these or acceptable equal; plus a
nonfoaming wetting agent. Sufficient detergent chemical shall be added to
provide a phenolphthalein alkalinity in range of 3000 to 5000 ppm as
CaCO3 circulating water. Alkaline detergent shall be supplied by an
acceptable water treatment specialist who shall supply chemicals, perform
necessary tests and supervise final cleaning operation.

2. Operate pumps and circulate water throughout system for period of one (1)
day. At the end of the day of circulation, remove and clean all strainer
baskets and blow off all low points.

3. After completion of above circulation, completely drain out system and refill
with clean water and circulate water for one additional day. A chemical test
shall then be made to determine if water contains an alkalinity of 200ppm
or less. If more than 200ppm, redrain and refill; run pumps and continue
doing so until alkalinity drops below 200ppm. When below 200ppm, water
may remain in system for regular operation. pH value shall be maintained
at 8.5-9.5.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/12 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 MVAC, ATC AND IBMS INSTALLATION

Table 2 - Pipework Specification

Pipework
Specification
Description Pipe Joints (see Note 1) Flange/Union Fittings (see Note 2)
as referred to
in Table 1
A Black mild steel tube to 1. Screwed or welded joints for Black malleable iron: 1. Screwed Piping: for pipes up
BS1387 (BSEN 10255) sizes up to 50mm. bronze to iron spherical to 50mm malleable iron
‘heavy’ grade. seat union for pipework screwed fittings to BS 143
up to 50mm. and 1256. Steel welding neck
B Carbon steel grade 430 to 2. Welded joints or flange joints Flange to BSEN 1092 2. Welded Piping: purpose
BSEN ISO 1127 / BSEN to BSEN 1092 for size 65mm for size 65mm and over. made steel butt-welding pipe
10220 and BSEN 10216-1 and over. fittings to BSEN10253-1 and
/ BSEN 10217-1. 2. Use long radius reducing
elbows at pumps. Use
eccentric welding reducing
fittings at changes in pipe
size for horizontal piping, with
top level for water piping.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/13 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 MVAC, ATC AND IBMS INSTALLATION

Pipework
Specification
Description Pipe Joints (see Note 1) Flange/Union Fittings (see Note 2)
as referred to
in Table 1
C Galvanized mild steel 1. Screwed sockets for pipework Galvanized malleable Galvanized malleable iron screwed
tube to BS 1387 (BSEN up to 50mm. iron: bronze to iron fittings to BSEN 10242 or grooved
10255) ‘Medium’ grade. spherical seat unions for mechanical couplings.
pipework up to 50mm.
Screwed steel boss
flanges to BSEN 1092 or
grooved mechanical
coupling
2. Screwed sockets or grooved
mechanical coupling to
pipework 65mm and over.
D Unplasticised P.V.C. BS Solvent welded joints to BSEN Mechanical joints to Injection moulded unplasticised
3505 Class E 1452, using solvent cement to BS BSEN 1452. PVC fittings solvent welded to
4346-3. BSEN 1452.
E Copper tube to BSEN Silver blazing capillary joint to Silver blazing capillary Silver blazing to BSEN 12449 or
12449 BSEN 12449 or ANSI B16.22 joint, flange to BSEN compression to BSEN 1254-2.
1092
F Copper tube to BSEN Refer Pipe fitting Flange to BSEN 1092 Cold water : Solder ring to BSEN
1057 1254-1 or capilliary to BSEN 1254-5
Hot water : Silver blazing to BSEN
1254-5
G Copper pipe for pressure Welded joints for size up to 50mm. Welded joints for size up Silver blazing to BSEN 12735-1 up
system to BSEN 12735-1 Above 50mm flange joint to BSEN to 50mm. Above 50mm to 50mm. Above 50mm flange joint
1092. flange joint to BSEN to BSEN 1092.
1092.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/14 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 MVAC, ATC AND IBMS INSTALLATION

Pipework
Specification
Description Pipe Joints (see Note 1) Flange/Union Fittings (see Note 2)
as referred to
in Table 1
H Ductile iron pipe with 1. Cast flanged joint to BSEN Cast integral or inert gas Ductile iron to BSEN 545, cement
cement lined or fusion 1092 with rubber gaskets to machine welded at lined or fusion bond epoxy coated
bond epoxy coated BSEN 682. manufacturer’s works to internally, and flanges to BSEN
internally to BSEN 545 BSEN 1092. 1092.
Class K12 and coated
externally with bitumen
and zinc.
2. Mechanical coupling.
3. Bolts and nuts shall be of
bright steel coated with
protective paint before
installation.
I Spun cast iron pipe with Hubless joint with stainless steel Hubless joint with Spun cast iron hubless fittings with
internal coating to BSEN grade 304 coupling with synthetic stainless steel grade 304 internal and external coatings to
877 and external painted elastomer (EPDM or SBR) sleeve to coupling with synthetic BSEN 877.
with anti-corrosion paint. BSEN 681 and stainless steel fixing elastomer (EPDM or
bolts. SBR) sleeve to BSEN
681 and stainless steel
fixing bolts.

Note 1: a. Employ the above method of joining pipes.

b. Joints shall not be closer than 3,000mm except where necessitated by fittings.

Note 2: a. Pipe fittings shall be provided as specified in the above for the various pipe materials.

b. Eccentric reducing sockets shall be used where a reduction in pipe size is required to ensure proper drainage or elimination of air pockets.

c. Long sweep bends shall be used in preference to round elbow bends wherever practicable. Square elbows shall not be used.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.14(AC)/15 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.15 VALVES AND FITTINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, installation and testing of valves and fittings in
Pipework System.

1.02 General Requirements

A. All valves delivered to site shall be new and shall be provided with adequate
identification for different grades.

B. Cover the inlet and discharge openings of all valves. Store valves in crates or
plastic packages and protect them from damage until ready for installation.

C. During installation, protect all valves from dirt and debris.

D. Provide pressure gauges, air vents, drain valves and gunmetal test cocks for all
equipment and as shown on Drawings.

E. Provide isolating valves for all equipment.

F. Provide regulating valves at branch lines, bypasses etc. where regulation of flow
is required for balancing.

G. Provide valves having proper clearance; leak proof at the specified test pressure;
manufacturer's name or brand; the figure or list number; the guaranteed BS or
ANSI working pressure cast on the body and cast or stamped on the bonnet.
Provide valves of a given type from one manufacturer except accepted for
special application.

H. Provide valves suitable for the working hydraulic pressure specified for the
service and as specified in the “Testing and Commissioning” Section of the
Specification. Provide gate and globe valves suitable for repacking under
pressure. Regardless of service, do not furnish valves rated for less than 1,035
kPa working pressure.

I. Valve Connections:

1. Provide valves suitable for connection to adjoining piping as specified for

pipe joints unless otherwise specified.

2. Valves of size 50 mm and smaller shall have taper screwed ends to BS 21

(ISO 7/1).

3. Valves of size 65 mm and larger shall have flanged connections to BSEN

1092.

4. Use solder joints or screw to solder adaptors for connecting valves to

copper tubing.

5. Use grooved body valves with mechanical grooved jointed piping.

6. Provide butterfly valve with flanged end body or full lug body for flanged
connection.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

J. Unless otherwise specified, all valves shall be of full line size.

K. All valves, fittings, joints and jointing media shall be suitable for the substances
conveyed.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. The following Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards and Specifications shall

apply to work included in this section.

1. BS 5150 to BS 5163 for service ratings and other relevant British

Standards.

2. ANSI

3. ASME

4. UL

5. ASTM

B. Products shall be furnished by manufacturer who normally supplies this type of

equipment and who can show evidence of having furnished such equipment that
has been in successful operation for a period of at least 5 years.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit the following together with all other information required elsewhere in the
Specification for each type of valve for review.

1. Complete manufacturer's literature for material and equipment.

2. Certification of compliance with the requirements specified.

3. Support details for valves.

4. Operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Valves for chilled water, heating water, condenser water, seawater, hot water, make up
water, compressed air and chemical treatment systems shall have the following ratings
unless otherwise specified:

Maximum System
BS 5150 Rating
Working Pressure (kPa)
1035 PN16
1553 PN25

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.02 Valves specification for the various services shall be in accordance with Table 2.1

A. The valve construction materials specified in Table 2.1 shall conform to the
following standards:

1. Bronze to BSEN 1982 LG2

2. High tensile brass to BSEN 12163, BSEN 12164 & BSEN 12167

3. Cast iron to BSEN 1561 Grade 220

4. Bronze to BSEN 1982 with a zinc content not exceeding 0.05%

5. Stainless steel to BS 970 Grade 316

6. Ductile iron to BSEN 1563

7. Ni-resist iron to BSEN 13835:2002

8. Ni-Al-bronze to ASTM B148

Table 2.1 - Valves Schedule

Type of Valve Size (mm) Body Material Disc & Seat Material
Gate & Globe 15 - 50 Bronze Bronze
65 and above Cast iron Bronze / Cast Iron
Swing Check 15 – 50 Bronze Bronze
Silent Seat 65 and above Cast iron Bronze / Stainless Steel
Check
Butterfly 50 and above Ductile iron steel / Seat: EPDM /Burna N
PVC encapped
Disc: Ductile Iron /
ductile iron
Stainless Steel
with EPDM
Coating / Nylon
Coating / Ni-Al-
Bronze

B. Should the system pressure exceed 1,035 kPa, high pressure valve with
minimum 2,000 kPa working pressure shall be used.

2.03 Gate Valves

A. Valves shall be rated, designed and tested in accordance with BS 5154 for
bronze valves and BS 5150 or BS 5163 for cast iron valves.

B. Up to 50 mm : bronze body, solid wedge disc, bronze union bonnet, non-rising

stem. Threaded connection to BS 21.

C. 65 mm and larger : cast iron body, bronze seat ring, full way solid wedge disc,
non-rising stem, bolted yoke bonnet, flanged connection to BSEN 1092.

D. Valves for seawater or well water system : Ni-resist body, 316 stainless steel
trimmed disc & seat, Ni-Al-bronze rising stem, flanged connection. Valves shall

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

be entirely suitable for use with seawater. Valves of 50mm nominal bore and
below shall be UPVC, ABS or polyproperlene bodied stop valves.

E. Valves for Chemical Treatment System : UPVC valves. Valves of 65mm nominal
bore and above shall be flanged connection. Valves below 65mm nominal bore
shall be threaded connection.

2.04 Globe and Angle Valves

A. Up to 50 mm : bronze body, bronze union bonnet, non-rising stem, metal to metal

seat, threaded connection to BS 21.

B. 65 mm and larger : cast iron body, bronze mounted globe, regrinding, replaceable
seat and disc, bolted yoke bonnet, bronze trimmed, flanged connection to BSEN
1092.

C. Valves for seawater and well water system : Ni-resist body, 316 stainless steel
trimmed, replaceable seat and disc, Ni-Al-bronze rising stem; flanged connection.
Valves shall be entirely suitable for use with seawater. Valves of 65mm nominal
bore and below shall be UPVC, ABS or polyproperlene bodied stop valves.

D. Valves for chemical treatment system : UPVC valves. Valves of 65mm nominal
bore and above shall be flanged connection. Valves below 65mm nominal bore
shall be threaded connection.

E. Regulating valves shall be fitted with a lockable indicator on the spindle to show
the proportional opening.

2.05 Check Valves

A. For valves 65mm and above:

1. Provide silent check valves of the non-slam, centre-guided globe type /

silent type at each pump discharge or where shown on the Drawings.
Valves shall be so designed such that closing action is controlled by
stainless steel spring and trim to return the disc to seat before zero velocity
and before reversal of flow takes place in pipe line.

2. Disc shall be free floating, centre-guided and controlled by velocity of flow

without aid of grease or counter weight balance.

3. Check valves designed to prevent grinding of seat and disc after assembly,
with removable cap for inspection of bearings and disc movement.

4. Valves shall be flanged connection end cast iron body to BSEN 1561 and
ISO 185, 316 stainless steel trim, spring, disc and seat.

B. For valves 50 mm and below:

1. Swing check, bronze, with removable hinge pin and screwed cap, suitable
for operation in either horizontal or vertical position. Threaded connection.

2. Provide with clean out plugs and generally with offset swing flappers.
Provide with removable cap, regrinding disc and seat ring.

C. Valves for chemical treatment system shall be cast iron body, teflon lined seat,
shaft and disc or as recommended by the manufacturer.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Valves for seawater or well water system shall be Ni-resist body, 316 stainless
steel trim, spring, disc and seat. Flanged connection.

2.06 Butterfly Valves

A. General: Rating of 1,600kPa unless otherwise indicated, tight closing, integral

flanged, with resilient seats. Full lug body shall be capable of providing bi-
directional “Dead End Service” at full rated pressure with the downstream flange
removed. Provide seats that cover inside surface of body and extend over body
ends; or provide o-rings so that valve body may be bolted and sealed between
flat raised faced with minimum bolt loading and without additional gaskets.

B. Bodies: Ductile iron grade 400-18, completely coated with polyamide or

equivalent against corrosion. 50mm extended neck shall be allowed for insulating
purpose.

C. Seats: EPDM or Buna N and shall be suitable for the temperature rating of the
system served.

D. Discs: Ductile iron with EPDM coating / Nylon coating or type 316 stainless steel
for fresh water and Ni-Al-bronze for sea water or well water.

E. Shaft Stems: Type 316 / 416 stainless steel for fresh water and Ni-Al-bronze for
seawater or well water.

F. Control Handles: Suitable for locking in any position or with 10 or 15 degree

notched throttling plates to hold valve in selected position. Provide gear
operators for size over 80 mm. Provide position indicators and limit stops.

G. Valves in Insulated Lines: Provide extended necks to compensate for insulation

thickness and allow ample clearance for operating handle.

H. All butterfly valves of 450 mm or above shall be fitted with 20 mm by-pass globe
valve.

I. All manual butterfly valves up to 80 mm shall be fitted with 10 position locked

levers. Valves over 80 mm shall be fitted with hand wheel worm gear type
actuators with position indicators and limit stops factory adjusted at full open and
full closure.

J. Valves for chemical treatment system shall be cast iron body, teflon lined seat,
shaft and disc.

K. A short piece of pipework with flanged shall be coupled to the valve to facilitate
future isolation and dismantling of equipment for servicing.

2.07 Motorized Valves (Pneumatic or Electric)

A. Provide for each valve, as indicated on the Drawings, pneumatic or electric

motorized valve operator, attached to and supported by valve.

B. Mount valve operators at factory or at Site under manufacturer's supervision.

C. Provide manual overrider with gimbol and hand wheel for each operator to allows
operation in the event of power failure. The operator shall automatically be
declutch when motor is activated.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Provide motor, magnetic motor controller, control circuit transformer, build-in

reversing contactors, opening and closing torque and limit switches.

E. Provide high speed, high torque type motor. Winding insulation shall be to IEE
standard class B. Provide built-in thermal overload protection. Closing time of all
motorized valves set with adjustable timer control which is capable of setting to
not more than two minutes.

F. Provide limit switches to give remote indication of valve/actuator piston position.

Limit switches shall be of quick-break type, capable of being accurately and
closely set, and mechanically connected to moving valve at all times following its
position.

G. Provide all electrical connections, disconnect switches, conduit and power wiring
for motors and remote push buttons.

H. Motorized valve shall be of normally-closed type, unless otherwise indicated on

the Drawings.

2.08 Ball Float Valve

A. All ball float valves shall be of 'Equilibrium' or equal pattern with stainless steel /
tinned copper float, unless otherwise specified elsewhere. Valve of sizes up to 50
mm diameter shall conform to BS 1212: Part 1.

B. Ball floats selected for valves up to 50mm diameter shall be sized in accordance
with the pressure zone of the valve, and shall comply fully with BS1968 or
BS2456.

C. Ball floats for valves over 50mm diameter shall conform to BS1968 or BS2456.

D. All ball valves shall be of bronze or cast iron valves body with nickel alloy and
stainless steel working parts.

E. For fresh water applications ball floats may be of copper, tinned copper, stainless
steel or plastic. For seawater applications ball floats shall be either neoprene
coated copper or plastic. All ball floats shall be spherical unless otherwise
specified.

F. Ball float shall not be secured to the lever arm by welding. The lever arm shall
either be penetrated through the ball float or secured to the ball float by
mechanical means.

2.09 Safety Relief Valves

A. Valve shall be pressure actuated type, spring return angle pattern.

B. Body, disc and base shall be constructed of bronze.

C. Valve shall be complete with trim, guides, adjusting screw with cap and threaded
connections.

2.10 Automatic Air Vents

A. Automatic air vents shall be provided at all high points of the system as
directed/specified or as indicated on the Drawings.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Connections to the service pipes shall be made at the highest point to ensure
complete venting. Automatic air vents shall be mounted so that the inlet
connection is in an exact vertical plane.

C. Automatic air vents shall have brass or gunmetal bodies, non-ferrous or stainless
steel floats and guides, and non-corrodible valves and rubber seats.

D. All automatic air vents shall be of at least 20 mm diameter unless otherwise

specified and shall be of the single large-orifice type suitable for the release or
admission of air during system filling or draining.

E. A gate valve shall be provided between the automatic air vent and the connected
pipework to enable isolation of the automatic air vent for maintenance.

F. Vents shall be designed to facilitate dirt removal while in service.

G. Automatic air vents shall be designed to open to discharge air or air/fluid mixture
and to close firmly against fluid.

2.11 Manual Air Vent

Manual air vents shall be provided at the highest points of all risers and droppers, and at
high points along pipelines.

2.12 Strainers

A. Strainers shall be provided in pump suction pipes, water tank outlets and in the
locations specified or shown on the Drawings. Strainers shall be of the same
nominal bore as the pipeline in which they are fitted. Strainers shall be properly
installed to ensure that filtered matter is retained within the screen.

B. Strainers shall be full line size, "Y" or "BASKET" type as specified or as shown on
the Drawings and readily removable for cleaning.

C. Strainers at the pump suction inlets shall be fitted with removable channel
magnets, secured to the screen or basket by stainless steel retaining lugs and
threaded rods, and placed to provide a continuous magnetic field around the
entire circumference of the screen. They shall be fitted with a breech-locking
arrangement to maintain the screen in place when removing the cover plate. The
screen cover plate shall be bolted using studs with hexagonal headed nuts and
shall be fitted with a special hinge. Initially, each strainer shall be fitted with mesh
lined baskets, reinforced on both sides with an open bottom. After initial cleaning,
the baskets shall be replaced with a standard basket, suitable for the service
required. All Y type strainers shall be complete with screw plug for drain or
blow-off.

D. Strainers of up to and including 50 mm shall be gunmetal or bronze bodied and

have screwed end caps with a brass drain plug. Strainers of 65 mm and over
shall be cast iron bodied to the requirements of BSEN 1561 with cast iron cover
and mild steel stud bolts. The cover shall be complete with a 25 mm bronze drain
valve, the outlet of which shall be capped with a brass plug.

E. Screens and baskets shall be of brass or stainless steel to suit the service
intended. The total free area of the installed screen shall be not less than 3 times
of the internal cross sectional area of the inlet pipe. Openings in the screen or
basket shall be less than 1.5 mm and 3mm in diameter for valves sizes equal to
or less than 100mm diameter and equal to or larger than 125mm diameter
respectively.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. Strainers shall be of adequate strength to withstand the working pressure.

2.13 Double Regulating and Balance Valves

A. Double regulating valves shall be provided as shown on the Drawings to ensure

proper balancing of water circuits.

B. Balancing is to be carried out to meet specified water flow rate with a tolerance of
±10%.

C. Flow measurement shall be with an accuracy better than ± 5% within the whole
measuring range. Measurement of flow and differential pressure shall be made
with a microprocessor instrument which enables the operator to read the flow
directly without the use of diagrams or tables.

D. Pressure measuring nipples shall be provided as integral ports of the valve body
for measuring differential pressure and shall have suitable means for positive
leak tight shut-off when not in use.

E. Valves shall be of globe valve design with profiled plugs to control water and flow,
to reduce noise and cavitation.

F. Adjustment and presetting of the flow shall be made with a multi-turn handwheel
using a digital scale with a resolution better than 2.5 % of the full scale.

G. The setting shall be lockable with a mechanical stop, which allows the valve to be
closed but not to be opened further than the adjusted value. The mechanical stop
shall be concealed from view as far as possible.

H. Valves shall offer the possibility for water-tight shut-off against the same water
pressure as the body pressure rating.

I. Valves with thread connection in sizes from 10 to 50 mm shall be bronze,

complete with regulating disc having a logarithmic flow characteristic, position
indicator and reinforced nylon hand wheel. Body working pressure rating shall be
of at least 20 bar at 150°C and in compliance with BS 7350, BS 5154 and
threaded to BS 21.

J. Valves with flanged connections from size 65 mm diameter and above shall be
made of cast iron equivalent to BSEN 1561 for a body pressure rating of at least
16 bar at 120°C and in compliance with BS 7350, BS 5152 and flanged to BSEN
1092 unless otherwise specified. The stem, seat and disk ring shall be of grade
316 stainless steel.

K. Valves shall be sized to operate in a nominal measuring range of 50% to 100% of

full opening to ensure maximum accuracy and shall comply with manufacturer’s
recommended valve sizing methods. Calculation on sizing of valves shall be
submitted for review, and shall include information including valve size, Kv value,
flow rate, calculated differential pressure with valve preset.

L. One set of measuring instrument shall be provided. The measuring instrument

shall be microprocessor based with an accuracy of ±1% of displayed value. The
computerized balancing instrument shall be powered by re-chargeable Ni-Cd
batteries suitable for operation from a 240 V, single phase 50 Hz power supply.
The instrument shall be user-friendly with self-prompting menu to guide the user.
Units of measurement shall be selectable as specified below:

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Differential pressure bar, kPa, mH2O

Flow m3 /hr, l/hr, l/s

M. The instrument shall have memory storage space to store up to a minimum of

200 measured values and a minimum of 400 log values. These stored measured
values and log values can be directly viewed from the instrument or printout on a
printer or viewed on a computer. All necessary software shall be provided to
enable viewing on a personal computer.

2.14 Dirt Pockets and Drainage System

A. Provide dirt pocket at bottom of all water, steam and condensate risers. They
shall not be smaller than the full size of the riser and shall be approximately 150
mm long.

B. Provide on each dirt pocket, 25 mm bronze hose gate valve, with hose cap and
chain for working pressure as specified.

C. Provide 25mm drain pipe connecting the gate valve and the nearest floor drain.

2.15 Automatic Flow Control Valves

A. Provide automatic pressure compensating flow control valves of sizes as

recommended by manufacturer where indicated on the Drawings. Provide
transformation pieces for valves of different line size.

B. Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to the
required capacity within 5% accuracy over an operating pressure differential of at
least 14 times the minimum required for control.

C. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self-contained open-

chamber cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow internal working parts shall be
stainless steel. No plated materials are acceptable.

D. The stainless steel cartridge assembly shall consist of a spring-loaded cup. The
cup shall be guided at two points and shall utilise the full available differential
pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction and
hysteresis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin orifice plate for self cleaning
of the variable inlet ports over the full control range.

E. Valves shall be of control range of 9 kPa - 138 kPa differential pressure with the
minimum pressure drop of kPa to control flow. Cast iron valve bodies shall be
provided with inlet and outlet tappings suitable for connection of instruments for
verification of flow rates. Valve bodies shall be rated for system working pressure.

F. Furnish certified performance data for the flow control valve based on
independent laboratory tests.

G. Each automatic flow control valve shall be furnished with a valve kit consisting of
6.35 mm x 50 mm minimum size nipples, quick-disconnect valves (to be located
outside of insulation), and fittings suitable for use with the measuring instruments
specified.

H. Provide a metal identification tag, with chain for each installed valve. The tag to
be marked with model number and rated flow in l/s.

I. Furnish flow measuring instrument to verify flow rates.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1. Correct flow shall be verified by establishing that the operating pressure

differential across the valve tappings is within the range indicated on the
submittal data sheet for that model number.

2. The pressure measuring apparatus shall be portable.

2.16 Thermometers

A. Furnish 220mm scale thermometers of adjustable angle type, V-shape case,

glass front, mercury-filled / alcohol filled red reading column, separable socket
connection complete with stainless steel well, where indicated on the Drawings.

B. Provide remote bulb temperature indicators with the temperature gauges

mounted on a wooden base when temperature sensing locations are higher than
3m above the floor.

2.17 Temperature/Pressure Gauges

A. Black enamel iron case 100mm diameter, threaded chromium-plated brass ring
with heavy glass, bronze spring tube, precision movement and micrometer
adjustment. Furnish pulsation dampers, steel pipe fittings and shutoff cocks of
needle point globe type, all brass, for the working pressure as specified.

B. Provide remote temperature/pressure indicators with temperature/pressure

gauges mounted on a wooden base when temperature/pressure sensing locations
are higher than 3m above the floor.

2.18 Gauge Cocks

A. Gauge instrument shall be fitted with a gauge cock between the instrument and
the service pipe.

B. Gauge cock bodies shall be constructed from bronze and have a polished finish.

C. Gauge cocks shall be of the straight pattern ground plug type with lever handle.

D. All gauge cocks shall be of the 3-port type with the pipework on the drain/vent
port extended to discharge clear of all equipment and insulation.

E. Gauge cock connections shall conform to BS 21.

2.19 Electromagnet and Ultrasonic Flowmeters

A. The flowmeter shall be of the direct reading type in l/s, and shall be suitable for
the chemical and physical properties of the fluids to be measured and suitable for
both horizontal and vertical installations.

B. Each flowmeter shall consist of a flow sensor, an integral signal converter/

transmitter and a digital display unit. The flow sensor shall be installed in the
pipework without obstructing the flow. The protection class of the sensor and
converter/transmitter housing shall be at least to IP 67 and IP 65 respectively.
The flowmeter shall have a constant accuracy to a maximum error of ± 0.5% of
the actual flow for flow velocity of greater than or equal to 0.5 m/s. The
installation of the flowmeter shall be as per the manufacturer's recommendation
with sufficient length of straight pipe ran both at the upstream and downstream
piping.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. The flowmeter shall conform to BSEN 50081 and BSEN 50082 or similar
international standards on Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) compliance for
industrial and commercial applications.

2.20 Energy Meters

A. The calculator unit of an energy meter shall calculate and display digitally the
water energy consumption in kWh with an accuracy to a maximum error of ±1.5%
throughout the range of measurement.

B. The number of digits of accumulated energy consumption display shall not be

less than six.

C. The housing protection for the microprocessor and calculator unit shall not be less
than IP 54.

D. Signal connection facilities to the Central Control and Monitoring System /

Building Management System shall be provided for displaying the energy
consumption computed, the flow rate and temperature readings as specified.

2.21 Open Expansion and Make-up Tanks

A. Open expansion tanks for the complete MVAC/HVAC systems shall be provided.
Sizes and locations of the tanks are shown on the Drawings.

B. Each tank shall be constructed of fibreglass panel type with stainless steel water
tight hinged cover, locking device, internal and external cat ladders. Material for
the construction of the tanks shall be of the type approved by the Water Authority.

C. Each tank shall be complete with drain valves, isolating valves, over flow, vent,
outlet and drain, quick fill and funnel type fill connection, make up float controller,
level operated make up valve and low level alarm. A water tight hinged cover
shall be provided for access to valves and level sensors.

2.22 In Line Separators for Seawater or Well Water System

A. Provide separators for seawater or well water system where shown on Drawings.

B. Separator shall be designed to remove 98% of all sand particles down to 74

microns. Maximum pressure drop shall be less than 85 kPa at design flow rate.

C. Entire body of separator shall be constructed of carbon steel coated for corrosion
resistance.

D. Each separator shall have a timer operated pinch valve for slurry removal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 General

A. Provide valves at points as shown on the Drawings or specified and arrange to

give complete and regulating control of piping on the Drawings systems. Provide
valves full size of line in which they are installed. Install valves with neat
appearance and grouping, so that all parts are easily accessible for operation and
maintenance.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Air Vent Valves:

1. Provide manual air vent assemblies at all high points necessary to purge
air from piping system. Connect copper tubing to the top of high point, or
other location, and extend down to a nearby floor drain.

2. Provide automatic type air vent valves where indicated and installed with a
minimum 9mm diameter short pipe with globe valve in riser. Provide full
size copper tubing drain lines from automatic valve to the nearest floor
drain.

3.02 Installation

A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal but not inverted.

B. Install gate or butterfly valves for shut-off and isolating service, to isolate
equipment, part of a system, or vertical riser.

C. Install globe or angle valves for throttling service and control device or meter by-
pass.

D. Provide spring-loaded check valves on discharge side of water booster pumps.

E. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, and low points of piping and
apparatus.

F. Provide drain valves with threaded ends for hose connections.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.15(AC)/12 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.16 DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of ductwork, diffusers, registers,
grilles, dampers and accessories.

1.02 General Requirement

A. All ductwork and distribution accessories delivered to Site shall be new and
indelibly stamped to identify different grades, materials and manufacturers.

B. Provide all ductwork, diffusers, registers, dampers and grilles generally in

accordance with the Drawings.

C. All materials used including duckwork, insulations, adhesives, flexible

connections, gaskets, sealants, fibre glass boards, etc. shall fully comply with all
requirements of the FSD.

D. Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be selected with good Air Distributiion
Performance Index (ADPI) and shall meet requirements of noise criteria as
stipulated in the Section “Acoustic Treatment”.

E. Thermal insulation for ductwork shall be fabricated off-site. Detailed requirements

shall refer to the “Insulation” section of this spectification.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Products shall be furnished by the manufacturer who normally supplies these

types of products and can show evidence of having furnished such products that
have been in successful operation for a period of at least five years.

B. Applicable Codes and Standards:

1. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.

2. Building Energy Code (BEC)

3. HVCA, DW/143, A Practical Guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing

4. HVCA DW/144, Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork

5. HVCA, DW/151, Specification for Plastics Ductwork

6. HVCA, DW/171 Standard for Kitchen Ventilation Systems

7. HVCA, DW/191, Guide to Good Practice Glass Fibre Ductwork

8. BS, BSEN, ISO, NFPA, SMACNA and UL

1.04 Submittal

A. Submit shop drawings including plans, sections, elevations, schematics,

schedules and details of all system for review, The shop drawings shall show
locations of all dampers, splitters, hangers, supports, grilles, diffusers, louvres,
flexible joints, access panels & testing points for review.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Submit construction and mounting details for hangers, dampers, diffusers, louvres,
grilles, hoods for review.

C. Submit guaranteed performance figures for each size of supply grilles, ceiling
diffusers offered. The performance figures shall include:

1. Face velocity

2. Static pressure drop

3. Throw in meters for terminal velocity of 2.5m/s, 7.5m/s and resultant room
air velocities.

D. Submit samples of all grilles, diffusers, louvers, hangers, sheet metals, fire
dampers and flexible connectors for review prior to ordering.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Sheet Metal Ductwork

A. All sheet metal and stainless steel ducting shall be constructed to the
recommendations of the HVCA, DW/144.

B. Ductwork shall be constructed of galvanised steel sheets to BSEN 10346 of

minimum thickness complying with standards as listed above.

C. Steel metal duct sizes given on the Drawings are clear internal dimensions and
allowance shall be made for both internal and external insulation where applicable.

D. Provide splitter dampers, complete with adjusting handle or similar device to all
branches off the supply air ducts to regulate air flows along the main ducts and
the branch ducts, whether they are specifically shown on the Drawings or not.

E. Provide stainless steel dampers to stainless steel branch ducts as shown on the
Drawings.

F. Provide fire dampers as indicated on the Drawings. Fire damper construction

shall conform to the requirements of FSD.

G. Provide flexible connectors of not less than 50mm long between all air handling
units/fans and the associated ductwork to prevent transmission of vibration to
adjacent elements. Also provide flexible connectors at expansion/movement
joints in buildings whether shown on the Drawings or not.

H. The material used for the flexible connectors shall withstand the conditions of
temperature and air pressure, and shall comply with the standards of air-tightness.
The material shall be constructed of non-combustible material and comply with
the requirements of FSD.

I. Provide access doors in ducts where required to gain access to dampers, filters or
controls.

J. Access doors and panels in ductworks shall be quick release pattern. Multiple
screw fixings will not be accepted. The doors shall be of air-tight construction
with gasket mounted on the periphery of door frame.

K. Provide flanged joints to equipment and elsewhere as necessary to facilitate

maintenance.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

L. All flanged joints in duct work shall be made up with rubber gaskets or suitable
mastic material in accordance with the requirements of FSD.

M. Apply sealants, adhesives, tapes to joints for sealing. All such materials shall
comply with the requirements of DW/144 and FSD.

N. Balancing dampers of appropriate types shall be provided for air balancing

whether shown on the Drawings or not.

Short radius rectangular and square elbows in air ducts shall be equipped with
double thickness turning vanes. Long radius elbows shall be used wherever
possible.

O. The transition ductwork between silencers and fans of 1m in diameter and above
shall be constructed of not less than 2mm thick galvanized steel plates. For fans
below 1m in diameter, the transition ductwork between fans and silencers shall be
constructed of not less than 1.2mm thick galvanized sheet steel.

2.02 Flexible Ducts

A. Provide flexible ducts where required or as shown on the Drawings. Flexible duct
shall be neatly fixed and adequately supported.

B. Flexible duct used to connect constant or variable air volume boxes and main
ductworks as indicated on the Drawings shall comply with Part 7 of DW/144.

C. Flexible duct length shall not exceed 2,000mm.

D. Bending radius shall be sufficient to prevent undue tensioning of the outside of

the bend and restriction of the throat likely to cause deformation and/or leakage.
The ratio between the bending radius and the duct diameter shall be not less than
2. In no case shall flexible ductwork be used to connect misaligned ducts nor
used as main air distribution duct.

E. Flexible duct shall consist of flexible corrugated metal tubing of stainless steel,
aluminium, tin plated or aluminium coated steel. Flexible duct shall be suitable for
an operating temperature range of -5° to 90°C and shall comply with the
requirements of FSD.

F. The frictional resistance to air flow per unit length of flexible duct shall not exceed
150% of the frictional resistance per unit length of galvanized steel duct of the
same diameter.

G. Flexible duct shall be insulated and wrapped with a minimum 25mm thick
24kg/m3 density fibreglass blanket. The outer vapour barrier shall be aluminium
foil of the FSD approved type.

H. Flexible duct shall not be used for any system which is designed for handling
smoke or as a part of a smoke control system.

I. The leakage from any section of flexible duct work shall not exceed 1% of the
local design air flow rate at the local maximum static pressure.

2.03 Circular and Oval Duct

A. Circular and oval ductwork shall be spirally wound galvanised steel or stainless
steel ducting as specified.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Only standard proprietary fittings shall be used for circular and oval ductworks.

2.04 Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork

A. Provide all kitchen exhaust duct as shown on the Drawings.

B. All exhaust ductwork serving kitchens shall be formed from minimum 1.0mm
stainless steel sheets of grade 316 / 316L.

C. All kitchen exhaust ductwork shall have continuously soldered seams and water
tight construction. Drained sump with a drain connection plugged or to run with
pipework to suitable drain points shall be provided at low points as required.
Exact location of the drain point shall be determined on Site.

D. Air tight side access doors shall be provided every 3000mm, minimum size 450 x
450mm. Access doors shall have the same equivalent thermal resistance as the
main exhaust ductwork.

2.05 Fire Rated Ductwork

A. Where shown on the Drawings, fire rated ductwork or equipment enclosure shall
be fabricated from fire rated material to the requirements of FSD, BS 476 or
relevant UL standards,

B. The construction of the ductwork or enclosure shall take into account the
structural strength, noise isolation as required and the requirements of Class C
duct in accordance with DW/144.

C. All necessary supports, cover strips, aligning strips and other accessories required
for the complete installation of fire rated ductwork shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer as the duct sheets and shall be assembled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation to the required fire rating and complying with
FSD requirements. Approval letter from FSD regarding the construction details
and test certificates from a recognized laboratory shall be submitted.

D. Whether BS 476 thermal insulation criterion is applicable or not, fire rated air-
conditioning supply, return and exhaust ductwork shall be complete with thermal
insulation aluminium foil vapour barrier.

E. All fire resistant ductwork or enclosure, apart from its fire resisting quality, shall be
able to resist accidental mechanical damage and shall pass the hard body impact
test in accordance with BSEN 1128 with the weight being dropped from not less
than 1m.

2.06 Fire Dampers

A. Provide fire dampers in air ducts in the following locations:

1. Wherever a duct passes through a floor slab or a fire compartment as

shown on the Drawings.

2. Other locations as required by the latest edition of the Building Ordinance

of Hong Kong.

3. Other locations as required on the Drawings.

B. Fire dampers shall fully comply with the requirements of FSD.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Fire damper casings and blades shall be constructed of mild steel, painted with
two coats of primer paints and provided with a mild steel angle frame on each
side of a wall or floor.

D. Fire damper casings shall be flanged to suit the ductwork to which they are fitted
and the cross sectional area shall not be less than that of the ductwork.

E. Blade and fusible link shall be accessible for servicing through an air-tight
inspection door placed upstream or downstream of the air path wherever it
provides better access.

F. Provide fusible link of FSD approved type with temperature rating not exceeding
69°C to all fire dampers unless otherwise specified. FSD’s approval letter for the
fusible link shall be submitted for record before installation. The link shall be
arranged in an accessible position and at upstream of the damper.

G. Details and positions of all fire dampers and associated access doors shall be
submitted for review prior to installation on Site.

H. Install the electro-thermal type fusible link in locations as indicated on the

Drawings. The bare wire link shall be provided adjacent to the damper unless
otherwise indicated.

I. Provide all necessary fixing framework for the installation of fire dampers.

J. Provide FSD approved type fire rate material to seal off the clearance between
the fire dampers and wall or floor.

K. Proprietary fire dampers shall be of FSD approved type and installation details
shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

L. Supply 50 percent spare fire damper fusible links of the total number installed to
the Employer at the time of Practical Completion of the Contract.

2.07 Motorized Dampers (MD)

A. All motorized dampers shall be suitable for installation in either a vertical plane or
a horizontal plane as shown on the Drawings.

B. The damper shall be operated by electric actuator and shall be readily assembled
on Site from modular panels. Each motor operated damper panel shall be of the
multiple-parallel-blade type, with an independent channel frame; and shall be
factory-assembled complete with frames, blades, shafts, bearings, seals, linkage,
and all accessories required to erect the panels into composite dampers.

C. Motorized damper shall be provided with all structural support members and
hardware required for installation as indicated on the Drawings with additional
framing or trims as required to complete the installation.

D. Motorized damper shall be arranged for motor operation to two (2) blade positions
(fully open and fully closed) or more than two (2) positions as indicated on the
Drawings.

E. Motorized damper actuator shall be mounted outside of the damper frame.

F. Spring-return type damper actuator shall be provided either to open or close

damper as required in the event of power failure. Positions of dampers on power
failure are indicated on the Drawings. Actuator shall be submitted for review.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

G. All motorized dampers shall be the product of a single manufacturer; and all alike
components shall be provided by a single supplier.

H. Motorized damper module assembly shall have a net free face area of not less
than 80 % measured to the inside of the frames.

I. Design of dampers shall be based on standard air having a density of 1.20 kg/m 3.

J. The motorized damper manufacturer shall carry out factory tests to verify that
when the dampers are fully closed and holding against a differential pressure of
1000 Pa, air leakage through the damper will not exceed 0.1 m3/s per square
metre of net damper face area.

K. When the dampers are in the fully open position and air is flowing across the
damper at a uniform velocity of 10 m/s, the static-pressure drop across the
damper shall not exceed 38 Pa.

L. The motorized dampers and their associated structural-supporting systems shall,

when the dampers are in the fully closed position, be capable of withstanding a
differential pressure across the dampers of not less than 1.5 kPa.

M. The motorized damper blade and shaft assemblies shall be supported at each
end by means of heavy duty, permanent self-lubricating bronze bearings.

N. AlI motorized damper blade seals and damper frame seals shall be fabricated of
a flexible material suitable for the specified operating conditions as required. The
seals shall be factory-installed in dove-tail grooves incorporated for this purpose
in the design of the blade and frames to facilitate a tight closure between the
blades, and between the blades and frame. All seals shall sit securely in the
closed damper position. Alternative design of the seals will be subject to review
by the Architect/Engineer. Noise due to resonance of spring-type seals or any
other source will be rejected.

Each module of damper with only two operating positions should have one limit
switch with two contacts to monitor its open/closed status. If any one module of
the damper fails to operate, the damper shall be considered not functioning
properly. For each module of damper with three operating positions, two or more
limit switches shall be provided.

O. Motorized damper linkage shall consist of stainless steel rods not less than
6.4mm in diameter, extending through bearings inserted in brackets fabricated of
stainless steel. The linkage bearings shall be fabricated from bronze or other
material suitable for the specified operating conditions as required. The linkage
brackets shall either be attached to the damper-blade shafts or be side-mounted
and mechanically inter-connected with the shafts. Set screws shall not be used in
the linkage assembly.

P. Motorized damper frames shall be of a channels cross section with not less than a
100 mm web and 50 mm flanges, and shall be fabricated of minimum 2mm thick
hot-dipped galvanized steel plate to BSEN 10327. Reinforcing bosses and
dove-tail grooves for mounting frame seals shall be integral parts of the channel
configuration. The corners of the frames shall be either welded or reinforced by
means of riveted gusset plates.

Q. All screws, bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors, and/or other hardware
required to complete assembly/installation shall be fabricated from stainless steel
grade 316, and all intermediate supports, framing members, and hardware

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

required for assembly/installation of the damper shall be fabricated of stainless

steel grade 316, or hot-dipped galvanized steel.

R. The motorized dampers shall be installed using fastening devices and structural
support elements herein specified, and in accordance with the published
instructions of the damper manufacturer.

S. Motorized damper blades shall have an aerofoil cross-section, and shall be

fabricated of minimum 2mm thick hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet to BSEN
10327. All unprotected edges shall be touched up with an acceptable paint-on
type zinc-based protective coating. The width of the blades, measured in the
direction of airflow shall not be less than 100 mm and shall not be greater than
200 mm.

T. Motorized damper blade shafts shall be fabricated of stainless steel, and shall not
be less than 12.8 mm in diameter. The design of the shafts shall incorporate the
devices required for securely locking the blades onto the shafts.

U. All hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet for MOD, MSFD and MFD shall comply with
BSEN 10327.

V. Actuator shall be of sufficient torque to ensure tight closure of the damper, and
shall be capable of being detached with ease to allow manual operation of the
damper. The actuator shall be provided with spring return to close or open as
required in the design in case of power failure.

W. The actuator linkage shall be capable of being adjusted so as to allow the damper
to function as a volume control damper.

2.08 Motorized Smoke and Fire Dampers and Motorized Fire Dampers (MSFD/MFD)

MSFD/MFD shall comply with the requirements of FSD and as specified above for
MOD, with the following additional requirements:

A. MSFD/MFD frames and other components made of steel shall be hot-dipped

galvanized to BSEN 10327.

B. MSFD/MFD design and construction materials shall be submitted for review and
shall conform to the high temperature ratings as specified on the Equipment
Schedules and/or Drawings.

C. MSFD/MFD shall comply with BS 476: Part 20 or UL 555 and Class II to UL 555S.
MSFD/MFD shall be tested in accordance with the procedure specified in UL
555S with respect to the requirements of elevated temperature and air leakage of
the MSFD/MFD.

D. MSFD/MFD shall have a minimum fire rating to match with the FRP requirement
of the structural elements where the MSFD/MFD is mounted.

E. All materials used for the construction of the MSFD/MFD shall be so selected and
all components and accessories of the dampers shall be so designed that the
dampers will be fully operational in accordance with the performance
requirements specified when fully exposed in an air stream temperature of 250°C
for not less than one hour. Accessories shall include actuators, limit switches and
any other damper status sensing devices.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. The entire damper and associated actuator shall meet the requirements of FSD
and be of fail safe type. The fail safe positions of the dampers shall be as
indicated on the Drawings.

2.09 Volume Control Dampers

A. Volume control dampers shall be of the opposed blade, multi-leaf type with
overlapped blades. Single blade dampers of minimum 1.6 mm thick and suitably
stiffened may be used for duct smaller than 200mm by 200mm subject to prior
review.

B. All dampers shall be constructed with no vibration or rattling under all operating
conditions.

C. The setting of the damper shall be clearly indicated and marked permanently
after the system has been regulated. The lever shall be aligned with the damper.

D. Dampers shall be capable of being held in position by means of an Allen screw to

fix the position of the lever after regulation.

E. The air leakage through the dampers shall not be more than 5% at the maximum
system pressure when fully closed.

F. Provide suitable seals between damper spindles and casing.

G. For system static pressure below 1,000Pa or ductwork velocity below 12m/s,
blade of at least 50mm wide shall be used. For static pressure at or above
1,000Pa, at least 100mm wide blade shall be used. Central blade reinforcement
bar shall be provided for damper span longer than 1,500mm. Single module of a
damper shall not exceed 2,000mm x 1,000mm.

2.10 Non-Return Dampers

A. Dampers shall present a minimum resistance to air flow under running conditions
and take up a stable position in operation.

B. Maximum resistance shall be presented under reverse air flow conditions such
that they will be forced to close and remain so.

C. Resilient strips or other purpose made devices shall be provided to prevent the
damper from rattling and as an aid to air sealing under reverse flow conditions.

D. Blades shall be rigidly constructed of galvanized steel or aluminium sheet of not

less than 0.8mm and shall be square straight, free of buckling.

E. Blades of less than 300mm in height shall be fitted with a 3mm steel spindle at
each end. Blades of 300mm and over in height shall be fitted with a 8mm steel
spindle at each end. Spindles shall be carried by sealed ball bearings or copper
bush.

F. Bearing or copper bushing shall be accessible for cleaning and lubrication and
shall be mounted in a rigid galvanized steel frame. The maximum length of each
blade without a central bearing shall be 1000mm.

2.11 Square Ceiling Diffusers

A. Diffusers shall be constructed of extruded aluminium and shall be enamel baked

to an acceptable colour.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Diffusers shall have removable cores and square or round necks. Diffuser sizes
are shown on the Drawings.

C. Provide aluminium or steel opposed blade volume control dampers of black

colour with concealed adjustment lever. Volume control damper shall be
equipped and factory fabricated by the same diffuser manufacturer. In general,
damper will not be required for a fan coil unit system having a single supply
diffuser.

D. Provide galvanized steel sheet painted black at the front view to seal off the
dummy diffuser.

E. Diffuser rings or frames shall be compatible with the ceiling construction in which
they are installed. A transition piece shall be provided to connect the diffuser to
the duct. All edges exposed to view shall be rolled or otherwise stiffened and
rounded. Internal parts shall be removable to permit cleaning of the diffuser and
provide access to the duct.

F. Baffles, turning vanes or other devices shall be provided for the required air
distribution pattern. Equalizing grids shall also be provided.

2.12 Supply and Transfer Air Grilles and Registers

A. Double deflection supply air grilles/registers shall be connected to ducts with

provision for tamper-proof adjustment of air pattern. Adjusting tool shall be
provided by the same manufacturer. Grilles/registers shall have at least 80% free
area.

B. Furnish grilles/registers to meet the size and capacities as shown on the Drawings.
Provide gaskets to obviate air leakage.

C. Grilles and registers shall be factory assembled with opposed blade volume
control dampers operable through the grille face. The adjustment shall be made
using a key through the face of the register. The volume control damper shall be
group-operated of opposed blade type. The operating mechanism shall not
project through any part of the register face.

D. All grilles and registers shall be of extruded aluminium enamel baked to an

acceptable colour.

E. All grilles shall be capable of being removed easily from the ductwork.

F. All edges exposed to view shall be rolled or otherwise stiffened and rounded. All
edges shall be equipped with airtight, non-combustible neoprene, or sealing strips
to prevent leakage. The register rings or frames shall be compatible with the
ceiling construction on which they are installed.

2.13 Return and Exhaust Grilles, Registers and Diffusers

A. Grilles shall have single set of fins which shall be vision proof to effectively mask
the return opening.

B. Free area of grille core shall be at least 80%

C. Clause 2.12, Items B to F as specified above shall be followed.

D. Grilles and registers shall be of hinge type.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. Return air diffusers shall match the supply diffusers in appearance and shall be
constructed of the same material and identical in surface finish as required.

F. Return air diffuser inner vane core shall be removable without the need of tools to
access the return air filter, which may be installed behind the diffuser or grille.
The filter shall either be clipped to the grille or framed inside the ductwork.

2.14 Linear Air Diffusers

A. Each diffuser shall be of multi-slotted vertical/horizontal discharge, ceiling

mounted type fitted into field-insulated air boot with spigot for receiving supply air
duct as detailed on the Drawings.

B. Diffuser of extruded aluminium shall be enamel baked to an acceptable colour.

For slot type diffuses, adjustable vanes providing 180° pattern for discharge
direction control and flow rate control shall be provided. The linear diffuser shall
be capable of maintaining a horizontal discharge pattern at a turn down ratio
down to 20% of the maximum specified air volume without air dumping.

C. For slot type diffuses, number of slots and lengths of diffuser and capacity shall
be as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide air boots to the diffusers as shown on the Drawings. Air boot casing shall
be constructed of minimum 1mm thick galvanized steel with interior surfaces
insulated with 48kg/cu.m, 25mm thick glass fibre coated to prevent erosion.
Insulation and air boot shall be extended to cover the collar of diffuser. Volume
control damper shall be provided in the air boot spigot.

E. The insulation shall comply with NFPA-90A, UL-181 and BS 476 Part 4, 5, 6 and
7 standards (or related clauses of ISO TR 5658-1) and the requirement as
stipulated in the Building Energy Code.

F. Exterior surface of boots shall be painted and finished to an acceptable colour.

G. The flanges of the diffusers shall be required to support 'drop in' ceiling panels
subject to the ceiling panel design.

H. Provide suitable support points independent of the suspended ceiling for the air
boots and the associated diffusers.

I. Air boot spigot location and dimensions shall generally be as indicated on the
Drawings.

J. Where linear diffusers are mounted in a continuous line, there shall be means of
ensuring alignment between consecutive diffusers and of equalizing pressure
behind the vanes.

K. Provide galvanized steel sheet painted black at the front view to seal off the
dummy part of diffuser.

2.15 Nozzle and Jet Diffusers

A. Nozzle/Jet diffuser assembly shall consist of round diffuser elements which shall
be fitted to square or rectangular back plate, opposed blade volume control
damper and duct collar.

B. Each nozzle/jet diffuser assembly shall consist of the diffuser elements and shall
be compatible with the architectural design in which they are installed.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Individual diffuser element shall be capable of adjusting the air deflection up to

30° from any plane perpendicular to the face. Adjustment shall be accomplished
from front or back of the diffuser without tools.

D. Volume control dampers shall be provided for the diffusers.

2.16 Light Troffer Diffuser

A. Diffuser shall be saddle-type low profile unit with oval side inlet.

B. Casing shall be constructed of minimium 1 mm glavanized steel completed with

internal thermal insulation.

C. Provide with air pattern controllers to control the discharge from horizontal to
vertical and provide trim dampering. Pattern controllers shall be adjustable
through the discharge slots of the diffuser fixture combination.

D. Diffusers shall be designed to compatible and intergrate with the light fixture
without using screw type fasteners.

E. Independent support shall be provided to the light troffer diffusers.

2.17 External Louvers

A. Unless otherwise specified, all external intake and exhaust louvers shall be
provided by the Main Contractor. Louvers shown on the Drawings shall be
provided and comply with this Specification.

B. Intake and discharge louvers shall be formed of aluminium frame with profiled
aluminium weather-proof blades unless otherwise specified. Louvers shall be
anodised to an acceptable colour.

C. Provide a detachable galvanized 6mmx6mmx1.2mm diameter wire mesh screen

on the rear face of each louver.

D. Where the total louver face area exceed 4m2, the louver shall be made up of
individual sections mounted on a rigid galvanized steel supporting structure
spanning across the opening.

E. Provide all external frame and supporting steelwork for the louvers.

F. Louvers of dimensions exceeding 300mmx300mm and at installed height from

ground floor level less than 3,000mm shall be protected internally with security
bars of size 12mm at 150mm centres mounting in a steel frame with 6mm cross
bracing on spans over 1,000mm.

G. The total free area of any external louver shall not be less than 60% of the face
area as indicated on the Drawings and the pressure drops through any louver
shall not exceed 25 Pa unless otherwise specified.

H. Aluminium louvers shall not be used for smoke extraction system and air release
system.

2.18 Door Grilles and Louvers

A. Grilles and louvers which are incorporated in doors shall be provided by the Main
Contractor unless otherwise specified.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Check all such grilles and louvers during the installation to ensure the suitability
and the proper operation for the A/C system.

2.19 Cleansing points

A. The ductwork cleaning point shall generally be of a type consisting of a 50mm

diameter metal flange with a 20mm diameter hole closed with an air-tight screwed
plug through which inspection, cleaning and disinfect ion of the ductwork can be
carried out.

B. The ductwork cleaning point shall be of proprietary product, so constructed and

installed that no cold bridge which cause condensation will occur.

2.20 Test Points

A. Provide test points for measuring air flow at the following locations: at all fans (in
the straightest section of duct near to the outlet); at main branches after
regulating dampers, at cooling coils, heater batteries (both before and after the
coil or battery), and any other position indicated on the Drawings. Exact locations
of these holes shall be shown on shop drawings and submitted for review.

B. On insulated ductwork, test holes shall be boxed out for the thickness of the
insulation.

C. Test holes shall be 25mm diameter and fitted with an effective removable
proprietary sealed cap.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Ductwork Installation

A. Provide complete ductwork systems and ensure the installation can be adjusted
to the designed flow rates.

B. Check all the Drawings provided in regard to structural requirements and other
finishes before detailing the ducting system. Allowance shall be made for the
detailed development and on Site coordination.

C. Submit all ductwork detailed drawings for review before fabrication commences.

D. Duct sizes given on the Drawings are clear internal dimensions and allowance
must be made for insulation where applicable.

E. Protect ductwork, appurtenances, and openings from dirt, foreign objects and
damage during the construction period.

F. Replace damaged ductwork and other appurtenances at no additional cost.

G. All ductwork to be rigidly and adequately supported at intervals not exceeding 2

meters.

H. Provide hangers for the proper installation of ducts in accordance with DW/144.
Hangers shall be of 7mm, 10mm, or 13mm diameter galvanized steel rods,
depending on size of duct. All such hangers shall be provided with screwed
lengths on the lower for level adjustment of duct runs. All nuts shall be provided
with washers and lock-nuts, and projecting ends of bolts shall be cut off.

I. Supports shall not be riveted or bolted to the air ducts.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/12 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

J. Install dampers and splitters in a manner so that they can be adjusted at any time
after completion of the work.

K. Install dampers without strain or distortion in any part of the dampers.

L. Adjust moving parts such that they can move freely.

M. Caulk dampers airtight around frames.

N. Adjust dampers and splitter adjusting rods to operate freely, between the open
and close position.

Install flexible connections in accordance with Part 7 of DW/144.

O. All ductwork shall be manufactured according to the dimensions taken on site.

Provision shall be allowed to accommodate any discrepancies between the
Drawings and the site dimensions.

P. All branches and openings in ducts shall be purposely made prior to erection of
the ductwork.

Q. Cross-breaking shall be permitted on low velocity ductwork only and in no case

where rigid external insulation will be applied.

R. Internal roughness, sharp edges or obstructions to air flow shall not be allowed.

S. External edges and corners formed from cheated joints shall be neatly dressed
down with air tight joints.

T. Provide at least 75mm clearance from ductwork to walls, ceiling and obstructions
where a high standard of cleanliness must be maintained.

3.02 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles Installation

A. Install diffusers, registers and grilles so that they can be key adjusted from the
face directly without special tools.

B. Unless otherwise specified, install vanes, volume control dampers and multiple-
blade extractors so that they can be removed through the diffuser and registers
for access to the duct.

C. Install diffusers, grilles, registers and louvers with frame connected to the
ductwork and provide soft gaskets inserted under the frame or otherwise so
arranged such as to avoid air leakage around the diffusers and grilles.

3.03 Cleaning of Air System

A. Clean air systems by means of industrial type vacuum cleaners to effectively

remove dust and foreign material from surfaces in the air stream. Cleaning shall
be carried out in sections as the installation progresses.

B. Clean exposed ductwork and leave it in satisfactory condition, free from dust,
grease, oil or foreign material for application of insulation or finish painting.

3.04 Access Panel

A. Each change of direction (90° or greater) shall be provided with an access panel
at the turning elbow of air ducts for ductwork maintenance.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/13 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Where there is no air grille, one access panel shall be provided at every 15 m of
straight air duct. The openings in ductwork for air grilles can be utilized for gaining
access.

C. Access panels shall be provided in the inlet and/or discharge side(s) of equipment.

D. Generally access panels shall be of size 450 mm by 450 mm and shall be

provided in an accessible horizontal position.

3.05 MD and MSFD/MFD Installation

A. Each damper shall be installed so as to provide smooth operation, opening and

closing without shock in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Undue flexing or bending of connecting rods and linkage will not be acceptable.
Such connecting rod or linkage shall be replaced with either a corrected design,
higher strength material or increased size of such a component at no extra cost.

C. Dampers shall be supported independently of the ductwork.

D. Wall and floor mounted dampers: All unavoidable spaces and purpose-provided
spaces between the damper frames and the structure shall be sealed as required.
Blanking-off plates for such purpose shall be considered as part of the damper
assembly and shall be provided at no additional cost.

E. Damper module installations shall be fully sealed by gaskets between the module
frame and the mounting frame. The gasket material for MSFD/MFD shall meet
the continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250°C for not less than
one hour and shall be subject to approval of FSD.

F. Identification of damper position is required on easy visible and accessible

position, and the damper setting position after balancing shall be marked in a
permanent manner.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.16(AC)/14 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.17 INSULATION

1 GENERAL

1.1 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of thermal insulation.

1.2 General Requirements

A. Deliver materials securely wrapped, packaged and labelled for safe handling.

B. Store materials in dry store.

C. No asbestos based insulation shall be used.

D. Thermal insulation shall be applied to all air or water distribution system

conveying conditioned, warmed or chilled fluid.

E. Air distribution system conveying untreated fresh air and exhaust air need not be
insulated except where they pass through conditioned space or where
condensation may occur.

1.3 Quality Requirements

A. The insulation materials furnished shall be a product of a manufacturer who has

made the same product for a period of at least five years.

B. All insulation materials including the associated fasteners, adhesives, tapes, etc.
shall be tested to and with results in compliance with the following requirements
of:

1. BS 5422, BS 5970 and BSEN ISO 12241 and FSD.

2. BS 476-12 or equivalent; Ignitable T;

3. BS 476-6 or equivalent, Fire propagation I<12, i 1<6

4. BS 476-7 or equivalent; Surface Spread of Flame Class 1

5. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.

6. Building Energy Code (BEC)

1.4 Submittals

A. Submit complete catalogue and technical information.

B. Submit test certificates recognized by FSD.

C. Submit all types of insulation material samples.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.17(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Pipework and Ductwork Insulation

A. The materials, thickness and finishes for of insulation applied for various services
are specified in Table A of this Section.

B. Schedule of Insulation Materials

1. Rigid glass fibre pre-formed section with a factory applied aluminium

vapour barrier jacketing secured in position with aluminium bands.

Minimum Density: 64 kg/m 3

Maximum K-factor: 3.3 x 10-2W/mK at 20 oC(mean temperature)

Temperature Range: 0 to 120oC.

Pre-formed glass fibre sections shall have a minimum length of 900mm.

Butt joint tapes, of not less than 100mm wide, shall be used to ensure
perfect sealing of the joints between sections. The fibre diameter of the
glass fibres shall be 4 to 10 microns and fibre length 30mm to 60mm.

2. Semi-rigid fibre glass duct wrap with a factory applied vapour barrier
jacketing secured in position with adhesives and fixing pins/retaining
washers. Vapour barrier shall be double sided aluminium foil reinforced by
cross grid fibre glass filaments and its water vapour permeance shall be
less than 1.3 ng/Ns to ASTM E96 and puncture resistance shall be at least
1.0 Joules to Technical Association of Pulp and Paper Industry (TAPPI)
T803.

Minimum Density: 32 kg/m3

Maximum K-factor: 3.6 x 10-2W/mK at 20°C (mean temperature)

Temperature Range: 0 to 120°C.

The fibre diameter of the glass fibres shall be 4 to 10 microns and fibre
length 30mm to 60mm.

3. Self-extinguishing type polystyrene board, held in place with hot

bitumen.

Minimum Density: 32 kg/m3

Maximum K-factor: 3.6 x 10-2 W/mK at 25oC (mean temperature)

Temperature Resistance: 79oC.

4. Self-extinguishing type polystyrene pre-formed section held in place

with hot bitumen.

Minimum Density: 32 kg/m3

Maximum K-factor: 3.6 x 10-2 W/mK at 25oC (mean temperature)

Temperature Resistance: 79oC.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.17(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5. Not used

6. Flexible elastomeric pipe insulation shall be of fire-retardant, flexible,

closed-cell, HCFC and CFC free, in continuous lengths, with factory applied
talc coating on inner surface. Flexible elastomeric insulation shall have a
flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of not over
150 for 12 mm thickness, in accordance with ASTM E84 test method.

Maximum K-factor: 4x10-2 W/mK at 20°C mean temperature

Density: 64kg/m3 for pipes, 80kg/m3 at support

Closed cell content: at least 90%

Water vapour permeability: not exceeding 0.28 µgm/Nh

Maximum operating temperature: at least 80°C

Surface Coefficient: >10 w/m 2K

The water absorption properties of the insulation shall be of not more than
0.02% by volume as per ASTM C209.

The material, including adhesives and all other accessories shall have fire
properties to Class ‘O’ to UK Building Regulation, latest edition and fire
rating BS 476 Part 7. The insulation material shall be a ‘built-in’ vapour
barrier and achieve condensation control without any additional vapour
barrier foil.

Smoke Visibility (ISO5659-2)

The mean specific optical density, Dm, shall be less than 500 under all test
conditions. The thickness of the test specimen shall be 25mm and the Dm
shall be the maximum value of the specific optical density (Ds10) of the
three tests computed at 10 minutes time interval.

Smoke Toxicity

The smoke toxicity shall comply with either of the following standards or
equivalent:

a. International Maritime Organization (IMO) – International Code for

Application of Fire Test Procedure: Part 2 – Smoke and Toxicity Test,
IMO MSC 61(67)

b. Naval Engineering Specification (NES) 713 (latest issue) –

Determination of the Toxicity Index of the Products of Combustion
from Small Specimens of Materials, mean Toxicity Index under 5.

7. Fibreglass duct board

Fiberglass supply, return and exhaust ductwork where shown on the

Drawings shall be constructed from 38mm thick rigid fibre glass board
factory faced with aluminium sheet of minimum 0.07mm thick.

Minimum Density: 80 kg/m 3

Maximum K-factor: 3.6 x 10-2 W/mK at 20oC (mean temperature)

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.17(AC)/3 April 2019

 E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Fibre glass boards shall be factory surface treated to prevent erosion due
to air movement at a speed of 20m per second.

8. Fibre glass internal duct lining

Internal lining to ductwork as indicated on the Drawings shall comply with

Clause 2.1.B.2 of this Section except that the surface shall be factory
treated to prevent erosion caused by air movement at a speed of 20m per
second.

Table A
Schedule of Insulation
Nominal Minimum Thickness of
Services Material (Clause 2.1.B) +
Size (mm) Insulation (mm)
Finishes (Clause 2.1.C)
Plant Externall
Plant Normal
Normal Externally Room y (Note
Room (Note B)
(Note A) C)
1. Chilled water, Upto 50 25 40 40 (1) + (2) (1) + (1) (4) + (3)
heating water 65 – 100 35 50 50 Ditto Ditto Ditto
pipes & feed 125 – 300 40 65 65 Ditto Ditto Ditto
and 300 & 50 75 75 Ditto Ditto Ditto
expansion Above
pipe
2. Condensate all 15 15 15 (1) or (6) (1) or (6) (4) + (3)
pipes + (2) + (1)
3. Air- all 25 72 46 (2) + (2) (2) + (1) (3) + (3)
conditioned
supply and
pre-treated air
ductwork
4. Air- all 25 72 46 (2) + (2) (2) + (1) (3) + (3)
conditioned
supply and
return air
ductwork
5. Fresh or all 25 25 25 - (2) + (1) -
exhaust air
ductwork
inside air-
conditioned
space
6. Air- all 25 52 33 (2) + (2) (2)+(1) (3)+(3)
conditioned
exhaust
ductwork
7. Refrigerant Gas line 19 30 30 (6) + (2) (6) + (1) (6) + (4)
pipes (Note F) Liquid line 12 12 12 (6) + (2) (6) + (1) (6) + (4)
8. Steam pipe ( Up to 40 50 50 50 (1) + (2) (1) + (1) (1) + (3)
150oC) 50 to 65 65 65 65 Ditto Ditto Ditto
75 to 100 75 75 75 Ditto Ditto Ditto
Above 90 90 90 Ditto Ditto Ditto
100
9. Steam Up to 20 25 25 25 (1) + (2) (1) + (1) (1) + (3)
condensate 25 to 40 40 40 40 Ditto Ditto Ditto
pipe Above 40 50 50 50 Ditto Ditto Ditto

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.17(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Notes: i Plant room – Inside plant room or back-of-house areas without false ceiling. Insulation
calculations for plant room shall base on 35 oC; 95% RH.
ii Normal – Inside false ceiling or services in indoor environment or services areas not
exposed to outside atmosphere. Insulation calculations for normal areas shall base on
28 oC; 80% RH.
iii Externally – Exposed to ambient
iv The insulation thickness indicated in Table A is the minimum requirement only.
Calculation of insulation thickness according to BS 5422 and Building Energy Code shall
be submitted for review and thicker insulation shall be provided as necessary.
v All ductwork, pipework and associated valves/dempers/actuators etc. inside kitchens
areas shall be finished with 0.6 mm stainless steel sheet cladding firmly secured with
proprietary clips evenly spaced at 50mm centres.
vi Insulation for refrigerant pipes in split type system not more than 15kW cooling capacity.
For cooling capacity equal to or larger than 15kW, calculation of insulation thickness
shall be submitted for review.
vii Insulation for ductwork connecting to direct expansion air-conditioning equipment shall
have minimum density of 48kg/m 3.
viii The thickness of the insulation specified above are minimum thickness and the sub-
contractor shall submit the calculations to demonstrate sufficient thickness of insulation
be provided in accordance with BEC.

C. Finishes for Insulation

1. Insulation inside false ceiling and service ducts will not require any finishes
unless otherwise specified.

2. 0.8mm thick aluminium hammerclad cladding firmly secured with

proprietary clips shall be applied to indoor insulation which is visually
exposed to view and within plant rooms. Cladding shall be provided with
means of removal for repair and maintenance.

3. 15mm cement plaster finish on chicken-wire mesh with additional finish of

an acceptable water-proofing sheeting shall be applied to outdoor type
insulation which is exposed to ambient. The whole shall be then provided
with a completely weatherproof external enclosure to the insulation.
Corrosion proof bands and clips shall hold the sheeting tight against the
insulation such that ballooning will not occur.

4. Slim duct system or equivalent product with standard fittings and

accessories.

a. System component including side plate, bottom plate, cover,

installation rack, corner fitting, tee fitting, joint plate, sleeve, pipe
holder, etc. shall be manufactured from the same manufacturer.

b. Slim duct system shall be manufactured with UV protected PVC.

Finishing colour shall be submitted for review prior to manufacture.
Sample of the Slimduct system shall be submitted for review prior to
manufacture.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.17(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

c. All screws, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel. Pipe holders
shall be used to secure the refrigerant pipe to the bottom plate or to
the separate tier.

3 INSTALLATION

3.1 General

A. Insulation shall not be applied before the relevant plant or service has been
satisfactorily inspected and tested.

B. All insulation shall be applied by skilful workmen.

C. Apply insulation on clean and dry surface with no foreign materials, such as oil,
grease, rust, scale or any other dirt.

D. Apply clean and dry insulation only. Any wetted insulation shall be replaced
before handing over to the Employer.

E. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation as a

minimum requirement.

F. Provide a complete moisture and vapour seal wherever insulation terminates

against metal hangers, anchors, or other projections through insulation on cold
surfaces.

G. Provide continuous insulation through sleeves and openings unless otherwise

shown on the Drawings. Seal with 100mm wide aluminium foil to cover the pipe
sleeves and insulation on both sides.

H. Stagger all joints with respect to the adjacent butt joint. Seal with 100mm wide
aluminium foil type for fibre glass insulation.

I. Apply insulation in a manner to give an acceptable look and smooth surface of

uniform thickness. Steps and undulations in the surfaces will be rejected.

J. Adhesive approved by FSD and as recommended by the insulation manufacturer

shall be applied so that insulaton conforms to pipe / duct surfaces uniformly and
firmly.

3.2 Insulation on Sheet Metal Ducts

A. Cut insulation slightly longer than perimeter of duct to ensure full thickness at
corners.

B. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly banded.

C. For ducts wider than 450mm, provide galvanized iron metal studs’ split prongs or
studs or other acceptable devices in addition to adhesive for securing of
insulation. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush and the vapour
barrier facing shall be thoroughly sealed with a vapour barrier mastic or tape
where the pins have pierced through. Pin spacing shall not exceed 300mm on
centres.

3.3 Insulation of Pumps, Deaerators Tanks, Calorifiers

A. Fit insulation snugly against equipment without voids.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.17(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Bevel curved surface edges to provide a tight joint.

C. Provide metal insulated cover with metal fasteners, supports, frames and
membranes.

3.4 Piping

A. Install same thickness insulation as the adjoining pipe insulation on flanges,

valves and other fittings to obtain the maximum strength and security. Seal joints,
protruding metal parts and valve stems thoroughly.

B. For pipe size of 150mm or above, provide stainless steel straps with the
insulation, at a minimum three straps per insulation section length.

3.5 Application of Insulation on Pipe Saddles

A. Cut a piece of premoulded pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used
on piping, slightly larger than the void formed by the outer pipe circumference
and the pipe saddle.

B. Press insulation into the void by hand pressure, so that both ends project slightly
beyond each end of the saddle.

C. Cut the ends of insulation flush with saddle ends.

D. Do not use filler, adhesive or other material to fill the void or imperfections in
insulation.

3.6 Insulation for Anchors

A. Insulate anchors which are secured directly to cold piping as specified for a
minimum distance of 200mm from the surface of the pipe insulation.

3.7 Insulation and Protection at Pipe and Duct Supports

A. Insulation at pipe support shall be protected by semi-circular galvanized steel

protecting shield of 1.0mm thick and 250mm long.

B. For insulated pipes above 300mm diameter, steel bridging pieces will be allowed
to penetrate the insulation to support the pipe. All annular space between support
saddle and pipe shall be filled with insulation and the supports shall be adequately
insulated to prevent condensation (for chilled water pipes).

C. Sheet metal strips shall be added between the air ducts and hangers.

3.8 Flexible Connectors

A. Flexible connections for the ductwork and pipework shall be insulated to the
above specified thickness with flexible insulation wrapped with a factory-applied
vapour barrier jacketing.

B. 0.8mm thick aluminium hammerclad cladding firmly secured with ‘pop’ rivets shall
be provided to the services within plant room.

C. An additional waterproofing sheet finish for a completely weatherproof external

enclosure to the insulation shall be provided to services exposed to ambient.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.17(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3.9 Valves, Strainers and Fittings

A. All valves, strainers, flanges, fittings, traps, etc. shall be insulated in conformity
with the pipework in which they are incorporated, and to the same thickness.

B. Whenever the pipework are clad, the associated valves, strainers traps, flanges,
fittings, etc. shall be provided with 1.2mm thick aluminium split-boxes arranged
for easy removal.

C. The box shall enclose the valve handle and have a lid for valve access.

D. A canvas insertion shall be provided to allow the insulated boxes to be removed

without damage done to the insulation.

E. The insulation on the pipe immediately adjacent to flanges shall be neatly

swagged off to allow for easy removal of bolts.

3.10 Deaerator, Condensate Tanks, Blowdown Tank, Heat Exchangers, Calorifiers,

Make Up and Expansion Tanks

A. Deaerator, condensate tanks, blowdown tank, calorifiers, make up and expansion

tanks of hot water system, heat exchanger for hot water system, and steam supply
systems shall be insulated with 50mm thick 64 kg/m 3 density rigid fibre glass and
enclosed by 1.2mm thick aluminium casing to facilitate easy removal for
inspection and maintenance. Detail construction of casing shall be submitted for
review.

B. For heat exchangers, make-up and expansion tanks in chilled water application,
flexible elastomeric pipe insulation as specified in Clause 2.1.B.6 shall be used.

C. Cold water pipes, vents and other pipes not normally insulated shall be insulated
for a minimum of 1 metre from the equipment. Full insulation shall be required
where the pipes and vents are exposed to ambient. The insulation used shall be
the same as that for the chilled water, heating water pipes.

D. K-factor and temperature range of insulation material shall be as per Clause 2.1.B
of this Section.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.17(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.18 VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, supply and installation of vibration eliminators
and flexible neoprene connectors.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, mount all mechanical equipment on

vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and vibration-induced
noise to the building structure and all occupied areas.

B. Select vibration isolators in accordance with the weight distribution so as to

produce reasonably uniform deflection.

C. The mountings shall be selected to provide adequate isolation of vibration at the

lowest operating speed for rotating components.

D. The springs selected for any given application shall be non-resonant with the
equipment’s or support structure’s natural frequencies.

E. Vibration isolation provision shall be such that vibration will not be perceptible to
occupants. A root-means-square surface vibration velocity of 0.1 mm/s shall be
taken as a reference limit of perception.

1.03 Quality Requirements

Furnish equipment, which are the product of a manufacturer who normally supplies this
type of equipment and can show evidence that such equipment have been in successful
operation for a period of at least five years.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit complete catalogue information and shop drawings for material and
equipment, test certificates, etc. for review.

B. Submit spring deflections, isolating efficiency, spring type and mounting methods
for all equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. All isolation equipment shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations

of the manufacturer.

2.02 Spring Type Isolators

A. Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any
housing and complete with 6mm neoprene acoustical friction pads between the
baseplate and the support.

B. All mountings shall have levelling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the
equipment.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.18(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring
at rated load with a horizontal spring stiffness 1-1 times the rated vertical spring
stiffness.

D. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection.

2.03 Spring Type Isolators with Limit Stops

A. Equipment with operating weight different from the installed weight such as
pumps, chillers, boilers, etc. and equipment exposed to the wind such as roof
mounted plants shall be mounted on spring mountings as described herein,
except that the vertical limit stops shall be included to prevent spring extension
when weight or some of the weight is removed.

B. The installed and operating heights shall be the same.

C. A minimum clearance of 12 mm shall be maintained around restraining bolts so

as not to interfere with the spring action.

D. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operations.

E. Mountings used outdoors shall be stainless steel 316.

2.04 Vibration Hangers

A. Vibration hangers shall consist of a steel welded cage containing a steel spring
and 8mm deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene/rubber element
shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box.

B. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit
the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the hole and short-
circuiting the spring.

C. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection.

D. Neoprene isolators shall be protected from overload by metal to metal restraints

or lateral containment.

E. Stainless steel 316 shall be used for externally used spring mounts.

2.05 Flexible Neoprene Connectors

A. Provide flexible neoprene connectors to the inlet and outlet of chillers, pumps,
boilers, cooling towers and other equipment as shown on the Drawings.

B. Manufactured of multiple piles of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both molded
and cured in hydraulic rubber presses.

C. Steel wire or rings shall not be used as pressure reinforcement.

D. Straight connectors shall be of twin sphere construction whilst elbow connectors

shall be of single-sphere construction unless otherwise specified.

E. Manufactured with floating steel flanges recessed to lock the connector’s raised
face neoprene flanges.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.18(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. All connectors shall be rated at a minimum of 1035 kPa at 60 oC.

G. All connections shall be made with flanged sphere or twin-spheres properly pre-
extended as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent additional elongations
under pressure. Provide control tie-rods for all flexible connectors as
recommended by the manufacturer.

H. Flexible connectors shall have a life in excess of 10 years under design working
condition.

2.06 Vibration Pads

A. Vibration pads shall be neoprene in-shear multi-layer waffle type with steel shims
in between waffles.

B. Material used for pad or mat type mounting may be cellular, ribbed or studded.
Pads and mats shall normally be bonded to both the supported and supporting
surfaces.

C. Cork pads or mats shall not be used.

2.07 Horizontal Thrust Restraints

A. Air handling equipment shall be protected where necessary against excessive

displacement which might result from high air thursts in relation to the equipment
weight.

B. Thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene pad.
The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and designed so it can
be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum
of 6mm movement at start and stop.

C. The assembly shall be furnished with one threaded rod and two angle brackets for
attachment to both the equipment and ductwork or the structure. Horizontal
restraints shall be attached at the centre line of thrust and symmetrically on eith
side of the unit.

2.08 Ductwork Flexible Connections

A. Materials and installation methods for all flexible connections between ductwork
systems and equipment shall comply with the requirements of DW144.

B. Sound isolating flexible connections shall be provided at the suction and delivery
connections of all fans and air handling units and elsewhere as shown on the
Drawings or as may be required to eliminate vibration.

C. At least 25mm slack shall be allowed in these connections to insure that no

vibration is transmitted from fan to duct work. The fabric shall either be folded in
with the metal or attached with metal collar frames at each end to prevent air
leakage.

D. Connections shall be made from neoprene-coated glass fabric or acceptable

equal. All connectors shall comply with the latest requirement of FSD. Relevant
certificates shall be submitted.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.18(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.09 Concrete Intertia Bases

A. Concrete inertia bases shall be formed within a structural steel beam or channel
frame reinforced as required to prevent flexing, misalignment of the drive and
driven units or transferral of stresses into equipment. The base shall be complete
with height saving brackets, concrete reinforcement and equipment bolting down
provisions.

B. The thickness of concrete inertia bases shall be as recommended by the

equipment manufacturer but not less than 150mm nor 1/12th of the longest
dimension of the base. The base depth needs not exceed 300mm unless
specifically required.

C. Base forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of 13mm

bars or angles welded in place at 150mm centres running both ways in a layer of
40mm above the bottom, or additional steel as is required by the structural
conditions.

D. Unless otherwise specified, concrete inertia bases shall weigh from 2 to 3 times
the combined weight of the equipment/plant to be installed thereon.

E. Base forms shall be furnished with drilled steel members and with anchor-bolt
sleeves welded below the holes where the anchors fall in concrete locations.

F. Height saving brackets shall be provided in all mounting locations to maintain a

base clearance of 50mm.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Air Handling Units, Primary Air Handling Units and Fans

1. Mount on an integral steel base, with a common member running the full
length of the fan and motor of sufficient rigidity.

2. Limit movement with horizontal trust restraints shall be provided for all
fans.

3. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, minimum static deflection for

spring isolators shall be 25mm.

B. Pipeworks and ductworks

1. All pipeworks and ductworks connecting to vibrating equipment shall be

mounted/supported on minimum 25mm static deflection spring hangers
within the plant room or 15m from the equipment whichever the greater.

2. All pipeworks and ductworks passing building expansion/movement joints

shall be provided with flexible joints with appropriate rating.

C. All Pumps

1. Floating concrete bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to
provide support for suction and discharge base elbows.

2. The pump and motor shall be mounted on a common floating base with a
minimum of 95% vibration isolation to the ground.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.18(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to

maintain a 24mm clearance below the base.

4. Minimum static deflection for spring isolators shall be 20mm for pumps up
to 45kW and 40mm for pumps exceeding 45kW. For pumps in the
basement, minimum static deflection shall be 20mm.

D. Air Compressors

1. Mount on spring type isolators with 25 mm minimum static deflection.

2. Specification same as pump section.

E. Horizontal Pipe Isolation

1. Vibration hangers shall be provided generally for pipes inside the various
A/C plant rooms.

2. Minimum steel spring static deflection of hangers and isolators shall be as

follows:-

Minimum
Pipe Size (mm) Static Deflection (mm)

Up to 75 20
75 to 150 38

F. Vertical and Riser Pipe Isolation

1. Risers shall be suspended from or supported by hangers or mountings as

indicated on the Drawings. All riser pipes shall be resiliently suspended at
intervals of 8 meters.

2. Specification same as horizontal pipe isolation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.18(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.19 WATER CHEMICAL TREATMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the furnishing and installation of complete and operable water
treatment for chilled water, condenser water and heating water.

1.02 Quality Requirements

A. Qualification of manufacturer: Furnish products from a manufacturer who has

manufactured water treatment equipment for a period of at least five years.

B. Engage the services of a specialist for initial cleaning and pretreatment and for a
period of one year after the Date of Practical Completion.

C. Specialist's services shall include supervision of the cleaning and pretreatment,

and the start-up and adjustment of automatic water treatment system.

D. The specialist shall also conduct monthly analysis of the treated water after
operation and correct dosages when necessary.

E. Chilled water treatment system shall fulfill the requirements as stipulated in

EMSD’s technical guidelines for connection to district cooling system.

F. Chemical water treatment system including manual feed chemicals, dosing pot
with necessary rust inhibitors and biocides with sufficient quantity necessary for
testing, commissioning and operation shall be provided.

1.03 Submittals

A. Submit complete catalogue, technical information and shop drawings for all
materials and equipment including power requirements, wiring and control
diagrams.

B. Submit maintenance data and operating instructions for treatment systems.

C. Submit three copies of water samples analysis of the chilled, heating and
condenser water after the system is commissioned. Monthly water samples
analysis shall also be submitted.

1.04 Design Criteria

Design the water treatment system to minimize corrosion and to prevent scale
depositing on the systems. The treatment equipment and chemicals shall be selected
according to the make up flow rates, system temperatures and pressures, system water
capacity (information for system pre-cleaning). The treatment plants shall maintain the
water system quality requirements during operation of the system:

A. Chilled Water System

pH-value 8.0 - 10.0

Turbidity (FTU) <20 ppm

Total Iron Increment <0.2 ppm

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.19(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Total Copper Increment <0.2 ppm

Total Dissolved Solid <2500 ppm

Nitrite 500 - 1000 ppm

Bacterial Count <10,000 npml

B. City water will be used for the make-up to the chilled water.

C. In selecting the chemical and duration of treatment for all systems, reference
should be made to the report on the analysis of the preliminary make-up water
characteristics as given below:

Chemical values expressed in mg/l for make-up Water

(parts per million)

Item City Water

pH Value 6.9 - 9.0

Turbidity (FTU & scale) 0.2 - 1.5

Total Hardness (as CaCO) 10 - 40

P-Alkalinity (as CaCO) 0 - 10

M-Alkalinity (as CaCO) -

Chlorides (as C1) -

Iron (as Fe) 0 - 0.1

Total Dissolved Solids 25 - 150

D. Make-up water analysis for city water for the site shall be performed at no
additional cost to the Employer and a complete report shall be delivered before
the actual water treatment design.

1.05 Chemical Quantity Requirements

A. Submit calculations showing total quantities of the various chemicals required for
12 months operation of the water treatment system.

B. Base quantity of chemicals for:

1. 4500 hours per annum for chilled and condenser water plants.

2. 2500 hours per annum for heating water plant.

C. Supply the quantity of chemicals adequate for 1 year consumption from the date
of Practical Completion of the plant.

D. Chemicals used shall be compatible and neutral to piping materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.19(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.01 Chilled Water

A. Initial Chemical Treatment

1. After the completion of initial cleaning and flushing, the system water shall
be chemically treated immediately.

2. Corrosion inhibitor shall be applied at a higher dosage than normal dosage

to ensure complete passivation of the freshly exposed metal surfaces by
forming a protective film of metal-corrosion inhibitor complex.

3. The chemical used shall be DREWSPERSE deposit agents and

BIOSPERSE microbiological with appropriate defoamer manufactured by
Drew Industrial or other acceptable alternative. Details of chemical shall
be submitted for review. The dosage shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer.

B. Normal Operation Alternative

Treatment provided shall be in accordance with the following table. Alternatives

may put forward by the specialist water treatment specialist/supplier at the time of
tender for review.

System Protection Chemical Method

Chilled Water Corrosion and DREWSPERSE Time Controlled

and Heating bacteria control deposit control dosing into the
Water agents and return flow header
BIOSPERSE in the central plant
microbiological room
with appropriate
defoamer
manufactured by
Drew Industrial or
acceptable
alternative

2.02 Maintenance Service

A. Engage the services of a specialist for the maintenance service for a period of
one year from the day the plant system is first put into normal and continuous
operation to supervise and advise the plant operating personnel in correct water
treatment. The specialist shall be certified by the water treatment system
manufacturer as competent in the application of the system provided.

B. The maintenance service shall include:

1. Perform a detail analysis of the water for all chilled and heating systems
before operation.

2. Monthly site system water analysis and chemical dosing equipment

inspection.

3. Record the on-site analysis on log book for information.

4. Advise the dosage of chemical treatment.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.19(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5. Re-adjustment of the dosage if necessary to achieve the recommended

water quality.

6. Issue monthly report to the Employer and Architect/Engineer.

2.03 The water treatment package shall consist of proprietary made high density
polyethylene solution tank, mixer, solution pump, foot valve, check valve, strainer,
injection nozzle, solution tubing and PVC drain valve. Fine strainer shall be provided
before the chemical dosing pump. The tank shall be supported on builder's plinth at
300mm above floor level. Drain pipe shall be extended to the nearest gulley. The total
tank capacity shall be sufficient to hold a 10-day supply of chemical solutions.

2.04 Chemical Feed Pump

A. Feed pumps shall be of positive displacement diaphragm type providing fully

adjustable output capacity over the operating range with sufficient discharge
pressure.

B. Pump housings shall be of corrosion resistant glass reinforced polypropylene and

all electrical/electronics components shall be encapsulated. If necessary, anti-
syphon/pressure release valve mechanisms shall be provided to ensure anti-
syphon protection plus priming, even under pressure.

C. The pumps shall have an acrylic moulded headed PVC/polypropylene fittings

ceramic valve balls, teflon seal rings and lquiform face, spring anti-syphon
mechanism. The discharge tubes shall be 10 mm internal diameter and of suitable
PVC to transport the solutions involved.

D. The pump suctions shall be mounted into the tank using a PVC suction tube
assembly that will prevent the suction tube becoming wrapped around the agitator
shaft. The end of the pump suction tube shall not extend beyond the bottom of the
PVC tube shield.

E. Pumps shall be driven by a single phase, 50Hz AC motor.

F. Pumps shall be timer controlled programmed to provide required dosage to the

systems.

G. Provide electronic level switch to each tank to show minimum tank level and
simultaneous switch off of feed pumps.

2.05 Chemical Tank

A. The chemical tank shall be of ultra violet resistant round molded fibre glass or
polyethylene chemical mixing tanks (or equal) of not less than 180 litres capacity
each.

B. The tank shall be complete with cover of high rigidity fibre glass or polyethylene
having suitable molded recessed or other acceptable arrangements to support
mountings of metering pump, agitator and liquid level controller switch.

C. The tank shall be suitable for mixing the chemicals specified. Although normally
operated at plantroom temperature, they shall be suitable for solutions at
temperature of up to 40oC.

D. The tank shall have a strong flat bottom providing adequate support when full
such that the outer perimeter of the tank shall not be forced up by water pressure
causing the bottom to bulge.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.19(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.06 Liquid Level Switch

A. Provide a liquid level switch into each tank cover to prevent the feed pump and
agitator from running should the mixing tank become empty.

B. This shall be suitable for the combined current of the pump and agitator and shall
interrupt the power supply to both through direct switching or by relay.

C. The level switch shall be contained in a corrosion resistant assembly of glass

reinforced polypropylene. It shall have PVC float tube foamed polypropylene float
and encapsulated reed switch.

D. In each case, there shall be a float protector to prevent false actuation due to
turbulence etc. A low voltage 12 volts transformer shall provide the supply to the
reed switch for safety.

E. The liquid level switch casing shall be manufactured from non ferrous metal or
otherwise be protected against corrosion.

2.07 Miscellaneous

A. Provide suitable chemical test kits for the packages.

B. Power supply complete with isolating switches to equipment shall be included.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit equipment and appurtenances to space provided and make readily serviceable.

B. Provide waste connections for all water treatment equipment.

C. All chemical diffusers shall be suitable for removable or installation without

interrupting system operation.

3.02 Field Quality Control

A. Chemical Tests:

1. Perform chemical analysis of all the systems at the time of start-up.

2. Determine the chemical status of the water with respect to the requirement
of this Specification.

3. Add chemicals and operate the systems for 48 hours.

4. Analyze the solution at the end of 48-hour operation and deliver a complete
report in triplicate.

5. Report any deficiencies in the treatment and correct them at no additional

cost to the Employer.

3.03 Adjust and Clean

A. Prior to testing equipment, flush the piping systems with chemically treated water
to remove scale, slag, dirt, oil, grease or foreign material.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.19(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Remove and hand clean low points and strainers.

C. Perform cleaning of piping with proper cleaning chemical as advised by the water
treatment specialist and as specified in other Section of this Specification.
Treatment chemical for cleaning shall be submitted for review.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.19(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.20 ACOUSTIC TREATMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the supply, manufacture, requirements of the acoustic materials,
their use and installation, and sound attenuation fitments.

1.02 General Requirements

A. The requirements indicated on the Drawings and/or the Equipment Schedule shall
be applicable to the associated equipment and the sound level requirements shall
be satisfactorily met with. Acoustic calculations for all fans, AHUs, PAUs, fan coil
units, split type A/C units, pumps, compressors, chillers, etc., shall be submitted
for review.

B. Acoustic attenuation, attenuators, acoustic louvres shall be installed as indicated

on the Drawings and/or herein specified.

C. Deliver acoustic equipment and materials securely wrapped, packaged and

labelled for safe handling

D. Label each item with manufacturer’s name and brand designation, the reference
specification and characteristics of application.

E. Store equipment and materials in dry and dust free areas to avoid caulking of the
infill and secure storage facility. The material and products shall be free from
scratch or corrosion.

F. EPD’s noise control requirements shall be noted and complied with. Noise
generated from the selected and installed equipment together with the air ducts,
louvres, silencers, etc., shall not exceed the permitted noise level nor contribute
towards a combined noise level which exceeds the permitted noise level.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products shall be furnished by manufacturer who

normally supplies this type of equipment and materials and who can show
evidence of having furnished such equipment and materials that have been in
successful operation for a period of at least five years.

B. Quality Control:

1. Conduct tests for sound attenuators on dynamic insertion loss performance

in accordance with ASTM-E477 “Duct to Reverberation room” method with
air flowing through the sound attenuator at rated capacity, with forward and
reverse flow direction. The test section shall be at the middle of a long
straight duct run to reduce the effect on random incidence of the sound
wave and to obtain a more reliable pressure loss rating of the air
downstream of the attenuator.

2. Conduct tests for acoustic materials on sound transmission loss

performance, sound absorption coefficients etc. in accordance with ASTM
E90, E413 and C423 as appropriate.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.20 (AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. A Noise Assurance Plan shall be submitted for review to demonstrate how the
restrictions on noise levels and the acceptable noise limits specified in the
Specification will be achieved.

D. The products shall satisfy the following:

1. Classification as incombustible in accordance with BS 476 Class O.

2. All requirements of HKFSD.

E. Nameplate: Attach nameplate to each acoustic equipment showing

manufacturer’s name, serial and model number and the normal direction of flow.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit complete catalogue information and shop drawings showing dimensions,

operating weights, ductwork connection details, mounting and fixing details,
complete material specification.

B. Submit certificates to show that the materials meet the specified requirements.
The certificates shall include test results on Dynamic Insertion Loss at rated
capacity with forward and reverse flow, self-generated noise and pressure drop in
accordance with ASTM E477.

C. Submit sample of acoustic lining.

D. Mounting and fixing details for sound attenuators shall include details and
dimensions of all ductwork and equipment connections, vibration isolation, fixing
bolts, and any special builder’s work requirement.

A. Mounting and fixing for duct and plantroom lining shall clearly indicate methods of
fixing, support channels, type of adhesives used, protective coating etc.

B. Include a noise assurance plan in the acoustic calculations for all noise generating
equipment

1.05 Noise Criteria

The acoustic treatment selected shall meet the following noise criteria.

Room Location NC / NR

Office and Office Corridor NC 40

Retail Arcade / Public Spaces NC 45
Secuity Control Room NC 45
Fire Control Centre NC 45
Carpark / Loading Dock NC 50
All plant rooms NC 55
Kitchen NC 50
Toilet / Lift Lobby / Food Court NC 45
Main Lobby / Reception Desk NC 40
CLP Transformer Room NR 65

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.20 (AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

In addition to the requirement shown above, acoustic treatment shall be applied to all
ductwork/equipment by all means such that the noise level for all external fresh air
intake louvres and exhaust air louvres shall not exceed the limit set by the EPD.

This Sub-Contractor is responsible for on-site sound level measurement for every single
spaces to ensure the noise criteria can comply with specification requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. All sound attenuations shall be selected from the standard range of a single
manufacturer. All plant room and duct lining shall be selected from the standard
range of a single manufacturer though not necessarily the same manufacturer as
that for attenuators.

B. All material and equipment for the acoustical treatment for any system within this
project shall be wholly imported. However, locally assembled sound attenuation
using imported materials may be acceptable providing they fully meet the
requirements of Specification, are submitted for review and responded with no
objection by the Architect/Engineer in writing prior to ordering.

2.02 Sound Attenuators

A. Outer casings of rectangular sound attenuators shall be made of 1.2mm thick

galvanized steel.

B. Internal partitions for rectangular silencers shall be made of not less than 0.6mm
thick galvanized perforated steel sheet.

D. Internal stiffeners shall be made of not less than 0.8mm galvanized steel.
Perforated sheet holes shall be 2.4mm diameter spaced in 4.8mm staggered
centres.

E. The inlet and discharge ends shall be of bell mouth shape with the intake bell
mouth made from not less than 0.8mm galvanized steel, properly jointed to the
perforated sheets.

F. The splitters shall be attached to the casing with proper reinforcement such that
any part of the splitter shall not vibrate nor detach from the casing during
operation.

G. The air passage shall be reasonably straight so that the rated pressure drop and
dynamic insertion loss rating shall not be exceeded.

H. The infill shall be of inorganic mineral of glass fibre of at least 40kg/m 3 and be
packed under not less than 10% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration
and setting. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof.

I. All cut surfaces for the sheet metal and welded spots shall be coated with zinc
rich paints.

J. All seams of the sound attenuator shall be applied with a duct sealing compound
and shall be air tight when operating at 1,200Pa static pressure and rated capacity.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.20 (AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

K. Sound attenuator shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air
pressure of 2kPa and shall be suitable for continuous use in an air stream
temperature of 250 C for not less than one hour when it is used in smoke
extraction system.

L. Design for pressure drop shall not exceed nominal pressmen drop and dynamic
insertion loss shall be equal to or greater than specified.

M. In case when the sound attenuators are built from modules, fix the attenuators
according to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

N. Where sound attenuators are selected for outdoor operation, they shall be
completely weather-proofed and treated against corrosion.

2.03 Fan

A. In all cases, select the fans with the highest efficiency and lowest possible sound
power level.

B. Sound power level for all eight octave frequency bands at audible range with
reference to 10-12W shall be submitted for review.

2.04 Diffusers, Grilles, Registers

A. In all cases the diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be carefully selected for the
lowest noise generation possible consistent with good air distribution.

2.05 Duct Bends

Duct bends which are close to the fan outlet and/or pass over critical areas shall be lined
with 30mm thick, 48kg/m 3 fiberglass with protecting surfaces. The duct lining shall
extend for at least 3 meters on both arms of the elbow.

2.06 Acoustic Linings for Ducts

A. Apply acoustic linings where specified or shown on the Drawings.

B. Lining shall be manufactured from long textile type glass fibres bonded together
with a thermosetting setting resin and shall be moisture resistant. The air stream
surface shall be overlaid with a fire-resistant black arcylic coating such that no
fibre erosion occurs at the rated air velocities and velocities up to 30m/s.

C. Lining shall be semi-rigid and coated with a black pigmented, fire resistant
coating on the side towards the air stream. This coating shall be tightly bonded to
the surface fibers to resist damage during installation and in service, and to
provide a tough air stream surface for a flow velocity up to 30m/s.

D. The insulation material shall be non-hygroscopic,inert and vermin-proof.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.20 (AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. The acoustic linings shall be 50mm thick, 80kg/m3 and shall have the following
minimum sound absorption coefficients according to ASTM C423.

Octave Bands Sound Absorption

Centre Frequency, Hz Coefficient

125 0.36
250 0.91
500 1.19
1000 1.2
2000 1.07
4000 1.05
NRC 0.98

F Lining shall comply with BS 476-4 and be approved by HKFSD.

2.07 Acoustic Panels

A. Furnish acoustic panels as shown on the Drawings.

B. Panels shall be of minimum 100mm thick and shall be fabricated with 1.2mm
perforated galvanised steel inner sheet and 1.9mm cold rolled GI steel outer
sheet. Interior panel perforation shall be of 2.4mm round holes on 4.8mm
staggered centres.

C. Panels shall be filled with glass fibre insulation of 40kg/m 3 minimum density with
following UL Composite Fire Resistance Ratings:

- Flame Spread 15

- Smoke Developed 0

- Fuel Distributed 0

D. The insulation material shall be non-hygroscopic, inert and vermin proof.

2.08 Acoustic Louvres

A. Unless otherwise specified, the acoustic louvers to be installed to the external

walls of plant rooms when specified shall be 300mm thick.

B Outer casings shall be made of 1.6 mm thick galvanized sheet steel. The noise
absorbing surfaces of the louver blades shall be made of 0.8mm thick perforated
galvanized sheet steel and all other surfaces of the louver blades shall be made
of 0.8mm thick galvanized sheet steel.

C. Louvre blades shall be filled with glass fiber of density 48 kg/m 3.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.20 (AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. The acoustic louvers shall have the following minimum Transmission Loss (TL).

Octave Band Insertion Loss

Centre Freq. (Hz) (dB)

125 7

250 11

500 12

1000 13

2000 14

4000 12

8000 9

E. Static pressure drop of louvers shall not exceed 50Pa at a face velocity of 2.2m/s.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Install sound attenuators in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations

and printed instructions.

B. Properly locate the sound attenuators such that noise break-in to ductwork on the
‘quiet’ side of the attenuator or noise break-out from the ductwork in between the
noise source and the attenuator shall be adequately controlled. Where this is not
achievable, the affected ductwork shall be acoustically lagged to control noise
break-out / break-in.

C. Fit sound attenuators to the space available without restricting the air flow.

D. Provide sheet metal transitions, suspensions, vibration isolators or supports and

concrete pads as shown on the Drawings and where necessary.

E. Provide duct liner where specified or shown on the Drawings or required for
proper installation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.20 (AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.21 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, supply, installation and testing of

electric/electronic control and auxiliary equipment required for the proper functioning of
the complete ventilating and air conditioning system installed under this Contract.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Provide automatic temperature control system as indicated on the Drawings and

Equipment Schedule.

B. Automatic temperature control system shall be so designed to achieve a reliable

control in performing the control and monitoring functions stipulated in the
specification and shall be of the direct digital control type or electronic
microprocessor-based type comprising all software and hardwired interlocks,
control wiring and ancillary components to operate accurately in the prescribed
sequence. The system shall be able for integration with other different systems
such as electro-mechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic type to meet different
installation requirements as necessary.

C. The automatic temperature control system shall be capable of standalone

operation without relying on the intelligent building management system (IBMS)
or central control and monitoring system (CCMS) or the like. Unless otherwise
specified, the automatic temperature control system shall however be equipped
with all necessary auxiliary devices for future interfacing and direct connection to
IBMS, CCMS and the like.

D. Control system shall be arranged such that in the event of electrical power failure
or other abnormal operating condition, built-in `fail-safe' features will always
prevent the occurrence of potentially hazardous condition.

E. For the control equipment mounted in accessible positions or in normally

occupied areas, these control items shall be provided with means to discourage
unauthorized interference.

F. For the control equipment exposed to view (such as room thermostats), colour
and features of the equipment should match with the decoration and shall be
submitted for Architect's Approval before ordering.

G. All control equipment, especially the electronic type, shall not be stored at site,
and shall only be delivered and installed when the site is ready for installation.

H. Protect the control equipment from mechanical and corrosive damages during
delivery and installation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1.03 Quality Assurance

A. Qualifications of manufacturer : Furnish controls and automatic control system

and equipment which are the products of a reputable single manufacturer who
normally supplies this type of system and equipment and can show evidence that
such control system and equipment have been in successful operation for a
period of at least five years.

B. Control equipment shall be installed, tested and adjusted under the direct
supervision of the manufacturer.

C. Installation of controls shall be by experienced electricians and mechanics under

supervision of experienced engineers.

D. Furnish all necessary items to make the installation complete in every respect
and safe and ready for regular operation and use.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit complete catalogue information and shop drawings for all material and
equipment including wiring and control diagrams for each system and control
panels.

B. Submit detailed description of proposed control monitoring functions and

operation, sequencing logic, system configuration, interface provision, etc. of
each individual system for Approval based on the general system requirements
as specified in this Section. The automatic temperature control system shall be
of advanced and proven design offered by a reputable manufacturer.

C. Submit a complete set of floor plans showing the actual location and mounting
heights of thermostats and the zone served by each thermostat and have it
graphically coded.

D. Submit the following items for inclusion in operation manuals:

1. Complete electrical schematic diagrams of each system showing and

identifying each internal and external component and all graphic coding.

2. Additional detail and wiring diagrams showing all graphic coding.

3. Sequences of operation.

4. Sequences of interlocking.

5. Operation of alarms.

E. Submit copies of operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Submit a complete parts list of all internal and external components.

G. Submit samples of thermostat and FCU control valve.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1.05 System Requirements

A. Controllers

Direct digital controllers or approved equal with built-in real time clock shall be
provided for control and operation of the air conditioning system including chilled
water pumps, chilled water pumping system, primary air handling units, air
handling units, zone air distribution units, etc. Back-up battery with power healthy
indicator and alarm shall be incorporated in the controller.

B. Chilled Water Pumping System

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the chilled water pumping system shall
perform the following:

1. Circulation pumps with differential pressure by-pass control and operation.

2. Primary Variable Flow (VPF) system control and operation.

3. Monitoring and alarm signal control and indication.

4. Comply with EMSD’s latest version of “Techniacl Guidelines for

Connection to District Cooling System” requirements.

C. Primary Air Handling Units (PAU)

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the following control operation and

functions shall be provided.

1. Start-stop control including automatic fire tripping as required by HKFSD

and demand on-off control etc.

2. Capacity control for constant air flow and/or variable air flow system

3. Temperature and relative humidity control

4. Filters and air cleaners status monitoring and alarm indication

5. Monitoring and alarm (local and remote) signals and indication.

D. Air Handling Units (AHU)

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the following control operations and

functions shall be provided:

1. Start-stop control including automatic fire tripping as required by HKFSD

and demand on-off control, etc.

2. Capacity control for constant air flow and/or variable air flow system

3. Temperature and relative humidity control

4. Fresh air supply control

5. Filters and air cleaners status monitoring and alarm indication

6. Monitoring and alarm (local and remote) signals and indication

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. Zone Air Distribution Units

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the following zone air distribution units
shall perform the control operations and functions as listed here below for each
unit.

1. Fan Coil Unit (FCU)

Control operation and functions shall include:

a. Start-stop operation including fire tripping as required by HKFSD,

manual and automatic on-off control, etc.

b. Temperature control

c. Fresh air supply control

d. Monitoring and alarm control and indication

2. Variable Air Volume (VAV) unit

a. Start-stop operation including fire tripping as required by HKFSD,

manual and automatic on-off control, etc.

b. Temperature control

c. Fresh air supply control

d. Monitoring and alarm control and indication

3. Ventilation System Control

The system shall include toilet exhaust, designated room exhaust, plant
room ventilation, ventilation at designated area, etc. as applicable to this
project. The control operation and function shall include the following.

a. Start-stop operation including automatic fire tripping as required by

HKFSD

b. Capacity control

c. Monitoring and alarm (local and remote) signals and indication

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Direct Digital Controllers (DDC)

A. Unless otherwise specified, the DDC shall have sufficient memory to support its
own operating and control system database including control processes, energy
management applications, alarm management, historical/trend data for all points,
maintenance support applications, operator I/O, manual override monitoring, etc.
The memory board shall be expandable to a larger size as needs grow.

B. The controller shall be equipped with sufficient communication ports for

simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as modems,
printers, personal computers, portable operator’s terminal etc.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. The point terminal modules shall be available for analogue/digital input or output
types. Manual override shall be available on analogue/digital outputs to allow the
user to manually control the position of the end device.

D. Each outstation shall be factory pre-wired comprising a factory fabricated metal

enclosure, hinged door with master lock and name plate holder. The outstation
shall be of modular design with standard function modules and have at least 25%
spare capacity for future expansion. Each outstation shall also contain interface
hardware modules to accept a plug-in portable operator terminal with visual
display and analogue facility to facilitate commissioning and fault finding.

E. The DDC shall include the following:

1. LED for status indication

2. Real time clock

3. Safe and restart feature after a power failure

4. Battery back-up

5. Time scheduling features

6. Alarm management

2.02 Air Conditioning (A/C) Central Supervisory Control System and Equipment

A. Provide central A/C control console located as indicated on the Drawings.

B. The central A/C control console shall consist of but not be limited to the following:

1. Network Control Module to manage the communication between central

control workstation and the DDC.

2. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) unit with minimum 2 hours backing up

capacity of the workstation.

3. Central control workstation with minimum 27” Digital LED monitor Full HD,
A3/A4 laser printer, keyboard and mouse, etc.

4. Portable Notebook Computer

5. A 16-bit/full duplex audio system complete with speakers.

C. System Capacity

The system provided shall be expandable for 25% more points than specified for
initial system, to allow for future expansion of system. In addition, the expansion
shall not require the change of sensors or controllers, addition of transmission
trunk wires, except in areas not presently covered by the system, nor require
abandonment or replacement of any part of the base system.

D. Data Transmission System

1. The capability of Local Area Network including hub shall possess sufficient
operating speed of 1 Gbps and signal characteristics to serve all functions
as specified.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2. All data transmission shall be transmitted in digital form, using fibre optics
cable.

3. The data transmission system shall be of the continuously active type

providing positive supervision of data transmission.

4. Any interruption or cessation of transmission shall be detected and

annunciated as "trouble" at the central control workstation, by display and
printout with the time and address of the zone(s) failing to respond.

E. Network Control Module (NCM)

1. The NCM shall be a field proven at least 32-bit word computer based
equipment suitable for real-time process control applications. The memory
capacity shall be capable of performing all the A/C functions as specified in
this Specification with a 25% spare memory capacity reserved for future
extension.

2. The NCM shall be capable of transmitting and receiving data over voice
grade commercial telephone lines.

3. The NCM shall be provided with a power fail safe and restart feature.

4. An automatic bypass feature shall be provided to keep the system active in

the event of failure of the local AC power source.

5. A minimum of 10 independent input/output channels shall be provided.

6. System loading shall be through the use of a floppy disk drive for loading
the software programme and specified user programme. The floppy disk
drives and interface system shall be capable of recording the point data file
and other keyboard input parameters. The whole system shall then be
capable of being reprogrammed using the executive programme without
further manual keyboard entries.

F. Uninterrupted Power Supply Unit (UPS)

1. The UPS shall consist of a battery power source, charger, AC output

inverter system, and automatic load transfer circuits for fully automatic
operation.

2. The UPS shall be an on-line type UPS. The total recharge time shall be
less than 24 hours for a fully discharged battery set.

3. Two pilot lights shall be located in the front operating panel. One pilot light
indicates that incoming AC power is available, the other pilot light indicates
that the UPS is in the ready or standby mode.

4. The battery system shall be of totally enclosed nickel-cadmium type,

separate from and independent of other battery systems, capable of
operating the entire A/C Central Supervisory Control System under 100%
full load condition for a period of two hours.

G. System Support Software

1. Software shall be provided to support the command functions and

application programmes specified in this Specification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

The system's support software shall be multi-user system and shall be able
to concurrently issue commands to the running programs. Also, the
owner's personnel shall be able to add or modify application packages and
modify data files without requiring interruption of the monitoring and control
programmes.

2. Diagnostic programmes which exercise all features of the NCM, and report
all detected failures shall be provided. Stand-alone diagnostics shall be
provided for the NCM and peripherals. On-line diagnostics shall be
provided for the memories, operator's terminals and printers.

3. The means for the operator to verify that each keyboard entry is correct,
via display or print on the terminal output, before the command is entered
and acted upon shall be provided.

4. A software shall be provided to generate report on the dynamic status of

any equipment or sensor in the system inventory for display on the work-
station, printer or both, including the following:

a) Current status (ON/OFF, etc.)

b) Present value (in engineering units, if applicable)

c) A single equipment

d) A list of equipment

e) A range of equipment. (e.g. by category or zone)

In addition, the following standard reports shall be operator selectable:

a) Point Summary Report

b) Trend Report

c) Alarm and Run Time Report

d) Custom Report

5. An alarm software shall be provided to notify the operator the occurrence

of an alarm condition. All alarm messages displayed on the monitor
screen or printer shall be in simple English. Alarm messages shall include
as a minimum such as location of alarm, time of occurrence, type of alarm,
etc. An initial message which can be automatically presented to the
operator whenever an associated alarm is brought in shall be provided.

6. Notification of any type of alarm shall not be permitted to inhibit notification

of any other alarm. Random occurrence of alarms at any rate shall not
cause loss of any alarm or overburden the system. Any single alarm (on a
per outstation basis), shall be recognized by the CPU for appropriate alarm
handling within 3.5 seconds of its occurrence in the data environment.
Operator acknowledgement of one alarm shall not be considered as
acknowledgement for mandatory operator acknowledgement of an alarm
and shall not in any way inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms.

7. This Contractor shall provide a minimum of 5 levels of access to the A/C

Central Supervisory Control System software.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

It shall be possible to define a hierarchical set of "passwords" such that a

suitable password must be entered by the operator in order to access the
particular level(s) of system operation or particular subset of system alarms.

a) The first, operator's level of access shall allow authorized operators

to operate the system. The intercom, command buttons, selective
data display, alarm display, and alarm acknowledgement shall be
operational in this level of operation.

b) The second, supervisor's level of operator access shall allow certain

areas of memory access. It shall be possible to
read/assign/add/delete basic start-stop programs, event programs,
time of day, day of week, and the system calendar (month/day/year)
through this level of access.

c) Other levels of access shall be determined during the

commissioning stage as directed by the Architect.

8. The system shall allow a dynamic graphic display on the SVGA monitor to
show the real time status of any equipment being monitored and controlled
for all systems. The display shall be presented in such a way that the
function of any equipment and device is easily envisaged on the graphics.
Such diagrams shall be submitted to the Architect for Approval The
graphic generator shall be resident in the system and programmed in such
a way that the generation of new graphics can easily be performed on line.

9. An energy management software shall be provided for the operator to

assign a point to be totalized in terms of run time. It shall be possible to
totalize either on time or off time up to a minimum of 5000 hours while
totalization continues. The run time limits for individual point shall be able
to be defined by the operator. When a limit is exceeded, an alarm (change
of status) shall be annunciated. The software shall also include the
following programmes to facilitate energy management.

a) Time of Day (TOD) Programmes

Programmable time programme shall be provided for the following:

- equipment on/off with or without time delays

- analog limits

- access / security system

- automatic output of the following logs and summaries

selected item log

alarm summary

off-normal summary

analog limit summary

run time total summary

special summaries

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Time programs shall be automatically initiated according to a

predetermined time schedule for each day of the week. An additional
time programme shall be provided for holidays.

On/Off and execution time shall be programmable and can be

overridden by the operator on line.

b) Event Programmes (EP)

The system shall provide a minimum 200 EP. The EP shall be

structured such that one initiator may set and reset the EP as it goes
from normal to offnormal and back to normal or one initiator may set
the programme and a second initiator reset the programme or reset
may be manual via the operator terminal keyboard. EP shall have
priority assignments to allow them to override other programmes in
the set mode when desired.

c) Optimum Start-stop Programme

This programme shall continuously monitor the space temperature

and outside air temperature of each system specified to be under
optimised start-stop control. The control algorithm shall start up the
system at the latest possible moment as necessary to warm the
space up to 20 degrees in winter (or, in summer, to cool the space
up to 25 degrees) prior to schedule occupancy. Range shall be field
programmable from the operator's terminal.

The programme shall also monitor and record actual accumulated

energy savings due to chilled water system optimisation sequencing
control. This is done by comparing the past efficiency and load
profile data with actual operating data. The report of calculation shall
be provided in Lotus 123 format via pre-programmable macros and
sorted into the following categories:

i. total savings due to chilled water temperature optimization.

ii. total savings due to sequencing control for chilled water

pumps, etc.

iii. savings due to chilled water optimisation at each 10% load

level.

iv. savings due to changes in chilled water pumps combinations,

etc.

10. The software shall allow the users to modify and tailor the system to the
specific and unique requirements of the equipment installed, the programs
implemented and to staffing and operational practices. Online modification
of system configuration, program parameters, and data base shall be
provided via menu selection and keyboard entry of data into reformatted
display templates. The following modification capability shall be provided
as a standard feature (but shall not be limited to):

a) Designation of operator passwords, access levels, point segregation

and auto sign off.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

b) Peripheral assignment of segregation groups and operators to

terminals and printers, designation of backup terminals and printers,
designation of terminal headers points and enabling / disabling of
printouts of operator changes.

c) System configuration/diagnostic capability shall include

communications and peripheral port assignments,
workstations/outstations assignments to the communications
networks, workstations/outstations enable/disable, assignment of
command trace to points and application programs, and initiation of
diagnostics.

d) Time/schedule change capability shall include time/date set,

time/occupancy schedules, exception/holiday schedules and daylight
savings time schedules and the like.

e) Points related change capability shall include system/point

enable/disable, run time enable/disable; assignment of points to
segregation groups, calibration tables, lockout, run time and to a
fixed input or output value; and assignment of alarm/warning limits.

f) Application program change capability shall include enable/disable

of Energy Management Software (EMS) programs, EMS program
changes; assignment of comfort limits, global points, time and event
initiators, time and event schedules and enable/disable time and
event programs.

11. The Contractor shall state his system capability, in terms of maintenance
management, and shall submit his proposals under the following headings:

a) Maintenance scheduling and work order

b) Maintenance forecast

c) Maintenance action

d) Cost summary

e) Report and format

f) Repair history

g) Maintenance inventory

H. Control Workstation

1. The primary operator interface for the system shall be a workstation

operating under software control. All data access, command outputs,
alarm annunciation, system file generation shall be accomplished via the
operator's workstation and associated alphanumeric keyboard. The
workstation shall be a factory assembled unit complete with LED monitor.

2. Hardware

a) 3.2 GHz 8MB Processor

b) 1 no. DVD RW

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

c) 1TB or above hard drive

d) LPT1, LPT2, COM1, COM2, I/O ports

e) 1GB DDR3

f) Built-in 56K modem plus broad band connection card

g) 27’’ LED monitor, 1800 x 1200 for operator’s terminal

h) RJ45 network port and network card

i) Keyboard & mouse

3. Operating System

a) The workstation shall come with the latest version of WINDOWS 8

or latest software platform and configured to suit the entire A/C
Central Supervisory Control System environment.

b) The Contractor shall provide English version WINDOWS platform.

4. Operation

a) Several levels of addressing shall be provided for identification as

follows:

The unit descriptor shall identify the logical group of points

that the points is associated with

The point descriptor shall identify the individual point within a

unit.

The data type descriptor shall describe the type of data as

alarm, fault, command, etc.

The operator shall be given the facility to uniquely identify

each point by entering abbreviation for its building, its tunnel,
its unit, its point, its data type and a number. The whole
address shall have up to 16 alphanumeric characters. It shall
be possible a group of data points by giving only a part of the
address equipment to address all the points

b) An audible alarm indicates a change of status condition.

c) The software shall include the operating system, application software,

operator assignment file. A complete set of language comments
shall be used for manipulation, including file duplication, deletion
and modification.

d) The operator's workstation shall have several levels of access to

permit operation by operator, supervisor and/or engineer at the
proper level to the extent he is entitled.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5. Capability

a) The workstation shall provide facilities for manual entries and visual
displays enabling an operator to enter information into the system
and obtain displays of system information. All requests for status,
intercom and control etc. shall be selected from the workstation. The
facility shall be provided to permit the operator to perform the
following tasks through the keyboard of the operator's terminal as a
minimum:

Manual and auto start/stop command

Reset command

Display of all point log of selected sub-systems

Display of alarm summary of selected sub-systems

Lock-out/Unlock of selected items

Display of points within a particular system on request

Run time summary

Additional functions are itemized under the systems specified

hereafter

b) All command functions shall be acknowledged on the workstation.

Error messages shall be displayed for any illegal or improperly
executed commands.

c) The system shall respond to any number of changes of state and

report and correct sequence in which they occur. The sequence
reporting shall not be dependent upon any sequence operating
and/or interrogating techniques.

6. System Line Trouble

a) Trunk cable and DDC linkage cable

b) Date frame transmission failure

c) No acknowledge condition of outstation/DDC

d) Circuit card of outstation/DDC disconnected

e) Parity error

7. Functions

Function selection shall be in simple English language along with the

proper alphanumeric identification of the system through the keyboard and
shall be as follows:-

a) Contact Input Display

Permits display of contact condition including on, off, close, open,

auto, manual, high, low access, secure and trouble etc.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/12 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

b) Time Set

Permits operator to update time display through correct setting of

input value on the keyboard.

c) Alarm Summary

Permits operator to demand sequential display of the point address

of all points currently in alarm in the order in which they occurred.
Demand shall be by selected outstation/DDC panel, or by selected
point module at operator's discretion.

d) Motor Summary

Permits operator to demand sequential display of the point address

of all on-off binary inputs with conditions of each identified. Demand
shall be by selected outstation/DDC or by selected point module at
operator's discretion.

I. Event Printer and Log Printer

1. Printers shall be laser printers suitable for A3/A4 size papers and of high
quality, heavy duty, and long life. The printer shall have the fastest print
speed available in the market at the time of installation and be rated for
continuous duty operation.

2. Automatic ON-OFF motor control and audible alarm during alarm printing
out shall be incorporated in the printers. Acoustic noise shall not be
greater than 50 dB(A).

3. Function switches for commonly used functions of the system shall be

included.

4. Functions

The printers shall consist of but not be limited to the following functions:

a) Change-Of-State-Log Alarm

For both binary and analogue inputs, the printers shall print out the
time of occurrence, an identifier for the type change (alarm, return to
normal, reporting status), the point number, analogue value, and the
point type or engineering units, alarm printouts shall be in red.

b) Alarm Summary

By means of the keyboard, the operator shall be able to demand a

summary of the point addresses of all points currently in alarm in the
order in which they occurred. Demand shall be by entire complex,
by selected outstation/DDC or by selected point module at operator's
discretion.

c) Operator Guide and Information Messages

The printer shall provide appropriate message printouts to advise the

operator of the following conditions:-

Illegal requests made

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/13 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Invalid point address called for

Line data frame transmission failure or coaxial cable break

(identify location)

DDC no acknowledgement (identify location)

Parity error (identify location)

J. Portable Notebook Computer

1. 2 sets of portable notebook computer shall be provided for field

programming of DDC and NCM.

K. Keypad

The keypad shall be designed for daily arm-disarm operation and shall have the
following features:

1. Audible warning for disarm attempt

2. Back-lit silicon rubber keypad

3. LED indication for system status such as system on/off

L. Hub

The hub shall connect two separate thick and thin network segments by up to 100
meters. Provision of diagnostic feedback for trouble shooting. The front-panel
indicators indicate power, data receiver, segment connection, collision detection
shall be equipped. The hub shall at least have connection capacity of 16
segments.

2.03 Local Control Panel

A. Provide local control panels with sub panels (if required due to individual project
requirement) for all air conditioning equipment at locations as indicated on the
Drawings or as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

B. The panel shall be constructed of 1.5mm thick hairline finished stainless steel
sheets complete with all flush galvanised steel supports and accessories. All the
lettering shall be in English and Chinese characters and to be engraved on the
panel. All lettering and characters shall be approved by the Architect before
fabrication. The front cover shall be of 2mm thick hairline finished stainless steel
with sectional recessed hinged cover for easy inspection and maintenance.

C. The panel shall be factory wired with terminal trips and/or piped, ready for field
installation.

D. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the panel shall include the following:

1. Indicating lights, ammeters, gauges, control switches, push buttons, control

wiring and other necessary equipment to enable local/remote operation and
monitoring of all A/C equipment;

2. The running and alarm indicating lights for a particular equipment shall be
fitted onto the panel as standard module blocks;

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/14 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. An alarm chime shall be provided to sound an alarm condition when any of

the alarm indicating lights is energised An alarm mute button shall also be
provided to acknowledge the alarm by the operator. Alarm indicating lights
shall remain on until the conditions causing the alarms are returned to
normal state.

4. Electrical controllers, relays, isolators, etc

E. Refer to "Electrical Works" Section of this Specification for details.

2.04 Modulating Control Valves

A. All control valves shall have modulating actuators with a turn down ratio of at
least 50 to1 and be installed as indicated on the Drawings.

B. All valves shall be sized by manufacturer of automatic controls to assure fully

modulating operation as generally specified in this section of the specification.
Valves indicated as full line size shall have properly sized internals. If valve
smaller than line size is furnished, include reduction pieces for installation in line
size indicated.

C. Pressure drop across the control valve shall generally be 50% of the controlled
circuit.

D. Control valves shall generally be normally closed unless otherwise specified,

single-seated, cage-guided, stainless steel trim, cast-steel body with pilot
positions. Valves shall be heavy duty with equal percentage V-port plug. Valve
sizes 65mm and larger shall be flanged. Pressure ratings shall be suitable for the
intended use and not less than the ratings specified in the ‘Valves’ section of this
specification.

E. Provide control valves to meet the system control requirements and as indicated
on the Drawings.

F. Provide valve opening pointer at each valve actuator to indicate the valve
opening and position.

G. Fan Coil Control Valves

1. Fan coil valve operator shall be electric-thermal type operating on line

voltage.

2. Valve body shall be 2-way, normally closed. Body shall be complete with
union for connection.

3. Valve operator shall be of silent operation.

4. Pressure drop across valve shall be nominal 1m. Valve working pressure
shall not be less than 10 bar with 3 bar close off pressure.

5. Control valve shall be equipped with automatic reset to automatic control

mode after mechanically fully open during commissioning.

2.05 Differential Pressure Control Valves

A. Provide differential pressure control valves located across the water supply and
return lines as indicated on the Drawings.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/15 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Control valves shall be with equal percentage V-port plug, normally closed,
electrically operated, single seated, cage guided, stainless steel trim, bronze or
cast-iron body. Pressure rating shall be suitable for the intended use and not less
than the ratings specified in the ‘Valves’ section of this Specification.

C. Valve shall be actuated by differential pressure controller, control function wide

band proportional type with set point adjustment, display pointer, process variable
display pointer, and the red pointer for high limit setting.

D. Size the valve such that when fully open, 100% of the rated flow of a circulating
pump shall flow through the valve at the designed chilled water mains differential
pressure.

E. Provide a standby globe valve across the differential bypass valve and operate
manually in case the two-way differential bypass valve malfunctions.

2.06 Temperature Controllers

A. Controllers shall be of corrosion resistant construction, suitable for use in the

prevailing conditions of equipment room and shall not affect the controllers'
proper functioning.

B. Controllers shall be electronic with zero and proportional adjustments, and be

equipped with indicating lights which varies in intensity as the controller
modulates. Controller shall have a 0 to 20 Vdc output to modulate the control
valve. All adjustments shall be concealed.

C. Where dual input controllers are required, the authority of the compensating
sensor shall be adjustable only at the Controller.

2.07 Automatic Dampers

A. Automatic operated dampers shall have frames of a minimum of 3.5mm

galvanised steel not less than 50mm in width and aerodynamically formed blades
of not less than 1.5mm galvanised steel sheet.

B. Dampers shall be adequately braced to form a rigid assembly. Blades shall be

secured to zinc plated axles by zinc plated bolts and nuts.

C. All blade bearings shall be nylon or bronze. Teflon coated thrust bearings shall
be provided at each end of every blade to minimize torque requirements and
insure smooth operation.

D. All blade linkage hardware shall be constructed of corrosion resistant, zinc plated
steel and brass.

E. Supply and exhaust dampers shall be of the low leakage types and sized for
minimum pressure drop at the indicated ductwork size and for effective linear air
flow characteristics.

F. The leakage and flow characteristics plus a size schedule for all controlled
dampers shall be submitted for Approval.

2.08 Valve/Damper Actuators

A. Actuators shall have reversible motor drives and shall be site interchangeable for
direct or reverse action and suitable for both on/off and modulating operation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/16 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Electric motor drives for damper actuators shall output adequate torque to limit
the full stroke time within 20 seconds.

B. Valve actuators shall be equipped with manual opener, and shall have spring
return mechanism during power failure.

C. Actuators shall incorporate end switches for all sequencing applications. Actuator
shall also have feedback provision to report to the A/C Central Control System
true position/% opening of the associated control valves/dampers.

2.09 Motorised Valve Operators

A. Provide for each valve as indicated on the Drawings motorised valve operator,
attached to and supported by valve.

B. Mount valve operators at factory or at site under manufacturer's supervision.

C. Provide a handwheel for each valve operator, which shall automatically de-clutch
when valve operator is in function.

D. Operator shall be capable of operating in any valve mounting attitude, and

capable of being mounted either in line or transverse to the pipeline.

E. Operator shall be bolted directly to the butterfly valve top without the use of
special brackets, linkages or couplings if butterfly valves are used.

F. Where operators are exposed to weather, provide 0.8mm G.I. removable housing
to the Approval of the Architect.

G. Motor operator shall be totally enclosed with no external moving parts. The
actuator shall be of the rack and pinion type providing constant output torque.

H. Motorised valve operator shall operate on 220V, 1 phase, 50 HZ. AC Unit shall
consist of motor, magnetic motor controller, control circuit transformer, built-in
reversing contactors, opening and closing torque and limit switches, built-in open-
close-stop momentary contact push-buttons and open-close position indicating
lights and terminal posts provided for field wiring of remote momentary contact
open-close-step push buttons and open-close position indicating lights, all factory
prewired in single enclosure.

I. Motor: High speed, high torque type, of adequate capacity, specially suitable for
valve operation. Motor winding insulation, IEEE standard Class B. Provide built-
in thermal overload protection. Closing time of all motorized valves set with
adjustable timer control which can be set to not less than one minute nor more
than two minutes.

2.10 Sensors

A. General

1. All sensors shall be selected with measuring range suitable for the
corresponding systems.

2. All room mounted sensors shall be installed at a level from finished floor as
indicated below unless otherwise specified:-

Room Thermostat for FCU 1150 mm (Top Level)

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/17 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Space Thermostat for CAV/VAV False ceiling level

The final positions and finish colour shall be subject to the Architect’s
Approval.

3. All pipe/duct mounted sensors shall have the immersion parts constructed
of material compatible with the fluid they handle.

4. Pipe/duct mounted sensors shall be complete with mounting flange/kit,

cable gland and all necessary accessories to fit in the pipe/duct. The
sensors working temperature and pressure ratings shall be suitable for the
testing parameters of the corresponding systems.

5. Pipe/duct mounted sensors when installed outdoors shall have

weatherproof type integral enclosures.

6. Sensors shall be of tamper-proof construction, calibrated at the control

manufacturer’s factory.

B. Room Temperature Sensors

1. Room temperature sensors shall operate on linearized resistance sensing

element and have a connection plate to permit easy removal of the sensor
as necessary.

2. All sensors shall have setpoint adjustment knob with sensing range of 0°C
to 40°C. The necessary shall be within 0.5%.

3. All sensors used for CAV/VAV valves/boxes shall be completed with

network access jack for use with portable operator terminal.

4. Sensors for fan coil units shall feature automatic and manual 3-speed fan
control, setpoint adjustment knob, LCD display of room temperature,
setpoint, fan speed, cooling mode.

5. Sensors for air handling units shall be mounted in the return air duct of the
unit or at a location as indicated on the Drawings.

6. The temperature control device for comfort cooling should be capable of

providing a dead band of at least 2°C within which the supply of cooling to
its serving space is shut off or reduced to a minimum, except for a
temperature control device that requires manual changeover between
heating and cooling mode.

C. Pipe/Duct Temperature Sensors

1. Sensors shall have accuracy of 0.2°C.

2. Sensors for air duct of cross sectional area at or below 0.4m² shall have
sensing element encapsulated in straight probe.

Averaging element sensors shall be provided when the duct area exceeds
0.4m² or when the sensor is to be installed within air handling equipment.
Sensing element length shall be adequate to completely cover the cross-
sectional area of the pipe/duct/equipment. The maximum spacing between
elements shall be 200mm.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/18 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. Pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be insertion type complete with

grade 316 stainless steel thermowell.

D. Relative Humidity Sensors

1. Sensing element shall be of the capacitance type with sensing range of 5%

to 95%. The accuracy shall be within 3% R. H. at 23 C.

2. Room humidity sensors shall share a common housing with room

temperature sensors, with independent setpoint adjustment knob on the
face plate. The common housing shall be completed with network access
jack for use with portable operator terminal.

3. The humidity control device should be capable of adjusting the set point
relative humidity of the space it serves down to 30% and up to 60%.

4. Duct mounted sensors installed indoors shall have enclosure with degree
of protection not below IP54.

E. Differential Pressure Sensors

1. All pipe/duct mounted sensors shall have accuracy of 2%.

2. Room differential pressure sensors shall be provided to monitor the air

differential pressure across each set of pressure stabilizer shown on the
Drawings. The sensors shall have measuring range of -50Pa to 50Pa and
an accuracy of 0.3Pa. The sensor enclosure face shall have digital
display of differential pressure, and LED lights to indicate normal/alarm
status. Control parameters can be changed by plugging in portable
operator terminal.

F. Static Pressure Sensors

1. The sensors shall have accuracy of 1%.

2. The sensors shall be internally wired with auto-zeroing circuitry.

G. Differential Pressure Switches

1. Differential pressure switches shall be provided for monitoring particulate

air filters status.

2. The pressure setpoint shall be adjustable by means of a calibrated switch.

H. Air Velocity Sensors

1. Air velocity sensors shall be capable of linear indication of the velocity of

air in a ductwork from 0 to 15 m/s and shall vary its output voltage with a
change in air velocity.

2. Sensors shall have range selection for low velocities. The accuracy of the
sensor shall be within 1% of the range.

3. Each air velocity sensor shall be completed with an integral transmitter

providing linear proportional output to A/C Central Supervisory Control
System.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/19 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

I. Flow Sensors

1. Flow sensors shall be of the electromagnetic flow type.

2. Electrodes shall be of stainless steel or other approved material suitable for

the liquid to be measured.

3. Complete self diagnostic function of the measurement system (sensor and

converter) shall be provided. The accuracy of the sensors shall be within
1% of the range.

J. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors

1. Carbon dioxide sensors shall be microprocessor based and comprise a

selective photo-acoustic CO2 sensor of a heated stable oxide
semiconductor or a non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) CO2 sensor.

2. The sensing range of carbon dioxide sensors shall be from 0 to 2000ppm.

3. The accuracy shall be within 5%.

4. Carbon dioxide sensors shall be available for room or ductwork mounting.

K. Carbon Monoxide (CO) Sensors

1. Carbon monoxide sensors shall be factory assembled units, designed to

continuously monitor and indicate the level of carbon monoxide in parts per
million on its meter and to activate the alarm circuit, alarm horn and
warning light when the carbon monoxide concentration reaches the alarm
point and deactivate the alarms when the carbon monoxide concentration
drops below the alarm point.

2. The alarm point shall be factory set at 200ppm and shall be internally
adjustable from 10 to 250ppm. Sensor response shall be 90% of
maximum reading within 60 seconds with 200pm carbon monoxide
concentration.

3. The sensor coverage shall be based on the requirements of the relevant

regulations but not be less than 500m2 per one sensor.

4. Unit shall be designed for operation with 220V, 50HZ, single phase supply
and shall have solid-state circuitry, terminal strip with contacts for recorder,
alarm and fault outputs, replaceable factory-matched pair of catalytic,
semi-conductor sensors, meter calibrated 0 to 250ppm, illuminated ON,
PURGE, ALARM ON, FAULT/TEST switches, momentary ALARM RESET
switch, all mounted on the unit’s cover.

5. Unit shall have environment-proof, fibreglass polyester case with hinged,

latched and lockable cover. Alarm light shall be mounted on the top of the
case and conduit connector or opening and a test gas connector at the
bottom of the case.

6. Sensors shall have at least a life time of 3 years with warranty certificate
from the manufacturer. Replacement shall consist of replacing the
detector head and filter.

7. Sensor shall comply with UL Standards, BS standard or other relevant

regulations for gas monitoring.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/20 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

L. Enthalpy Sensors

1. Each enthalpy sensor shall incorporate a temperature sensor and relative

humidity sensor to output the enthalpy signals. The respective component
sensors shall comply with the requirements in this section of this
Specification.

2. The sensors shall accept input signals of ranges 0-50°C/0-100% RH. The
measuring range shall be 0-100kJ/kg.

3. The sensors shall incorporate radio interference protection to BS EN 50081,

and suitable for use in the installed environment.

M. Probe-type Smoke Detectors

1. Probe-type smoke detectors shall be of the photo electronic type, operable

at air velocities of 1.5m/s to 20m/s.

2. Detector housings shall be UL listed per UL268A specifically for in-duct use.
The housings shall incorporate an airtight smoke chamber and with integral
mounting base suitable for both photo electronic and ionisation detector
heads.

3. Detectors shall be completed with filter system to minimize false alarm due
to dusty environment.

N. Water Level Switches

1. Water level switches for high/low water level alarms shall be of the float
type, comprising polypropylene body, EPDM rubber bending relief, and
PVC sheathed cable.

2. All plastic components of the switches shall be welded and screwed up

without the use of adhesive.

O. Flood Alarm Sensors

1. Flood alarm sensors shall be provided inside raised floor as shown in the
Drawings.

2. Sensors shall be of the cable type comprising two insulated conductors and
two electrode sensor wires physically separated from each other in a
braided construction. The sensing cable shall be installed in a perforated
protective plastic enclosure. Each cable shall have a driver module
connected to the adjacent DDC outstation.

3. 10m of cable sensor shall be allowed and provided at each location

complete with end terminations and leader cables.

P. Wind Speed and Directional Sensor

1. Wind speed and directional sensors shall be provided as shown in the

Drawings.

2. Sensors shall have an operation of range 0 to 50 m/s and an accuracy of

1m/s or 10%, whichever is greater, for wind speed sensing.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/21 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. Sensors shall have an operation of range 0 to 180 km/hr and an accuracy

of 5%, for wind directional sensing.

4. Sensor shall have 3-core unshielded cable to deliver the output pulses to
the A/C Central Supervisory Control System for the control of ventilation
fans.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit equipment and appurtenances to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

B. Install the entire automatic temperature control system, including control

equipment and wiring under the supervision of the automatic temperature control
equipment manufacturer.

C. Mount damper operators outside of the duct with support plates that are
completely outside the insulation or covering. Install support plates in a manner
that will prevent condensation on damper operator or on supports.

D. Support valves and damper operator motor mountings so that the operator does
not deflect from its normal path when operating under load.

E. Locate sensing elements and duct sensors where they will respond to
representative temperature within the duct or casing.

F. Install duct sensors and remote transmitters outside of ducts and casings.

1. Where ducts or casing are insulated, mount sensors flush with outside
insulation so that moisture will not condense on sensors or on supports.

2. Install duct sensor capillary tubes and wires to pierce the thermal insulation
at the least practicable number of points.

3. Seal insulation properly where wiring passes through.

G. Protect control wires by conduit, molding or flexible armor. Coil control wires
and fasten excess lengths out of the way.

H. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the bottoms side of control panel shall be
mounted at 1200mm above the finished floor level.

1. Provide 100mm clearance between rear of panel and wall.

2. Mount controls, instrument gauges, thermostats and relays flush on the

front of the panel.

3. Install wiring connections for accessibility in servicing.

I. Mount framed schematic control diagram adjacent to each control panel or

cabinet.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/22 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3.02 Field Quality Control

Upon completion of the installation, furnish the services of a competent engineer with
specialized experience in control systems for testing and commissioning of the
systems and to furnish the Employer's personnel with the following:-

A. Operating instructions for minimum period of ten consecutive eight-hour days.

B. Provide 6 copies of completely printed, operating instructions in manual or

handbook form, completely and clearly indexed for ready reference during actual
operation.

1. Include descriptions of the systems and background information, and

complete procedures for adjustment, calibration, replacement and repair of
all components in the system.

2. Use these instructions as a text during the instruction of the operating

personnel.

C. Train operators in preventive maintenance of the systems and to recognize

malfunctions at the control facilities by observation of visual and audible signals.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.21(AC)/23 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

SECTION 3.22 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

1 GENERAL

1.1 Description

1.1.1 This Specification covers the design, manufacture, supply, transportation, delivery,
installation, coordination with other parties, configuration, testing, commissioning,
maintenance and rectification of defects during the 2 years of defects liability period (DLP)
of the Building Management System (hereinafter called “BMS”) for Tower A and Tower B
of the Proposed Commercial Development at NKIL 6557, Kai Tak Area 1E, Site 2,
Kowloon as described herein and shown on the Drawings. Two separated systems shall
be provided for Tower A and Tower B.

1.1.2 Supply and installation of two BMS (including all the required hardware, software,
operating system and licenses) to Tower A and B. BMS in Tower A and Tower B shall be
capable for integration to achieve the following requirements:

A BMS in each Tower shall be able to function individually and allow for control and
monitoring of the system equipment in the corresponding tower. No implication to
either system if failure occurs in one of the tower.

B Workstation in Tower A shall be able to control and monitor the system equipment
in Tower B through the same user interface. .

C Workstation in Tower B shall not have right to control and monitor system
equipment in Tower A in normal situation.

1.1.3 The System shall be provisioned with the equipment listed in Section 2 “PRODUCTS” as
the minimum standard and configured according to the Drawings as minimum
configuration. Meeting the minimum product standrds and configuration standards do not
necessary imply the System Performance Requirements can be met. This Contractor
shall provide additional equipment, enhanced standards, improved systems configuration
to ensure the completed System shall meet the System Performance Requirements in
this specification.

1.1.4 The BMS equipment shall basically consist of the following items, the Contractor shall
include any equipment which are required to be installed together with the BMS
equipment to achieve a proper performance:

A Building Network Controller to manage the communication between the BMS

server(s) and the stand-alone DDC Controller(s).

B BMS Central Server

C Direct Digital Control (DDC) Controllers.

D Personal computer BMS Operator Workstation with LCD monitor, printer, keyboard,
mouse, etc.

E Portable Notebook Computers

F Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) unit with minimum 30 minutes backing up

capacity of the Server, workstations, Building Network Controllers, DDC
Controllers.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/1 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

Detailed description of each item of the above equipment shall be as stated hereinafter.

1.1.5 Duty/Redundant BMS central equipment including BMS server and workstation shall be
provided to both Tower A and Tower B BMS. Duty and Hot standby redundant BMS
server and shall installed in Server Room. In event of a failure of the duty
server/workstation, the hot-standby server/workstation shall take over all roles of
duty server without affecting the control functions of the systems.

1.1.6 The BMS shall be a peer-to-peer distributed intelligence system via TCP/IP Ethernet
backbone. Each DDC Controller shall be located within the various plant rooms on
various floors. The DDC Controllers shall be linked to the Ethernet backbone through a
Building Network Controller (CU). The DDC controllers shall be linked to the CU to form
a communication sub-network and provided global strategy and direction and
communication on a peer-to-peer basis with other DDC controllers.

1.1.7 All Software provided shall be off-the-shelf products supported by the latest Windows
operating system.

1.1.8 The Contractor shall provide software licenses for all software packages used in the
BMS and free update of all software to latest service and maintenance patches for the
Project during DLP.

1.1.9 The system shall have built-in analytics for energy saving and ease of operation,
included but not limited to: Thermographics, Environmental Index, Dashboard, Energy
Report, Fault Detection Diagnostics, Scatter Plot Charting, Trending, etc.

1.1.10 The system shall be included to provide mobile access via web-based browser , which
allows remote access the system via tablets or smartphone. All license fees shall be
included. The remote access shall capable of receive and acknowledge alarms, view
and manage values/set points (selectable), schedules and trend log list.

1.1.11 All graphics of the system (include for Workstation display) shall be designed according
to client’s requirements and shall be able to adjust until obtain final approval from clients
and end users.

1.1.12 The BMS shall include to provide all necessary hardware and software to interface with
the 7D-BIM and enable linkage between the two platforms.

1.1.13 This Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all colour graphic floor plan and
systems schematic on-screen display. The exact quantity of colour graphics floor plan and
system schematic on-screen display shall be submitted by this Contractor and to be
approved by client.

1.1.14 Uninterruptible Power Supply unit shall be provided for the system including the BMS
Workstation, BMS server, network equipment, DDC network Controller BMS shall be a
peer-to-peer distributed intelligence system via TCP/IP Ethernet backbone etc. for 3
0minutes continuous operation of the system upon main failure.

1.1.15 The BMS shall include the provision of all necessary hardware and software to monitor
and/or control the MEP systems and installations as specified below. The BMS Interface
Schedule give an indication of the type and quantities required on the project to enable
this Contractor to configure the most appropriate system for the installation. A brief
description is also given to indicate the type of interface and details to be used with other
services and systems. This will enable this Contractor to determine the extent of field
wiring required and incorporated this as part of the Works.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/2 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

1.1.16 Other equipment, products and installation not specified in this specification but required
for the complete installation and functioning of the BMS shall be provided by this
Contractor.

1.1.17 Provide all the wiring, cable, interconnection cable between equipment, plugs,
connectors, sockets, converters, etc., which is necessary for the connection of
equipment for the complete functioning of the system.

1.1.18 Labelling all the equipment and devices of the System, all labels shall be made of plastic
laminated, the labelling scheme shall be submitted for Engineer approval.

1.1.19 Provide demonstrations of Graphical User Interface (GUI) to the Employer and
Employer’s Representatives and obtain users’ comments and approval on the GUI prior
to the production.

1.1.20 Mock up for any part of the installation as required.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF STANDARD

1.2.1 The design, supply & installation, testing & commissioning and materials of the system
shall comply with, but not limited to, the following standards and requirements: -

A BACnet

B Modbus

C LON Works

D LON Mark

E LON Talk

F OPC Client/Server Version 2.0 and all subsequent revision

G ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard – Part 1: General requirements, April 1, 2001

H ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.1-1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard - Part 1: General Requirements - Addendum 1 - Minimum 4-Pair UTP
and 4-Pair ScTP Patch Cable Bend Radius, July 1, 2001

I ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, April 1, 2001

J ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Components - Addendum 1 -
Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling,
June 1, 2002

K ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components - Addendum 2,
December 1, 2001

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/3 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

L ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling - Addendum 3 - Additional
Considerations for Insertion Loss and Return Loss Pass/Fail Determination, March
1, 2001

M ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.3 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, March 1,

2000

N ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard -

Addendum 1 - Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125 um
Optical Fiber Cables, April 1, 2002

O ANSI/TIA/EIA 862 Building Automation Systems Cabling for Commercial Buildings,

April 11, 2002

P Electronic Industries Association / Telecommunication Industry Association

(EIA/TIA) 568A - Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards.

Q EIA/TIA - 568A-5 - Category 5E (Enhanced) Power Sum NEXT requirements.

R EIA/TIA - 569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways

and Spaces.

S EIA/TIA-TSB-67 - Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of

Unshielded Twisted Pair Cabling Systems, October, 1995

T EIA/TIA- 72 - Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines, October, 1995

U EIA/TIA PN-3398 (Cabling Practices for Open Offices), March, 1995

V International Standard Organization / International Electrotechnical Commission

ISO/IEC IS 11801, January, 1994

W UL Cable Certification and Follow Up Program

X National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

Y American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)

Z National Electric Code (NEC)

AA Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

BB UL Testing Bulletin

CC American National Standards Institution (ANSI) X3T9.5 Requirements for UTP at

100Mbps

1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1 This section covers the general system configurations and performance requirements for
the design, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of Building

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/4 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

Management System (BMS) in accordance with this Specification and Drawings, and
includes but not be limited to the following: -

A Design and configuration of Client/Server PC based BMS to perform the central

control, status/alarm monitoring, and other specified functions of the following
services and as shown in the BMS Interface Schedule: -

i Exchanging the control signals and monitoring point statuses as specified in

the BMS Interface Schedule.

ii Control and Monitoring of HVAC installations of the entire development via

high level interface with ATC system.

iii Alarm monitoring of common fire alarm, supervision and monitoring of AFA
installation of the entire development.

iv Monitoring of Plumbing and Drainage installation of the entire development.

v Control and monitoring of electrical and lighting installation of the entire

development.

vi Monitoring of Water Filtration, Water Feature, Irrigation of the entire

development.

vii Monitoring of Escalator and Elevator installations of the entire development.

viii Energy metering and consumption monitoring for water supply, electricity
supply, and chilled water supply for Retail Tenants area.

ix Energy metering and consumption monitoring for electricity supply,

generator supply, chilled water supply, cold and hot water supply for
landlord areas of the entire development.

x High temperature alarms, temperature monitoring and power failure alarms

monitoring for walk-in cold rooms / freezers.

xi Alarm monitoring of CCTV System and Access Control System.

xii Other control and monitoring function as specified in BMS Interface

Schedules and shown on Drawings.

B The BMS shall be capable of providing, but not be limited to, the following
functions:-

i Operational control of all MEP installations and equipment.

ii Event monitoring and logging of the status of MEP systems.

iii Alarm monitoring and logging of the type and nature of alarm of MEP
systems.

iv Logging and reporting on various energy consumption, maximum demand

monitoring and highlighting of efficient management device.

v Notification and reporting on all alarm signals.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/5 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

vi Time scheduling for equipment on-off/set-point control, system run time

totalization of all plant and equipment.

vii Trend logging and plant history data base.

viii Interactive preventive/corrective maintenance management.

ix Energy management such as electrical power consumption and maximum

demand monitoring, while load shedding, maximum demand limiting and
power quality measurement generally not be required, unless otherwise
specified.

x Plant energy optimization.

xi Hot Standby Server Redundant configuration implementation.

C The BMS shall include all necessary hardware and software to effectively control
and monitor the operation and performance of all the MEP systems, as detailed in
the BMS Interface Schedules which can be generalized but not be limited to the
following:-

i HVAC Control Systems.

a High Level interface with ATC System, details please refer to Section
of ATC System.

ii Plumbing and Drainage Systems

a Sump pumps and sump pits, grease and Petrol Interceptors alarm
and status monitoring

b Cold/flushing water pumps and tanks alarm and status monitoring

c PRV status and high pressure limit alarm

d Water pump start/stop and running status

e Tank level high/low limit alarm

f Filter flag status

g Ozone generator start/stop and running status

iii Electrical Installation

a ACB/MCCB alarm and status monitoring

b Battery and charger status monitoring

c Main supply automatic transfer switch

d Main supply power factor/frequency monitoring

e Main supply power consumption monitoring

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/6 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

f Time scheduled on-off control of indoor, outdoor, landscape and

Architecture lighting

g Main supply current/voltage/output power/power factor logging/power

quality measurement

h Generator plant running status and alarms

i Generator running parameters (i.e. Current, Voltage, Output KW and

Power Factor)

j UPS operating status

iv Lighting

a Carpark and Driveway Lighting Control

b Lift Lobby Lighting Control

c Corridor Lighting Control

d Toilet Lighting Control

e Lobby Signage Lighting Control

f Arcade Shop Front Lighting Control

g External and Façade Lighting Control

h Landscape Lighting Control

v Water Feature and Irrigation Systems

a Central control of water pumps by BMS

b Water pumps and tank level high/low limit alarm, start/stop and
running status

c Filter flag status

d Ozone generator start/stop and running status

vi Elevator and Escalator

a System alarm signal

b System fault and operation monitoring

vii Energy Metering for Chilled Water Supply, Cold and Hot Water Supply for
landlord Areas

a Logging of energy consumption

b Trending of energy consumption base on energy consumption history

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/7 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

c Energy bill calculation based on user’s defined tariff figures

viii Reading of Pressure Differential Sensors of HVAC equipment

a Analogue reading of pressure differential sensors

ix UPS system:

a Overload

b Overload shutdown

c Battery discharging

d Low battery voltage

e Input power failure

f Inverter output over-voltage / under-voltage

g Static bypass inhibited

x Standalone UPS System

a AC mains failure

b Low battery

c Bypass on

xi ELV System

a High level interface with Security System for monitoring of Water

Leakage Detection.

1.3.2 The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity and
functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, DDC I/O modules and operator
devices.

1.3.3 The system provided by this Contractor shall be expandable for 20% more points than
specified for initial system, to allow for future expansion of system. In addition, the
expansion shall not require the addition of transmission trunk wires, except in areas not
presently covered by the system, change of sensors or controllers, nor require
abandonment or replacement of any part of the base system.

1.3.4 The Contractor shall allow provision for all I/O points as specified in the Point Schedule
as a minimum. The system shall be provided with all necessary components to handle at
least an additional 20% of total I/O points (for each type of points) for certain equipment
not indicated in the point schedule or as spare capacity for approval by the Engineer. In
other words, the entire hardware and software capacity including all licenses required
shall include at least the supply and installation of the additional 20% system capacity.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/8 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

1.3.5 The BMS shall deploy on the Structured Cabling System and ELV network infrastructure
provided by this Contractor,

1.3.6 The connection between BMS of tower shall deploy on ISP leased line, which provided
by this Contractor and shared with other ELV Systems.

1.3.7 Digital Checking

Accepted digital checking procedures commonly used in true digital transmission

technologies shall be employed in the system.

1.3.8 Signal Protection

All cable entries into the DDC controllers and the Building Network Controllers, Servers,
Workstations shall be transformer coupled to prevent common mode voltages from
causing signal errors and to provide a high degree of noise rejection. The transmitted
pulses shall not cause any net DC charge on the cable which would produce DC
transients.

1.3.9 Functions

The digital communication line shall be capable of accepting all functions relating to
central monitoring and control such as contact (binary) inputs, two-state command
(start/stop, on/off, etc.), three-state command (on/off/auto, etc.), set point, and intercom
switching.

1.3.10 Command Functions

A All command functions shall be accomplished by the CPU. A status feedback

procedure shall be employed on all command signals to ensure that the monitored
device received the correct command instruction.

B Command mode operation initiated manually from the operator terminal by time
programme or by specific event shall be programmable to perform the following
application:-

i Activate and de-activate on command.

ii Activate momentarily when commanded.

iii Activate the output from the corresponding input alarm and remain activated
until commanded off, initial activation is independent of central panel(s).

C Conversion of any zone from monitor-only function to monitor/command function

or vice-versa shall be by simple addition or deletion of command relay and shall
require no other hardware additions or deletion.

1.3.11 The design of the BMS shall fulfil the following criteria:-

A Ease of operation

The system shall be user-friendly. All system software shall be field proven. The
BMS system shall run on server-client base and the operating system of servers
and workstations shall be Window-based and enable multiple programs to run
concurrently. All workstations shall be clients to the system server using Internet
Explorer or similar Internet Browsers as the basis of operation with advanced

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/9 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

techniques for easy learning, familiarization and operation, such as dynamic and
animated graphics displays. Graphic User Interface (GUI) application software
shall also be provided in the operator workstations to reduce the graphic
generation time at the workstation. All data analysis/reporting shall be
performed/generated by the BMS System Servers.

B High efficiency and flexibility

The system shall provide different level of priority, user-defined alarm report
destination, capable of initiate automatic page of the paging system for specific
alarm, no limit to the number of user-defined time schedules.

C Vendor independent

The system shall provide the protocol to communicate open to the other systems.
The system shall be a proven integration platform for multiple vendor of different
type of building sub-systems. Details on the open system requirements shall refer
to other sections of this specification.

D Expandability

Spare capability of at least 20% of the total number of analogue and digital
input/output points used shall be allowed. The system shall be modular design,
distributed intelligence and no centralized equipment to avoid over-loading of
single device or communication bottle-neck. Wherever applicable, distributed
server Architecture shall be implemented if the quantity of the monitoring points
exceed the handling capacity of a single BMS server. In addition, the expansion
shall not require the addition of transmission trunk, wires, except in area not
presently covered by the system, change of sensors or controllers, nor require
abandonment or replacement of any part of the base system.

E Network/Platform/Software connectivity

The system shall comply with international standard for network integration, in
Ethernet, and commonly adopted platform, such as MS, Windows 7, Windows XP,
Window 2000, Windows NT or UNIX. The system shall employ standard data link
method, such as Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE), Object Linking and Embedding
(OLE), Object Linking and Embedding for Process Control (OPC), standard
database format such as DB4, SQL.

F Wide Area Network (WAN) connection

The system shall be able to adopt different telecommunication technologies, e.g.

dial-up, broadband Internet connection using DSL/ADSL/Cable Modem, lease line,
ISDN, etc.

G System reliability and operation security

The system shall be standalone operation and localization function. Fully

distributed intelligence and true peer-to-peer communication network shall be
adopted. Different level of access and different level of control priority shall be
provided. Server communication lost shall not affect the operation of system. DDC
Controllers shall be equipped with internal memory to store temporary data when
connection between servers and DDC Controllers are lost.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/10 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

H This Sub-Contractor shall connect the DDC to the Marshalling Cabinets to collect
all the monitoring and control signals from other E&M Systems.

1.3.12 System Speed and Response Time

A The BMS shall have a system response time not exceeding the following specified
limits:

Under a nominal load of 100 messages per second across the system, alarms and
(non-alarm) events are to trigger system response within the respective time
intervals:-

Alarms : 2.00 +/- 1 seconds and

Events : 6.00+/- 0.5 seconds.

B The specified system response time is defined as the longest of the following:-

i Time interval between the occurrence of an information point change-of-

status in the connected systems and the commencement of an
uninterrupted report of the event on a man-machine interface device.

ii Time interval between a command executed by the operator and the

commencement of execution of the command at the information point in the
field.

iii Time interval between the occurrence of an event and the commencement
of pre-programmed sequence of actions such as Event Response Program,
generation of special reports, display of advisory text.

C In addition, at the BMS workstation, any alarm triggered at farthest location shall
be shown up at the workstation within 1-3 seconds. (when the system is
performing normal control & monitoring activities). Time to refresh all monitoring
points status on any system schematic in the Graphic User Interface (GUI) shall be
within 5-7 seconds.

1.3.13 System Configuration

A The Building Management System shall comprise PC-based Operator

Workstations, BMS Servers, DDC controllers, communication network for
signal/data transmission among the DDC controllers workstations and various field
support hardware to form a true "Distributed Intelligence Techniques".

B Operator Workstations shall be configured as Clients to the BMS Server in such a

way that only Internet Browser or GUI application software is required as a media
to logon to the BMS System. No special BMS application software is required for
the control, monitoring and report generation on operator workstations. Operator
workstation shall be able to perform real time control of equipment, real time
monitoring of system and its equipment as well as trend logging,
alarm/event/maintenance/energy consumption report generation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/11 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

C The BMS servers shall collect and store all the system information including all
real time and historical alarm/event of equipment, energy information, system
status. The BMS Server shall also be able to analyse the collected data for all kind
of reports as specified in this Specification. During normal automatic operation, the
system shall be running independently without need for the command from BMS
servers. In manual control operation, operator shall issue control command or set
point change command to the DDC through the BMS Servers and the change of
status of the equipment shall be fed back to the operator workstation through the
BMS servers with a maximum response time as specified in this Specification. Any
status change/alarm shall be printed on the alarm/event printers attached to the
operator workstations. Report generation shall also be performed by the BMS
Server.

D The DDC controllers shall collect and transmit all analog and digital signals as
specified. They shall be self-intelligent, microprocessor based stand-alone control
processors. The exact number of controllers shall be determined by this
Contractor in accordance with the equipment offered, the number of points to be
controlled/monitored. The DDC Controllers shall be linked to the DDC Controllers
to form a communication sub-network.

E The DDC Controllers shall be linked to the BMS servers and operator workstations
via a ELV Network Infrastructure in star topology, i.e., the Data Communication
Network which shall be supplied and installed by this Contractor. BMS data shall
be running separately. Data transmissions between the BMS servers/operator
workstations and the DDC controllers shall be in digital form through the Data
Communication Network. Direct communication can therefore be executed
between each DDC Controller, and also between each DDC Controller and the
BMS Servers/operator workstations; which shall be linked up by the Data
Communication Network; in a "peer to peer" basis in the network. The Data
Communication Network shall allow equal transfer of data between each and
every equipment on the network. With this configuration, all workstation/servers
and their associated peripherals shall operate in parallel and have equal access to
all data in the system. Through software assignments and command by the
operator, selected data is accessible through all of this operator workstation via the
BMS servers.

F The DDC Controllers / BMS Servers shall collect and transmit all analogue and
digital signal as specified. They shall be self-intelligent, microprocessor based
stand-alone control processors. The exact number of DDC Controllers shall be
determined by this Contractor in accordance with the capacity/capability of
equipment offered and the number of points to be controlled/ monitored. The DDC
Controllers shall be linked to form a communication sub-network.

1.3.14 Interface Requirement

A General

i This Section shall be read in conjunction with BMS Interfacing Schedule

(Point Schedule), which shall take precedence in case of any discrepancies
with this section.

ii The Sub-Contractor shall provide all the liaison, coordination with all other
relevant Sub-Contractors / MEP Sub-Contractors and provide all the
required hardware, engineering works and programming to interface with

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/12 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

other MEP installations as shown on the Interface Schedules, Drawings and

reference documents.

iii The Sub-Contractor shall responsible for coordinate with Employer’s

representative, Main Contractor, MEP Sub-Contractors for all the interface
connection, location, environment concern, etc., according to the
Specification and the Drawings.

iv The Interface Schedules, Drawings and reference documents show the

preliminary information on interface requirement between BMS and other
MEP installations provide the guidelines for this Sub-Contractor to develop
the detail interface design. This Sub-Contractor shall be deemed taken into
account that the interface requirements will subject to regular review to suit
the actual site design development, such as type of interface, protocol use,
high or low level data interface, type of connection, etc.

B Interfacing with MEP Systems

i High level interfaces which include Native BACnet, ModBus, OPC,

ControlNet, LONWorks, RS Data Protocol, TCP/IP, and Master/Slave
control shall be employed to communicate with MEP systems as specified.
Low level interface, e.g. dry contact shall only be employed for connecting
isolated points and simple individual equipment where high level interface is
not feasible.

a This Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with other parties for detailed

interface requirements on HVAC, Boiler of this development for. This
Contractor shall be responsible for but not limited to the provision of
the following but not limited to (if applicable):

b BACnet/ Modbus/ ControlNet ports allow for Independent System and

LONWorks connections

c Communication means for high-level communication with the control

and monitoring signals of HVAC as shown on the Drawings.

d Human-machine graphic shall be in schematic format to indicate

system status for remote controlling and monitoring points.

e Log and print of any alarm.

f Hardware and management software to handle relevant database.

g Counting the pressure difference across the terminal equipment coil

and control valve of the remote chilled water distribution circuits and
potential critical pressure prop circuits via high level interfacing with
BMS to control the variable speed drive primacy.

ii The Contractor shall coordinate with the corresponding Fire Services

Contractors of this development for detailed interface requirements. The
Contractor shall be responsible for provision of the following:

a Ethernet ports allow for TCP/IP, BACnet connections.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/13 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

b Communication means for high-level communication with the AFA

main panel as shown on the Drawings for OPC client / server
monitoring.

c Human-machine graphic shall be in schematic format to indicate

system status for monitoring points.

d Hardware and management software to handle relevant database.

e Log and print of any fire alarm.

f Connecting the pressure difference across the terminal equipment

coil and control valve of the remote chilled distribution. Circuit and
potential critical pressure prop circuit via DDC controller interfacing
with BMS to control the variable speed drive primacy.

iii This Contractor shall coordinate with the corresponding Lift & Escalator
Contractors for detailed interface requirements.

a Interfacing between Lift installation and BMS shall be provided via

high level interface for controlling and monitoring of all functions and
features using BACnet, Modbus and/or LonWorks standard open
protocol. Proprietary protocol will not be accepted. The Lift &
Escalator Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all
hardwards, software including any software modification and all
necessary contacts (high level) for lift interface with other trades,
adjacent to the lift Supervisory Panel at Security Control Room.
Signals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

I Fault alarm signal of each lift.

II Emergency call alarm of each lift.

III Mode of normal power and emergency power status conditions

for each lift.

IV On/Off status indication for each lift.

V Fire alarm lift homing indication for each lift.

VI Travel direction indication

VII Flooding alarm display of lift sump pits.

VIII Fault alarm/fire signal for each escalator.

IX Run/Stop status indication for each escalator.

X Emergency stop indication for each escalator.

iv Human-machine graphic in layout map in floor by floor basis to indicate

on/off status of lighting groups.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/14 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

a All necessary interface (high or low level as specified) with the other’s
application software to issue on/off and dimming commands to
lighting control system.

b Log and print of the completed control about remote and operator’s
action.

c Allow the lighting control software to be interfaced with the BMS

system computer.

v This Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with the relevant parties, if necessary,

for detailed interface requirements of generators, UPSs, and low voltage
switchboard works and standalone UPS.

vi This Contractor shall responsible for provision of following:

a Human-machine graphic in schematic format to indicate system

status of points as specified.

b Log and print of power supply failure and fault alarm indication.

c To display all the data such as voltage, current, power, harmonic, etc.

vii This Contractor shall coordinate with relevant parties of this development, if
necessary, for detailed interface requirements of power consumption
monitoring system, if specified in the BMS Interfacing Schedule. The Sub-
Contractor shall provide necessary human-machine graphic in schematic
format and DDC to show the power consumption of each department.

viii This Sub-Contractor shall co-ordinate with the other parties, if necessary,
that shall be monitored and/or controlled by the BMS and allow all the
software to be interfaced with the BMS system computer. The Contractor
integration work between all the installed software of other services and the
BMS system, as specified in the BMS Interfacing Schedule.

ix This Contractor shall coordinate with the relevant parties, if necessary, for
detailed interface requirements of BMS via high level interface.

1.3.15 Graphic Provision

A This Contractor's special attention is drawn to the requirement of control and

monitoring of the BMS through the graphic mode of operation as called for in the
relevant section of “Hardware and Software” of this Specification.

B This Contractor shall provide sufficient number of graphics to enable smooth

operation of the BMS on the various E&M systems as stipulated in this Section.

C Before generation of the graphics, this Contractor shall submit proposal for the
Approver who shall determine the requirement of sufficiency.

D The BMS shall provide a Graphic Display Building editor for the creation of site
specific graphic displays. It shall allow one-step online building of display static
and dynamic objects. It shall be a WYSIWYG editor (what you see is what you get)
allowing the displays drawn using the editor to appear exactly the same when
viewed from an BMS Operator Workstation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/15 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

E Displays shall be created in the HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) format. This
is essential so that the displays can also be viewed through a web browser as well
as the normal BMS operator workstation. The displays must be saved in the
standard HTML format. All graphic elements shall be available as HTML elements.
It shall be possible to view and edit the resulting HTML file using a text editor.
Systems which do not support HTML displays will not be acceptable.

F Static objects created using the Graphic Display Building Editor shall include static
text, rectangles, arcs and circles. However, it shall be possible to animate static
objects to give the dynamic characteristics of the real-world object the point
represents.

G It shall be possible to link dynamic objects to the BMS database. They shall allow
information to be displayed from the database or to allow an operator to interact
with them in order to make changes in the database and to perform control actions.
Dynamic objects shall include dynamic text, push buttons, indicators, charts, check
boxes, combo boxes, pop up boxes, ActiveX controls and scroll bars.

H It shall be possible to include static and dynamic display objects on the one display.
The editor shall allow display objects to be manipulated by pointing, clicking and
dragging. The editor shall allow display objects to be drawn, re-sized, copied,
grouped, rotated, aligned and layered over each other. It shall be possible to copy
and paste objects within and between displays.

I The Graphic Display Building Editor shall support the following features:

i One step display building (both background and dynamic information)

ii Point and click operation

iii Paste to and from the Clipboard

J Absolute positioning object placement

i Ruler and grid

ii Configurable tool, colour and line palettes

iii Dialog boxes for definition of object properties

iv Shape and page building

v On-line help

vi Import graphics from third party packages including WMF, BMP, TGA, GIF
and JPEG formats.

vii Standard library of FMS industry objects

viii Live video element

ix Building of Face Plates

x ActiveX controls

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/16 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

xi ActiveX documents

xii Display Scripts written in either JavaScript or VBScript

xiii Multilevel undo and redo

xiv Object manipulation including combine, union, intersection

xv Transparent images

K The graphical programming language shall ensure that the users can make use of
pre-engineered applications and graphics or have the power to create their own
screens or strategies with no dependencies

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 In additional to the submittal required elsewhere in the specification, the followings shall
be submitted for approval at the appropriate stages of the Works:

A The manufacturer of all copper cables and associate accessories shall be

ISO9000/ISO9001 or above certified, copies of the certificates must be submitted.

B Provide manufacturer's catalogues showing all the technical information of the

products and materials, performance characteristics, dimensions, colour,
configurations, installation requirements, constraints, standard of compliance and
certification body.

C Submission shall include all the items specified in Specifications and as required
for the completion of the installation. Manufacturers’ cut sheets shall include, but
not limited to:

i All network switches.

ii All DDC and I/O modules.

iii Sensors and transducers.

iv All computer servers, workstation, peripherals and accessories.

v All power supply cable and control cables.

vi Fiber optic cable and UTP Cable for network connection.

vii All required tooling.

viii All grounding and surge suppression system components.

ix All software packages.

1.4.2 Sample

A The Sub-Contractor shall submit the following sample materials for approval prior
to installation: -

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/17 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

i Fibre Optic Cable and Control Cable

a One 300mm straight length of each type of fibre optic cable with
termination of fibre optic connector at both ends with the
workmanship that will be adopted for mass production.

b One 300mm straight length of each type of control cable.

ii Category 6A Cable

a One 300mm straight length of Category 6A Cable.

iii Sensors and Transducers

a One (1) no. of each type of sensor.

b One (1) no. of each type of transducer.

iv DDCs and I/O Modules

a One (1) no. of each type of DDC.

b One (1) no. of each type of I/O module.

v Network Switch

a One (1) no. of each type of switch.

vi Others

a One sample each of the following items shall be provided.

vii One for each type of labels.

viii Any other samples as specified elsewhere in this Specification

ix All samples of materials specified shall be properly mounted and submitted

in duplication for approval.

2 PRODUCT

2.1 Particular Requirement

2.1.1 Network Control Unit (CU)

A General

i The CU shall be a field proven computer based equipment suitable for real-
time process control applications. The initial memory capacity shall be
capable of performing all the necessary functions as specified in this
Specification with a 25% spare memory capacity reserved for future
extension.

ii The CU shall be capable of transmitting and receiving data over voice grade
commercial telephone lines and TCP/IP Ethernet network.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/18 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

iii The CU shall be provided with a power fail safe and restart feature. An
orderly restart of electrical loads controlled from the data processing
controller shall occur on power resumption after a power failure. There shall
be no loss of system memory on power failure at the CU.

iv Each CU shall be able to support at least 10 DDC controllers simultaneously

connected to that CU.

v UPS shall be provided to allow continuous operation of the CU for at least

30 minutes after power failure.

vi Each peripheral device shall be capable of being programmed to

command/display/alarm all data, only E&M data, only security data, or any
combination of these data categories.

vii Reassignment or modification of operator terminal data shall be easily

accomplished in the field via a single keyboard entry.

viii Alarm monitoring points going into alarm shall automatically annunciate
themselves audibly and visually on the designated operator's terminal and
printer. Alarm points returning to normal shall annunciate and reset visually
on the same printer.

ix All analogue sensor scaling, necessary linearizing, and square root

extraction etc. shall be done at the DDC controllers.

x The CU shall perform a scanning test on the DDC controllers and peripheral
devices for proper operation at every interval of not more than 5 minutes.
Any mal-functioning shall be annunciated and recorded on the alarm log.

2.1.2 DDC controllers

A General

i The DDC controller shall be a fully user-programmable, supervisory

controller. The DDC controller shall monitor the network of distributed DDC
controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a
peer-to-peer basis with other DDC controllers.

ii Processor

a Controllers shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum 32 bits.

They shall be multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time digital control
processors. Outstation size and capability shall be sufficient to fully
meet the requirements of this Specification.

iii Memory

a Each outstation shall have sufficient memory to support its own

operating system with a minimum 32 bits, databases, and control
programmes, and to provide supervisory control for all second tier
controllers.

b The DDC shall be provided with a power fail safe and restart feature.
An orderly restart of electrical loads controlled from the data

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/19 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

processing controller shall occur on power resumption after a power

failure. There shall be no loss of system memory on power failure at
the DDC.

c The memory within each DDC controllers shall be non-volatile.

iv Hardware Real Time Clock

a The outstation shall have an integrated, hardware-based, real-time

clock.

v Communications Ports

a The DDC Controllers shall provide 10/100Mbit/s RJ45 Ethernet port

for connecting to the network infrastructure.

b Controllers shall allow temporary use of portable devices without

interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems,
printers, or terminals.

vi The DDC controller’s construction shall have a fabricated metal enclosure,

hinged door and master lock and name plate holder. All inputs and outputs
shall be connected to separately numbered terminals, located in the DDC
controllers. A local AC power failure or failure of any DDC Controllers shall
not disturb the normal function of the remaining system.

vii The DDC controllers shall be provided with plug-in printed circuit boards and
racks and factory prewired internal wiring. Terminal strips shall be provided
with identification. Spare capacity of 20% minimum shall be allowed in each
DDC controllers for future extension.

viii The DDC controllers shall be capable of handling start-stop commands,

mode changes, control point adjustments, digital alarms, status inputs, etc.

ix The operator shall be notified of the normal power supply failure by an

audible alarm together with the printout on the printer, stating the address
and detail of the failure. Similar alarm and printout shall be provided for
trouble reporting such as cable break, mal-function of remote sensor, data
transmission failure, no acknowledgement condition after command
repeated, etc.

x Time clock for all DDC Controllers shall be synchronized with the BMS
Servers either by hardware or software.

xi Each controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating
system and databases including:

a Standalone Control Processes

b Energy Management Applications

c Alarm Management

d At least 1 day temporary storage of Historical/Trend Data for all points

in case of communication lost

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/20 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

e Last 48 samples taken at half hour intervals for all connected

analogue points

f Maintenance Support Applications

g Custom Processes

h Operator I/O through communication ports

i Manual Override Monitoring

xii Each controller shall be able to accept/provide Digital Inputs for status/alarm
contacts, Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control, Multi-Stage Digital
Outputs for multi-speed or forward/reverse equipment control, Analogue
Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements,
Analogue Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity
control of primary equipment, Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring
and High Level inputs for excessive data transfer.

xiii Feedback shall be employed on all command output signals to ensure that a
monitored device (motor etc.) receives the command instructions and
responds as commanded by the operator or control system. Analogue to
digital conversion for analogue monitoring shall be performed at the DDC
Controller before transmission to the central processing equipment.

xiv Each controller shall provide local status indication of each binary input and
output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the
need for an operator I/O device.

xv Each controller shall be factory pre-wired comprising a factory fabricated

metal enclosure, hinged door with master lock and name plate holder. The
controller shall be of modular design with standard function (card type)
modules or similar to accept plug in printed circuit cards. Each DDC shall
be loaded up to 80% capacity only; 20% shall be reserved for future
expansion.

xvi Each controller shall contain interface hardware modules to accept a plug-in
notebook computer with visual display and analogue facility to enable
commissioning and fault finding to be achieved.

xvii Each controller shall have nickel cadmium type rechargeable battery backup
to protect the programme and operating data memories for at least 72 hours
in case of power failure.

xviii The operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or
centrally executed commands at each controller via local, point discrete, on-
board manual/off/auto operator override switches for binary control points
and gradual switches for analogue control type points. These override
switches shall be operable whether the controller is powered or not.

xix Each controller shall monitor the status or position of all overrides, and
include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that
automatic control has been inhibited. The DDC Controllers shall also collect
override activity information for daily and monthly reports.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/21 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

xx UPS shall be provided to allow continuous operation of the DDC Controllers

for at least 30 minutes after power failure.

xxi The controller shall utilize a graphic programming technique to configure the
control strategies. Special programming language shall not be required.

xxii Each controller shall have a built in display and adjust panel to allow for
direct access to the controller. Local adjustment of all set points and display
of all input and output values and status shall be provided at the panel.

xxiii Each DDC controller shall consist of at least four types of functional module
which are inter-connected during configuration to provide a complete control
algorithm.

a Control module

b Numeric calculation module

c Logic module

d Output module

xxiv Each DDC shall be configured to provide the following control functions:-

a On/Off control

b Proportional (P), Proportional plus integral (PI), Proportional plus

integral plus deviate(PID) control

c Average

d Minimum/Maximum selection

e Enthalpy calculation

f Signal selection

g Numeric calculation

h Line segment

i Time function (i.e. on delay, off delay, on delay with memory)

j Logic interlock

k Run-time counter

l Time schedule

m Totalizer and integrator

xxv All the control modes shall be software selectable at any time. The
controller shall communicate with the Building Network Controller via an
industry standard local network to maintain global database and perform
global system functions.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/22 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

xxvi DDC Controllers shall be equipped with indicator lamps for DDC status
indication such as system healthy, etc.

B Circuit Supervision

i Should any DDC controllers fail to continue to receive signals from the
transmission network, the CPU shall immediately realise the condition and
identify the specific location of failure in the system. Failure of any DDC
Controllers shall not render the BMS inoperable, but shall only result in loss
or degraded performance of that panel.

ii Number of controllers shown on the Drawings is for reference only. This

Contractor shall offer sufficient controllers for the satisfactory operation of
the entire system

2.1.3 Portable Notebook computer

A Provide 1 no. of portable notebook computer with a full-featured keyboard for field
programming of DDC controller. The notebook shall be handheld and plug directly
into individual distributed control panels as described below. Provide a
user-friendly, English language-prompted interface for quick access to system
information, not codes requiring look-up charts.

i Functionality of the portable operator's terminal connected at any DDC

Controller:

a Access all DDC Controllers on the network.

b Backup and/or restore DDC Controller data bases for all system
panels, not just the DDC Controller connected to.

c Display all point, selected point and alarm point summaries.

d Display trending and totalization information.

e Add, modify and/or delete any existing or new system point.

f Command, change set point, enable/disable any system point.

g Programme and load custom control sequences as well as standard

energy management programmes.

h All software tools for items i above must be provided to the end users
without any licensing restriction. The end user (or its appointed agent)
shall be able to use these tools freely during the lifetime of the system
supplied. All engineering documentation must be provided also. The
end user should be trained to the level of being able to proficiently
use these tools.

ii The Notebook computers shall provide English language prompting to

eliminate the need for the user to remember command formats or point

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/23 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

names. Prompting shall be provided consistent with a user's password

clearance and the types of points being displayed, to eliminate the
possibility of operator error.

iii The Notebook computer shall be equipped with a multi-function touchpad

for pointing and command selection, as well as parameter entry.

iv In addition to instantaneous summaries, the notebook computers shall allow

a user to display a Point History file for system points. Point History files
shall provide a record of value of analogue points over the last 24 hours, at
30 minute intervals, or a record of the last ten status changes for binary type
points with time stamp.

v The same set of passwords used at the Operator Workstations shall be

used at notebook computers.

vi Operator shall be able to logon to BMS through WLAN of Ethernet Network

System.

vii Portable operator terminal access to controller shall be password-controlled.

viii The notebook computer shall have the following minimum hardware
requirements:

a Intel Core i7 (2.4GHz, 6MB L3 Cache) or above

b Minimum 15” 1080P or equivalent display

c Minimum 1TB hard drive

d LPT1, COM1, USB3.0

e AMD Radeon or NVIDIA GeForce with minimum 1GB DDR3

f Video output port: VGA, HDMI Out

g 4G DDR3-1066MHz RAM

h 16×DVD +/- RW drive

i Li-ion rechargeable battery and battery charger

j 2×1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T Ethernet Ports

k Built-in IEEE 802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN

l Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10 Professional 64 bit of the

latest Service Pack or approved equivalent.

m Software: Microsoft Office 360, Microsoft SQL Server 2019

n BMS application software package and licenses for unlimited points.

2.1.4 BMS Servers

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/24 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

A The BMS Server shall comprise a high performance industrial type server grade
computer complete with keyboard and mouse, colour graphic monitor and various
types of printers. The server and accessories shall be rack mountable in a
standard 19” equipment rack.

B The minimum requirements of each BMS Server shall comply but not limited to the
following:

i Processor: Intel® CoreTM i7 6700or above

ii RAM: 32GB (2×16GB) Non-ECC DDR4 2666MHz SDRAM or more

iii Hard disk free space: 512GB M.2 PCIe NVMe Solid State Drive
Class 40 + 3TB 7200RPM 3.5” SATA3
Harddisk

iv Graphics capability:4 monitors support

v Display Card: NVIDIA Quadro K2200

vi Monitor Resolution Support: 1080(16:9)

vii Network: Dual NVIDIA® Quadro® P2000, 5GB, 4 DP

viii Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10 64 bit of the latest Service Pack
or approved equivalent.

ix USB Keyboard and Mouse

x 64-bit sound card and separate powered stereo speakers

xi Minimum 2 USB ports supporting USB 3.0

xii BMS application software package and licenses

xiii Software: Microsoft Office 360

xiv Dual Redundant Power Supply

xv Rack mountable in standard 19” equipment rack

C The disk drive shall allow accommodation of all fully configured point database, all
application database, all graphic database, all user defined reports, and all
historical data archival as described in this specification.

D The necessary hardware and software shall be supplied to allow periodic dumping
of all operator entered data onto another storage media. Also, necessary
hardware and software shall be provided to reload this data should changes,
additions of failures cause this data to be lost in the computer memory.

E Backup copies of all stand-alone DDC Controllers databases shall be stored in the
system servers.

F All analogue sensor scaling, necessary linearizing, square root extraction and
other algorithm etc. shall be done within the BMS Operator Workstations. Systems

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/25 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

using exterior remotely located hardware except system intelligent controllers, to

perform these functions will not be accepted.

G The BMS Servers shall be provided with a power fail safe and restart feature. An
orderly restart controlled from the data processing controller shall occur on power
resumption after a power failure. There shall be no loss of system memory on
power failure at the central processing unit.

H The entire BMS shall be capable of transmitting and receiving data over voice
grade commercial telephone lines.

I Each BMS Server shall have a UPS/battery supply with capacity capable of
maintaining the equipment operational for 30 minutes (minimum) during power
failure.

J Command entry, information management, network alarm management and

database management functions to the BMS shall be effective through the
operation terminal or computer mouse. However, all real time control functions
shall be resident in the DDC controller to facilitate higher fault tolerance and
reliability. The BMS Servers shall be provided with full upper/lower case ASCII
keyboard, numeric keypad, cursor control keypad and a minimum of 12
programmable function keys such as on, off, secure, access, open, close, auto,
manual, increase, decrease and trouble etc. Operation of the computer mouse
shall not require using more than one button.

K The colour graphic monitor shall be LCD type, high quality video signal output and
allow multiple users in both portrait and landscape orientation and have wide
viewing angle for optimal display performance.

2.1.5 BMS Operator Workstations

A The BMS Operator Workstations shall comprise a high performance real time,
digital personal computer complete with keyboard and mouse, colour graphic
monitor and various types of printers.

B Each BMS Operator Workstation shall comply with the following: -

i Intel® CoreTM i7 6700or above

ii 1 no. 16x DVD +/- RW drive

iii 512GB M.2 PCIe NVMe Solid State Drive Class 40 + 3TB 7200RPM 3.5”
SATA3 Harddisk

iv 32GB (2×16GB) Non-ECC DDR4 2666MHz SDRAM or more Serial/parallel

ports, USB, iLink to IEEE 1394

v At least 1 no. of RS-232 spare port shall be provided at each PC BMS

Operator Workstation for interfacing purpose and the number of RS-232
interface can be increased by inserting interface card to the workstation.

vi minimum 2 USB ports supporting USB 3.0

vii Dual NVIDIA® Quadro® P2000, 5GB, 4 DP 10/100/1000M RJ45 Ethernet

network card

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/26 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

viii Keyboard, mouse, Handwriting input pad, and other necessary peripherals

ix Operating System: Microsoft Windows10 Professional of the latest Service

Pack or approved equivalent.

x BMS application software package and licenses

xi Any other software not specified but required to complete the system and
perform the control, monitoring and reporting functions as specified in this
Specification.

C The workstations shall be able to perform the required functions as detailed in this
specification individually.

D Each workstation shall have a UPS/battery supply with capacity capable of

maintaining the equipment operational for 30 minutes (minimum) during all power
failure.

E Command entry, information management, network alarm management and

database management functions to the BMS shall be effective through the
operation terminal or computer mouse. However, all real-time control functions
shall be resident in the DDC Controller to facilitate greater fault tolerance and
reliability. The BMS Operator Workstation shall be provided with full upper/lower
case ASCII keyboard, numeric keypad, cursor control keypad and a minimum of
12 programmable function keys such as on, off, secure, access, open, close, auto,
manual, increase, decrease and trouble etc. Operation of the computer mouse
shall not require using more than one button.

F LCD monitor shall be provided for the display of dynamic graphics of the building
services systems. System addressing shall automatically display the system with
full system identification, user reference, date, time and programme day. The
appropriate control, monitoring points shall be clearly displayed with current real
value status.

G Each of the BMS Operator Workstation shall have a real time clock display
synchronized with the BMS Server. The resolution shall be at least one millisecond.

The clock display shall be in the form:

i Year

ii Month Of The Year

iii Day Of The Month

iv Hour Of The Day - Minutes

2.1.6 Server/Workstation LCD Monitor

A The minimum requirements of the monitor shall comply but not limited to the
following:

i Screen Viewable Size: 24” diagonal

ii Resolution: 1080P (16:9)

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/27 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

iii Contrast Ratio (Dynamic): Minimum 10000:1

iv Contrast Ratio: Minimum 1000:1

v Brightness: 300cd/m2

vi Response Time: Maximum 8ms (Grey to Grey)

vii Display Colour: 16.78 million colours

viii Viewing Angle: 178°/178° (Horizontal/Vertical)

ix Ambient Temperature: 0°C to 50°C

x Relative Humidity: Less than 90% non-condensing

xi Power Supply: Input supply shall be 100 - 240 volt A.C ±6%, 50/60 Hz
±2%.

xii Durability: 24×7

xiii VESA Mount: Support VESA Mounting Bracket

xiv Connectivity: Analogue D-SUB, DVI-D, Display Port 1.2, 2×HDMI 1.4, USB
3.0

2.1.7 Operation requirement of the BMS Operator Workstations

A The BMS Operator Workstations shall provide facilities for manual entries and
visual displays enabling an operator to enter data into the system and obtain
displays and logs of system information. All requests for status, analogue, logs
and control etc. shall be selected from the central processing equipment. The
following tasks shall be provided through the keyboard of the central processing
equipment as a minimum performance requirement:

i Manual and auto start/stop command.

ii Reset command.

iii Display of all point logs of selected subsystems.

iv Display of alarm summary of selected subsystems.

v Lockout/unlock of selected items.

vi Display of lockout items summary.

vii Display of programme start/stop summary.

viii Assign times and days.

ix Display of index of systems within the building on request.

x Display of points within a particular system on request.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/28 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

xi Add/delete trend points.

xii Initiate trend log.

xiii Enter trend times and change of trend log time interval.

xiv Enter/delete programme start/stop times.

xv Different security level of Passwords provided for entry into BMS control
system.

B All command functions shall be acknowledged on the colour graphic monitor.

Error messages shall be displayed for any illegal or improperly executed
commands.

C The system shall respond to any number of changes of state and report in a
prioritized manner such that critical alarms for fire and security systems are
reported prior to maintenance related alarms. Software for orderly control of alarm
reporting sequence shall be provided.

D Reassignment, or modification of data in the central processing unit shall be easily

accomplished in the field via single keyboard entry.

E A flashing alarm shall be provided in the central processing equipment for the
indication of alarm and a change of state condition. Audible alarm shall be
provided, but actuated only by special command at the keyboard. A silence key
shall be furnished to silence the audible alarm.

F Function selection shall be in simple English language along with the proper
alphanumeric identification of the system. The following function descriptions are
minimum requirements and shall be addressed via a dedicated function keypad or
the mouse.

i Contact Input Display

Permits display of contact condition including on, off, close, open, auto,
manual, high, low, access, secure and trouble, etc.

ii Time Set

Permits the operator to update the time display through correct setting of
input value on the keyboard.

iii Alarm Summary

Permits the operator to demand sequential display of the point address of all
points currently in alarm in the order in which they occurred. Demand shall
be by selected DDC Controller, or by selected point module at the operator's
discretion.

iv Status Summary

Permits the operator to demand sequential display of the point address of all
on-off binary inputs with conditions of each identified. Demand shall be by

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/29 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

selected DDC Controllers or by selected point module at operator's

discretion.

v Manual Two-State And Three-Stage Switching

Permits the operator to select any monitored two-state control device

(start/stop, day/night setback, etc.) or any three-stage control device
(summer/winter/auto, fast/low/off etc.) and alter its operation. If the
controlled device does not respond accordingly after an appropriate time
delay the system shall identify this condition as a Change-Of-State alarm
event. Further, if at any time, the controlled device alters its operation
without being commanded to do so by the operator's console, the system
shall identify this as a Change-Of-State alarm event.

vi Analogue Value Display

Permits true decimal display of analogue inputs with at least 50 identifiers of

engineering units including degrees, kilowatt hours, pressure, amperes, Hz
and volts. The colour graphic monitor shall permit display of analogue
values in units or tenths to four significant figures, and shall include a minus
sign for displayed values less than zero.

vii Analogue Out-Of-Limit Comparison

Permits the operator to assign individual high, low or both limits to each
analogue input via the keyboard. Limit assignment and display shall be in
real units of the measured variable in decimal format and shall be uniquely
assigned for each analogue input. The alarm limit assignment and display
shall not be independent upon analogue input range nor shall group alarm
techniques in DDC Controller hardware be required to display, assign, or
alter analogue limits. The system shall continue to fully perform its monitor
and control functions while limits are being displayed or changes in limit
assignments are being accomplished.

viii Manual Set Point Adjustment (Reset) And Position Adjustment

Permits the operator to enter new set point adjustments for each control
device so designed. The system shall provide for individual adjustment of
each point and readout of set point status.

ix Time Programme Start-Stop For Interface With DDC Controllers

Permits the operator to establish individual seven day operating schedules

for each motor (such as motors for fans, AHU, pumps, etc.) so designated.
Two seven days channels shall be included for each motor. Each channel
shall provide one "on" and one "off" time per day. This feature shall be
individually expandable in groups of two channels for each motor requiring a
more flexible operating schedule. Common time channels shared by
multiple motors shall not be acceptable. No adjustments or modifications in
DDC Controllers shall be required to display, or alter motor programs times
or to add or delete motors from this feature. Manual override shall be
available at all times for any motor under programme control. The motor
programme and time changes shall be accomplished "on-line". The system
shall continue to fully perform its monitor and control functions while any

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/30 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

changes in the motor programme are being accomplished or any motor

schedules are being displayed.

x Running Time Totalization

For each pump/fan schedule, accumulated running time totals shall be

retained in memory. Actual running time shall be compared to a preset
maximum time, and the totals automatically printed when actual equal
maximum, indicating maintenance is required. Totalized values may be
individually reset to zero by operator command.

xi Continuous Point Histories

The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the
value of all analogue input points at half hour interval for the past 24 hours
and record the last 10 changes of all binary points. These samples for all
points shall allow the operator to immediately analyze equipment
performance and all problem related events

G The BMS Operator Workstation shall allow the operator to simultaneously view
several graphics at the same time to analyze total building operation, or to allow
the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting
work in progress, or to allow a network map to be viewed for the overall system
configuration.

H Backup copies of all stand-alone DDC Controllers databases shall be stored in the
system server.

I Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC Controller data bases shall be
provided. In the event that any DDC Controller on the network experiences a loss
of its data base for any reason, the system shall automatically download a new
copy of the respective data base to restore proper operation. Data base
backup/Download shall occur over the local area network without operator
intervention. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute downloads of
any or all portions of a DDC Controller data base.

J System characteristics and feature of BMS should include:-

i Windows based (Chinese and English) graphical interface with on line help
function for operation in workstation;

ii Interconnected to the BMS Operator Workstations in other buildings By

telecommunication lines;

iii Control and monitoring of general building services system including MVAC
Automatic Temperature Control System, electrical, lighting, plumbing and
drainage system, Medium Voltage System, etc;

iv Logging and reporting on operating status, energy consumption, total run

time and alarm signals;

v Time programming for on/off control of equipment and lighting;

vi Temperature control of air conditioning and mechanical ventilation system;

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/31 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

vii Maintenance control and management

2.1.8 BMS system software support

A Software shall be provided to support the command functions and application

programmes specified in this Specification. The system’s support software shall be
multi-user system as defined below.

B BMS Operator Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training

through the use of English language prompting, English language point
identification and industry standard PC application software. The software shall
provide, as a minimum, the following functionality:

i Graphical viewing and control of environment

ii Scheduling and override of building operations

iii Collection and analysis of historical data

iv Definition and construction of dynamic colour graphic displays

v Editing, programming, storage and downloading of controller databases

C Provide a graphical user interface which shall minimize the use of a typewriter
style keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device and "point
and click" approach to menu selection. Users shall be able to start and stop
equipment or change setpoints from graphical displays through the use of a mouse
or similar pointing device.

i Provide functionality such that all operations can also be performed using
the keyboard as a backup interface device.

ii Provide additional capability that allows at least 10 special function keys to

perform often-used operations.

D The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows the user to
run several applications simultaneously. The mouse shall be used to quickly select
and switch between multiple applications. This shall be accomplished through the
use of Microsoft Windows or similar industry standard software that supports
concurrent viewing and controlling of systems operations.

i Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed

simultaneously, and in any combination, via user-sized windows:

a Dynamic colour graphics and graphic control

b Alarm management

c Time-of-day scheduling

d Trend data definition and presentation

e Graphic definition

f Graphic construction

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/32 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

ii If the software is unable to display several different types of displays at the

same time, this Contractor shall provide at least two BMS Operator
Workstations.

E This Contractor shall provide a minimum of 5 password access protection levels of

access to the BMS software to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control,
display and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each
user, based upon an assigned password. It shall be possible to define a
hierarchical set of "passwords" such that a suitable password must entered by the
operator in order to access the particular level(s) of system operation or particular
subset of system alarms.

Level 1 – Data Access and Display

Level 2 – Level 1 and Operator Overrides

Level 3 – Level 2 and Database Modification

Level 4 – Level 3 and Database Generation

Level 5 – All privileges, including Password Add/Modify

F The system shall automatically generates a report of log-on/log-off and system

activity for each user. Any action that results in a change in the operation or
configuration of the control system shall be recorded.

i A minimum of 50 unique passwords, including user initials, shall be

supported.

ii Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their
respective passwords. Menu selections displayed shall be limited to only
those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.

iii The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off time and
system activity for each user.

iv User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 5 to 60 minutes shall be

provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line.

G Software shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to,
the following:

i Start-up or shutdown selected equipment

ii Adjust setpoints

iii Add/modify/delete time programming

iv Enable/disable process execution

v Lock/unlock alarm reporting for points

vi Enable/disable totalization for points

vii Enable/disable trending for points

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/33 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

viii Override PID loop setpoints

ix Enter temporary override schedules

x Define holiday schedules

xi Change time/date

xii Automatic daylight savings time adjustments

xiii Enter/modify analogue alarm limits

xiv Enter/modify analogue warning limits

xv View limits

xvi Enable/disable demand limiting for each meter

xvii Enable/disable duty cycle for each load

H Reports shall be generated and directed to either LCD displays, printers or disk.
As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types
of reports:

i A general listing of all points in the network

ii List of all points currently in alarm

iii List of all points currently in override status

iv List of all disabled points

v List of all points currently locked out

vi DDC Controller trend overflow warning

vii List all weekly schedules

viii List of holiday programming

ix List of limits and deadbands

x Energy consumption summary / trend

I Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a
user-selected group or groups or for the entire facility without restriction due to the
hardware configuration of the building automation system. Under no conditions
shall the operator need to specify the address of the hardware controller to obtain
system information.

J Scheduling

Provide a graphical spreadsheet-type format for simplification of time-of-day

scheduling and overrides of building operations. Provide the following
spreadsheet graphic types as a minimum:

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/34 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

i Weekly schedules

ii Zone schedules

iii Monthly calendars

iv Weekly schedules shall be provided for each building zone or piece of

equipment with a specific occupancy schedule. Each schedule shall include
columns for each day of the week as well as holiday and special day
columns for alternate scheduling on user-defined days. Equipment
scheduling shall be accomplished by simply inserting occupancy and
vacancy times into appropriate information blocks on the graphic. In
addition, temporary overrides and associated times may be inserted into
blocks for modified operating schedules. After overrides have been
executed, the original schedule will automatically be restored.

v Zone schedules shall be provided for each building zone as previously

described. Each schedule shall include all commendable points residing
within the zone. Each point may have a unique schedule of operation
relative to the zone's occupancy schedule, allowing for sequential starting
and control of equipment within the zone. Scheduling and rescheduling of
points may be accomplished easily via the zone schedule graphic.

vi Monthly calendars for a 24-month period shall be provided which allow for
simplified scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and
special days shall be user-selected with the pointing device and shall
automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the
weekly schedules.

K Collection and Analysis of Historical Data

i Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and
preserve records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any
system point may be trended automatically at time-based intervals or
changes of value, both of which shall be user-definable. Trend data may be
stored on hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting.

ii Trend data report graphics shall be provided to allow the user to view all
trended point data. Reports may be customized to include individual points
or pre-defined groups of at least 6 points. Provide additional functionality to
allow any trended data to be transferred easily to an off-the-shelf spreadsheet
package such as Microsoft Excel. This shall allow the user to perform custom
calculations such as energy usage, equipment efficiency and energy costs
and shall allow for generation of these reports on high-quality plots, graphs
and charts.

L Dynamic Colour Graphic Displays

i Adequate graphic diagrams shall be prepared to show the real time status
of any equipment being monitored and controlled such as the power supply
system, lighting system, FS systems, Plumbing and Drainage Systems, Lift
and Escalator Installations, MVAC systems etc. and shall be presented in
such a way that the function of any equipment and device is easily
envisaged on the graphics. Such diagrams shall be submitted to the
Architect/Engineer for Approval.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/35 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

ii Colour graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of
mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems
and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided by this Contractor as
indicated in the point I/O summary of this specification to optimize system
performance analysis and speed alarm recognition.

iii The graphic generator shall be resident in the system and programmed in
such a way that the generation of new graphics can easily be performed on
line.

iv The operator workstation shall allow users to access the various system
schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu
selection or text-based commands.

v Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status

indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations and shall
automatically update to represent current conditions without operator
intervention.

vi The windowing environment of the PC BMS Operator Workstation shall

allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at a time to analyze
total building operation or to allow the display of a graphic associated with
an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.

vii Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add,
modify or delete system graphic displays.

viii Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single DDC
Controller, but shall be able to include data from any and all other network
panels to allow the development of network-wide control strategies.
Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one process as
the input to any number of other processes (cascading).

ix Provide the capability to backup and store all system databases on the
workstation hard disk. In addition, all database changes shall be performed
while the workstation is on-line without disrupting other system operations.
Changes shall be automatically recorded and downloaded to the
appropriate DDC Controller. Similarly, changes made at the DDC
Controllers shall be automatically uploaded to the workstation, ensuring
system continuity. The user shall also have the option to selectively
download changes as desired.

x Provide context-sensitive help menus to provide instructions appropriate

with operations and applications currently being performed.

xi Maintenance Management System Software

xii A PC-based maintenance management software package shall be

integrated with Building Management System

xiii Provide preventive maintenance work orders

xiv Stock of spare inventory control

xv Staff duty logging

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/36 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

xvi Work order for unscheduled (Emergency) maintenance

xvii Plant history data base

M Energy Management Software

i A programme shall be provided for the operator to assign a point to be

totalized in terms of run time. Limits of totalization may be set beyond which
alarms will be annunciated. Any binary input may be assigned to this
programme by the operator via command entry.

ii The run time limits for individual point shall be able to be defined by the
operator. When a limit is exceeded, an alarm (change of status) shall be
annunicated.

Programmable time programme shall be provided for the following :

a equipment on/off with or without time delays

b analogue limits

c access / security system

d automatic output of the following logs and summaries

I selected item log

II alarm summary

III off-normal summary

IV analogue limit summary

V run time total summary

VI special summaries

iii Time programs shall be automatically initiated according to a predetermined

time schedule for each day of the week. An additional time programme shall
be provided for holidays.

iv On/Off and execution time shall be programmable and can be overrided by

the operator on line. These changes can be assigned up to one week in
advance. The override command can be temporary (once a time) or
permanent. Any points not responding to a programmed command shall
automatically generate an alarm output.

v The time programmes assigned to any given point shall be output to the
operator upon request. The output shall include holidays, day of week and
times.

vi Built in time delays between consecutive start commands generated by the

time programmes shall be provided in order to prevent power surges for
heavy electrical loads.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/37 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

vii In addition to two state line control, time dependant set point control shall be
provided for night set-back, morning warm-up and normal daily set point
system loops. The software shall interface with the optimal start/stop
program such that start/shop times may be assigned by the optimal
start/stop program.

N Event Programmes

Event initiators shall be any digital data point in the system or any analogue alarm
limit. The event programmes shall be structured such that one initiator may set and
reset the event programmes as it goes from normal to off normal and back to
normal or one initiator may set the programme and a second initiator reset the
programme or reset may be manual via the operator terminal keyboard. Setting an
event programmes shall cause a series of start or stop commands to assigned
loads to be executed and resetting the event programmes shall cause the opposite
commands to be executed to programmed event programmes points. Event
programmes shall have priority assignments to allow them to override other
programmes in the set mode when desired. The operator's terminal shall have full
decimal read-write capability for initial, load and priority assignment.

2.1.9 BMS Communication Network

A Open Communication Protocol – BACnet

i Communication protocol among workstations and DDC controllers supplied

shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2008 and ISO 16484-5. In
addition, all products supplied, including the workstation, must be listed with
BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) and PICS must be submitted by the
Contractor.

ii All BACnet workstation and controllers must be based on native BACnet,

that is, systems using gateways to route proprietary devices and objects to
BACnet are not acceptable.

iii All level of DDC controllers must support BACnet. System Clienture with
BACnet controllers linking with proprietary controllers is not acceptable. BTL
Listing for the CU and controllers must satisfy the requirement of Device
Profile for B-BC (Building Controller) and B-AAC (Advanced Application
Controller) respectively as per ASHRAE Standard 135-2008 Annex L2 & L3.

iv Workstations which use proprietary protocol for communication with DDCs

are not acceptable. Moreover, system Clienture with workstation which can
only accept BACnet information but cannot provide BACnet information to
DDC or other workstation is not acceptable. That is, workstations with only
BACnet Client function are not acceptable. BTL Listing for the workstation
must satisfy the requirement of Device Profile of B-AWS (Advanced
Operator Workstation) as per ASHRAE Standard 135-2008 Annex LX1.

B BACnet Communication Standard

i BACnet is the standardized protocol adopted for communication among

controllers at all levels. Native BACnet should be used and systems using
gateways to route proprietary devices and objects to BACnet are not
acceptable. The BACnet implemented shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 135-2008 and associated addenda as a minimum.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/38 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

ii Every controller must be a BACnet device and shall operate on the BACnet
Data Link/Physical layer protocol specified for that device as defined in
relevant sections.

iii All controllers shall have a communication port for connections with the
operator interfaces using the BACnet Data Link/ Physical layer protocol:

a At the Building Network Controller level, BACnet/IP, BACnet/Ethernet

and BACnet/MSTP must be supported.

b At the Application Controller level, BACnet/MSTP and BACnet/PTP

must be supported.

c When BACnet/IP is supported, the device should also be acting as a

routing device so that controllers at different IP subnet can be
connected together. That is, the device must be supporting BBMD
functions for communication over different IP subnets.

iv Communication services over the network shall result in operator interface

and value passing that is transparent to the internetwork Clienture as follows:

a Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on

the network will allow the operator to interface with all other
controllers as if that interface were directly connected to the other
controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom
programs, etc., for all controllers shall be available for viewing and
editing from any one controller on the network.

b All database values (e.g., objects, software variables, custom

program variables) of any one controller shall be readable by any
other controller on the network. This value passing shall be
automatically performed by a controller when a reference to an object
name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's
database. An operator/installer shall not be required to set up any
communication services to perform network value passing.

2.1.10 Uninterrupted Power Supply Unit (UPS)

A The Uninterrupted Power Supply Unit (UPS) shall consist of a battery power
source, charger, AC output inverter system, and automatic load transfer circuits for
fully automatic operation.

B The UPS shall be an on-line type UPS. When normal AC power returns, the UPS
shall transfer the load to the rectifier output. At this time the charger shall turn on
to its "high" charge position until the batteries are recharged to 80% of their rated
capacity, then automatically switches to its maintenance "sensing" position to keep
the batteries in their best full-charge condition. The total recharge time shall be
less than 24 hours.

C Two pilot lights shall be located in the front operating panel. One pilot light
indicates that incoming AC power is available, the other pilot light indicates that the
UPS is in the ready or standby mode.

D The battery system shall be of totally enclosed sealed lead-acid type, separate
from and independent of other battery systems, capable of operating the entire

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/39 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

Building Management System under 100% full load condition for a period of 30
minutes. The lead-acid type battery cell shall comply with BS 6290 Part 4.

E Should the emergency outage of line power exceed the maximum operation time
of the UPS, there shall be no resultant damage. When the UPS’s maximum duty
cycle is exceeded, automatic shutdown shall occur.

F The batteries shall provide 30 minutes full load power to back up the servers and
operator workstations memories, alarms, instructions and operation requirements,
in the event of mains or standby generator supply failure.

2.1.11 Printers

A Laser printer shall be installed in the BMS. 2

B The dot matrix printer shall meet the following minimum requirements:

i 24-pin dot matrix, wide carriage, high quality, heavy duty and long life.

ii 300 character per second minimum print speed and be rated for continuous
duty operation.

iii 24 x 12 DOT matrix character structure switchable to 24 x 36 DOT matrix for

letter quality output.

iv Compressed mode option for 220 characters per line.

v Software selectable under, emphasized, double strike and expanded

(double width) characters capability.

vi Adjustable line spacing of 6 or 8 lines per inch.

vii Adjustable tractor for 5 inch to 15 inch paper widths.

viii 96 ASCII upper and lower case character set.

C Automatic ON-OFF motor control and audible alarm during alarm printing out shall
be incorporated in the printers.

D A full alpha numeric keyboard shall be incorporated with a capability to generate

full English and Chinese language printouts. Function switches for commonly
used functions of the system shall be included.

E Functions

When a log designated for the printer occurs, the dot matrix printer shall turn on
and commence printing at a rate of 300 characters per sec. minimum, time in 24
hour form, the day, month and year and following items for each system.

The printers shall provide the following functions:

i Change-Of-State-Log

For both binary and analog inputs, the printers shall print out the time of
occurrence, an identifier for the type change (alarm, return to normal,

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/40 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

reporting status), the point number, analog value, and the point type or
engineering units, alarm printouts shall be in red.

ii Alarm Summary

By means of the keyboard, the operator shall be able to demand a summary

of the point addresses of all points currently in alarm in the order in which
they occurred. Demand shall be by entire complex, by selected
outstation/DDC panel or by selected point module at operator's discretion.

iii Operator Guide and Information Messages

The printer shall provide appropriate message printouts to advise the

operator of the following conditions:-

a Illegal requests made.

b invalid point address called for.

c Line data frame transmission failure or coaxial cable break (identify

location).

d DDC panel no acknowledgement (identify location).

e Parity error (identify location).

F The colour laser printer shall meet the following minimum requirements:

i For both A4 and A3 paper

ii 600 dpi, 2400 dpi resolution

iii 8 pages per minute (Colour) & 35 pages per minute (B/W)

iv 400 MHz microprocessor

v 64 MB Memory expandable to Max. 1 GB

vi Transmission Interface: USB 1.1, Parallel & 10/100 Base Tx.

2.1.12 Control Cables

A Twisted pair cables for control signals and power shall be minimum 18 AWG.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 On-site Testing

When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission
media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting
and final field tests shall be completed by the installer. Provide a detailed cross-check of
each sensor within the system by making a comparison between the reading at the
sensor and a standard traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. Provide a
cross-check of each control point within the system by making a comparison between the
control command and the field-controlled device. Verify that all systems are operable

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/41 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power.
Submit the results of functional and diagnostic tests and calibrations to the
Architect/Engineer for final system acceptance.

3.2 Joint Testing and Commissioning

This Contractor shall liaise and coordinate with other contractors to carry out joint testing
and commissioning of other E&M systems to ensure all the interfacing connection,
hardware and software handshaking, data transfer, data retrieval, etc., are working
properly without any error to perform the control and/or monitoring function as specified
in Technical Specification and shown on Drawings.

3.3 Testing and Commissioning before Handover

A This Contractor shall ensure BMS System is installed, tested and commissioned in
accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations and local regulations.

B This Contractor shall ensure verification that equipment labeling and equipment
information within the BMS System is correctly installed, programmed, and
commissioned.

C This Contractor shall prove all BMS points are correctly configured and all controls
(automatic and manual) are operating as designed. The BMS System shall be
properly tested to Engineer’s satisfaction.

D All drawings and panel schedules shall be maintained to document as-built

conditions. The Contractor shall provide a full set of as-built drawings of the
system. The Contractor shall provide, at no cost, PDF drawings of all base building
infrastructure and both PDF and AutoCAD drawings for the services drawings,
including all interfaces diagrams with other E&M services. Full AutoCAD drawing
for the architectural layouts shall be provided

3.4 Security Room Equipment and Accessories

A Under this section, the minimum acceptable standard of quality and functions to be
performed for major control room equipment and accessories shall be described.
This Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design, supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of all the control room equipment and accessories to the
satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.

B General Requirements

i The Works for control room equipment and accessories shall be detailed as
per the Drawings and generalised as follows:

a Control Console shall be provided in Security Control Room

b This Contractor shall provide a UPS unit and all necessary accessories
shall be provided in the Security Control Room to support the control
equipment for BMS System as specified hereinafter.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/42 April 2019

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
AT NKIL 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E, SITE 2, HVAC INSTALLATION
KOWLOON

ii This Contractor shall provide the complete wiring works including trunking,
conduit and necessary accessories for the BMS System inside the Security
Control Room.

iii This Contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate with the Main Contractor
and other Contractors for the builder's works, the services and equipment
inside the Security Control Room provided by Main Contractor and other
Contractors. This Contractor shall submit combined services and equipment
layout drawings of Security Control Room for the Architect/Engineer's
approval prior to installation and fabrication.

iv All equipment, instrument, appliance, control accessories, material, etc.,

provided shall be of current model for which replacement parts shall be
available at least five years after completion of the Free Maintenance Period.

v All equipment and materials of the same type shall be the product of the same
manufacturer. All similar items of equipment shall be interchangeable.

vi Sample shall be provided for submission and all equipment and materials
must be approved by the Architect/Engineer before ordering.

vii All the custom made lettering and graphics for the Control Console shall be
submitted for Architect/Engineer's Approval before fabrication.

viii In addition to the compliance of minimum requirement stipulated in this

Specification, the control room equipment and accessories shall allow at least
20% spare on the facilities of hardware, software and space for further
expansion.

3.5 Power Supply for BMS Equipment

A Power supply for all BMS Equipment (include BMS server, workstation, Ethernet
switch, network controller, DDC, etc.) shall be provided by this Contractor inside
the Security Control Room, ELV Rooms and all other E&M Plant Rooms.

B Uninterruptible Power Supply shall be connected to the BMS Servers, Workstation,

Processing Units, LCD Monitors, and Printers of the BMS System.

C This Contractor shall be responsible to size the power supply according to the
equipment layout as per the drawings. Further coordination shall be carried out on
site for the exact interface locations.

WSP (ASIA) LTD TS 3.22(AC)/43 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.23 AIR FILTERS AND AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of permanent air filters,
disposable air filters, activated carbon filters, auto-roll filters and air cleaning equipment.

1.02 General Requirements

A. Filters and air cleaning equipment shall be adequately stored in dry area and
protected during shipping and construction.

B. Filters shall not be fitted into the filter frames until necessary for commissioning.

C. In design and purchase of equipment, provide for the interchangeability of items

of equipment, sub-assemblies and parts.

D. All supply air systems shall be provided with filtering systems unless specifically
noted on the Drawings.

E. Filtration media for building flush-out shall be of MERV 13 as determined by

ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-1999(1). Building flush-out with new filtration media at 50%
outside air shall be carried out after construction ended and prior to occupancy.
The flush-out duration shall be subject to calculation of the fresh air required to
attain the IAQ certification ‘good’ class requirement.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products shall be furnished by manufacturer who

normally supplies this type of equipment/materials and can show evidence that
such equipment/material have been in successful operation for at least five years.

B. Codes and Specifications:

1. The air filters shall comply with the latest version of the following standards
where applicable :-

(i) Underwriters Laboratories UL586 - Test Performance of High Efficiency

Particulate, Air Filter Units.

(ii) BSEN 779 – Particulate Air Filter for General Ventilation –

Requirements, Testing, Marking.

(iii) ASHRAE Standard 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for

Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing
Particulate Matter.

(iv)Eurovent 4/5 – Method of Testing Air Filters Used in General Ventilation

2. The fire property of air filters shall comply with the following standards where
applicable :-

(i) BS 476-4 – Non-Combustibility Test for Materials.

(ii) BS 476-6 – Method of Test for Fire Propagation for Products, with
Indices “I” 12 and “i1” 6.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.23(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

(iii) UL900 – Standard for Air Filter Units, Class 1 or Class 2.

(iv) DIN 53438 Part 3 – Response to Ignition by A Small Flame, Surface

Ignition, Class F1.

All filters or filter cells shall bear the identification label specifying one of the
above standards with associated manufacturer information.

3. The air cleaning equipment (bio-oxygen generator and UV sterilizing light)

shall comply with the safety standard of Occupational, Safety and Hygienic
Association (OSHA), USA and Food & Drug Authority (FDA), USA.

C. All filters, carbon filters, air cleaning equipment, etc. shall comply with the latest
requirements of FSD and must be FSD approved type/model.

D. Nameplates: Securely attach plate to each major item of equipment showing

manufacturer's name, serial and model number.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit complete catalogue information and shop drawings for materials and
equipment showing dimensions, weights, ductwork connections and flange details,
mounting and fixing details, complete material specification and filtering efficiency.

B. Submit independent laboratory test report on sample testing for every type of filter
and air cleaning equipment for proof of performance complying with this
Specification.

C. Submit copies of operation and maintenance manuals for all types of air cleaning
equipment.

D. Submit samples of all types of filters and air cleaning equipment for review.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. Filter assemblies shall operate with at least the efficiencies specified in this
Section.

B. Filter shall be complete with robust enclosure, holding frames and housing
constructed of non-corrosive metal or mild steel galvanized in accordance with the
relevant clauses of ‘Painting and Labelling’ Section of this Specification.

C. The enclosure shall be constructed and assembled in such a manner that a rigid
and durable enclosure for the filter pack is provided.

D. The periphery of the filter pack shall be continuously bonded to the inside of the
enclosing frame thus eliminating the possibility of air bypass.

E. Holding frames shall be factory fabricated and shall be equipped with gaskets and
a minimum of four heavy duty positive sealing fasteners. The gaskets shall be
able to prevent air bypass between the filter and frame, between the adjacent
frames and between the frames and housing. The fasteners shall be capable of
being attached or removed without the use of tools.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.23(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. The housing shall be factory fabricated and assembled. They shall incorporate
access doors, extruded aluminium tracks and individual holding frames designed
to accommodate standard size filters in efficiency and construction rating
specified for the installation.

G. All filter sections shall be designed and constructed in such a way that both
washable and disposable filters can be used.

H. Face velocity of filters shall not be greater than 2.5m/s unless otherwise specified.

2.02 Permanent Air Filters (Washable, Aluminium Filter Media and Frame)

A. Washable filters, unless otherwise specified, shall be fitted to all air handling units
(AHU), primary air handling units (PAU), fan coil units and fresh air intake fans.

B. Flat panel-type filter units shall be of the cleanable cartridge-corrugated strips of

expanded aluminium mesh design.

C. Dry type filters shall be of 50mm thick (25mm thick for fan coil unit only).
Minimum average dust weight arrestance efficiency shall be 65% (50% for 25mm
thick) as per ASHRAE Standard 52.1. Initial resistance shall not exceed 100 Pa at
2.5 m/s face velocity (50 Pa for 25mm thick at 1.5 m/s face velocity).

D. Maximum air flow through filters shall not exceed manufacturer’s published rated
capacity.

E. Design to fit the space available and construct so as to prevent the passage of
unfiltered air.

F. Furnish filter box with air-tight access panels for filters replacement, complete with
corrosion-resistant steel filter frame and clamps, gasketed and sealed to prevent
air by-pass.

G. Face velocity of filters for fan coil units shall not be greater than 1.5m/s.

2.03 Disposable Air Filters

A. Provide medium efficiency, pleated, disposable type air filters for AHU and PAU
as indicated on Drawing and/or Equipment Schedules.

B. All filter sections of the AHUs as indicated shall be designed/constructed in such a

way that both washable and disposable filters can be used, and the face velocity
for both such filters shall not be greater than 2.5m/s. Face velocity of filters for
fan coil units shall not be greater than 1.5m/s.

C. Filter media shall be of the non-woven cotton fabric type and shall be reinforced
by a woven scrim backing. The filter media shall have an average atmospheric
dust-spot efficiency of not less than 30% as per ASHRAE Standard 52.1 with
initial resistance not exceeding 75 Pa at 2.5m/s face velocity. It shall have an
average dust weight arrestance of not less than 80% as per ASHARE Standard
52.1 with initial resistance not exceeding 75Pa at 2.5m/s face velocity.

D. The filters shall be 50mm thick, the effective filter media shall be not less than
0.7sq.m of media per 0.1sq.m of filter face area and shall contain not less than 11
pleats per 0.3m.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.23(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. The media support shall be a welded wire grid which shall be bonded to the filter
media to eliminate the possibility of media oscillation and media pull away. The
media support grid shall be formed in such a manner that it affects a radial pleat
design, allowing total use of filter media.

F. The enclosing frame shall be constructed of a rigid, heavy-duty chipboard with

diagonal support members bonded to the air entering and air exit side of each
pleat, to ensure pleat stability. The inside periphery of the enclosing frame shall
be bonded to the filter pack, thus eliminating the possibility of air bypass.

G. Holding frames shall factory fabricated of 1.2 mm galvanized steel and shall be
equipped with gaskets and spring type positive sealing fasteners (at least 4
numbers). Fasteners shall be capable of being attached or removed without using
tools.

H. One complete sets of coarse filters shall be furnished for use during the
construction, testing and balancing period. Spare filters as per Section 2 of this
Sub-Contract shall be handed over to the Employer.

2.04 Disposable Bag Type Filters

A. Provide disposable bag type filters for all AHU and PAU. This type of filters shall
also be provided for other equipment as specified or as shown on the Drawings.

B. Both filter cartridge and frame shall be fabricated by one manufacturer from basic
raw materials.

C. Air Filter Frame for the Filter Cartridge:

1. Air filter frame shall be constructed of light weight, durable extruded

aluminium or galvanized steel.

2. The framing members shall be permanently gasketed to prevent the by-

pass of unfiltered air.

D. Air Filter Cartridge:

1. The percentage of open area of the full size cartridge face shall not be less
than 90% of the total face area.

2. Air filter cartridge shall be constructed in a configuration to provide uniform

dust loading throughout the full net effective media area.

3. Bag filter cartridge shall be self-support type without using retaining clip.

4. Air flow velocity across filter shall be uniform as measured at any point of
the cartridge.

5. Furnish filter media to satisfy the initial pressure drop across Bag Air Filter
System of not higher than 100Pa for 100% efficiency at 5 micron particle
size.

6. Bag filter shall have minimum discoloration efficiency of 55% according to

ASHRAE Standard 52 test method.

7. Bag filter shall be of MERV 13 standard according to ASHRAE

Standard 52.2.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.23(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. Permanent Holding Frame:

1. The permanent holding frame shall be corrosion resistant, 16 gauge

galvanized steel construction with matching rivet holes for installation.

2. The construction of the permanent holding frame shall be such that the air
filter cartridge can be serviced from the sides, top, bottom, upstream or
downstream of the filter as required such that the filters can be replaced
module by module.

3. The air filter cartridge shall be properly gasketed to the holding frame to
prevent the by-pass of unfiltered air.

F. Prefilters

1. Prefilters shall be provided in association with bag filters.

2. Prefilters shall be as specified in Clause 2.2A to F of this Section of the

Specification.

2.05 Activated Carbon Filters

A. Carbon filters shall comprise activated carbon trays, slide-servicing, a 50mm

disposable panel prefilters and factory built side access housing of reinforced
heavy gauge galvanized steel.

B. Air tight, removable access doors shall be provided at either side of the housing
such that carbon trays can be slid into the housing and retained in slide channels
when an access door is removed.

C. Air resistance shall not exceed 80Pa at 2.5m/s face velocity.

D. The absorbent bed in the panels shall be of uniform thickness packed to ensure
that compacting does not occur when the filter is in use. The absorbent shall be
selected to give optimum absorbing efficiency for the agents indicated and a
minimum of 40kg shall be provided for each m3/s of design air volume flow rate.

E. Maximum air flow through filter shall not exceed manufacturer’s rated capacity.

2.06 Auto-roll Filters

A. The filter shall comprise the complete assembly of filter frame, motor, drive, filter
blockage sensor and filter media.

B. All sheet metal parts shall be of corrosion resistant galvanized steel construction.

C. The filter media supplied in roll form and 50mm thickness, shall be fed
automatically across the face of the filter, while the used dirty media shall be
rewound onto a roll at the other end drum.

D. Each roll shall not be less than 20 meters long for sufficient useful life before
replacement is required.

E. The filter shall operate automatically to maintain operating resistance within the
range to suit the filter media and the required operating efficiency.

F. The filter shall advance the filter media automatically on the command from a
pressure switch, timer, or light-transmission control.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.23(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

G. The control circuit shall operate to ensure uniform feeding of the filter media for
constant dirt condition and loading. This shall not need re-calibration if the actual
working condition differs from design or if the system is of the variable air volume
type. Visual or audible warning to call for filter media replacement shall be
provided.

H. The driving motor shall be automatically switched off when the filter media end is
reached and a filter stop alarm shall be generated to alert filter replacement.

I. The controls shall be factory wired and installed electrically to insure fail safe
operation.

J. The filter shall be designed and constructed to allow continuous operation during
routine servicing and maintenance of the filter.

K. The filter media shall be provided with an effective seal to minimize air bypass.

L. The filter shall have an initial resistance not exceeding 45Pa and a mean
resistance of 85Pa under designed operating conditions. The air velocity through
the filter media shall not exceed 2.5m/s. It shall have an average synthetic dust
weight arrestance of not less than 80% by ASHRAE Standard 52.1, unless
otherwise specified.

2.07 Bio-Oxygen Generators (Air Purifiers)

A. The bio-oxygen generator shall be capable of reducing bacteria and airborne

contaminants within the area concerned. All components of the bio-oxygen
generator, which are within the air stream, shall comply with the latest
requirement of Fire Services Department.

B. Bio-oxygen generators shall have removal efficiencies not less than 95% of
airborne bacteria (total count), 95% of airborne particulate of 0.5 micron to 5.0
micron, 95% of cigarette smoke particles, 80% of odours and 95% of hydrogen
sulphide. Manufacturer’s certificates and independent laboratory test reports shall
be submitted for substantiation.

C. The bio-oxygen generator shall consist of a power generator and screw-in

electrode tubes. The length of each electrode shall not be less than 300mm.
Each electrode shall handle a maximum of 200m3 room volume for general air
conditioning application. The optimum configuration of each bio-oxygen
generator shall be recommended by the manufacturer to satisfy the specified
performance in each application. Selection details shall be submitted for review.

D. Each bio-oxygen generator shall be suitable for ductwork mounting and shall
consist of electrode tubes and power generator with built in output regulator. The
electrode tube shall consist of electrodes, glass tube and a thread connector at the
base of the tube for connection with the tube socket provided at the power
generator. Each tube shall be covered by stainless steel mesh and earthed by the
grounding leaf spring connected to the power generator. No high voltage part
shall be exposed and accessible. All parts in contact with air shall be corrosive
resistant. The required quantity and output of the electrode tubes for each air
handling plant shall follow manufacturer’s recommendation, and shall be sufficient
to handle the design air flow rate and the volume of the room being served.

E. The power generator of the bio-oxygen generator shall operate on 220 Volt 50Hz
single phase power supply. The power generator shall be equipped with built-in
regulator for output adjustment.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.23(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

The power generator shall also be fitted with an on/off switch, on/off indicator
lamps, output regulating rotary switch, overload circult breaker and electrode tube
sockets.

F. The electrode tubes shall consist of screw-in base and a glass tube. The
electrode tube shall be covered with a stainless steel mesh and shall be earthed
by means of an earth clip connected to the power generator.

G. The output voltage of bio-oxygen generator shall vary from 4500 to 7500 volts in
ten steps. Output voltage out of this range shall not be accepted. Site tests shall
be carried out to verify the output voltage.

H. The bio-oxygen generator shall not generate ozone in the proposed areas in
excess of the safety standards specified by the Occupational, Safety and Hygienic
Association (OSHA), USA and Food & Drug Authority (FDA), USA. Site tests
shall be carried out to verify the ozone level in the occupied zones.

I. The bio-oxygen generator shall be mounted using stainless steel mounting flange
provided by the same manufacturer.

J. The bio-oxygen generator shall be wired so that the units can be unplugged and
removed for regular cleaning and maintenance. Under no circumstances must
the machines be hard wired such that they cannot be removed for regular
servicing.

K. The power generator shall be equipped with a micro-processor and shall be wired
up to form a bus system and then connected to the Building Management System
(BMS) or ATC via RS232 or RS485 for remote control and monitoring.

L. The bio-oxygen generator shall be controlled in either Auto or Manual mode. In

Auto mode, the units shall be switched on/off at a pre-determined time period.

2.08 Ultra-Violet Sterilizing Light (UV)

A. The ultra-violet sterilizing light shall be UL listed and all components within the air
stream shall comply with latest requirement of Fire Services Department. It shall
be capable of killing mould and other airborne microbial contaminants within the
area concerned such as cold, flu and measles viruses, Legionella, tuberculosis
and other bacteria, viruses and mould spores.

B. the sterilizing light shall have one pass bacterial removal efficiency not less than
95% of Total Bacteria Count (TBC) Test, unless otherwise specified in the
Particular Specification. The sterilizing light (UV) shall not generate ozone in the
proposed areas in excess of the Safety Standards specified by the Occupational,
Safety and Hygienic Association (OSHA), USA and Food & Drug Authority (FDA),
USA. Site tests shall be carried out to verify the ozone level in the occupied
zones.

C. Each unit shall be suitable for ductwork mounting or integrated with the AHU and
shall consist of emitter tube and power generator with built-in output regulator.
The emitter tube shall consist of electrodes, glass tube and a thread connector at
the base of the tube for connection with the tube socket provided a the power
generator. Each tube is capable of producing broadband UV waveform in the
range around 250-nm mercury spectral line. The required quantity and output of
the emitter tubes for each air handling plant shall follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation, which shall be sufficient to handle the design air flow rate and
the volume of the room being served.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.23(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. The power generator shall operate on 220 Volt 50Hz single phase power supply.
The power generator shall be equipped with built-in regulator for output
adjustment. The power generator shall also be fitted with an on/off switch, on/off
indicator lamps, output regulating rotary switch, overload circuit breaker and
electrode tube sockets.

E. The operation status shall be monitored by ATC or BMS.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

B. Install filters and air cleaning equipment on air handling units, primary air handling
units, fan coil units and fresh air intake fans as shown on Drawings.

C. Galvanized transitions shall be provided for connecting the filter box to the
equipment and the associated ductwork. Access door with ample size shall also
be provided for filter and air cleaning equipment inspection. Details of
construction shall be submitted for review.

D. Filters shall be formed by modules of maximum size 600mm x 600mm and the
gaps between the modules and the holding frame shall be of box type properly
gasketed to prevent leakage. Galvanized transitions shall be provided for
connecting the filter box to the equipment and the associated duct work.

E. Except for auto-roll filters, install filter flag indicators or other filter pressure drop
indicators to indicate need for replacement of air filters for all air handling units,
primary air units, ventilating units and fresh air or transfer air intake fans for all
scheduled premises areas.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.23(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.24 MISCELLANEOUS HVAC EQUIPMENT

1 GENERAL

1.1 Description

This Section specifies the manufacturing, supply and installation of the followings:

Duct heater

Expansion tank

Pressure Gauge

Thermometer

Flow meter

1.2 Quality Assurance

Quanlifications of manufacturer: Products shall be furnished by manufacturers who

normally supplies this type of equipment/material and can show evidence of having
furnished such equipment/material that have been in successful operation for a period
of at least five years.

1.3 Submittals

Submit complete catalogue information and shop drawings for material and equipment,
test certificates, etc. for review.

2 PRODUCT

2.1 Electric Duct Heater

A. The heating element shall be sheathed black heated type with a surface
temperature not exceeding 260°C in still air and shall be of FSD approved type.

Heating elements are to be proprietary make and locally made heater elements
will not be accepted and it shall occupy the entire cross sectional area of the air
duct. All electrical connections shall be wired to a terminal box mounted
externally from the duct. Internal wiring shall be carried out in cable as used in
high temperature work. The frame of elements shall be of galvanised sheet
metal.

B. The installation of heater box shall comply to FSD’s requirement.

C. A sequence interlocking control shall be provided that the heating elements shall
not be energized before the fan motor.

Install a suitable fused isolating switch for the heater together with a contactor
which is to be interconnected with fan starter and the thermostat cutout to ensure
that the heaters can operate within the set temperature when the fan is running.

D. A duct type overheat thermostat, with fail-safe feature and manual reset, shall be
provided at a distance of 600mm maximum from the heating element to switch off
the elements when the mean temperature inside the air duct exceeds 50°C+10%
and within 90 seconds of reaching this temperature.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.24(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.2 Feed and Expansion Tank

A. Construction of Tank

1. The tank shall be constructed of fibreglass panels type with stainless steel
water tight hinged cover, locking device, internal and external cat ladders.
Material for the construction of the tanks shall be of the type approved by
the Water Authority.

2. Each tank shall have uPVC nut tank ferrules and washers of the same
manufacturer for connection to inlet, outlet, overflow vent and drain pipes
to the tank. The make up water supply to the tank shall be connected to a
water supply point.

B. Tank Support

1. The tank shall be mounted on the stainless steel framework with all
necessary angle and struts to ensure the supporting structure is perfectly
rigid.

2. All support beams, support legs, platforms, hangers and anchor bolts
required for the proper installation of the tanks as recommended by the
manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the Architect.

2.3 Temperature Gauge

A. Temperature gauges shall be first grade instruments individually calibrated and

certified and calibrated in degrees Centigrade.

B. Temperature gauges shall be of the 100mm diameter dial type, mercury in-steel,
or mercury-in-glass type at least 300mm long with an accuracy of +0.5°C. In all
cases, thermometer shall be inserted in stainless steel pockets so that the
instrument may be replaced without draining the contents of the pipe or vessel.

C. Temperature gauges shall be installed where shown on the Drawings, and

whether shown on the Drawings or not, in the flow and return connections of the
following plant:-

- All heating and cooling coils (except fan coil units); and

- all calorifiers and heat exchangers (primary and secondary sides).

D. Thermometer pockets shall be provided at the flow and return connections of all
pumps in heating or cooling circuits only.

E. The operating range of each gauge shall be suitable for the service and shall be
reviewed prior to ordering.

F. Where shown on the Drawings, digital thermometers may be required to be

incorporated in the control panels for remote indication of chilled water flow and
return and other temperature.

2.4 Pressure Gauge

A. Pressure gauges shall be of Bourdon type with brass syphon and cock, and piping
connection to the measuring point. Size to be 100mm diameter dial.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.24(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. All gauges shall have black pointer, red overrun indicators, and red mark at
normal working pressure. The instruments shall be selected for the normal
operating range expected and dial calibrations shall not exceed twice the normal
working pressure.

C. Pressure gauges shall be installed where shown on the Drawings, and whether
shown on the Drawings or not, in the flow and return connections of the following
plant:-

- Chillers (condenser water and chilled water side);

- all pumps;

- all heat exchangers (primary and secondary sides);

- all air receivers and compressors; and

- all pressure vessels.

D. Tappings and cocks for receiving portable gauges shall be provided at the flow
and return connections of all water coils (except fan coil units) and at each port of
all control valves (except fan coil units).

2.5 Orifice Plate Flow meter

A. Provide orifice plate flow measuring devices where shown on the Drawings and
elsewhere as required for the proper commissioning of the systems in accordance
with the "Testing and Commissioning" Section of this Specification.

B. It should be noted that the requirements for flow measuring devices as shown on
the schematics shall be sufficient indication for their inclusion in the Contract
(These devices are not always marked on the Drawings).

C. Notwithstanding the position of flow meters on the Drawings, it should be ensured

that the installation meets the minimum requirements for straight unimpeded
lengths of pipe both upstream and downstream of the orifice plated as
recommended by the manufacturer.

D. For fresh water systems, plate carriers shall generally be of the FH type for sizes
25mm and 75mm (nominal) and GP type for sizes 76mm to 610mm (nominal).

E. On sea water, oil, gas, steam or other fluid applications, the manufacturer's
recommended carriers and materials shall be used.

F. Orifice plates shall be completed with pressure tappings, cocks and one portable
direct reading (dial type) pressure measuring instrument complete with 4m length
of high pressure flexible hose and coupling, all as recommended by the orifice
plate manufacture for the accurate measurement of flow with his equipment.

G. The resistance across the flow meter shall not exceed 5kPa.

H. Orifice plates and assemblies shall be suitable for flow measurement within the
tolerance specified in the "Commissioning and Testing" Section of this
Specification.

I. Positions of all pressure tappings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.24(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.6 Annubar Type Flow meter

A. The annubar type flow meter shall be inserted as indicated and through the wall of
the pipe (via a suitable boss) with the sensing point at the centre of the pipe.

The device shall provide a differential pressure reading through:-

1. The high pressure velocity head sensor facing the flow.

2. Inside the high pressure sensor and interpolating tube to continuously

average velocity pressure.

3. A low pressure sensor to detect static pressure.

B. The resultant differential pressure is to be transmitted through the instrument

head to a differential pressure flow responder meter.

For water metering purposes the pressure sensor tube inserted into the pipe being
metered shall generally be of round cross section.

C. This type of equipment may also be utilised for air flow measurement in which
case it must be supplied with the appropriate type of insertion tube as provided by
the manufacturers.

D. The position for probe insertion shall not be near any bends or other fittings likely
to affect the water flow by turbulence or differential velocities across the pipe.
The distance from any such fitting up stream of the measuring point shall not be
less than 10 diameters of the pipe.

3 EXECUTION

3. 1 Installation

A. Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided or shown on the Drawings
and make readily serviceable.

B. Provide hangers, supports, legs, boards, bolts, flanges for the installation of the
equipment.

C. All equipment shall be arranged with the provision of valves/cocks so that the
equipment can be removed without draining the water circuits.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.24(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.25 PAINTING AND LABELLING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section describes the requirements for materials, methods of painting and painted
identification and labelling of equipment, ducts and pipes and other accessories.

1.02 General Requirements

A. This Sub-Contractor is responsible for the painting of all HVAC installation inside
plant rooms, including but not limited to equipment, ductworks, conduits, cables
trays, trunking, pipeworks whether insulated or not, etc. and all steel works in
connection with the installations under the Building Services Nominated Sub-
Contract.

B. All exposed metal surfaces, shall, after inspection and testing either in the factory
or on Site, be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, oil, grease, dirt, scale and rust by grit
or shot-blasting in accordance with BS 7079 and then ground smooth where
necessary, immediately after which they shall be treated.

C. Surfaces of castings, steel work, piping and plant and machinery which are to be
in direct and permanent contact with concrete shall be properly painted and
covered, prior to despatch from the Contractor's premises, with a substantial
coating of cement wash or other proprietary coating plus a lapping of
weatherproof tape. The method of coating and waterproof tape shall be submitted
for review.

D. Except where otherwise specified, all non-embedded pipes and fittings located in
inaccessible positions (e.g. in pipe trenches, pits) shall be externally coated by
dipping in acid-free hot bituminous compound. The coating thickness shall be
submitted for review. The pipe or fitting shall then be lapped with a layer of
acceptable anti-corrosion tape.

E. The internal surfaces of all oil service ferrous pipes and fittings shall be carefully
inspected to ensure that all scale and other particles or contaminants have been
removed and shall then be protected in an acceptable manner to prevent
deterioration during transport and subsequent erection.

E. The external surface of accessible ferrous pipes and fittings shall be treated with
one coat of acceptable primer paint prior to despatch from the place of
manufacture.

F. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the external surfaces of all HVAC

equipment shall, unless made of non-ferrous metal, be coated with an acceptable
bituminous compound. All access ladders and platforms and associated
supporting steelwork provided shall be galvanized.

G. All other exposed surfaces, except where otherwise specified, shall be thoroughly
cleaned of all dust, oil, grease, dirt, scale, rust or other contaminants by power
tool operated metal brush, or preferably by shot or grit blasting, and shall then be
coated immediately with one coat of primer paint. The proposed method of
treatment and coating shall be submitted for review.

Following factory tests, any rough surfaces shall be filled in and carefully dressed
smooth, on completion of which further treatment shall be as detailed hereunder:

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1. All interior surfaces of oil-filled chambers and tanks, and the external
surfaces of piping or fittings included therein, shall receive one undercoat
followed by two final coats of oil-resistant enamel paint of an acceptable
colour and type.

2. All internal surfaces of cubicles, kiosks, marshalling and junction boxes,

containing wiring or other apparatus, and the internal compartments of
plant components delivered to Site in assembled or partially assembled
condition, shall be paint-finished with three coats of stove enamelled paint,
the last of which shall be of an anticondensation finish.

3. The external surfaces of cubicles, kiosks, marshalling and junction boxes

shall be finished in stove enamel paint with not less than 50 microns dry
film thickness, and with colour in accordance with BS 381 C.

4. All surfaces of plant and machinery shall receive protection to suit the duty
involved. In particular all surfaces forming an interior accessible
compartment shall receive one undercoat and two final coats of white
oil-resistant enamel paint, the application of which shall be undertaken only
following completion of erection on Site.

5. Any damage to priming coats made good by the Contractor on completion

of installation shall be finally painted in acceptable colours.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. Material shall be supplied by a manufacturer who has produced painting products

for a period of at least ten years.

B. Relevant Codes and Standards

BS 245: Mineral Solvents for Paints and Other Purposes

BS 381 C: Colours for Identification, Coding and Special Purposes

BS 443: Testing Zinc Coatings on Steel Wire and for Quality Requirements

BS 476: Part 7: Fire Test for Building Materials and Structures

BS 544: Linseed Oil Putty for Use in Wooden Frames

BS 729: Hot Dip galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles

BS 1710: Identification of Pipelines and Services

BS 3262: Hot-Applied Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials

BS 4652: Zinc-Rich Priming Paint

BS 4756: Ready Mixed Aluminium Priming Paints for Woodwork

BS 4800: Paint Colours for Building Purposes

BS 6044: Pavement Marking Paints

BS 6150: Code of Practice for Painting of Buildings

BS 6900: Raw, Refined and Boiled Linseed Oils for Paints and Varnishes

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

BS 7079: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and

Related Products

BS 8000: Workmanship on Building Sites

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit complete catalogue information of materials.

B. Submit colour samples.

C. Submit manufacturer's recommendation of painting system and procedures,

surface preparation, nominal wet and dry film thickness for each coat, conditions
under which paint will be applied, estimated design life of the painting system etc.
for review before painting.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. Primer Paint

1. For synthetic finishing paints on internal and external woodwork, paint shall
be aluminium primer to BS 4756, Type 1.

2. For synthetic finishing paints on internal and external metalwork, paint shall
be zinc chromate primer or metallic zinc-rich primer to BS 4652, Type 2 or
water based, anti-corrosive primer.

3. For synthetic or non-toxic paints on galvanized metal, use an etching

primer with a zinc chromate base or a water based, anti-corrosive primer.

4. For polyurethane paint on internal and external metal work, paint shall be
metallic zinc-rich primer to BS 4652, Type 2 or water based, anti-corrosive
primer.

5. For emulsion paint on internal plaster work, paint shall be an alkali resisting
primer or water based, anti-corrosive primer.

B. Undercoat Paint

1. For metal work installed internally, paint shall be a linseed oil modified
alkyd based or wate based undercoat highly pigmented to appropriate
shade.

2. For metal work installed externally and exposed to weather, paint shall be
a polyamide or polyurethane epoxy pigmented with titanium oxide.

3. For plastered surfaces, paint shall be a fungus resistant, vinyl acetate or

acrylic emulsion paint.

C. Finish Paint

1. For metal work installed internally paint shall be long linseed oil modified
alkyd with glossy finish and fungus resistant characteristics.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2. For metal work installed externally and exposed to weather or damp

environment paint shall be polyurethane or polyamide epoxy with high
weather resistance.

3. For plastered surfaces, paint shall be a fungus resistant vinyl acetate or

acrylic emulsion paint.

D. Fire retardant paint shall be an intumescent paint which, when used alone or in
conjunction with other paints applied to combustible substrate shall be in
accordance with a manufacturer's tested system that achieves Class 1 spread of
flame rating to BS 476: Part 7.

E. Heat resisting paint shall be a heat resisting enamel paint. Priming coat and
undercoats used in conjunction with the enamel finishing coat shall be similarly
heat resisting.

2.02 Galvanizing

A. Unless otherwise specified, hot-dipped galvanized coating shall be provided for

all iron and steel articles.

B. Unless otherwise specified, the galvanized coatings shall be applied by the hot
dip process and shall consist of a smooth, clean zinc coating free from defects
and of uniform thickness complying with BS 729. Sheradising, parkerizing, or
other alternative processes shall not be used without having been submitted for
review.

C. All drilling, punching, tapping and bending of parts shall be completed and all
burrs removed before galvanizing is commenced.

D. The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not affect the
mechanical properties of the material.

E. Unless otherwise specified, semi-finished products such as hot dipped galvanized

steel sheet suitable for subsequent fabrication shall have the following coating
weights:

1. Where no paint finish is required the coating weight shall be not less than
300 g/m 2 per surface.

2. Where paint finish is required the coating weight shall be not less than 60
g/m2 per surface.

3. In the case of steel wire, the coating shall be of such thickness as to

comply with BS 443.

2.03 Paint Finish Schedule

A. Unless otherwise specified, a paint finish to a colour to be specified shall be

applied to all exposed services including supporting rods and brackets, cable
trays, trunking, lighting fittings, pipework, ductwork, access doors/panels, surface
conduits and accessories.

B. Unless otherwise specified, all machinery/equipment shall be finished in a colour

to be specified at the time of installation/manufacturing. Unless conforming to the
general colour scheme specified, the manufacturer's standard finish colour may
not necessarily be accepted.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. The requirements of paint finish shall be as follows:

1. All equipment casings and metal parts shall undergo different stages of
pretreatment such as chemical cleaning, abrasive blasting, acid pickling,
galvanizing or electro-galvanizing before painting. There shall be at least
one coat of corrosion resistant primer, one undercoat and two finish coats
to suit the intended duty and operating requirements. Details of
pretreatment shall be submitted for review prior to application.

2. If damage to paint is found during transportation, storage or installation,

repaint the whole equipment without extra cost.

3. Replace all damaged parts or components and repaint the whole

equipment without extra cost if rust is found on any equipment due to
inadequate painting material or poor workmanship or incorrect handling
during transportation, storage or installation. Removal of all the existing
paint, chemical cleaning, rinsing and other necessary pretreatment shall be
included in repainting before applying primer, undercoats and top coats.
Details shall be submitted for review.

D. Insulated pipework or ductwork where no cement plaster finishing is provided

shall be identified by colour bands of 100 mm wide as specified in Clause 2.04.

2.04 Identification Colours

A. All finish coat colour shall be to BS 381 C and identification colour shall be as per
clause 2.05 below. Colours not covered in clause 2.05 shall be agreed.

B. Valves

All valves shall be painted in the same colour as the pipe to which it is fixed,
except that handles installed in plant rooms or on roofs shall be painted red, No.
540 regardless of the service.

C. Colour Bands

1. All insulated pipework without cement plaster finishing shall be provided

with identification colour bands of colours as specified for the relevant
services in the colours schedule.

2. Colour bands shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 2 m and

whenever necessary at bends, tees, when pipes pass through from one
room or zone to another, and when two or more pipes run in parallel.
Colour bands for each pipe shall be at the same locations.

3. Bands shall be of 100 mm wide.

D. Hangers, spring isolators, and supports shall be painted as for the equipment
unless otherwise specified.

2.05 Colours Schedule

A. All equipment, unless otherwise specified, shall be finished in a colour to be

specified at the time of installation. The Contractor shall obtain requirements on
this in good time.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. After painting and cleaning of piping and insulation is complete, exposed services
systems shall be finished generally in accordance with BS 1710 and shall be
identified by means of coloured stencilled or prefabricated legends with flow
arrows as follows unless otherwise specified.

Schedule of Colours

Description of Services Basic Colour Code Basic

Colour Indication Colour
100 mm approx.
Pipework:
Drinking Green Blue Green
Cooling Green White Green
(Primary)
Boiler Feed Green Crimson White Crimson Green
Condensate Green Crimson Emerald, Crimson Green
Green
Water Chilled Green White Emerald, White Green
Green
Mains supply, Green White Blue White Green
Cold
Mains supply, Green White Crimson White Green
Hot
Sea, river, Green
untreated
Fire Fighting Green Safety Red Green
In either Yellow ochre
gaseous or
Gases liquefied
condition
(exception)
Compressed Air Light blue
Steam Silver grey
Lubricating Oil Brown Emerald Green Brown
Town Gas Yellow ochre Emerald Green Yellow ochre
Drainage Black
Acids & Alkalines Violet
Equipment:
Plant Opalme Green
Electrical conduits & Orange
ductwork
Ductwork White
Fire Fighting Safety red

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

BS Colour Reference

BS 4800
(1) Basic Identification Colours
Green 12D45
Silver grey 10A03
Brown 06C39
Yellow ochre 08C35
Violet 22C37
Light Blue 20E51
Black 00E53
Orange 06E51
(2) Safety Colour
Red 04E53
Yellow 08E51
Auxillary blue 18E53
(3) Code Indication Colour
Crimson 04D45
Emerald green 14E53
Yellow 10E53

2.06 Labelling

A. Label all the provided plant and equipment in both English and Chinese as to duty
or service. All such labelling to correspond to Schedules, diagram, etc. shall be
provided as part of the Record Drawings. Labels generally shall be of `Perspex'
reverse engraved with red lettering, or Black Traffolite engraved with white
lettering, or as otherwise required by the Architect.

B. All valves throughout the installation shall be fitted with labels in the form of black
traffolite discs, not less than 50mm diameter x 1.5mm thick, engraved with white
lettering. Labels shall either be secured under the hand wheel of fixed to the
body of the valve by means of link brass chain.

2.07 Directional Arrows and Lettering

A. Apply the directional arrows and lettering to indicate the direction of flow or return.
Colours of arrows and lettering shall be black where the background colour is
other than black and white where the background colour is black.

B. Paint the directional arrows and lettering on all visible sides of ducting on 2.5m
centres.

C. Paint the directional arrows and lettering on two visible sides of all piping at 2.0m
centres and adjacent to valves and tees.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Painting shall be in accordance with BS 6150 and BS 8000: Part 12 and as

described in the following.

B. All holes, cracks, and any other defects in surfaces shall have been made good
prior to painting with materials used in accordance with manufacturers'
recommendations.

C. Well brush each coat into the surface so that every part, including joints, junctions,
angles, and the like are adequately covered. Excessive or uneven thickness of
paint film, particularly at edges, angles and junctions shall be avoided.

D. Apply coatings only to clean dry surfaces after any previous coatings have
hardened, and rub down smooth with fine glass paper before the subsequent coat
is applied.

E. Successive coats of paint shall be of slightly differing tints.

F. Apply coatings with applicators of suitable size. Flat wall brushes shall be not less
than 150mm wide. Rollers shall be covered with materials appropriate to the type
of paint and consistent with the required finished surface of the work.

G. Mechanical spraying machines shall not be used unless instructed or reviewed.

Spray painting shall be preceded by application of priming coat (or first undercoat
if there is no priming coat) by brush.

H. Where required, prime and paint to fixing surfaces which become inaccessible on
assembly before they are assembled.

I. Where one or more additional coats are specified to be applied off-Site, they shall
be applied to all surfaces and edges, including those which will be concealed
when incorporated into the Works.

J. Prime and paint bottom edges before hanging.

K. Remove all articles of ironmongery, hardware and the like before painting and
replace (with matching screws) after completion and leave everything clean and
completely free from, all paint stains and splashes.

L. Paint shall not be applied to steelwork under the following conditions:-

1. When the ambient temperature falls below 4°C or the relative humidity
rises above 85%.

2. For outdoor work, during periods of inclement weather including fog, frost,
mist and rain or when condensation has occurred or is likely to occur on the
metal.

3. When the surface temperature of the metal to be painted is less than 3°C
above the dew point of the ambient air.

4. When the amount of dust in the air or on the surface to be painted is in the
opinion of the Architect/Engineer excessive.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

M. Two-pack paints of the epoxy resin type shall not be applied and cured when the
temperature is below that recommended by the paint manufacturer.

N. All materials to be used shall be recommended by the manufacturers for the

particular surface and conditions of exposure, and that they are compatible with
each other.

O. All primary, undercoating and finishings used on the same work shall be:-

1. supplied by one manufacturer and,

2. of types recommended by the manufacturer as suitable for using together.

P. Where surfaces have been treated with preservatives or fire retardants, the
treatment manufacturer shall confirm that coating materials to be applied are
compatible with the treatment and shall not inhibit its performance.

Q. Any discrepancy in the requirements of painting specified in this Specification

shall be notified and accepted before proceeding with the application.

3.02 Method of Application

A. The paint finish shall be regarded as an additional finish applied over hot-dipped
galvanized steel sheet or extruded aluminiurn surface, or other specified coatings.
Details shall be submitted for review prior to application.

B. As far as possible, paint finish shall be applied at the manufacturer's premises

prior to delivery to Site for installation.

3.03 Electrostatic Painting at Manufacturer's Works

A. Electrostatic painting shall be applicable to cable trays, trunking, lighting fittings,

and other equipment which is fabricated and prefinished/painted at
manufacturer's premises. The process shall include the following steps:

1. Degreasing with alkaline liquid;

2. Washing with water;

3. Drying;

4. Applying primer coats of 1-2 micron thick;

5. Applying undercoats of 10-15 micron thick;

6. Applying finish coats of 10 micron thick; and

7. Baking.

3.04 Painting on Site

Painting on Site shall also be provided to supporting rods and brackets, pipework,
ductwork and other equipment which is tailored or fabricated on Site. The process shall
include the following steps:

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

A. Preparation

1. Galvanized surfaces shall be washed with white spirit to remove dirt and
grease. If the metal coating is defective, proposals for rectification shall be
submitted for review.

2. Mild steel or ductile iron surfaces shall be scraped or wire-brushed to

remove rust and loose scale and welding slag or splatter. Surfaces shall
be cleaned out. Oil, grease and dirt shall be removed using white spirit.

B. General

1. Colours shall be agreed prior to painting. For each finish colour, the colour
of undercoat recommended by the paint manufacturer shall be used.

2. Control Samples: Sample areas of each paint type shall be reviewed

before carrying out the Works.

C. Cleanliness

1. All brushes, tools and equipment shall be kept in a clean condition.

2. All surfaces shall be kept clean and free from dust during painting and
drying.

3. A suitable receptacle for liquids, slops, and washing shall be provided.

Disposal shall be in accordance with the EPD Procedures.

D. Preparation of materials

1. Paints shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Any paints showing impurities, lumps, skin or uneven consistency shall be

strained through fine gauze prior to application.

3. Different paints shall not be mixed.

4. Paints shall be stirred to attain an even consistency before use.

E. Protection

1. Freshly applied paints shall be adequately protected from damage.

2. "Wet Paint" signs shall be exhibited and protective barriers shall be

provided on Site where necessary.

3. Surfaces adjacent to those being painted shall be adequately protected.

F. Application

1. Paints shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations to clean, dry surfaces in dry atmospheric conditions and
after any previous coats have hardened.

G. Priming

1. Water based priming coats shall be applied by brush unless other methods
are accepted.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2. Priming coats shall be to the manufacturer's recommended thickness.

3. Any primed surfaces that have deteriorated on site or in transit shall be

touched-up or re-primed.

4. Metal surfaces shall be primed on the same day they have been cleaned.

5. Unless otherwise specified, undercoats shall be applied with a brush in a

wet, even film over all the surfaces, avoiding uneven thickness at edges
and angles.

6. All priming and undercoats shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface with
abrasive paper and all dust shall be removed before applying the next coat
of paint.

7. Unless otherwise specified, finish coats shall be applied with a brush in a

wet, even film over all the surfaces, avoiding brush marks, sags, runs and
other defects. A second coat shall be applied within 48 hours of first coat.

8. Surface shall be cut neatly and clearly. Adjacent surfaces shall not be
splashed or marked.

H. Materials or paint

1. All coating materials shall be submitted for review prior to ordering.

2. Coating materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's sealed containers,

clearly labelled with the following information

a. Type of material;

b. Brand name, if any;

c. Intended use; and

d. Manufacturer's batch numbers.

3. The coatings shall be assessed under the following headings and

guidelines as to flammability:

a. Application: extent of application and various properties of the paint

and substrate system on the flammability and smoke or toxic gas
emission characteristics;

b. Thickness.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.25(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.26 MOTORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This Section specifies the manufacture, installation, connecting and testing of motors.

1.02 General Requirement

A. Store the motors in crates and well covered and protect until for installation.

B. Motor arranged for automatic restart shall have label of durable material
permanently fixed and in a prominent position clearly inscribed for warning.

1.03 Quality Assurance

A. Qualifications : Furnish motors which are the product of a manufacturer who has
been engaged in production of similar motors for a minimum of five years.

B. Standards : Furnish motors which comply with the relevant BSEN, BS, IEC
Standards, and the requirements of this section.

C. Nameplates : Securely attach nameplate on each motor showing manufacturer's

name, serial model number and all information as required by BSEN60034-1 or
IEC60034-1.

1.04 Submittals

As a minimum, submit the following for review at the appropriate stages of the Works :-

A. Reports on factory tests performed on each motor.

B. Shop drawings and manufacturer's literature including the following :-

1. Description of motor and its components.

2. Outline dimensions, weight, mounting and fixing details.

3. Wiring diagrams.

4. Motor speed-torque, current, efficiency and power factor curves.

5. Manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list, operation and maintenance

instructions.

6. Material list for motor components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. Unless otherwise specified or reviewed without objection, all motors shall be of

the fan-cooled type to cooling method IC411 (Totally Enclosed Fan Ventilated –
TEFV) as defined in BSEN60034-6 or IEC60034-6.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.26(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. All motors shall be insulated with Class B or better materials to BSEN60085 or

IEC60085, impregnated with non-hygroscopic oil-resistant insulating varnish.
Insulation materials shall be suitable for the working conditions encountered.

C. Motors shall be adequately rated to meet the service demands of associated

driven units under all conditions and as limited by electrical and mechanical
protective devices.

D. A.C. motors shall be squirrel-cage induction type and shall comply with BS4999
and relevant parts of BS5000 and BSEN60034.

E. All motors shall be capable of accelerating the driven plant from standstill to rated
speed with a terminal voltage of 80% of the nominal supply voltage at 50Hz.
With the exception of short-time rated motors, all motors shall be capable of
operating continuously at rated torque, with an input voltage range between 90%
and 106% of the nominal value at 50Hz. They shall be capable of delivering the
rated torque when running at 70% nominal voltage for a period of 10 seconds
without overheating. Under all of the above operating conditions, the slip of the
motor shall not exceed 10% of the synchronous speed. For short-time rated
motors, the above requirements shall also apply but for the duration of the short-
time period.

F. All motors shall be capable of operating continuously and capable of driving the
driven units at their rated output at any frequency between 48Hz and 51Hz
together with any voltage between 90% and 106% of the nominal voltage without
causing any damage to the motor.

G. Vertical shaft motors shall have thrust / ball bearings that are reviewed without
objection.

H. All bare steel internal parts except bearings shall be painted unless otherwise
protected against corrosion.

I. Motors shall be designed for low shaft currents and shall have adequate provision
to prevent bearing damage by shaft currents.

J. An auxiliary marshalling box, electrically and mechanically separate from the

power supply terminal boxes, shall be securely mounted on the motor frame for
marshalling all small wiring from motor mounting.

K. All motor components shall be subjected to the most rigid inspection during
manufacture, and completed motors shall be fully tested to comply with
BSEN60034 or IEC60034. Test certificates of all motors shall be submitted in
duplicate for review if required by the Engineer before delivery of the motor to
site.

L. All motor rotors shall be dynamically balanced. The vibration and noise level
generated by the motors shall not exceed the recommended limits as stipulated in
BSEN60034-9 and BSEN60034-14 respectively.

2.02 Rating and Construction

A. Motors in all cases shall be suitable for the duty intended. Power rating of all
motors as indicated on the Drawings are for guidance only.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.26(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

A margin of not less than 5% for compressor, 10% for pumps and 15% for fans
shall be provided over the continuous rating of the motor (without overloading)
selected to match the maximum power absorbed by the item of equipment under
its most sever operating conditions, taking into account of the characteristics of
the machine being driven by the motor.

The motor efficiency shall be in compliance with the minimum requirements of

Building Energy Code for electrical installation. The power factor of motor shall
not be less than the minimum values as stated below. The values shall be based
on the full load operation of the motor.

Minimum Power Factor of Motors

Power Factor
Power-Rating (kw) 2-Pole 4-Pole or above
2.2 p < 11 0.85 0.85
11 p < 55 0.88 0.86
55 p 75 0.88 0.88
75 above 0.90 0.88

B. All motors shall be suitable for use in the temperature and atmospheric conditions
of up to 40oC and relative humidities of up to 99%.

C. Unless otherwise specified, motors rated at 2.2kW and below shall be suitable for
220V single phase 50Hz operation, and motors with rating greater than 2.2kW
shall be suitable for 380V 3 phase 50Hz operation.

D. Motors with rating less than 11kW shall be suitable for direct-on-line starting. The
starting current shall not exceed 6 times the full load current.

E. Motors rated between 11kW and 55kW, inclusive, shall be suitable for star-delta
starting. The starting current shall not exceed 2.5 times full load current.

F. Motors with rating greater than 55kW shall be suitable for auto-transformer
starting and shall be provided with suitable means to limit the starting current not
exceeding 2.5 times the rated full load current.

G. Unless otherwise specified or reviewed without objection, motor speed shall be as

follows:-

1. Sprinkler pumps, hydrant pumps and drencher 3,000r.p.m.

pumps

2. Other than above 1,500r.p.m.

H. All motors shall also comply with the following requirements :-

1. The motor shall be die cast aluminium or cast iron frame with frame end
brackets, and with provision for earthing.

2. The motor shall be finished with red oxide zinc chromate primer with two
finish coats of ANSI 61 grey paint.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.26(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.03 Protection

Unless otherwise specified, the degree of protection of the motors shall conform to IP44
for indoor, IP55 for outdoor application and IP68 for submersible motor.

2.04 Termination Box and Terminals

A. Termination box shall be of die cast aluminium alloy or cast iron diagonally split
type and suitably gasketed to prevent ingress of moisture and dirt with the
following additional requirements :-

1. Rotatable in any of the four 90 degree positions.

2. Threaded holes suitable for mounting brass cable glands.

3. Stud type terminals for terminating electric cable as specified.

4. Internal wiring connections to the main terminal boxes and auxiliary

marshalling boxes.

B. The numbers of terminals provided shall be in accordance with the starting

method intended.

C. Final connections to electric motors shall be by means of flexible PVC insulated

copper cables in rustproofed flexible steel conduit for mechanical protection.
When flexible conduits cannot be used due to the size of the cables, the cables
shall be suitably protected in a manner that is reviewed without objection.

D. Where direct termination of the specified cables to the motor’s termination boxes
are impossible, the cables shall be terminated to an auxiliary marshalling box
which in turn shall be connected to the motor termination box using cables of
suitable type and size. Where such cable marshalling boxes are required, detail
proposals on the intended cable size, cable type, and termination details shall be
submitted for review.

2.05 Bearings

Bearings shall have 15 years of average life with double shields and the following
additional requirements:-

A. Unless sealed-for-life bearing is provided, ball or roller bearings shall be provided

with grease fittings and minimum pressure relief fittings for in-service lubrication.

B. Guide and thrust bearings for vertical motor drive units shall be subject to review.

2.06 Anti-Condensation Heater

A. Sea water pump motors located inside water-front pump chambers or motors with
rating greater than 30kW shall be provided with anti-condensation heater, and the
control circuit shall be arranged such that the heater is off when the starter is on
and vice versa. Heaters shall be wired from the respective starter in MCC or
LMCP.

B. The heaters shall be terminated in a robust terminal box electrically and

mechanically separated from any other terminal boxes. The anti-condensation
heater terminal box shall be fitted with an undrilled gland plate suitable for conduit
termination or cable entry.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.26(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.07 Type of Drive

All motors having “V” belt drive shall be mounted on sliding rails of the bedplate
common with the driven machines, and with adjustable bolts of ample length for the
drive. All motors and drives shall be accurately turned and provided with pulleys or
couplings as required for the drive. All motors and drives shall be accurately aligned
with the driven machines. Type and number of belts for the motor shall be of the design
that is reviewed without objection.

2.08 Lifting Eyes

All motors with a net weight in excess of 25kg shall be provided with lifting eyes or lugs
on the casing of the motor.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Install motors as required by the driven equipment.

B. Provide lifting equipment for the installation of motors.

C. Any additional steel works, supporting brackets and members which are required
for the motor installation shall be provided.

D. All motors shall operate without vibration. Where possible, the motors shall be
mounted on a common bedplate with the machine being driven.

E. Frames and supports for motors shall be accurately set and leveled.

F. Provide holding down bolts required for the fixing of motors. Should the bolts be
required to be sunk in concrete base, all the necessary details and fixings shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval in adequate time.

G. For each motor, an emergency stop pushbutton (EPB) shall be provided as

specified in other section of the Specification.

H. No motor shall be installed in a position where surrounding plant or building work

would obstruct the necessary periodical testing, cleaning and maintenance of the
motor.

I. All rotating parts of motors shall be properly guarded.

J. The casing of the motor shall be earthed as specified in other section of the
Specification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.26(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.27 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE (MCC)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 General Requirements

A. The electrical schematic diagrams for the MCC and associated equipment are for
guidance only. All of the electrical equipment provided, including switchgear,
motor starters, interconnecting power cables, and busbars, shall be compatible in
every respect with the electrical characteristics of the motors provided, and shall
be designed to suit the starting, normal and abnormal operating conditions of the
motor, and under fault conditions.

B. The MCC shall be of the self-contained floor standing extendable multi-cubicle

type, built up from compartments housing the circuit breakers, fused switchgear,
relays, busbars, controls etc. as shown on the schematic wiring diagrams
contained in the Drawings and as specified hereinafter. The MCC shall be
suitable for the service conditions specified in this Specification.

C. The location and the minimum dimensions of the MCC shall be as indicated on
the Drawings.

1.02 Particular Requirements on Quality Assurance

A. The MCC shall tested assemblies as defined in BSEN61439-1, manufactured,

factory assembled and tested by a specialist switchboard manufacturer.

B. The MCC and associated equipment, including switchgear, controlgear and

busbar assemblies shall be certified for the category of duty specified, and shall
be identical in mechanical construction to the prototype MCC which had been
type-tested by a competent and approved testing laboratory to the fault
conditions, temperature rise limits, and arc fault containment. Relevant
technical information and literature in English and copies of type-test certificates,
drawings and test reports shall be made available for examination during factory
tests to verify that the above requirement has been met.

C. Schedule of Standards

The whole of the MCC shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the
latest revision of the following standards.

BS88, BSEN60269,IEC60269 - Cartridge fuses

BS89, BSEN60051,IEC60051 - Electrical indicating instruments

BS142, IEC60255 - Electrical protection relays

BSEN13601 - Copper for electrical purpose

BSEN60085, IEC60085 - Classification of electrical insulation

BSEN60898-1, IEC60898 - Miniature air-break circuit breakers

IEC62052-11 - Electricity meters

IEC60255 - Electrical relays

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

BS6004, IEC60227 - PVC insulated cables, non-armoured,

for power and lighting

BS6231 - PVC insulated cables for switchgear

and control gear wiring

EN 60622, IEC60622 - Sealed nickel-cadmium prismatic

rechargeable single cells

BS7430 - Code of practice for earthing

BS7671, IEC60364 - Wiring regulations for electrical

installations for buildings

IEC61869-2 - Current transformers

EN55014 - EMC Requirements for Household Tools

and Similar Apparatus

BSEN61439, IEC61439-2 - Design verified assemblies

EN60947, IEC60947 - Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear.

EMSD (Hong Kong) - Code of Practice for the Electricity

(Wiring) Regulations

1.03 Submittals

As a minimum, submit the following for approval at the appropriate stages of the Works:

A. Details of equipment and components and manufacturer's data, including time-

current curves for each type and rating of circuit breaker and fuse proposed,
magnetising curves of CTs proposed etc.

B. Detailed MCC construction drawings to show the busbar arrangement, panel

layout etc.

C. Electrical control wiring diagrams showing details of all wirings internal and
external to the MCC, together with terminal numbers for cable terminations.

D. Setting levels of all adjustable tripping devices.

E. Calculation on battery sizing.

F. Equipment weight.

G. Builder's work requirements.

H. Maximum heat dissipation from the MCC.

I. Schedule of labels, inscriptions and colours.

J. Surface treatment of the MCC.

K. Locations of the emergency stop pushbuttons (EPBs).

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

L. Proposal on the testing procedures and report format for testing of the MCC at
the manufacturer's works and on site.

M. EMC certificates, declarations of conformity and EMC type test reports for relays,
meters and electronic components if required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

A. As far as practicable, the use of electrically dissimilar metals in contact shall be

avoided. If this is not possible, the contact surfaces of one or both of the metals
shall be electroplated or the two metals shall be insulated from each other.

B. All similar items of the MCC and their component parts shall be completely
interchangeable.

C. All parts which are subject to wear or damage by dust shall be totally enclosed in
dust-proof housings.

D. Adhesives shall not be used in the MCC unless otherwise specified.

E. All bolts, studs, nuts and washers shall be the same as those used in the type
test . When tolerance limitations preclude plating, corrosion-resistant steel shall
be used.

F. Washers shall be provided under all nuts and bolt heads. Bolts and studs shall
protrude by at least one thread pitch but not more than five thread pitches beyond
the outside face of nuts.

G. The MCC shall be designed to conform to the best engineering practice.

Arrange all instruments, relays, switchgear, indicating lamps, control switches,
pushbutton and the like in a neat, functional and logical manner.

H. The MCC shall be designed for simplicity of operation and maintenance to give
reliable service and minimum maintenance.

2.02 Construction

A. The MCC shall be self supporting, with modular top, side and back panels and
doors of not less than 2.0mm thick electro-galvanized sheet steel built up on
substantial framing to provide a rigid construction and clear accessibility to all
internal components within the MCC.

B. The degree of protection of enclosures shall be to IP31 for indoor use and IP54
for outdoor use to EN60529 and IEC60529.

C. The complete MCC shall comply with Form 4b segregation.

D. Provide detachable panels at the back of the MCC with a pair of handles for
every panel for easy fixing/removal of the panels. Gasket all detachable panels
and swing panels.

E. The MCC shall be of uniform height, and uniform depth front-to-back, throughout
its length and shall present a neat and tidy appearance. Arrange all control and
indication components mounted on or within the MCC between 500mm and
1800mm above the finished floor level unless otherwise specified.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. All doors shall have concealed hinges and shall be interlocked with the switch
mechanism. Provide all doors with dust-excluding gasket of neoprene or other
equivalent and approved material.

G. Provide non-magnetic removable gland plates of not less than 3.2mm thick at the
top and bottom of the MCC with suitable cut-outs for cables and/or busway
terminations.

H. Adequate arrangement for air circulation shall be made within each compartment
of the MCC and equipment shall be adequately sized to ensure that the internal
temperature of the MCC will be well within the operating ranges of all electrical
and electronic components including switchgear, controlgear, busbars, relays,
and timers inside the MCC. Provide ventilating louvres where required.

I. All insulators shall be non-hygroscopic and non-deteriorating.

J. Provide a base frame made up of steel channel with a minimum height of

100mm of substantial strength at the bottom of the MCC.

K. Provided earthed metallic internal compartments for housing sensitive metering

equipment and protective relays.

2.03 Finishes

A. All steelwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, oil, grease, dirt, scale, rust
and other contaminants by an approved method, such as chemical pickling, and
shall be epoxy powder coated immediately at the manufacturer's works. The
epoxy powder coating shall be not less than 50 microns thick.

B. The final colours for the equipment shall be the manufacturer's standard colours,
unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this Specification.

2.04 Busbars

A. Busbars shall be made of hard drawn, electro-tinned high conductivity, bare

rectangular solid copper bars. Full size phase and neutral bars shall be provided.

B. Brace and support all busbars rigidly. The complete assembly shall be capable of
withstanding the maximum mechanical stresses to which it may be subjected
under fault conditions.

C. Busbars, busbar connections and bare conductors forming part of the equipment
of the LV switchboard shall comply as regards current-carrying capacity and limits
of temperature rise with the requirements of BSEN61439-1 and IEC61439-1.

D. Whenever a vertical section of the MCC contains more than one outgoing circuit,
provide busbar risers or droppers to which the outgoing circuits are connected.
Busbar risers and droppers shall be as short and as straight as possible and shall
be so arranged that all conductors of the outgoing circuits can be brought onto
the bars without undue bending.

E. All conductors between the main busbars, busbar risers and droppers and the
outgoing switchgear shall be of high conductivity copper bars as specified, having
a current rating of not less than that of the outgoing switchgear to which they are
connected. Label all busbars with colour code for phase identification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. The configuration of the busbar assembly contained in the MCC shall be the
same as that shown on the type test drawings. The main busbars, the busbar
droppers and risers shall be type-tested to EN60439 and IEC60439. Any change
in the configuration will require separate type test certificates. For conductors
between these busbars and the outgoing protective devices not short-circuit type-
tested to a fault current of 50kA for 1 second at 0.25 lagging power factor,
insulate by approved means to ensure that an internal short-circuit is only a
remote possibility.

G. Jointing of busbars shall be by mechanical means, silver plated or tin-plated at

joints. Provide washers and locknuts to all bolts. The length of overlap at
joints shall not be less than the width of busbars to be jointed.

H. Identify the nominal rating of the busbars, busbar risers and droppers by self-
adhesive colour labels.

I. Insulators for busbar supports shall be non-hygroscopic and non-tracking

moulding.

J. Segregate busbar as specified.

K. The busbar system shall have an insulation voltage of 660V d.c..

2.05 Air Circuit Breakers (ACBs)

A. All ACBs shall be of the horizontal withdrawable pattern and shall comply with
and be fully type-tested to EN60947-2 or IEC60947-2, and shall meet the
following requirements:

Number of poles : 4 (for incomers and bus-sections)

3, with bolted-type neutral link (for outgoing breakers)

Rated insulation voltage: 660V a.c.

Rated frequency: 50Hz

Rated uninterrupted current (derated to suit site conditions): as shown

on Drawings

Rated working temperature: 40 deg.C.

Rated short-circuit making capacity: 105kA at 0.25 power factor

Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu): 50kA.

Utilization category: B

Rated short-time withstand current (Icw): 40kA

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics): 100% of Icu

Closing mechanism : hand charged and motor charged spring closing mechanism
using 220V a.c. system voltage power source.

Tripping mechanism : shunt trip using d.c. power source as specified hereafter.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

All ACBs shall be certified by a recognized national testing authority to show

compliance with the short circuit duty as specified above.

B. The ACBs shall also meet the following requirements:

1. Electrical connection between the ACB and the busbar system of the MCC
shall be of plug and socket type with automatic screening shutters to shield
the fixed terminals in the MCC when the ACB is withdrawn. The shutters
shall be properly labelled to indicate whether they are for incoming or
outgoing terminals and provided with padlock facilities.

2. The ACB cannot be inserted or withdrawn when in the closed position.

Attempted withdrawal shall not trip a closed ACB.

3. Live parts of the ACB shall not be accessible from the front of the MCC
unless the ACB is drawn out.

4. Means shall be provided to padlock the ACB in its CONNECTED, TEST

and ISOLATED positions.

C. Notwithstanding the above, each ACB shall be equipped with, but not be limited
to, the following:

1. A mechanically operated indicating device to indicate breaker positions.

2. Where indicated on Drawings or the power supply is to be taken from more

than one transformer, interconnection facilities between the main incoming
circuit breakers shall be provided. All incoming and interconnection
circuit breakers shall be of 4-pole type interrupting all live conductors.
Key and electrically interlocked to prevent the transformers from operating
in parallel shall be provided.

3. One ammeter complete with selector switch and matching CTs to measure
all line currents.

4. One voltmeter complete with selector switch for line and phase voltage
reading (for incoming breakers only).

5. One three phase power factor meter (for incoming breakers only).

6. One kWh meter with matching CTs where indicated on the Drawings.

7. Overcurrent protection relay where indicated on the Drawings. The relay

shall be triple pole non-directional IDMT relay with adjustable current
settings and time settings. The time-current characteristics of the relay
shall be selected to ensure full coordination and discrimination with the
maximum allowable time-current characteristics of the upstream
distribution transformer and HV switchgear, and to the approval of the
power company.

8. Earth fault protection relay where indicated on the Drawings. The relay
shall be single pole non-directional IDMT relay with adjustable current
settings and time settings. The time-current characteristics of the relay
shall be selected to ensure full coordination and discrimination with the
maximum allowable time-current characteristics of the upstream
distribution transformer and HV switchgear, and to the approval of the
power company.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

9. Built-in type adjustable instantaneous overcurrent protection unit (for

incoming breakers only).

10. Where indicated on the Drawings and/or specified in other section of this
Specification, provide an under-voltage trip relay capable of holding the
circuit closed for a period of 0 to 5 seconds adjustable at the
commencement of complete mains failure. The under-voltage relay shall
be of the self-resetting type.

11. Breaker OPEN/CLOSED/TRIPPED-ON-FAULT indicating lamps.

12. Breaker OPEN/CLOSE push buttons.

13. Phase indicating lamps (for incoming breakers and bus-sections only).

14. Control circuits, with anti-pumping relays, to ensure positive operation of

the ACB requiring automatic closing.

15. Auxiliary contacts for local status indications, controls and 20% spares.

16. Lamp test push button.

17. Auxiliary contacts for remote status indications, controls and 20% spares,
where specified in other section of this Specification.

18. REMOTE/LOCAL-MANUAL breaker control selector switch, whenever

remote control is specified.

19. If a digital multifunction power meter as indicated in the Drawings is used,

the analogue meters mentioned in items 3,4,5 and 6 of this section above
shall be replaced by the digital multifunction power meter. The digital
multifunction power meter shall have, but not limited to, the functions as
performed by the mentioned analogue meters. The digital multifunction
power meter shall be completed with related current transformers.

20. If a digital protection relay as indicated in the Drawings is used, the

analogue protection relays mentioned in items 7,8 and 9 of this section
above shall be replaced by the digital protection relay The relay shall be
microprocessor-based digital protection relay for overcurrent protection
and earth fault protection where indicated on the Drawings. The relay
shall be time delayed three-phase digital time-current characteristics of the
relay shall be selected to ensure full co-ordination and discrimination with
the maximum allowable time-current characteristics of the upstream
distribution transformer and HV switchgear, and to the approval of the
power company.

The digital protection relay shall be completed with related current

transformers.

2.06 Fused Switchgear

A. All fused switchgear shall comply with EN60947-3 or IEC60947-3 and shall be
rated for uninterrupted duty, utilization category AC-23A, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings and shall have rated fuse short-circuit current of 40kA
minimum. All live parts shall be fully screened from the front.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Fused switchgear shall have mechanical interlocks between the panel door and
the switch operating mechanism and shall be so arranged that the panel door
cannot be opened with the switch in the ON position. Similarly, it shall not be
possible to close the switch with the cubicle door open, except that provision shall
be made within the cubicle for an authorized person to defeat the mechanical
interlock and close the switch with the door in the open position for test purposes.

C. All switchgear shall be flush mounting and be fitted with mechanical ON/OFF
indicators with operating handles of the semi-flush or telescopic pattern, and with
suitable means for padlocking in either the ON or OFF position.

D. Fused switchgear shall be provided with adequate accelerating springs and

toggle action to ensure positive quick-make and quick-break action independent
of the speed of operation of the handle and shall be capable of closing onto and
remaining closed on a fault, and able to operate even if the mechanism spring is
broken. All contacts shall be silver plated for service reliability.

E. Fused switchgear shall be triple pole with bolted neutral link, triple pole with
switched neutral, double pole or single pole with bolted neutral link, as specified.
The neutral link shall be accessible and detachable from the front of the fused
switchgear panel.

F. Fuses shall be of HRC type to BS88:Part 2, Class Q1 fusing factor.

2.07 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)

A. MCCBs shall comply with and be fully type-tested to BSEN60947-2 or IEC60947-

2, and shall meet the following requirements:

Number of poles : 3 or 4 as specified on the Drawings

Rated insulation voltage: 660V a.c.

Rated frequency: 50Hz

Rated uninterrupted current (derated to suit site conditions): as shown on

Drawings

Rated working temperature: 40 deg.C.

Rated short-circuit making capacity: 105kA at 0.25 power factor

Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu): 50kA.

Utilization category: A

Rated short-time withstand current (Icw): 40kA.

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics): 100% of Icu

All MCCBs shall be certified by a recognized national testing authority to confirm

compliance with the short circuit duty as specified above.

B. MCCBs shall have all mechanical and live metallic components completely
enclosed within an all insulating moulded case.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. The operating mechanism shall be independent of operating speed and the

overcentre toggle action shall provide a quick-made and quick-break switching.
Handles shall be trip free. Contacts shall be non-welding.

D. MCCBs shall have over-current tripping mechanism of the thermal magnetic,

temperature compensated type to give time delay overload circuit protection and
instantaneous short-circuit interruption. The operating characteristic shall be
such that the time delay on overload tripping is inversely proportional to the
overcurrent up to a threshold value of approximately seven times the rated
current at 40 deg.C.

E. Provide handle lock attachments complete with padlock and two keys, capable of
locking the MCCB either in the open or closed position.

F. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and/or specified in other section of

this Specification, provide MCCB with an integral electronic type trip unit for
providing over-current and earth fault protection. Earth fault protection shall
have an adjustable earth fault tripping range between 0.2 to 1 of rated current of
the MCCB and an adjustable tripping time of 60ms to 350ms. The trip unit shall
be equipped with LED lamp and lamp test button to indicate MCCB tripping status
on over-current and earth fault.

2.08 Motorized MCCB Units

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide motorized MCCB for control purpose
or tripping the MCCB during an earth fault or under-voltage condition.
Operations of the MCCB shall be by individual momentarily energized solenoid
mounted on the breaker. The closing solenoid shall operate on the mains supply
while the tripping solenoid shall operate on the d.c. supply as specified hereafter.

B. Where indicated on the Drawings and/or specified other section of this

Specification, provide MCCB with integral electronic type trip unit for providing
over-current and earth fault protection. Earth fault protection shall have an
adjustable earth fault tripping range between 0.2 to 1 of the rated current of the
MCCB and an adjustable tripping time of 60ms to 350ms. The tripping unit shall
be equipped with LED lamps and lamp test button to indicate MCCB tripped
status on overcurrent and earth fault.

C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and/or specified in other section oif
this Specification, provide an under-voltage trip relay capable of holding the
circuit closed for a period of 0 to 5 seconds adjustable at the commencement of
complete mains failure. The under-voltage relay shall of the self-resetting type.
Incorporate a time delay circuit to close the MCCB automatically within a period
of 0 to 30 seconds adjustable at the commencement of mains restoration.

D. Notwithstanding the above, each motorized MCCB units shall be equipped with,
but not be limited to, the following:

1. MCCB OPEN/CLOSED/TRIPPED-ON-FAULT indicating lamps.

2. MCCB OPEN/CLOSE pushbuttons.

3. Control circuits, with anti-pumping relays, to ensure positive operation of

the MCCB, requiring automatic closing.

4. Auxiliary contacts for local status indications, controls and 20% spares.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5. Lamp test pushbutton.

6. Auxiliary contacts for remote status indications, controls and 20% spares.

7. REMOTE/LOCAL-MANUAL MCCB control selector switch, whenever

remote control is specified.

2.09 Automatic Transfer Switches

A. Where indicated on the Drawings as paired ACBs or MCCBs, each breaker shall
be equipped with, but not be limited to, the following:

1. ACB or MCCB as specified, but with motorized mechanism for ON/OFF

operation. Operations of the breaker shall be individual momentarily
energized solenoid mounted on the breaker. The closing and tripping
solenoid shall operate on the DC supply as specified hereafter.

2. Electrically and mechanically interlocking to facilitate automatic/manual

changeover from the normal source to the standby source.

3. Automatic/manual changeover selector switch.

4. Interlocking facility to ensure that normal breaker tripped on fault will not
cause the standby breaker to close or vice versa, unless the breakers are
reset manually. Provide padlock facilities for both breakers to prevent
accidental re-closure during maintenance.

5. The changeover system between the normal and standby sources shall be
as follows:

(i) A 3-phase undervoltage relay with time delay facility shall be

provided in the MCC to monitor the voltage condition of the normal
source. Upon failure of one or more phases of mains supply or a
reduction of voltage to a value of 90% to 70% (adjustable) of the
nominal value, the normal breaker shall be tripped by the
undervoltage relays.

(ii) Another set of undervoltage relay as specified above shall also be

provided to monitor the voltage condition of the standby source.
Once the voltage from the generator supply reaches 90% of the
nominal value, the standby breaker shall close automatically.

(iii) Upon restoration of the normal power supply, which has been
determined stable after a time delay, the standby breaker shall open
and the normal breaker shall close, transferring the loads to the
normal supply. It shall also be able to switch the load back to the
normal supply under manual control.

6. Incorporate in the control circuit a test switch to simulate mains power

failure and initiate the changeover sequence to allow on-load testing.

2.10 Motor Starters

A. Every motor starter shall be designed to perform the following functions

efficiently and safely:

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1. To start the motor without damage to the drive or driven equipment whilst
regulating the starting current to the satisfaction of the power supply
company and ensuring that at all stages of starting, the motor will develop
sufficient torque to accelerate the load.

2. To stop the motor.

3. To prevent damage to the motor due to overload, under voltage,

disconnection of one phase etc.

4. To prevent damage to reduced voltage started motors and danger to

personnel due to resumption of the electricity supply following a failure.

5. To limit the damage to the motor due to stalling or internal electrical or

mechanical faults by quickly disconnecting the supply.

6. To prevent damage to the motor or the starter itself due to improper

unskilled or hesitant operation or failure to complete a starting sequence
once it is connected.

7. To enable the motor and starter to be completely isolated from the main
supply and from all control supplies for inspection and repairs by means of
a single switch.

B. Each motor starter assembly shall comprise switchgear, contactors, protection

relays and accessories as specified hereinafter. The whole unit shall be
enclosed in the cubicle from which no access can be gained to adjoining cubicles.
The contactors, in conjunction with its immediate upstream switchgear, shall pass
the Type 2 co-ordination under short circuit conditions as specified in Clause
7.2.5 of BSEN60947-4-1 or IEC947-4-1.

C. All starters shall comply with section 7.2 of BSEN60947-4-1 or IEC947-4-1,

and shall be adequately rated for the conditions in which it shall operate.

D. All contactors shall be electro-magnetic type and shall comply with BSEN60947-
4-1 or IEC947-4-1, utilization category AC-3 of intermittent duty class 30.

E. All starters shall be of electrically held on pattern and shall not release until the
voltage falls below 75% of nominal.

F. Control circuits shall be operated on mains supply derived from the MCC,
suitably protected by fuse to BS88: Part 1 and Part 6.

2.11 Direct-on-line (DOL) Starters

A. Motors rated below 11kW shall be direct-on-line started provided that the
maximum starting current does not exceed six times the rated motor full load
current, otherwise star-delta starters shall be provided.

B. The starters shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Fused switchgear or MCCB as specified.

2. Triple pole air break contactor.

3. One triple pole motor protection unit incorporating three phase over-current
and single-phasing protection.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

The over-current protection unit shall be of thermal type, with a minimum

setting of 110% of full load current. No external re-set shall be provided.

4. No-volt release device of automatic resetting type.

5. Local/off/remote control selector switch lockable in each position.

6. Start and stop pushbutton.

7. Indicating lamps for motor running, off and tripped on fault.

8. Dry contacts wired to terminals for remote indication of motor running, off,
tripped on fault and summary alarm to the various central control panels at
the location shown on the Drawings.

9. One set of terminals wired for connection to the following:

(i) Emergency stop pushbutton, effective in all positions of the

local/remote switch, if any.

(ii) Remote start/stop of the motor, effective only in the remote position
of the selector switch.

10. Hour run meter.

11. Lamp test button.

12. Any other items required to effect satisfactory motor starting and control as
specified elsewhere in the Specification.

2.12 Star-delta Starters

A. Motors rated at and above 11kW and 55kW, inclusive, shall be star-delta started
to limit the maximum starting current within 2.5 times the rated motor full load
current.

B. Star-delta starters shall be equipped as per DOL starters specified above, with
the following additional provisions:

1. Electrically and mechanically interlocked triple pole air break contactors

arranged for automatic open transition star-delta motor starting, with an
adjustable automatic timing device for switching over from star to delta
connection.

2. One ammeter to read red phase current with matching CTs. If a digital
multifunction power meter as indicated in the Drawings is used, the
analogue meters shall be replaced by the digital multifunction power meter.
The digital multifunction power meter shall have, but not limited to, the
functions as performed by the mentioned analogue meters. The digital
multifunction power meter shall be completed with related current
transformers.

3. One triple pole motor protection unit incorporating three phase over-
current, single-phasing and earth leakage protection. The over-current
protection unit shall be of thermal type, with a minimum setting of 110% of
full load current.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/12 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

The earth leakage protection unit shall be selected to isolate the motor
circuit with a maximum fault disconnection time of 5 seconds in case of
earth leakage without causing nuisance tripping of the motor circuit due to
motor starting and transient current saturation.

2.13 Reduced Voltage (RV) Starters

A. Motors rated above 55kW shall be reduced voltage started to limit the maximum
starting current within 2.5 times the rated motor full load current.

B. Reduced voltage starters referred herein shall be auto-transformer starter and

shall be equipped as per star-delta starters specified above, with the following
additional provisions:

1. Electrically and mechanically interlocked triple pole air break contactors and
reactor arranged for closed transition reduced voltage motor starting, with an
adjustable automatic timing device for switching over from reduced voltage
to full voltage connection.

2. Air-cooled copper winding auto-transformer with insulation Class F and

suitable tappings for the closed transition reduced voltage motor starting. The
auto-transformer have with three tappings at 50%, 65% and 80% for
adjustment on site and shall be suitable for 6 starts per hour.

2.14 Soft Starters

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, soft starters shall be provided to limit the
maximum starting current as specified hereafter.

B. The starters shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Fused switchgear or MCCB as specified in the Drawings.

2. One set of solid state motor controller as specified below:

a) The solid state soft motor controller shall be a power electronic type
motor starting device. It shall control the voltage applied to the motor
smoothly by varying the conduction angle of the solid state A.C. switches
which can be triacs, reverse parallel connected SCR-diode circuit or
reverse parallel connected SCR-SCR circuit etc. or using, other similar
technique.

b) The solid state motor controller shall be manufactured to conform to the

following relevant standards or other similar recognised international
standards:-

BS EN 60068-2 (IEC 68-2-6) For vibration resistance,

BS EN 60068-2-27 (IEC 68-2-27) For shock resistance,

BS 6667 Part 3 (IEC 801-3) For radio-electrical interference

immunity

BS EN 50081 For electromagnetic compatibility.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/13 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

c) The solid state motor controller shall be manufactured by a reputable

manufacturer which has continuously manufactured soft starters for at
least 5 years and the manufacturer shall have a local agent to provide full
technical support, including adequate spares holding and technical
expertise in testing, commissioning and trouble-shooting. Training shall
be provided by the manufacturer’s representatives on operational and
maintenance aspects including essential trouble-shooting techniques.

d) Full technical details of the solid state motor controller provided by the
manufacturer shall be submitted and shall cover at least the following:-

1) technical guide on its applications.

2) schematic and wiring drawings, and down to circuit board level

where possible.

3) shop drawings and as-fitted drawings.

4) operation manuals with commissioning guide.

5) maintenance manuals with trouble-shooting guide.

6) parts list and recommended spare parts with price.

e) Degree of Protection of Enclosure

The solid state motor controller shall be protected to at least IP20 for
operation without derating under ambient temperature of up to 40 deg. C
and relative humidity of up to 95%.

f) Voltage and Power Rating

Unless otherwise specified, the rated operational voltage shall be 380

Volt ±6%, 3-phase, 50 Hz ±2%. The rated power and quantities of the
solid state motor controllers shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

g) Mode of Operation

The solid state motor controller shall provide the following modes of
operation and shall be transitionless without causing any current inrush
and torque surges during operation:-

1) Voltage ramp - The motor voltage shall begin initially at a preset

‘start voltage’ and increase to line voltage at a preset ‘ramp rate’.
The acceleration ramp time shall be adjustable up to 30 sec.

2) Current limitation - It shall be capable of limiting the maximum

starting current which shall be adjustable up to 5 times of rated
current.

3) Soft stop - A deceleration voltage ramp shall be applied to the motor

for applications which require an extended coast to rest. The
voltage ramp down time shall be adjustable up to 60 sec.

4) Kickstart - A current pulse shall be provided in softstarter to develop

additional torque at start for loads which may need a boost to get
started.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/14 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5) Apart from the above, other modes of operation such as energy

saving, voltage pedestal starting, full voltage starting, D.C. injection
braking etc. shall also be provided when specified.

h) Protection

The solid state motor controller shall have an integral protection to the
motor and softstarter and LED diagnostics to aid in set-up and
troubleshooting. The protection shall include, but not be limited to the
following:-

1) thermal overload protection of the motor and solid state motor

controller.

2) mains supply protection for phase failure and phase unbalance.

3) internal fault protection.

4) stalled motor protection.

i) Auxiliary Contact

The solid state motor controller shall provide auxiliary contacts for end of
starting (by-pass) and fault condition. The output relay contact shall be
suitable for 220 V A.C. operation in category AC11 and D.C. operation in
category DC11.

j) Selection of solid state motor controller and Operating Precautions

1) The starting current-speed transition curve of the selected solid state

motor controller shall closely match with the starting torque-speed
characteristics of the motor and loading. The ratings of the solid
state motor controller shall be selected based on ‘hot start’ operation
i.e. the motor is re-started immediately after operating at the
maximum rating for a period of time.

2) The motor associated with the solid state motor controller shall be
capable of starting the driven load when is supplied at reduced
voltage and current. In case of severe duty, it shall check with the
motor manufacturer that its derating is compatible with the operating
cycle and the starting times.

3) The heat sink of the solid state motor controller shall be of good
quality aluminium construction and shall provide sufficient thermal
inertia to permit successful starting of the motor without exceeding
permitted junction temperature of the solid state AC switches.

4) The solid state motor controller shall be capable of continuously

delivering the rated output voltage (or reduced output voltage under
energy saving mode) with power factor of not less than 0.9 lagging
without external chokes or power factor correction capacitors at any
load. A by-pass contactor shall be provided and the order to close
and open the contactor shall be controlled by the built-in signal of
the solid state motor controller.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/15 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5) The solid state motor controller shall have the provisions to accept
DC input from an external device such as Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC) for controlling the start and stop of the unit.

6) Semiconductor fuses, one for each phase, shall be provided and

have the characteristics suitable to protect the solid state motor
controller.

7) The solid state A.C. switches shall have a blocking voltage of at

least 1400V with a rate of rise of reapplied voltage tolerance of at
least 1000V per microsecond. However, an isolation contactor or
isolator shall be available as an option to isolate the supply in the
‘Off’ state of the solid state motor controller for the safety of the
operator.

8) UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES should power factor correction

equipment be connected between the solid state motor controller
and the motor. If power factor correction equipment is employed, it
should be connected to the supply side of the solid state motor
controller.

k) The solid state motor controller shall be suitable for 20 starts per hour.

1. Triple pole air break contactor as by-pass contactor. The

contactor shall be paralled connected with solid state motor
controller.

2. One triple pole motor protection unit incorporating three phase

over-current, single-phasing and earth leakage protection. The
over-current protection unit shall be of thermal type, with a
minimum setting of 110% of full load current. The earth leakage
protection unit shall be selected to isolate the motor circuit with a
maximum fault disconnection time of 5 seconds in case of earth
leakage without causing nuisance tripping of the motor circuit due
to motor starting and transient current saturation.

3. One ammeter to read red phase current with matching CTs.

4. No-volt release device of automatic resetting type.

5. Local/off/remote control selector switch lockable in each position.

6. Start and stop push button.

7. Indicating lamps for motor running, off and tripped on fault.

8. Dry contacts wired to terminals for remote indication of motor

running, off, tripped on fault and summary alarm to the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) System

9. One set of terminals wired to provide for connection to the

following:

10. Emergency stop pushbutton, effective in all positions of the

local/remote switch, if any.

11. Hour run meter.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/16 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

12. Lamp test button.

13. Any other items required to effect satisfactory motor starting and
control as specified elsewhere in the Specification.

2.15 Variable Speed Drive Starters

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, variable speed drive starter shall be provided
specified hereafter.

B. The starters shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Fused switchgear or MCCB as indicated on the Drawings.

2. One set of variable speed drive (VSD) as specified below :

a) The variable speed drive (hereinafter referred to as VSD) shall be a

solid-state converter to convert three phase mains supply of 380V±6%
and 50Hz ±1 Hz to an adjustable voltage and frequency output at its
rated throughput power. VSD shall conform to BSEN 50081 or other
similar recognised international standards on Electro-magnetic
Compatibility (EMC) compliance for industrial or commercial applications
and shall be manufactured to ISO 9001. Certificate of compliance shall
be issued for each standard rating of VSD used in the Contract after
being fully tested at the manufacturing facility.

b) The VSD shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer which has

continuously manufactured VSDs for at least 5 years and the
manufacturer shall have a local agent to provide full technical support
with adequate spares holding and technical expertise in testing,
commissioning and trouble-shooting. Training shall be provided by the
manufacturer's representatives on operational and maintenance aspects
including essential trouble-shooting techniques.

c) The VSD shall incorporate a 6-pulse full-wave uncontrolled diode bridge,

fixed voltage fed DC link with inductors and capacitors to form a filter, a
mains filter for EMC compliance, a pulse width modulation (PWM)
inverter bridge utilising insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTS) and
output inductors in the motor lines. The inverter bridge shall be
controlled by a microprocessor to produce a pulse width modulation
(PWM) waveform or similar technique which would result in full motor
voltage and sinusoidal current mains supply in the motor circuit. The
VSD shall be equipped with built-in RS 485/232 serial communication
ports.

d) The VSD shall be capable of continuously delivering rated output voltage

even when the mains supply voltage is down to 6% of its nominal value
and shall be able to control a standard BS 5000 3-phase squirrel cage
induction motor over a speed range of 20% to 100% continuously and
smoothly without de-rating the motor kW rating. The VSD shall provide
total power factor of not less than 0.9 lagging, without external chokes or
power factor correction capacitors, at all loads within the speed range.
The inrush current shall be zero and during starting, the current shall start
from zero and rises as the load accelerates with no danger of exceeding
full load current.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/17 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

e) The VSD shall allow unlimited switching of the motor circuit, at any load
and within the controlled speed range without damage and without the
need of auxiliary control switching. The VSD shall be capable of
automatically reconnecting to a spinning fan and run without tripping,
following mains interruption and on transfer from backup source. The
VSD shall be capable of running with no motor connected during
functional testing. The VSD shall have voltage/frequency (V/f) ratio
suitable for centrifugal pumps and fans control. Selectable V/f ratios
shall be provided and it shall not be possible to set a constant V/f ratio, to
prevent damage to connected equipment and to optimise energy usage.

f) The complete VSD unit shall be housed in the MCC with front-access
door. It shall be suitable for continuous operation without de-rating under
ambient temperature of up to 40oC and relative humidity of up to 95%
unless otherwise specified. The manufacturer shall arrange their
equipment to be fully tested including motor loading at their
manufacturing facility or by an approved testing authority to certify that
their equipment conforms to the aforesaid standard. Certificate of
compliance shall be issued for each standard rating of VSD used in the
Contract after being fully tested at the manufacturing facility or by the
testing authority.

g) The VSD shall be fully rated to provide the performance as follows:-

1) minimum efficiency of 95% at 100% load and not less than

90% at any other operating loads;

2) output torque shall be limited to 105% of full load torque;

3) no faculty for reversing the motor rotation shall be

incorporated;

4) the maximum allowable fifth harmonic current distortion

expressed in percent of the fundamental input current at the
VSD input terminals during operation within the variable
speed range shall be less than 35%.

5) the electromagnetic compatibility shall be to BS EN 50081,

EN 61800-3 or similar international standards.

6) The harmonic distortion shall comply with the Supply Rules

issued by the power supply company, code of practice for
energy efficiency of electrical installations issued by EMSD,
HK-BEAM requirements and LEED requirements.

7) the maximum allowable harmonic current distortion

expressed in percent of the fundamental input current at the
VSD input terminals during operation within the variable
speed range shall be as below table:

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/18 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion of Current

Designed Circuit Current (I, in A) Maximum Total Harmonic
Distortion (THD) in Percentage
of Fundamental Current
I < 40A 20%
40A I < 400A 15%
400A I < 800A 12%
800A I < 2000A 8%
I 2000A 5%

8) In order to achieve the above limit of THD current, a

harmonics filter suitable for the Variable Speed Drive
Starters shall be provided and form part of the VSD or LMCP
by this Sub-Contractor. The manufacturer of the harmonics
filter shall be same as the VSD.

h) The following minimum features shall be incorporated in the VSD unit

complete with an integral control panel:-

1) it shall accept digital and analogue 0-10 V, 4-20 mA control

signals;

2) integral measurement and selectable display of:

output current
output voltage
output frequency
output speed
output power
motor temperature

3) display of warning/fault/alarm status;

4) data can be transmitted on the RS 485/232 output for

remote interrogating and reprogramming;

5) it shall have programmable relay output (250V 2A) and

programmable analogue output of 4-20mA or 0-10V DC
suitable for the application;

6) 5 programmable preset speeds (including at least 2 skip

frequencies of adjustable bandwidth to overcome
mechanical or air system resonance);

7) selectable local or remote control;

8) it shall have the following integral protection against: -

loss of mains and motor phase

motor short circuit
motor circuit earth fault
motor overheat
overvoltage
VSD overheat
under voltage
input transients

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/19 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

VSD and motor overload

mains input accidentally couples to motor output
terminals

i) It shall have an integral full 3-term PID control to provide closed loop
control direct from a signal transmitter without need for external signal
conditioning;

j) It shall have a facility for controlling motor anti-condensation heater for

heater operation when the motor is idle.

3. One set of appropriate type starter for manually changeover operation in

case of VSD failure. The type of starter shall be direct-on-line or star-delta or
reduced voltage and shall be selected according to the motor rating.

4. No-volt release device of automatic resetting type.

5. Local/off/remote control selector switch lockable in each position.

6. Set of start and stop pushbutton.

7. Set of indicating lamps for motor running, off and tripped on fault.

8. Set of dry contacts wired to terminals for remote indication of motor running,
off, tripped on fault and summary alarm to the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) System.

9. One set of terminals wired to provide for connection to the following:

10. Emergency stop pushbutton, effective in all positions of the local/remote

switch, if any.

11. Hour run meter.

12. Lamp test button.

13. Any other items required to effect satisfactory motor starting and control as
specified elsewhere in the Specification.

2.16 Protective Relays

A. Protective relays shall comply with the relevant requirements of IEC60255.

B. Where plug selection is specified, the design shall be such that the plug setting
can be changed on load without open circuiting the CTs, and the highest current
tapping point will automatically be selected when the plug is removed.

C. Relays shall be of draw-out pattern, suitable for flush mounting to the doors of
dedicated and segregated relays compartments within the MCC. A contact shall
be fitted which shall short circuit the associated CTs on withdrawal of the relay.

D. A mechanical flag indicator shall be fitted to indicate the relay operation. A

hand-operated reset device shall be mounted in the relay cover to reset the
indicator and the auxiliary tripping relay, if any.

E. Provide a sealing device permitting the use of sealing wire to prevent

unauthorized opening of the relay cover.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/20 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. A filter shall be fitted to the relays to equalize the pressure inside and outside the
case without admitting dust.

G. The relay contacts shall be capable of making and breaking the maximum current
which may occur under fault conditions in the circuit in which they are connected.

H. All d.c. relays shall operate satisfactorily when the d.c. supply voltage varies
between 80% and 120% of its rated value, unless stated otherwise.

I. All protective relays shall conform to the EMC immunity standard BSEN61000-6-1
or BSEN61000-6-2 if required.

2.17 Control and Auxiliary Relays

A. Provide control and auxiliary relays where necessary to ensure a sound and
effective operations of the ACBs, MCCBs and contactors.

B. Relays shall be plug-in type, rack mounted, provided with cable connection
sockets and anchored by quick fastening vibration-proof devices.

C. All contacts shall be double breaking type. Relay coils shall be suitable for a.c.
or d.c. operation as required.

D. All protective relays shall conform to the EMC immunity standard EN 50082-1 or
EN 50082-2 if required.

2.18 Volt-free Contacts (Dry Contacts)

Provide volt-free contacts where required. They shall comprise a pair of contacts
operated directly by the equipment but electrically separated such that no electrical
potential derived from the equipment appears at the contacts. Use volt-free contacts to
complete external control, alarm or indication circuits. The volt-free contacts shall be
rated at 1A, 250V or better.

2.19 Current Transformers (CTs)

A. All CTs shall be rated for Class B temperature rise.

B. CTs shall be of epoxy resin encapsulated type and shall be capable of providing
the necessary output to operate the connected protective device or instruments.

C. Earth one secondary terminal of each set of CT through a removable link.

D. Protection CTs shall be suitably rated and of Class 5P accuracy or better. The
product of rated accuracy limit factor and rated output of the protection CT shall
not be less than 10 times the rated burden of the trip circuit including the relays,
connection leads and overcurrent release where applicable.

E. Measurement CTs shall be suitably rated and of Class 1 accuracy or better.

2.20 Indicating Instruments

A. All indicating instruments shall be of the flush-mounted, back-connected,

dustproof, heavy duty, switchboard type with matt black bezels. Scale plates
shall be white with black pointer and markings not subject to fading.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/21 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. All indicating instruments shall have a frame size of approximately 100mm by

100mm with a scale arc of approximately 240 degrees and with mechanical zero
adjustment accessible from the front without dismantling the instruments. The
range selected shall be suitable for the voltage and current levels to be indicated
with the normal maximum reading at approximately 60% of full scale.

C. All indicating instruments shall be of the moving iron spring controlled type. The
accuracy class shall be 1.5 for indicating instruments and 1 for integrating
meters. All indicating instruments shall not be damaged by occurrence of a
short-circuit or over-voltage which can be withstood by the switchgear.

D. Indicating instruments shall comply with the requirements of relevant parts of

EN60051. Integrating meters shall comply with the relevant requirements of
BS5685, IEC60521, or IEC60211.

E. Combination digital instrumentation in lieu of one or more of the above

mentioned analog indicating instruments is acceptable provided that its
performance is equal to or better than the analog indicating instrument specified.

2.21 Indicating Lamps, Push Buttons, Selector and Control Switches

A. All indicating lamps, luminous push buttons, selector and control switches shall
be of the heavy duty switchboard type, suitably insulated and rated for the
voltage level and current rating intended.

B. The lamp bulb shall be LED type with dome shape operated on 6V through a
built-in type transformer. The indicating lamps shall be designed to permit
removal of lamp lenses and bulb from the front of the units without the need of
any special tool and opening of the panel doors.

C. Selector switches for ammeters shall be of the rotary type with make-before-
break contacts for selection to read the three phase currents with the necessary
engraved plates clearly indicated. Selector switches for voltmeters shall be of
the rotary type with break-before-make contacts for selection to read the line and
phase voltages with the necessary engraved plates with phase voltages and line
voltages clearly indicated.

D. Switches for circuit breaker control shall be of the pistol grip type, with spring
return to the neutral position, and with an interlock to prevent repetitive closing
without moving first to the trip position.

E. Switches for other control selection and other purposes shall have spade type
handles.

F. "STOP" pushbuttons shall be in red and "START" push-buttons shall be in green.

All other push-buttons shall be in black.

G. "START" pushbuttons shall be effective when the selector switch (if fitted) is in
the "LOCAL" position, and shall not be effective when the selector switch is in the
"OFF" or "REMOTE" position.

H. Control switches shall be fitted with facilities for locking to prevent unauthorized
operations.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/22 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.22 Emergency Stop Pushbuttons (EPB)

A. EPBs shall be connected to the starter circuits and shall be effective under all
conditions.

B. EPBs shall be in red and designed for palm-push operation, with mushroom-head
button and rotating release.

C. All EPBs shall be to IP65.

2.23 Terminal Blocks

A. Terminal blocks for control wiring shall comprise banks of rail-mounted, screw-
clamp, spring-loaded insertion, solder-lug or stud type terminals as appropriate to
the design and duty of the cables to be terminated. Single terminals shall be
replaceable without dismounting adjacent terminals.

B. Terminal blocks shall be designed to securely clamp the wire between two plates
secured by a captive screw. Pinch screw type terminal blocks where the screw
is in direct contact with the conductor will not be accepted.

2.24 Fuses and Links

A. Fuse carriers and solid link carriers and bases shall be made of molded insulating
material.

B. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link carrier shall be shrouded so
that accidental contact with live parts cannot be made when the cartridge is
removed. It shall be possible to change fuses with the circuit alive without
danger of contact with live parts.

C. Fuses shall be to BS88-6 , designed to handle the anticipated short circuit

current, and of the cartridge type.

D. Fuse base shall consist of glass filled, high impact resistant, thermoplastic
polyester and shall incorporate a 35mm DIN rail mounting facility as well as a
single screw fixing.

2.25 Panel Heaters

A. Provide in each section of the MCC with a panel heater of an approved design at
60W per each cubic metre of the MCC. Shroud all the heaters and mount at the
bottom of the MCC.

B. Provide individual heater with fuse and rotary ON/OFF selector switch,
thermostatic controls and a lamp to indicate the energization of the heaters at the
front.

C. The heaters shall operate from the mains supply derived from the MCC.

2.26 Battery/Charger System

A. Provide one set of storage battery bank/charger inside the MCC to provide
independent source for the control of the LV switchgear and controlgear.

B. The battery charger shall be dual rectifier charger of constant potential type,
complete with the following as a minimum.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/23 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

All alarms and protection modules shall be in printed circuit card with solid-state
chassis, easily dismounted and replaced.

1. D.C. voltmeter and ammeter.

2. Surge suppressor.

3. Float, auto and manual boost charging selection and function.

4. Battery discharging indication.

5. Protection against over-charging and indication.

6. Charger failure alarm.

7. Battery low voltage indication and alarm.

8. Protective devices on the input and output circuits.

C. When under the boost charge selection, the battery shall be fully charged from
the fully discharged condition within 8 hours.

D. The storage battery bank shall be of heavy-duty industrial type design for the
purpose intended. Battery cells shall be free maintenance, rechargeable, high
performance nickel cadmium alkaline type having a proven service life of at least
10 years.

E. Under fully charged condition, the battery shall be capable of tripping the
associated ACBs and controlgear consecutively for at least 20 times without
being discharged to a level where damage may be caused to the battery. The
battery shall be sized to operate under the specified range of ambient
temperatures.

F. The output voltage of the battery bank shall be monitored by a control circuit
which shall raise a local and remote alarm when the battery/charger fails.

G. The battery circuit shall be adequately suppressed against radio interference to

limits laid down in EN55014.

H. The meters, alarms and protection modules shall conform to the EMC immunity
standard BSEN61000-6-1 or BSEN61000-6-2 if required.

2.27 Earthing

A. Provide a tinned copper earth bar of dimensions not less than 50mm by 6mm
along the whole length of the MCC bonding the framework of all modular
sections, complete with terminals for connections to the armouring or metal
sheath of all incoming and outgoing circuits, the integral earth busbars of
busducts, and to the electrical earth.

B. Provide an external earth terminal on the outside of both ends of the MCC for
earthing connection to the electrical earth.

2.28 Labels

A. Labels shall not be less than 75mm high. Lettering shall be of not less than
50mm high.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/24 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. All labels shall be manufactured from laminated traffolyte or similar plastic

materials, engraved and fixed by chrome plated screws.

C. All labels shall be in English and Chinese.

2.29 Internal and Control Wiring

A. All internal and control wiring shall be 600/1000V grade PVC insulated copper
cable with designated conductor temperature of 90oC to BS6231.

B. All cables shall be adequately rated single core multi-strand conductors of not
less than 1.5 sq.mm, run on PVC cleats or trunkings.

C. Each wire shall be fitted at both ends with a white ferrule with a black engraved
inscription to correspond with the diagram of connections.

D. Different insulant colours shall be provided to distinguish the various circuits.

2.30 Digital Multifunction Power Meter

A. The microprocessor based Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall measure the
electrical parameters including current, voltage, power factor, active and reactive
power and frequency by means of microprocessor technology. The meter shall
be able to communicate with PC-based BMS via a common network protocol
such as Modbus/LonWorks via RS232/RS485/Ethernet communication link by
means of plugging in communication module and without further modification of
the basic unit.

B. Technical Details

The Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall comply with the following technical
requirements :-

(a) Voltage input

- Maximum direct voltage : 600V a.c. between phase

- Other voltages : Through potential transformers

(b) Current input (In) : on current transformers, In / 5A

(secondary)

(c) Measurement : - True RMS value of line current

for each phase and neutral
current

- True RMS value of phase-neutral

voltage for each phase

- True RMS value of line voltage

for each phase

- Active power, kW

- Reactive power, kVAr

- Apparent power, kVA

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/25 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

- Frequency, Hz

- Power factor

- Energy, kWh

- harmonic distortion for voltage

and current, up to 31th harmonic
orders

- total harmonic distortion for

voltage and current

(d) Accuracy

- Voltage : ± 0.5%

- Current : ± 0.5%

- Power : ± 1%

- Power factor : ± 2%

- Frequency : ± 1%

- Energy : ± 1%

(e) Service condition

- Temperature : 0 to 50 C

- Relative humidity : 20 to 80%

(f) Communication

- Numeric : Series link RS-232 or RS-485 or Ethernet

- Analog : 4-20mA output

C. Physical Construction and Assessories

1. The Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall be housed in a single front

access industrial grade enclosure built as an integral part of the meter by
the original manufacturer. The meter shall then be panel mounted in the
L.V. switchboard cubicles. Alternatively, the meter can be designed for
DIN rail mounting. In either case, the front face shall be protected to not
less than IP54. The display shall either be L.E.D. or L.C.D. back light.

2. All writing shall be routed to allow easy removal of the cable connectors in
the event that the meter requires replacement. Current transformers
shorting block shall be provided such that current inputs can be
disconnected without open circuiting the current transformers. The
shorting block shall be wired so as not to affect the operation of protective
relays.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/26 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. The Digital Multifunction Power Meter for the main incoming circuit
breaker shall store in memory the maximum and minimum values of the
each parameter measured by the unit. These maximum and minimum
values in memory shall be recalled and displayed upon pressing of a
switch on the meter.

2.31 Digital Power Analyzer

A. The microprocessor based Digital Power Analyzer shall measure and monitor the
electrical parameters including current, voltage, power factor, energy, frequency
and power quality parameters by means of microprocessor technology. The
digital power analyzer shall be able to communicate with PC-based BMS via a
common network protocol such as Modbus/LonWorks via RS232/RS485/Ethernet
communication link by means of plugging in communication module and without
further modification of the basic unit.

B. The digital power analyzer shall continuously monitor the power system and
trigger alarm/event logging for power monitoring and analysis. The stored and
instantaneous measurement data shall be recalled and displayed on the front
panel upon pressing of keypad on the digital power analyzer and alternatively
monitored by PC-based application software supplied together with the analyzer.

C. The digital power analyzer shall have waveform capture capability which shall be
either initiated from the software or by the power analyser as a user defined
response to an alarm condition. The captured waveform samples shall be able
to transmit over the network to PC-based workstation for display, archival and
analysis.

D. The digital power analyser shall comply with the Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC) requirements in accordance with the following international standards :-

IEC 61000-4-2 Electronstatic discharge immunity test

IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated, radio-frequency. Electromagnetic field

immunity test

IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test

IEC 61000-4-5 Surge immunity test

IEC 61000-3-2 Limits for harmonic current emissions

Manufacturer’s calibration certificate shall be issued for every digital power

analyzer.

E. Technical Requirements

The digital power analyser shall comply with the following technical
requirements :-

(a) Voltage input

- Maximum direct voltage : 600V a.c. between phase

- Other voltages : Through potential transformers

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/27 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

(b) Current input (In) : On current transformers, In / 5A

(secondary)

(c) Measurement : - True RMS value of line current

for each phase and neutral
current

- True RMS value of phase-neutral

voltage for each phase

- % current unbalance

- True RMS value of line voltage

for each phase

- % voltage unbalance

- Active power, kW for each phase

and three-phase total

- Reactive power, kVAr for each

phase and three-phase total

- Apparent power, kVA for each

phase and three-phase total

- Frequency, Hz

- Power factor

- Active energy, kWh for three-

phase total with instaneous and
accumulated values

- Demand current for each phase

and three-phase average

- Demand active power, three-

phase total

- Demand apparent power, three-

phase total

- harmonic distortion for voltage

and current, up to 63th harmonic
orders

- total harmonic distortion for

voltage and current

(d) Accuracy

- Voltage : ± 0.5%

- Current : ± 0.5%

- Power : ± 0.5%

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/28 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

- Power factor : ± 0.5%

- Frequency : ± 0.5%

- Energy : ± 0.5%

- Harmonic : ± 1.0%

(e) Service condition

- Temperature : 0 to 50 C

- Relative humidity : Up to 95%

(f) Communication

- Digital : Series link RS-232 or RS-485 or Ethernet

- Analog : 4-20mA output

F. The digital power analyser shall provide date and time stamped event log. The
type of alarm events and size of the event log shall be user definable. The
following classes of events shall be available as alarm events:-

(i) Over / under voltage

(ii) Over / under current

(iii) Current or voltage unbalance

(iv) Phase loss, voltage or current

(v) Over / under frequency

(vi) Over kVA, kW or kVAr into / out of load

(vii) Under power factor, true or displacement

(viii) Over THD

(ix) Over demand, current or power

(x) Phase reversal

(xi) Voltage or current sag / swell

G. All setup parameters required by the digital power analyzer shall be stored in non-
volatile memory and retained in the event of control power interruption. The
memory shall maintain the maximum and minimum values of each parameter
measured by the unit and shall be backup by Lithium battery with battery life not
less than 7 years.

H. The digital power analyzer shall be able to receive d.c. power supply at 30V for
operation. A battery set and charger shall be provided.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/29 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.32 Active Harmonic Filter

A. General Requirements

1. Active harmonic filter (hereinafter referred to as “AHF”) shall be used to

eliminate harmonic currents circulating across the installation so that the
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) may be limited to a given percentage as
specified in the Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building Services
Installation published by EMSD.

2. AHF shall be installed in parallel with the distribution system, i.e. shunt
connected, wherever attenuation of harmonic current is needed. Preferably,
AHF shall be located close to those loads generating harmonic currents in
order to avoid circulation of the harmonic currents along the cables.

3. AHF shall conform to IEC 61000-4-2:2008, IEC 61000-4-3:2008, IEC

61000-4-4:2007 and IEC 61000-4-5:2009 or other similar recognised
international standards on Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
compliance for industrial or commercial applications and shall be
manufactured to ISO 9001:2008. Certificate of compliance shall be issued
for each standard rating of AHF after being fully tested at the
manufacturing facility.

4. AHF shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer which has

continuously manufactured AHF for at least 5 years and their
manufacturing facility shall have a local agent to provide full technical
support which includes adequate spares holding and technical expertise in
testing, commissioning and trouble-shooting. Training shall be provided
by the manufacturer’s representatives for government staff on operation
and maintenance aspects including essential trouble-shooting techniques.

5. Full technical details of the AHF as submitted by the manufacturer shall be

provided for the Architect’s approval and shall cover the following:

(i) technical guide on its applications;

(ii) schematic and wiring drawings down to circuit board level released
by the manufacturer;

(iii) shop drawings and as-fitted drawings;

(iv) operation manuals with commissioning guide;

(v) maintenance manuals with trouble-shooting guide; and

(vi) parts list and recommended spare parts with price.

6. Unless otherwise specified, the AHF shall be suitable for use with a 3-
phase and neutral, 4-wire, 380/220 V +6%, 50 Hz ±2% source neutral
earthed system. Service conditions to be:

a. Climate: Hong Kong (tropical);

b. Ambient temperature:

1. 5°C to +40°C (continuously 4 hours)

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/30 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2. Average 0°C to +35°C (over 24 hours);

c. Altitude: up to 2000 m above sea level; and

d. Relative humidity: 99% maximum.

The following technical requirements shall also apply:

(i) No. of phases: 3-phase without/with neutral, 3/4 wires.

(ii) Unit capacity: As specified on the drawings.
(iii) Harmonic orders: 2nd order to 25th order or more
compensation.

(iv) Filtering efficiency: 85% or more.

(v) Power factor correction: up to 0.98 lagging or more.
(vi) Steady state response: 40 ms or less
(vii) Ventilation: forced air cooled.
(viii) Noise level: 65 dBA or less.
(ix) Heat losses: 8% of rated capacity or less.

B. Performance Requirements

1. The operating principle of AHF shall be based upon the injection of a

harmonic current with appropriate phase shift corresponding to the
harmonic current drawn by the load which shall be analysed by the AHF
continuously. Consequently, the current supplied by the source shall remain
sinusoidal under the effective operating range of the AHF.

2. AHF shall be compatible with any type of load, and shall guarantee efficient
compensation, even when changes are made to the installation. The AHF
shall also be capable of delivering its rated output harmonic current to the
point of connection irrespective of load condition.

3. If the compensation of neutral harmonic current is required, in the neutral

conductor, the AHF shall be capable of compensating the harmonic current
three times greater than the phase current, particularly to compensate
harmonic current of order 3 and its multiples.

4. Start-up and shut down of AHF shall be initiated by control push buttons or
other means as specified. After a main power break-down, start-up of AHF
shall be automatic.

5. Should the AHF be overloaded during transient operation of certain loads

or permanently, this should not affect the reliability of its operation. Under
such circumstance, the AHF shall operate in a current limiting mode and
still deliver to the network its rated harmonic current.

6. For better adaptation to any installation, AHF shall be capable of operating

in association with other harmonic reduction systems. For ease of
expansion, it shall be modular type or be possible to associate 2 or more
AHF’s in parallel to increase the compensation capacity and to enhance
dependability, i.e. redundant operation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/31 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

7. To compensate the harmonics at different levels in the distribution network,

it shall be possible to connect the AHF at any point in the distribution
network, or to connect several AHF’s at different points in the installation
for maximum effectiveness.

C. Construction

1. AHF shall use an isolated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) bridge or other
similar technique to inject the proper harmonic current on the network, and
will be controlled by a microprocessor based system.

2. AHF shall be housed in an industrial grade cabinet constructed from high

quality steel sheet of minimum 1.2 mm thick side and back plate and 1.5
mm thick hinged front door with key lock. Protection class of the cabinet
shall be not less than IP21 for indoor and IP55 for outdoor application. The
entire surface shall be applied with chemical rust inhibitor, rust resisting
primer coat and topcoat to give maximum corrosion protection.

3. The dimension of AHF shall be as small as possible. Particularly, it will be

preferable to have the AHF fitted in low voltage cubicle switchboard or in
motor control centre.

4. AHF shall at least include the following kinds of protection:

(i) thermal overload protection;

(ii) internal short circuit protection; and

(iii) invertor bridge abnormal operation protection.

A three or four poles circuit breaker shall be installed close to the point of
the connection to the system to protect the connection cables. It shall be
selected according to general selection practice for circuit breakers and the
manufacturer recommendation.

5. As a minimum the AHF shall include the following read-out:

(i) an indicator for each phase of the incoming power supply;

(ii) an indicator for normal operating condition;

(iii) an indicator for AHF shut down; and

(iv) an indicator for fault condition.

Also a diagnostics panel shall be accessible from the front of the unit to
help the operator to identify the origin of abnormal situation and control
push buttons will be provided for ON/OFF operation and alarm reset.

6. AHF shall be equipped with built-in RS 485/232 serial communication ports

for control, programming and monitoring of the AHF by PC or other user
interface.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/32 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Segregation

Where equipment carrying currents of different types or at different voltages is

grouped in a common assembly, all equipment using any one type of current or
any one voltage shall be effectively segregated from equipment of any other
type, to avoid mutual detrimental influence and electromagnetic interference.

B. Polarity

Arrange polarity of all apparatus as follows when viewed facing the front of the
MCC:

1. For two pole apparatus: phase and neutral when reading from top to bottom
or left to right.

2. For three or four pole apparatus: L1, L2 and L3 phases and neutral when
reading from top to bottom, or left to right.

C. Cable Arrangement

1. Provide all the necessary cable lugs etc., and fix in positions on mounting
plates and straps, to suit the types and directions of entry of the cables as
shown on the Drawings or as specified.

2. Arrange cable conductors for all circuits within the MCC in a tidy manner
and secure all conductors mechanically at regular intervals to restrain any
movement of the conductors, either under operation conditions (e.g.
thermal expansion, vibration, etc.) or due to short circuit in any one of the
circuits, that may cause any damage or short circuit to any healthy bare
live parts in the MCC.

3. Allow maximum segregation between high current carrying cables and

instrumentation cables or provide earthed metallic partitions.

D. Cable Terminations

1. Do not rest insulated conductors against bare live parts or sharp edges.

2. Connect one conductor to a terminal only. The connection of two or more

conductors to one terminal will not be accepted.

3. Shroud all LV terminals and any other terminals which may remain live
with the mains isolated by heat shrinkable insulation. Label adequately with
cautionary signs.

E Control and Internal Wiring

1. Neatly bunch all wiring by nylon type cable ties and install in PVC trunkings
or flexible PVC tubing. Use colour coded cable for identification.

2. Enclose wiring across door hinges by a flexible PVC tubing and loop wiring
to permit the opening of doors and removal of components for inspection
without disconnecting and over-flexing of the cables.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/33 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. Provide removable links/fuses for all control circuits to facilitate isolation,

checking and maintenance.

F Wiring Terminations

1. Terminate cables having the same number at adjacent terminals and

interconnect by means of cable jumpers at the terminal block.

2. Shield and label terminals which may remain live when the equipment is
isolated from the mains supply adequately from accidental contact.

3. Provide white ferrules on each terminal for circuit identification, numbered

according to the wiring diagrams.

G. Fuses and Links

1. Provide fuses and links to enable any circuit to be isolated as necessary

for maintenance and test purposes without isolating the whole of the
control circuit.

2. Mount fuses and links in a readily accessible position within the MCC.
Group fuses and links which are functionally associated with the same
circuit.

3. Provide at least 10% and not less than 2 spare fuses and links for each
rating of fuses and links provided for the MCC. Fit spare fuses and links
in clips within a dedicated compartment of the MCC.

H. Terminal Blocks

1. House terminal blocks for interfacing with other trades in dedicated and
segregated compartments at either or both ends of the MCC.

2. Group terminal blocks according to the function and voltage of the control
circuit. Segregate each group from the other group.

3. Connect no more than two wires to one terminal.

4. Provide at least 10% and not less than 2 spare terminals for each terminal
block provided.

I. Earthing

Provide circuit protective conductor to all doors, cover plates, etc., to ensure
earth continuity. Size the circuit protective conductor according to the maximum
cross-section of supply lead to the equipment attached to the doors, cover plates,
etc., and in any case not less than 2.5 sq.mm.

J Nameplate and Label

1. Provide labels for every panel to describe the duty of every instrument,
relays and items of control equipment mounted externally and internally.
The designation on these labels shall be clear and concise, and shall,
where applicable, incorporate the device number.

2. Provide labels to all fuses and links to identify the current rating.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/34 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. Provide warning labels on the rear panels with white lettering on a red
background in both English and Chinese characters denoting "DANGER -
380V". Provide similar warning labels for all live parts, including test
terminal blocks.

4 Provide warning labels at the front and in the cabling compartment for
each automatic/remote closing or changeover switch denoting "BEWARE -
AUTOMATIC CLOSING".

5. Provide warning labels for the terminals of the d.c. supply control circuit
which may remain live when the main equipment is isolated from the
mains supply to reduce the risk of accidental contact.

6. Provide in a conspicuous position a nameplate to the MCC. The

nameplate shall be metallic and engraved or stamped with the
manufacturer's name, serial number and date of manufacture.

K. Finishes

Make good any damage to the finished coating of the MCC and hand paint to its
original finish color on completion of the installation.

L. Wiring Diagrams

Provide in every compartment of the MCC with a wiring diagram as if viewed

from the point of access to the enclosure. The wiring diagram shall be suitably
treated to prevent deterioration from dirt and age, and shall be securely fastened
to the inside of the access door of that compartment.

M. Operating Handle

Provide all operating handles, jigs, etc. required for the normal charging, closing,
opening, racking in and out operations of all circuit breakers of the MCC and shall
be properly fixed in a neat manner on a board with brass hooks inside the main
switch room.

N. Rubber Mat

Provide two rubber mats of ribbed surface, complying to BS921, laid in front of
and at the rear of the MCC. The rubber mats shall be continuous sheets of
minimum thickness of 10mm, each of same length as the MCC and minimum
width of not less than 1000mm or the width of the space between the front or
back of the MCC to the adjacent wall.

O. Emergency Stop Pushbuttons

One EPB shall be provided and positioned in the immediate vicinity of every
motor. In general, the EPB shall be provided within 1m of the associated motor,
and at about 1m above the finished floor level. The exact locations shall be
submitted for approval.

3.02 Discrimination

A. Ensure full discrimination within and between the MCC ACBs and other
switchgear so that short circuits or overloads on sub-circuits will not trip the MCC
circuit breakers but will effectively isolate the faulty circuit, leaving the healthy
circuits unaffected.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/35 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. Where earth fault detection is provided, discrimination shall be ensured as for

overloads above. Sufficient adjustment shall be provided so that spurious
tripping due to the inherent earth leakage of long cable runs and other equipment
will not occur without comprising the requirements of full discrimination.

C. Where circuit protection devices are not provided with earth leakage detection,
arrange to trip on earth leakage by means of the overcurrent protection by
ensuring a low earth loop impedance in accordance with the Code of Practice for
the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations and BS7671.

3.03 Provisions for Power Company's kWH Meters and Current Transformers

A. Where shown on the Drawings, make provision for accommodation of the Power
Company's kWh and kW meters and CTs within the MCC. Liaise with the Power
Company on the requirements and interfacing details. The metering
compartment shall be complete with a hinged glazed door for meter viewing and
suitable support for mounting the meter to the Power Company's requirements.

B. The accommodation for the Supply Company's metering equipment shall include
a suitable insulating panel for mounting the meters and suitable fuses to protect
the voltage coil circuits to each meter. The "mains" side of the fuseholders shall
be wired to the incoming supply mains. Fuses shall be of the H.R.C. type rated
at 5A, with provision for sealing to prevent unauthorised removal.

C. The MCC shall also be provided with suitable provisions of CT Chambers for
mounting the Supply Company's current transformers (CTs) in accessible
positions.

3.04 Interfacing with Automatic Temperature Control System (ATC)

A. The ATC, provided by this Sub-Contractor, will monitor and control the conditions
of the switchgear, motor starters and battery/charger system as specified
elsewhere in the Specification. All status and control wirings to be linked to the
ATC shall be brought to a marshalling cubicle from which the information will be
picked up by the field equipment of the ATC. All status and control interface
shall be provided in the form of dry contacts, and in pairs of N.O. and N.C.
contacts.

B. Provide transducers for transmission of analogue measurements such as current,

voltage and power. The output of the transducers shall be compatible with the
signalling system of the ATC and shall be of the 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V or 4 to 20mA
type for the current and voltage transducers and pulsed output for the power
transducer.

C. Provide control wirings in conduits and trunkings to the nearest data gathering
panels for interfacing with the ATC.

3.05 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)

A. General

1. Carry out the following minimum tests to provide assurance that the
equipment/plant/material being supplied will meet the performance
requirements of this Specification. Where applicable, all tests shall be
carried out in a manner as set down in relevant BS. The list provided is
an indicative minimum of the tests required.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/36 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Develop and submit full test schedules, procedures, circuit diagrams for
approval in accordance with the requirements of the other sections of the
Specification. Use standard testing forms attached to the Specification as
appropriate, otherwise, develop and submit testing forms for approval.

B. Visual Checks

1. Carry out visual inspection of the general construction of the MCC, the
busbar system, switchgear, instrumentation, cabling provisions, etc. to
determine if the MCC is ready for further testing and subsequent delivery
to site.

C. Verification of Measuring Instrument Accuracy

1. With the secondary injection test set connected to the ammeter terminals,
inject currents ranging from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%.
Compare the meter readings with the calibrated ammeter readings.

2. With a 3-phase variac connected to the voltmeter terminals, vary the

voltage from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%. Compare the
meter readings with the calibrated voltmeter readings.

3. Follow manufacturer's instructions for the calibration of voltage, current

and power transducers.

4. With a 3-phase variac connected to the under-voltage relay circuit, vary

the supply voltage gradually to record the drop-off and pick-up voltages of
the relay.

D. Dielectric Test & Insulation Test

1. With all switching devices in open positions, carry out 1000V meggar test
for phase to phase, phase to neutral, and phase to earth and neutral to
earth to measure the insulation resistance.

2. Repeat the above test with all switching devices in closed position.

3. Apply 2kV AC between all live parts and the exposed conductive parts (ie
between L1+L2+L3+N and E) for 60 seconds and measure the leakage
current.

4. Repeat the above test between each pole and all the other poles
connected to the exposed conductive parts (ie between L1 and
L2+L3+N+E, L2 and L1+L3+N+E, L3 and L1+L2+N+E, N and
L1+L2+L3+E).

5. The test voltage at the moment of application shall not exceed 1000V and
shall then be increased steadily within a few seconds to 2000V and
maintained for 60 seconds.

6. Prior to the HV test, disconnect all electrical equipment which are designed
for a lower test voltage, and current-consuming apparatus such as
measuring instruments in which the application of the test voltage would
cause the flow of a current.

7. Repeat the meggar test with all switching devices in closed position after
the HV test.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/37 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. Primary Injection Test

1. Record the following information for every circuit being tested:-

a. Circuit number.

b. Make, type, serial number, CT ratio, class, burden of every PCT and
MCT.

2. Inject primary current at the rated value to individual phase and neutral
conductors and measure the secondary current of the associated CT to be
tested.

3. Repeat the above measurement with primary current set at 50% of the
rated value.

F. Secondary Injection Test

1. Record the following information for every circuit being tested:-

a. Circuit number.

b. Make, type, serial number, rated current, trip coil voltage of every
O/C and E/F relay.

c. Nominal full load current and CT ratio of the associated PCT.

2. Inject secondary current in increasing amount to the relay and measure the
minimum current that the relay starts to pick up, and the minimum
operating current that the relay operates.

3. After the relay contacts are made, reduce the injected current slowly and
measure the minimum reset current when the relay resets to its normal
position.

4. With the O/L relay PSM at 100% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current
at 2 times the rated value and measure the operating time. Repeat the
test at 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current.

5. Repeat the above test at any other relay settings as directed during the
test.

6. With the E/F relay PSM at 20% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current
at 2 times, 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current and measure
the operating time. Repeat the test at any other relay settings as directed
during the test.

7. Compare the measured operating times and the theoretical nominal

operating times read from the manufacturer's published relay characteristic
curves.

Record the relay settings being left at the end of the test.

G. Polarity Check

1. Carry out polarity check to verify all CTs are correctly connected.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/38 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

H. Battery Test

1. Under fully charged condition, open the input switchgear to the battery
charger. Record the battery voltage against time and operate the ACBs
and controlgear to verify that the battery provided is adequate for its
intended duty.

2. After the battery discharge test, resume the power supply to the battery
charger. Record the charging voltage and charging current against time
to verify that the battery charger and battery provided is adequate for its
intended duty.

I. Functional Tests

1. Carry out functional tests to check that all control circuits are correctly
wired, and that all control schemes specified are fully incorporated.

2. Carry out mechanical operation tests of switchgears to verify that all

switching mechanisms are functional, and all drawout type switchgears are
correctly aligned.

J. EMC Tests

1. If required, carry out EMC tests for the whole assembly in accordance with
IEC61000-4 standards as appropriate if EMC certification for the EMI
susceptible equipment are not available.

3.06 Site Acceptance Tests (SAT)

A. General

1. Perform tests to verify that the complete installation will meet the
requirements of this Specification. Develop full test schedules for the
approval in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.

B. Visual Checks

1. Carry out visual inspection of the general construction of the MCC, the
busbar system, switchgear, instrumentation, cabling provisions, etc. to
determine if the MCC is ready for further testing and subsequent delivery
to site.

C. Verification of Measuring Instrument Accuracy

1. With the secondary injection test set connected to the ammeter terminals,
inject currents ranging from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%.
Compare the meter readings with the calibrated ammeter readings.

2. With a 3-phase variac connected to the voltmeter terminals, vary the

voltage from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%. Compare the
meter readings with the calibrated voltmeter readings.

3. Follow manufacturer's instructions for the calibration of voltage, current

and power transducers.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/39 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

4. With a 3-phase variac connected to the under-voltage relay circuit, vary

the supply voltage gradually to record the drop-off and pick-up voltages of
the relay.

D. Dielectric Test & Insulation Test

1. With all switching devices in open positions, carry out 1000V meggar test
for phase to phase, phase to neutral, and phase to earth and neutral to
earth to measure the insulation resistance.

2. Repeat the above test with all switching devices in closed position.

3. Apply 2kV AC between all live parts and the exposed conductive parts (ie
between L1+L2+L3+N and E) for 60 seconds and measure the leakage
current.

4. Repeat the above test between each pole and all the other poles
connected to the exposed conductive parts (ie between L1 and
L2+L3+N+E, L2 and L1+L3+N+E, L3 and L1+L2+N+E, N and
L1+L2+L3+E).

5. The test voltage at the moment of application shall not exceed 1000V and
shall then be increased steadily within a few seconds to 2000V and
maintained for 60 seconds.

6. Prior to the HV test, disconnect all electrical equipment which are designed
for a lower test voltage, and current-consuming apparatus such as
measuring instruments in which the application of the test voltage would
cause the flow of a current.

7. Repeat the meggar test with all switching devices in closed position after
the HV test.

F. Secondary Injection Test

1. Record the following information for every circuit being tested:-

a. Circuit number.

b. Make, type, serial number, rated current, trip coil voltage of every
O/C and E/F relay.

c. Nominal full load current and CT ratio of the associated PCT.

2. Inject secondary current in increasing amount to the relay and measure the
minimum current that the relay starts to pick up, and the minimum
operating current that the relay operates.

3. After the relay contacts are made, reduce the injected current slowly and
measure the minimum reset current when the relay resets to its normal
position.

4. With the O/L relay PSM at 100% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current
at 2 times the rated value and measure the operating time. Repeat the
test at 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/40 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5. Repeat the above test at any other relay settings as directed during the
test.

6. With the E/F relay PSM at 20% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current
at 2 times, 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current and measure
the operating time. Repeat the test at any other relay settings as directed
during the test.

7. Compare the measured operating times and the theoretical nominal

operating times read from the manufacturer's published relay characteristic
curves.

8. Record the relay settings being left at the end of the test.

G. Polarity Check

Carry out polarity check to verify all CTs are correctly connected.

H. Functional Tests

1. Carry out functional tests to check that all control circuits are correctly
wired, and that all control schemes specified are fully incorporated.

2. Carry out mechanical operation tests of switchgears to verify that all

switching mechanisms are functional, and all drawout type switchgears are
correctly aligned.

I. Contact Resistance Test

1. Carry out contact resistance test by means of “Ductor” tester or similar

instrument to verify that contacts and joints for switchgear, cables, busbars
as well as the contact and joint for outgoing cables and busbars are in
good condition.

3.07 Routine Test and Inspection During Maintenance Period

A. The following test shall be carry out for every six months during Maintenance
Period and for each time a test report shall be submitted for record.

1. Insulation Test

2. Contact Resistance Test

3. Functional Test

B. At the end of the Maintenance Period, an Inspection and Test Report shall be
submitted within two weeks before the completion of the Maintenance Period.
Such Inspection and Test Report shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Insulation Test

2. Contact Resistance Test

3. Functional Test

4. The “MCC” is operated in good condition.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/41 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5. The work carried out and any adjustments made during Maintenance
Period.

6. Any recommendation on the necessary improvement or rectification on the

“MCC”.

C. The test and inspection shall be carried out with the prior approval if such would
require shut-down of the “MCC”. Where dictates, the work shall be carried out at
any time outside normal hours as required.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.27(AC)/42 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.28 LOCAL MOTOR CONTROL PANELS (LMCPS)

1 GENERAL

1.1 General Requirements

A. The electrical schematic diagrams for the equipment to be installed as shown on

the Drawings are for guidance only. All of the electrical equipment provided,
including switchgear, motor starters, interconnecting power cables, and busbars,
shall be compatible in every respect with the electrical characteristics of the
motors provided, and shall be designed to suit the starting, normal and abnormal
operating conditions of the motor, and under fault conditions. Any extra cost
due to the modification of the LMCPs and the interconnecting power cables
necessary to meet the scheduled duties, and the requirements of the Wiring
Regulations and the power company will not be entertained.

B. The LMCPs shall be of the self-contained wall mounted or floor standing

extensible multi-cubicle type, built up from compartments housing the circuit
breakers, fused switchgear, relays, busbars, controls etc. as shown on the
schematic wiring diagrams contained in the Drawings and as specified
hereinafter. The LMCPs shall be suitable for the service conditions specified in
this Specification.

C. The location of the LMCPs shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

1.2 Particular Requirements on Quality Assurance

A. The LMCPs shall be tested assemblies as defined in BSEN61439-1,

manufactured, factory assembled and tested by a specialist switchboard
manufacturer.

B. The equipment within the LMCPs, including switchgear, controlgear and busbar
assemblies shall be certified for the category of duty specified. Relevant
technical information and literature in English and copies of type-test certificates,
drawings and test reports shall be made available for examination during factory
tests to verify that the above requirement has been met.

C. Schedule of Standards

The whole of the LMCPs shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
the latest revision of the following standards.

BS88, EN60269,IEC60269 - Cartridge fuses

BS89, EN60051,IEC6051 - Electrical indicating instruments

BS142, IEC60255 - Electrical protective relays

BSEN13601 - Copper for electrical purpose

BSEN60085, IEC60085 - Classification of insulating materials

BSEN60898-1, IEC60898 - Miniature air-break circuit breakers

IEC62052-11 - Electricity meters

IEC60255 - Electrical relays

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

BS6004, IEC60227 - PVC insulated cables, non-armoured, for

power and lighting

BS6231 - PVC insulated cables for switchgear and

control gear wiring

EN60622, IEC60622 - Sealed nickel-cadmium prismatic

rechargeable single cells

BS7430 - Code of practic for earthing

BS7671, IEC60364 - Wiring regulations for electrical installations

for buildings

IEC61869-2 - Current transformers

BSEN55014 - EMC Requirements for Household Tools and

Similar Apparatus

BSEN61439, IEC61439-2 - Design verified assemblies

BSEN60947, IEC60947 - Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear

EMSD (Hong Kong) - Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring)

Regulations

1.3 Submittals

As a minimum, submit the following for approval at the appropriate stages of the Works:

A. Details of equipment and components and manufacturer's data, including time-

current curves for each type and rating of circuit breaker and fuse proposed,
magnetising curves of CTs proposed etc.

B. Detailed LMCP construction drawings to show the busbar arrangement, panel

layout etc.

C. Electrical control wiring diagrams showing details of all wirings internal and
external to the LMCP, together with terminal numbers for cable terminations.

D. Setting levels of all adjustable tripping devices.

E. Calculation on battery sizing if required.

F. Equipment weight.

G. Builder's work requirements.

H. Maximum heat dissipation from the LMCPs.

I. Schedule of labels, inscriptions and colours.

J. Surface treatment of the LMCPs.

K. Locations of the EPBs.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

L. Proposal on the testing procedures and report format for testing of the LMCPs at
the manufacturer's works and on site.

M. EMC certificates, declarations of conformity and EMC type test reports for relays,
meters and electronic components if required.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 General

A. As far as practicable, the use of electrically dissimilar metals in contact shall be

avoided. If this is not possible, the contact surfaces of one or both of the metals
shall be electroplated or the two metals shall be insulated from each other.

B. All similar items of the LMCPs and their component parts shall be completely
interchangeable.

C. All parts which are subject to wear or damage by dust shall be totally enclosed in
dust-proof housings.

D. Adhesives shall not be used in the LMCPs unless otherwise specified.

E. All bolts, studs, nuts and washers shall be high tensile stainless steel and
cadmium plated. When tolerance limitations preclude plating, corrosion-
resistant steel shall be used.

F. Washers shall be provided under all nuts and bolt heads. Bolts and studs shall
protrude by at least one thread pitch but not more than five thread pitches beyond
the outside face of nuts.

G. The LMCPs shall be designed to conform to the best engineering practice.

Arrange all instruments, relays, switchgear, indicating lamps, control switches,
push button and the like in a neat, functional and logical manner.

H. The LMCPs shall be designed for simplicity of operation and maintenance to give
reliable service and minimum maintenance.

2.2 Construction

A. The LMCPs shall be self supporting, with modular top, side and back panels and
doors of not less than 1.5mm thick electro-galvanized sheet steel built up on
substantial framing to provide a rigid construction and clear accessibility to all
internal components within the LMCPs.

B. The degree of protection of enclosures shall be to IP31 for indoor use and IP54
for outdoor use to EN60529 and IEC60529.

C. The complete LMCP shall comply with Form 3b segregation.

D. Gasket all detachable panels and swing panels.

E. The LMCPs shall be of uniform height, and uniform depth front-to-back,

throughout its length and shall present a neat and tidy appearance. Arrange all
control and indication components mounted on or within the LMCPs between
500mm and 1800mm above the finished floor level.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. All doors shall have concealed hinges and shall be interlocked with the switch
mechanism. Provide all doors with dust-excluding gasket of neoprene or other
equivalent and approved material.

G. Provide non-magnetic removable gland plates of not less than 2.0mm thick at the
top and bottom of the LMCPs with suitable cut-outs for cables terminations.

H. Adequate arrangement for air circulation shall be made within each compartment
of the LMCPs and equipment shall be adequately sized to ensure that the internal
temperature of the LMCPs will be well within the operating ranges of all electrical
and electronic components including switchgear, controlgear, busbars, relays,
and timers inside the LMCPs. Provide ventilating louvres where required.

I. All insulators shall be non-hygroscopic and non-deteriorating.

J. Provide a base frame for the floor standing type LMCP. The base frame shall be
made up of steel channel with a minimum height of 100mm of substantial strength
at the bottom of the LMCP.

K. Provided earthed metallic internal compartments for housing senstive metering

equipment and protective relays.

2.3 Finishes

A. All steelwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, oil, grease, dirt, scale, rust
and other contaminants by shot or grit blasting, and shall be epoxy powder
coated immediately at the manufacturer's works. The epoxy powder coating
shall be not less than 50 microns thick.

B. The final colours for the equipment shall be the manufacturer's standard colours,
unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this Specification.

2.4 Busbars

A. Busbars shall be made of hard drawn, electro-tinned high conductivity, bare

rectangular solid copper bars. Full size phase and neutral bars shall be
provided.

B. Brace and support all busbars rigidly. The complete assembly shall be capable of
withstanding the maximum mechanical stresses to which it may be subjected
under fault conditions.

C. Busbars, busbar connections and bare conductors forming part of the equipment
of the LMCPs shall comply as regards current-carrying capacity and limits of
temperature rise with the requirements of EN61439-1 and IEC61439-1.

D. Whenever a vertical section of the LMCP contains more than one outgoing
circuit, provide busbar risers or droppers to which the outgoing circuits are
connected. Busbar risers and droppers shall be as short and as straight as
possible and shall be so arranged that all conductors of the outgoing circuits can
be brought onto the bars without undue bending.

E. All conductors between the main busbars, busbar risers and droppers and the
outgoing switchgear shall be of high conductivity copper bars as specified, having
a current rating of not less than that of the outgoing switchgear to which they are
connected. Label all busbars with colour code for phase identification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

F. Jointing of busbars shall be by mechanical means, silver plated or tin-plated at

joints. Provide washers and locknuts to all bolts. The length of overlap at
joints shall not be less than the width of busbars to be jointed.

G. Identify the nominal rating of the busbars, busbar risers and droppers by self-
adhesive colour labels.

H. Insulators for busbar supports shall be non-hygroscopic and non-tracking

moulding.

I. Segregate busbar as specified.

J. The busbar system shall have an insulation voltage of 660V d.c..

2.5 LMCP Main Isolating Switch

A. Every LMCP shall be provided with an main isolating switch as a means of

complete isolation of the LMCP. The main isolating switch shall comply with the
requirements on fused switchgear as specified above except that the fuse links
shall be replaced by copper busbars of approved rating.

B. Notwithstanding the above, each LMCP isolating switch shall be equipped with,
but not be limited to, the following:

1. Phase indicating lamps.

2. One voltmeter complete with selector switch for line and phase voltage
reading (For main isolating switch rating 200A and above).

3. One ammeter complete with selector switch and CTs to measure all line
currents (For main isolating switch rating 200A and above).

2.6 Fused Switchgear

A. All fused switchgear shall comply with BSEN60947-3 or IEC60947-3 and shall be
rated for uninterrupted duty, utilization category AC-23A, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings and shall have rated fuse short-circuit current of 30kA
minimum. All live parts shall be fully screened from the front.

B. Fused switchgear shall have mechanical interlocks between the panel door and
the switch operating mechanism and shall be so arranged that the panel door
cannot be opened with the switch in the ON position. Similarly, it shall not be
possible to close the switch with the cubicle door open, except that provision shall
be made within the cubicle for an authorized person to defeat the mechanical
interlock and close the switch with the door in the open position for test purposes.

C. All switchgear shall be flush mounting and be fitted with mechanical ON/OFF
indicators with operating handles of the semi-flush or telescopic pattern, and with
suitable means for padlocking in either the ON or OFF position.

D. Fused switchgear shall be provided with adequate accelerating springs and

toggle action to ensure positive quick-make and quick-break action independent
of the speed of operation of the handle and shall be capable of closing onto and
remaining closed on a fault, and able to operate even if the mechanism spring is
broken. All contacts shall be silver plated for service reliability.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. Fused switchgear shall be triple pole with bolted neutral link, triple pole with
switched neutral, double pole or single pole with bolted neutral link, as specified.
The neutral link shall be accessible and detachable from the front of the fused
switchgear panel.

F. Fuses shall be of HRC type to BS88:Part 2, Class Q1 fusing factor.

2.7 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)

A. MCCBs shall comply with and be fully type-tested to BSEN60947-2 or IEC947-2,

and shall meet the following requirements:

Number of poles : 4 or 3 as specified on the Drawings

Rated insulation voltage: 660V a.c.

Rated frequency: 50Hz

Rated uninterrupted current (derated to suit site conditions): as shown on

Drawings

Rated working temperature: 40 deg.C.

Rated short-circuit making capacity: 63kA at 0.25 power factor

Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu): 30kA.

Utilization category: A

Rated short-time withstand current (Icw): 30kA

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics): 100% of Icu

All MCCBs shall be certified by a recognized national testing authority to show

compliance with the short circuit duty as specified above.

B. MCCBs shall have all mechanical and live metallic components completely
enclosed within an all insulating moulded case.

C. The operating mechanism shall be independent of operating speed and the

overcentre toggle action shall provide a quick-made and quick-break switching.
Handles shall be trip free. Contacts shall be non-welding.

D. MCCBs shall have over-current tripping mechanism of the thermal magnetic,

temperature compensated type to give time delay overload circuit protection and
instantaneous short-circuit interruption. The operating characteristic shall be
such that the time delay on overload tripping is inversely proportional to the
overcurrent up to a threshold value of approximately seven times the rated
current at 40 deg.C.

E. Provide handle lock attachments complete with padlock and two keys, capable of
locking the MCCB either in the open or closed position.

F. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and/or specified in other section of

this Specification, provide MCCB with an integral electronic type trip unit for
providing over-current and earth fault protection.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Earth fault protection shall have an adjustable earth fault tripping range between
0.2 to 1 of rated current of the MCCB and an adjustable tripping time of 60ms to
350ms. The trip unit shall be equipped with LED lamp and lamp test button to
indicate MCCB tripping status on over-current and earth fault.

2.8 Motorized MCCB Units

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide motorized MCCB for control purpose
or tripping the MCCB during an earth fault or under-voltage condition.
Operations of the MCCB shall be by individual momentarily energized solenoid
mounted on the breaker. The closing solenoid shall operate on the mains supply
while the tripping solenoid shall operate on the d.c. supply as specified hereafter.

B. Where indicated on the Drawings and/or specified other section of this

Specification, provide MCCB with integral electronic type trip unit for providing
over-current and earth fault protection. Earth fault protection shall have an
adjustable earth fault tripping range between 0.2 to 1 of the rated current of the
MCCB and an adjustable tripping time of 60ms to 350ms. The tripping unit shall
be equipped with LED lamps and lamp test button to indicate MCCB tripped
status on overcurrent and earth fault.

C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and/or specified in other section oif
this Specification, provide an under-voltage trip relay capable of holding the
circuit closed for a period of 0 to 5 seconds adjustable at the commencement of
complete mains failure. The under-voltage relay shall of the self-resetting type.
Incorporate a time delay circuit to close the MCCB automatically within a period
of 0 to 30 seconds adjustable at the commencement of mains restoration.

D. Notwithstanding the above, each motorized MCCB units shall be equipped with,
but not be limited to, the following:

1. MCCB OPEN/CLOSED/TRIPPED-ON-FAULT indicating lamps.

2. MCCB OPEN/CLOSE push buttons.

3. Control circuits, with anti-pumping relays, to ensure positive operation of

the MCCB, requiring automatic closing.

4. Auxiliary contacts for local status indications, controls and 20% spares.

5. Lamp test push button.

6. Auxiliary contacts for remote status indications, controls and 20% spares.

7. REMOTE/LOCAL-MANUAL MCCB control selector switch, whenever

remote control is specified.

2.9 Automatic Transfer Switches

A. Where indicated on the Drawings as paired MCCBs, each breaker shall be

equipped with, but not be limited to, the following:

1. MCCB as specified, but with motorized mechanism for ON/OFF operation.

Operations of the breaker shall be individual momentarily energized
solenoid mounted on the breaker. The closing and tripping solenoid shall
operate on the AC supply as specified hereafter.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2. Electrically and mechanically interlocking to facilitate automatic/manual

changeover from the normal source to the standby source.

3. Automatic/manual changeover selector switch.

4. Interlocking facility to ensure that normal breaker tripped on fault will not
cause the standby breaker to close or vice versa, unless the breakers are
reset manually. Provide padlock facilities for both breakers to prevent
accidential re-closure during maintenance.

5. The changeover system between the normal and standby sources shall be
as follows:

(i) A 3-phase undervoltage relay with time delay facility shall be

provided in the MCC to monitor the voltage condition of the normal
source. Upon failure of one or more phases of mains supply or a
reduction of voltage to a value of 90% to 70% (adjustable) of the
nominal value, the normal breaker shall be tripped by the
undervoltage relays.

(ii) Another set of undervoltage relay as specified above shall also be

provided to monitor the voltage condition of the standby source.
Once the voltage from the generator supply reaches 90% of the
nominal value, the standby breaker shall close automatically.

(iii) Upon restoration of the normal power supply, which has been
determined stable after a time delay, the standby breaker shall open
and the normal breaker shall close, transferring the loads to the
normal supply. It shall also be able to switch the load back to the
normal supply under manual control.

6. Incorporate in the control circuit a test switch to simulate mains power

failure and initiate the changeover sequence to allow on-load testing.

2.10 Motor Starters

A. Every motor starter shall be designed to perform the following functions

efficiently and safely:

1. To start the motor without damage to the drive or driven equipment whilst
regulating the starting current to the satisfaction of the power supply
company and ensuring that at all stages of starting, the motor will develop
sufficient torque to accelerate the load.

2. To stop the motor.

3. To prevent damage to the motor due to overload, disconnection of one

phase etc.

4. To prevent damage to reduced voltage started motors and danger to

personnel due to resumption of the electricity supply following a failure.

5. To limit the damage to the motor due to stalling or internal electrical or

mechanical faults by quickly disconnecting the supply.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

6. To prevent damage to the motor or the starter itself due to improper

unskilled or hesitant operation or failure to complete a starting sequence
once it is connected.

7. To enable the motor and starter to be completely isolated from the main
supply and from all control supplies for inspection and repairs by means of
a single switch.

B. Each motor starter assembly shall comprise switchgear, contactors, protection

relays and accessories as specified hereinafter. The whole unit shall be
enclosed in the cubicle from which no access can be gained to adjoining cubicles.
The contactors, in conjunction with its immediate upstream switchgear, shall pass
the Type 2 co-ordination under short circuit conditions as specified in Clause
7.2.5 of BSEN60947-4-1 or IEC60947-4-1.

C. All starters shall be in accordance with section 7.2 of BSEN60947-4-1 or

IEC60947-4-1, and shall be adequately rated for the conditions in which it shall
operate.

D. All contactors shall be electro-magnetic type and shall comply with BSEN60947-
4-1 or IEC60947-4-1, utilization category AC-3 of intermittent duty class 30.

E. All starters shall be of electrically held on pattern and shall not release until the
voltage falls below 75% of nominal.

F. Control circuits shall be operated on mains supply derived from the LMCPs,
suitably protected by fuse to BS88: Part 2 and Part 6.

2.11 Direct-on-line (DOL) Starters

A. Motors rated below 11kW shall be direct-on-line started provided that the
maximum starting current does not exceed six times the rated motor full load
current, otherwise star-delta starters shall be provided.

B. The starters shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Fused switchgear or MCCB as specified.

2. Triple pole air break contactor.

3. One triple pole motor protection unit incorporating three phase over-current
and single-phasing protection. The over-current protection unit shall be of
thermal type, with a minimum setting of 110% of full load current. No
external re-set shall be provided.

4. No-volt release device of automatic resetting type.

5. Local/off/remote control selector switch lockable in each position.

6. Set of start and stop push button.

7. Set of indicating lamps for motor running, off and tripped on fault.

8. Set of dry contacts wired to terminals for remote indication of motor

running, off, tripped on fault and summary alarm to the various central
control panels at the location shown on the Drawings.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

9. One set of terminals wired to provide for connection to the following:

(i) Emergency stop pushbutton, effective in all positions of the

local/remote switch, if any.

(ii) Remote start/stop of the motor, effective only in the remote position
of the selector switch.

10. Hour run meter.

11. Lamp test button.

12. Any other items required to effect satisfactory motor starting and control as
specified elsewhere in the Specification.

2.12 Star-delta Starters

A. Motors rated at and above 11kW and 55kW, inclusive, shall be star-delta started
to limit the maximum starting current within 2.5 times the rated motor full load
current.

B. Star-delta starters shall be equipped as per DOL starters specified above, with
the following additional provisions:

1. Electrically and mechanically interlocked triple pole air break contactors

arranged for automatic open transition star-delta motor starting, with an
adjustable automatic timing device for switching over from star to delta
connection.

2. One ammeter to read red phase current with matching CTs.

3. One triple pole motor protection unit incorporating three phase over-
current, single-phasing and earth leakage protection. The over-current
protection unit shall be of thermal type, with a minimum setting of 110% of
full load current. The earth leakage protection unit shall be selected to
isolate the motor circuit with a maximum fault disconnection time of 5
seconds in case of earth leakage without causing nuisance tripping of the
motor circuit due to motor starting and transient current saturation.

2.13 Reduced Voltage (RV) Starters

A. Motors rated above 55kW shall be reduced voltage started to limit the maximum
starting current within 2.5 times the rated motor full load current.

B. Reduced voltage starters referred herein shall be auto-transformer starters and

shall be equipped as per star-delta starters specified above, with the following
additional provisions:

1. Electrically and mechanically interlocked triple pole air break contactors and
reactor arranged for closed transition reduced voltage motor starting, with
an adjustable automatic timing device for switching over from reduced
voltage to full voltage connection. The reactor shall be provided with three
tappings at 110%, 100% and 90% of the recommended designed setting for
adjustment on site.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/10 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2. Air-cooled copper winding auto-transformer with insulation Class F and

suitraable tappings for the closed transition reduced voltage mortor
starting. The auto-transformer have with three tappings at 50%, 65% and
80% for adjustment on site and shall be suitable for 6 starts per hour.

2.14 Soft Starters

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, soft starters shall be provided to limit the
maximum starting current as specified hereafter.

B. The starters shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Fused switchgear or MCCB as specified in the Drawings.

2. One set of solid state motor controller as specified below:

a) The solid state soft motor controller shall be a power electronic type
motor starting device. It shall control the voltage applied to the motor
smoothly by varying the conduction angle of the solid state A.C.
switches which can be triacs, reverse parallel connected SCR-diode
circuit or reverse parallel connected SCR-SCR circuit etc. or using,
other similar technique.

b) The solid state motor controller shall be manufactured to conform to

the following relevant standards or other similar recognised
international standards:-

BS EN 60068-2 (IEC 68-2-6) For vibration resistance,

BS EN 60068-2-27 (IEC 68-2- For shock resistance,

27)

BS 6667 Part 3 (IEC 801-3) For radio-electrical interference

immunity

BS EN 50081 For electromagnetic compatibility.

c) The solid state motor controller shall be manufactured by a reputable

manufacturer which has continuously manufactured softstarters for at
least 5 years and the manufacturer shall have a local agent to provide full
technical support, including adequate spares holding and technical
expertise in testing, commissioning and trouble-shooting. Training shall
be provided by the manufacturer’s representatives on operational and
maintenance aspects including essential trouble-shooting techniques.

d) Full technical details of the solid state motor controller provided by the
manufacturer shall be submitted and shall cover at least the following:-

1) technical guide on its applications.

2) schematic and wiring drawings, and down to circuit board level

where possible.

3) shop drawings and as-fitted drawings.

4) operation manuals with commissioning guide.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5) maintenance manuals with trouble-shooting guide.

6) parts list and recommended spare parts with price.

e) Degree of Protection of Enclosure

The solid state motor controller shall be protected to at least IP20 for
operation without derating under ambient temperature of up to 40 deg. C
and relative humidity of up to 95%.

f) Voltage and Power Rating

Unless otherwise specified, the rated operational voltage shall be 380

Volt ±6%, 3-phase, 50 Hz ±2%. The rated power and quantities of the
solid state motor controllers shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

g) Mode of Operation

The solid state motor controller shall provide the following modes of
operation and shall be transitionless without causing any current inrush
and torque surges during operation:-

1) Voltage ramp - The motor voltage shall begin initially at a preset

‘start voltage’ and increase to line voltage at a preset ‘ramp rate’.
The acceleration ramp time shall be adjustable up to 30 sec.

2) Current limitation - It shall be capable of limiting the maximum

starting current which shall be adjustable up to 5 times of rated
current.

3) Soft stop - A deceleration voltage ramp shall be applied to the motor

for applications which require an extended coast to rest. The
voltage ramp down time shall be adjustable up to 60 sec.

4) Kickstart - A current pulse shall be provided in softstarter to develop

additional torque at start for loads which may need a boost to get
started.

5) Apart from the above, other modes of operation such as energy

saving, voltage pedestal starting, full voltage starting, D.C. injection
braking etc. shall also be provided when specified.

h) Protection

The solid state motor controller shall have an integral protection to the
motor and softstarter and LED diagnostics to aid in set-up and
troubleshooting. The protection shall include, but not be limited to the
following:-

1) thermal overload protection of the motor and solid state motor

controller.

2) mains supply protection for phase failure and phase unbalance.

3) internal fault protection.

4) stalled motor protection.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/12 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

i) Auxiliary Contact

The solid state motor controller shall provide auxiliary contacts for end of
starting (by-pass) and fault condition. The output relay contact shall be
suitable for 220 V A.C. operation in category AC11 and D.C. operation in
category DC11.

j) Selection of solid state motor controller and Operating Precautions

1) The starting current-speed transition curve of the selected solid state

motor controller shall closely match with the starting torque-speed
characteristics of the motor and loading. The ratings of the solid
state motor controller shall be selected based on ‘hot start’ operation
i.e. the motor is re-started immediately after operating at the
maximum rating for a period of time.

2) The motor associated with the solid state motor controller shall be
capable of starting the driven load when is supplied at reduced
voltage and current. In case of severe duty, it shall check with the
motor manufacturer that its derating is compatible with the operating
cycle and the starting times.

3) The heat sink of the solid state motor controller shall be of good
quality aluminium construction and shall provide sufficient thermal
inertia to permit successful starting of the motor without exceeding
permitted junction temperature of the solid state AC switches.

4) The solid state motor controller shall be capable of continuously

delivering the rated output voltage (or reduced output voltage under
energy saving mode) with power factor of not less than 0.9 lagging
without external chokes or power factor correction capacitors at any
load. A by-pass contactor shall be provided and the order to close
and open the contactor shall be controlled by the built-in signal of
the solid state motor controller.

5) The solid state motor controller shall have the provisions to accept
DC input from an external device such as Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC) for controlling the start and stop of the unit.

6) Semiconductor fuses, one for each phase, shall be provided and

have the characteristics suitable to protect the solid state motor
controller.

7) The solid state A.C. switches shall have a blocking voltage of at

least 1400V with a rate of rise of reapplied voltage tolerance of at
least 1000V per microsecond. However, an isolation contactor or
isolator shall be available as an option to isolate the supply in the
‘Off’ state of the solid state motor controller for the safety of the
operator.

8) UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES should power factor correction

equipment be connected between the solid state motor controller
and the motor. If power factor correction equipment is employed, it
should be connected to the supply side of the solid state motor
controller.

k) The solid state motor controller shall be suitable for 20 starts per hour.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/13 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1. Triple pole air break contactor as by-pass contactor. The

contactor shall be parallel connected with solid state motor
controller.

2. One triple pole motor protection unit incorporating three phase

over-current, single-phasing and earth leakage protection. The
over-current protection unit shall be of thermal type, with a
minimum setting of 110% of full load current. The earth leakage
protection unit shall be selected to isolate the motor circuit with a
maximum fault disconnection time of 5 seconds in case of earth
leakage without causing nuisance tripping of the motor circuit due
to motor starting and transient current saturation.

3. One ammeter to read red phase current with matching CTs.

4. No-volt release device of automatic resetting type.

5. Local/off/remote control selector switch lockable in each position.

6. Start and stop push button.

7. Indicating lamps for motor running, off and tripped on fault.

8. Dry contacts wired to terminals for remote indication of motor

running, off, tripped on fault and summary alarm to the various
Central Control and Monitoring System (CCMS).

9. One set of terminals wired to provide for connection to the

following:

10. Emergency stop pushbutton, effective in all positions of the

local/remote switch, if any.

11. Hour run meter.

12. Lamp test button.

13. Any other items required to effect satisfactory motor starting and
control as specified elsewhere in the Specification.

2.15 Variable Speed Drive Starters

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, variable speed drive starter shall be provided
specified hereafter.

B. The starters shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Fused switchgear or MCCB as indicated on the Drawings.

2. One set of variable speed drive (VSD) as specified below :

a) The variable speed drive (hereinafter referred to as VSD) shall be a

solid-state converter to convert three phase mains supply of 380V±6%
and 50Hz ±1 Hz to an adjustable voltage and frequency output at its
rated throughput power.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/14 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

VSD shall conform to BSEN 50081 or other similar recognized

international standards on Electro-magnetic Compatibility (EMC)
compliance for industrial or commercial applications and shall be
manufactured to ISO 9001. Certificate of compliance shall be issued for
each standard rating of VSD used in the Contract after being fully tested
at the manufacturing facility.

b) The VSD shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer which has

continuously manufactured VSDs for at least 5 years and the
manufacturer shall have a local agent to provide full technical support
with adequate spares holding and technical expertise in testing,
commissioning and trouble-shooting. Training shall be provided by the
manufacturer's representatives on operational and maintenance aspects
including essential trouble-shooting techniques.

c) The VSD shall incorporate a 6-pulse full-wave uncontrolled diode bridge,

fixed voltage fed DC link with inductors and capacitors to form a filter, a
mains filter for EMC compliance, a pulse width modulation (PWM)
inverter bridge utilising insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTS) and
output inductors in the motor lines. The inverter bridge shall be
controlled by a microprocessor to produce a pulse width modulation
(PWM) waveform or similar technique which would result in full motor
voltage and sinusoidal current mains supply in the motor circuit. The
VSD shall be equipped with built-in RS 485/232 serial communication
ports.

d) The VSD shall be capable of continuously delivering rated output voltage

even when the mains supply voltage is down to 6% of its nominal value
and shall be able to control a standard BS 5000 3-phase squirrel cage
induction motor over a speed range of 20% to 100% continuously and
smoothly without de-rating the motor kW rating. The VSD shall provide
total power factor of not less than 0.9 lagging, without external chokes or
power factor correction capacitors, at all loads within the speed range.
The inrush current shall be zero and during starting, the current shall start
from zero and rises as the load accelerates with no danger of exceeding
full load current.

e) The VSD shall allow unlimited switching of the motor circuit, at any load
and within the controlled speed range without damage and without the
need of auxiliary control switching. The VSD shall be capable of
automatically reconnecting to a spinning fan and run without tripping,
following mains interruption and on transfer from backup source. The
VSD shall be capable of running with no motor connected during
functional testing. The VSD shall have voltage/frequency (V/f) ratio
suitable for centrifugal pumps and fans control. Selectable V/f ratios
shall be provided and it shall not be possible to set a constant V/f ratio, to
prevent damage to connected equipment and to optimise energy usage.

f) The complete VSD unit shall be housed in the LMCP with front-access
door. It shall be suitable for continuous operation without de-rating under
ambient temperature of up to 40oC and relative humidity of up to 95%
unless otherwise specified. The manufacturer shall arrange their
equipment to be fully tested including motor loading at their
manufacturing facility or by an approved testing authority to certify that
their equipment conforms to the aforesaid standard.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/15 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Certificate of compliance shall be issued for each standard rating of VSD

used in the Contract after being fully tested at the manufacturing facility
or by the testing authority.

g) The VSD shall be fully rated to provide the performance as follows:-

1) minimum efficiency of 95% at 100% load and not less than 90% at
any other operating loads;

2) output torque shall be limited to 105% of full load torque;

3) no faculty for reversing the motor rotation shall be incorporated;

4) the maximum allowable fifth harmonic current distortion expressed in

percent of the fundamental input current at the VSD input terminals
during operation within the variable speed range shall be less than
35%.

5) the electromagnetic compatibility shall be to BS EN 50081 or similar

international standards.

6) the harmonic distortion shall comply with the Supply Rules issued by
the power supply company.

h) The following minimum features shall be incorporated in the VSD unit

complete with an integral control panel:-

1) it shall accept digital and analogue 0-10 V, 4-20 mA control signals;

2) integral measurement and selectable display of:

output current
output voltage
output frequency
output speed
output power
motor temperature

3) display of warning/fault/alarm status;

4) data can be transmitted on the RS 485/232 output for remote

interrogating and reprogramming;

5) it shall have programmable relay output (250V 2A) and

programmable analogue output of 4-20mA or 0-10V DC suitable for
the application;

6) 5 programmable preset speeds (including at least 2 skip frequencies

of adjustable bandwidth to overcome mechanical or air system
resonance);

7) selectable local or remote control;

8) it shall have the following integral protection against: -

loss of mains and motor phase

motor short circuit

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/16 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

motor circuit earth fault

motor overheat
overvoltage
VSD overheat
under voltage
input transients
VSD and motor overload
mains input accidentally couples to motor output terminals

i) it shall have an integral full 3-term PID control to provide closed loop
control direct from a signal transmitter without need for external signal
conditioning;

j) it shall have a facility for controlling motor anti-condensation heater for

heater operation when the motor is idle.

3. One set of appropriate type starter for manually changeover operation in

case of VSD failure. The type of starter shall be direct-on-line or star-delta or
reduced voltage and shall be selected according to the motor rating.

4. No-volt release device of automatic resetting type.

5. Local/off/remote control selector switch lockable in each position.

6. Set of start and stop pushbutton.

7. Set of indicating lamps for motor running, off and tripped on fault.

8. Set of dry contacts wired to terminals for remote indication of motor running,
off, tripped on fault and summary alarm to the Central Control and Monitoring
System (CCMS).

9. One set of terminals wired to provide for connection to the following:

10. Emergency stop pushbutton, effective in all positions of the local/remote

switch, if any.

11. Hour run meter.

12. Lamp test button.

13. Any other items required to effect satisfactory motor starting and control as
specified elsewhere in the Specification.

2.16 Control and Auxiliary Relays

A. Provide control and auxiliary relays where necessary to ensure a sound and
effective operations of the MCCBs and contactors.

B. Relays shall be plug-in type, rack mounted, provided with cable connection sockets
and anchored by quick fastening vibration-proof devices.All contacts shall be double
breaking type. Relay coils shall be suitable for a.c. or d.c. operation as required.

C. All contacts shall be double breaking type. Relay coils shall be suitable for a.c. or
d.c. operation as required.

D. All control and auxiliary relays shall conform to the EMC immunity standard
EN50082-1 or EN50082-2 if required.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/17 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.17 Volt-free Contacts (Dry Contacts)

Provide volt-free contacts where required. They shall comprise a pair of contacts
operated directly by the equipment but electrically separated such that no electrical
potential derived from the equipment appears at the contacts. Use volt-free contacts to
complete external control, alarm or indication circuits. The volt-free contacts shall be
rated at 1A, 250V or better.

2.18 Current Transformers (CT)

A. All CTs shall be rated for Class B temperature rise.

B. CTs shall be of epoxy resin encapsulated type and shall be capable of providing
the necessary output to operate the connected protective device or instruments.

C. Earth one secondary terminal of each set of CT through a removable link.

D. Protection CTs shall be suitably rated.

E. Measurement CTs shall be suitably rated and of Class 1 accuracy or better.

2.19 Indicating Instruments

A. All indicating instruments shall be of the flush-mounted, back-connected,

dustproof, heavy duty, switchboard type with matt black bezels. Scale plates
shall be white with black pointer and markings not subject to fading.

B. All indicating instruments shall have a frame size of approximately 100mm by

100mm with a scale arc of approximately 240 degrees and with mechanical zero
adjustment accessible from the front without dismantling the instruments. The
range selected shall be suitable for the voltage and current levels to be indicated
with the normal maximum reading at approximately 60% of full scale.

C. All indicating instruments shall be of the moving iron spring controlled type. The
accuracy class shall be 1.5 for indicating instruments and 1 for integrating
meters. All indicating instruments shall not be damaged by occurrence of a
short-circuit or over-voltage which can be withstood by the switchgear.

D. Indicating instruments shall comply with the requirements of relevant parts of

IEC60051. Integrating meters shall comply with the relevant requirements of
BS5685, IEC60521, or IEC60211.

E. Combination digital instrumentation in lieu of one or more of the above

mentioned analog indicating instruments is acceptable provided that its
performance is equal to or better than the analog indicating instrument specified.

2.20 Indicating Lamps, Push Buttons, Selector and Control Switches

A. All indicating lamps, luminous push buttons, selector and control switches shall
be of the heavy duty switchboard type, suitably insulated and rated for the
voltage level and current rating intended.

B. The lamp bulb shall be LED type with dome shape operated on 6V through a
built-in type transformer. The indicating lamps shall be designed to permit
removal of lamp lenses and bulb from the front of the units without the need of
any special tool and opening of the panel doors.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/18 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. Selector switches for ammeters shall be of the rotary type with make-before-
break contacts for selection to read the three phase currents with the necessary
engraved plates clearly indicated. Selector switches for voltmeters shall be of
the rotary type with break-before-make contacts for selection to read the line and
phase voltages with the necessary engraved plates with phase voltages and line
voltages clearly indicated.

D. Switches for circuit breaker control shall be of the pistol grip type, with spring
return to the neutral position, and with an interlock to prevent repetitive closing
without moving first to the trip position.

E. Switches for other control selection and other purposes shall have spade type
handles.

F. "STOP" push-buttons shall be in red and "START" push-buttons shall be in green.

All other push-buttons shall be in black.

G. "START" push-buttons shall be effective when the selector switch (if fitted) is in
the "LOCAL" position, and shall not be effective when the selector switch is in the
"OFF" or "REMOTE" position.

H. Control switches shall be fitted with facilities for locking to prevent unauthorized
operations.

2.21 Emergency Stop Pushbuttons (EPB)

A. EPBs shall be connected to the starter circuits and shall be effective under all
conditions.

B. EPBs shall be in red and designed for palm-push operation, with mushroom-head
button and rotating release.

C. All EPBs shall be to IP65.

2.22 Terminal Blocks

A. Terminal blocks for control wiring shall comprise banks of rail-mounted, screw-
clamp, spring-loaded insertion, solder-lug or stud type terminals as appropriate to
the design and duty of the cables to be terminated. Single terminals shall be
replaceable without dismounting adjacent terminals.

B. Terminal blocks shall be designed to securely clamp the wire between two plates
secured by a captive screw. Pinch screw type terminal blocks where the screw
is in direct contact with the conductor will not be accepted.

2.23 Fuses and Links

A. Fuse carriers and solid link carriers and bases shall be made of molded insulating
material.

B. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link carrier shall be shrouded so
that accidental contact with live parts cannot be made when the cartridge is
removed. It shall be possible to change fuses with the circuit alive without
danger of contact with live parts.

C. Fuses shall be to BS88-6 , designed to handle the anticipated short circuit

current, and of the cartridge type.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/19 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Fuse base shall consist of glass filled, high impact resistant, thermoplastic
polyester and shall incorporate a 35mm DIN rail mounting facility as well as a
single screw fixing.

2.24 Panel Heaters

A. Provide each LMCP with a panel heater of an approved design and rated at
100W minimum. Shroud all the heaters and mount at the bottom of the LMCP.

B. Provide individual heater with fuse and rotary ON/OFF selector switch,
thermostatic controls and a lamp to indicate the energization of the heaters at the
front.

C. The heater shall operate from the mains supply derived from the respective
LMCP.

2.25 Earthing

A. Provide a tinned copper earth bar of dimensions not less than 25mm by 3mm
within the LMCPs for bonding of the framework of all modular sections, complete
with terminals for connections to the armouring or metal sheath of all incoming
and outgoing circuits, and to the electrical earth.

B. Provide an external earth terminal on the outside of both ends of the LMCP for
earthing connection to the electrical earth.

2.26 Labels

A. Labels shall not be less than 75mm high. Lettering shall be of not less than
50mm high.

B. All labels shall be manufactured from laminated traffolyte or similar plastic

materials, engraved and fixed by chrome plated screws.

C. All label shall be in English and Chinese.

2.27 Internal and Control Wiring

A. All internal and control wiring shall be 600/1000V grade PVC insulated copper
cable to BS6231.

B. All cables shall be adequately rated single core multi-strand conductors of not
less than 1.5 sq.mm, run on PVC cleats or trunkings.

C. Each wire shall be fitted at both ends with a white ferrule with a black engraved
inscription to correspond with the diagram of connections.

D. Different insulant colours shall be provided to distinguish the various circuits.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/20 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. Segregation

Where equipment carrying currents of different types or at different voltages is

grouped in a common assembly, all equipment using any one type of current or
any one voltage shall be effectively segregated from equipment of any other
type, to avoid mutual detrimental influence.

B. Polarity

Arrange polarity of all apparatus as follows when viewed facing the front of the
LMCP:

1. For two pole apparatus: phase and neutral when reading from top to
bottom or left to right.

2. For three or four pole apparatus: red, yellow and blue phases and neutral
when reading from top to bottom, or left to right.

C. Cable Arrangement

1. Provide all the necessary cable lugs etc., and fix in positions on mounting
plates and straps, to suit the types and directions of entry of the cables as
shown on the Drawings or as specified.

2. Arrange cable conductors for all circuits within the LMCPs in a tidy manner
and secure all conductors mechanically at regular intervals to restrain any
movement of the conductors, either under operation conditions (e.g. thermal
expansion, vibration, etc.) or due to short circuit in any one of the circuits,
that may cause any damage or short circuit to any healthy bare live parts in
the LMCPs.

3. Allow maximum segregation between high current carrying cables and

instrumentation cables or provide earthed metallic partitions.

D Cable Terminations

1. Do not rest insulated conductors against bare live parts or sharp edges.

2. Connect one conductor to a terminal only. The connection of two or more

conductors to one terminal will not be accepted.

3. Shroud all LV terminals and any other terminals which may remain live
with the mains isolated by heat shrinkable insulation. Label adequately with
cautionary signs.

E Control and Internal Wiring

1. Neatly bunch all wiring by nylon type cable ties and install in PVC trunkings
or flexible PVC tubing. Use colour coded cable for identification.

2. Enclose wiring across door hinges by a flexible PVC tubing and loop wiring
to permit the opening of doors and removal of components for inspection
without disconnecting and over-flexing of the cables.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/21 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. Provide removable links/fuses for all control circuits to facilitate isolation,

checking and maintenance.

F Wiring Terminations

1. Terminate cables having the same number at adjacent terminals and

interconnect by means of cable jumpers at the terminal block.

2. Shield and label terminals which may remain live when the equipment is
isolated from the mains supply adequately from accidental contact.

3. Provide white ferrules on each terminal for circuit identification, numbered

according to the wiring diagrams.

G. Fuses and Links

1. Provide fuses and links to enable any circuit to be isolated as necessary

for maintenance and test purposes without isolating the whole of the
control circuit.

2. Mount fuses and links in a readily accessible position within the LMCP.
Group fuses and links which are functionally associated with the same
circuit.

3. Provide at least 10% and not less than 2 spare fuses and links for each
rating of fuses and links provided for the LMCPs. Fit spare fuses and
links in clips within a dedicated compartment of the LMCPs.

H. Terminal Blocks

1. House terminal blocks for interfacing with other trades in dedicated and
segregated compartments at the uppermost compartment of the LMCPs.

2. Group terminal blocks according to the function and voltage of the control
circuit. Segregate each group from the other group.

3. Connect no more than two wires to one terminal.

4. Provide at least 10% and not less than 2 spare terminals for each terminal
block provided.

I. Earthing

Provide circuit protective conductor to all doors, cover plates, etc., to ensure
earth continuity. Size the circuit protective conductor according to the maximum
cross-section of supply lead to the equipment attached to the doors, cover plates,
etc., and in any case not less than 2.5 sq.mm.

J Nameplate and Label

1. Provide labels for every panel to describe the duty of every instrument,
relays and items of control equipment mounted externally and internally.
The designation on these labels shall be clear and concise, and shall,
where applicable, incorporate the device number.

2. Provide labels to all fuses and links to identify the current rating.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/22 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. Provide warning labels on the rear panels with white lettering on a red
background in both English and Chinese characters denoting "DANGER -
380V". Provide similar warning labels for all live parts, including test
terminal blocks.

4 Provide warning labels at the front and in the cabling compartment for
each automatic/remote closing or changeover switch denoting "BEWARE -
AUTOMATIC CLOSING".

5. Provide warning labels for the terminals of the d.c. supply control circuit
which may remain live when the main equipment is isolated from the
mains supply to reduce the risk of accidental contact.

6. Provide in a conspicuous position a nameplate to every LMCP. The

nameplate shall be metallic and engraved or stamped with the
manufacturer's name, serial number and date of manufacture.

K. Finishes

Make good any damage to the finished coating of the LMCPs and hand paint to
its original finish color on completion of the installation.

L. Wiring Diagrams

Provide in every compartment of the LMCPs with a wiring diagram as if viewed

from the point of access to the enclosure. The wiring diagram shall be suitably
treated to prevent deterioration from dirt and age, and shall be securely fastened
to the inside of the access door of that compartment.

M. Emergency Stop Pushbuttons

One EPB shall be provided and positioned in the immediate vicinity of every
motor. In general, the EPB shall be provided within 1m of the associated motor,
and at about 1m above the finished floor level. The exact locations shall be
submitted for approval.

3.2 Discrimination

A. Ensure full discrimination between the upstream switchgear and the switchgear of
the LMCPs so that short circuits or overloads on the motor circuits will not trip the
upstream circuit breakers but will effectively isolate the faulty circuit, leaving the
healthy circuits unaffected.

B. Where earth fault detection is provided, discrimination shall be ensured as for

overloads above. Sufficient adjustment shall be provided so that spurious
tripping due to the inherent earth leakage of long cable runs and other equipment
will not occur without comprising the requirements of full discrimination.

C. Where circuit protection devices are not provided with earth leakage detection,
arrange to trip on earth leakage by means of the overcurrent protection by
ensuring a low earth loop impedance in accordance with the Code of Practice for
the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations and BS7671.

3.3 Interfacing with Central Monitoring and Control System (CMCS)

A. The CMCS, to be provided by others, will monitor and control the conditions of
the switchgear and motor starters as specified elsewhere in the Specification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/23 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

All status and control wirings to be linked to the CMCS shall be brought to a
marshalling cubicle from which the information will be picked up by the field
equipment of the CMCS. All status and control interface shall be provided in the
form of dry contacts, and in pairs of N.O. and N.C. contacts.

B. Provide transducers for transmission of analogue measurements such as current,

voltage and power. The output of the transducers shall be compatible with the
signalling system of the CMCS and shall be of the 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V or 4 to 20mA
type for the current and voltage transducers and pulsed output for the power
transducer.

C. Provide control wirings in conduits and trunkings to the nearest data gathering
panels for interfacing with the CMCS.

3.4 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)

A. General

1. Carry out the following minimum tests to provide assurance that the
equipment/plant/material being supplied will meet the performance
requirements of this Specification. Where applicable, all tests shall be
carried out in a manner as set down in relevant BS. The list provided is
an indicative minimum of the tests required. Develop and submit full test
schedules, procedures, circuit diagrams for approval in accordance with
the requirements of the other sections of the Specification. Use standard
testing forms attached to the Specification as appropriate, otherwise,
develop and submit testing forms for approval.

B. Visual Checks

1. Carry out visual inspection of the general construction of the LMCP, the
busbar system, switchgear, instrumentation, cabling provisions, etc. to
determine if the LMCP is ready for further testing and subsequent delivery
to site.

C. Verification of Measuring Instrument Accuracy

1. With the secondary injection test set connected to the ammeter terminals,
inject currents ranging from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%.
Compare the meter readings with the calibrated ammeter readings.

2. With a 3-phase variac connected to the voltmeter terminals, vary the

voltage from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%. Compare the
meter readings with the calibrated voltmeter readings.

3. Follow manufacturer's instructions for the calibration of voltage, current

and power transducers.

4. With a 3-phase variac connected to the under-voltage relay circuit, vary

the supply voltage gradually to record the drop-off and pick-up voltages of
the relay.

D. Dielectric Test & Insulation Test

1. With all switching devices in open positions, carry out 1000V meggar test
for phase to phase, phase to neutral, and phase to earth and neutral to
earth to measure the insulation resistance.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/24 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2. Repeat the above test with all switching devices in closed position.

3. Apply 2kV AC between all live parts and the exposed conductive parts (ie
between L1+L2+L3+N and E) for 60 seconds and measure the leakage
current.

4. Repeat the above test between each pole and all the other poles
connected to the exposed conductive parts (ie between L1 and
L2+L3+N+E, L2 and L1+L3+N+E, L3 and L1+L2+N+E, N and
L1+L2+L3+E).

5. The test voltage at the moment of application shall not exceed 1000V and
shall then be increased steadily within a few seconds to 2000V and
maintained for 60 seconds.

6. Prior to the HV test, disconnect all electrical equipment which are designed
for a lower test voltage, and current-consuming apparatus such as
measuring instruments in which the application of the test voltage would
cause the flow of a current.

7. Repeat the meggar test with all switching devices in closed position after
the HV test.

E. Secondary Injection Test

1. Record the following information for every circuit being tested:-

a. Circuit number.

b. Make, type, serial number, rated current, trip coil voltage of every
O/C and E/F relay.

c. Nominal full load current and CT ratio of the associated PCT.

2. Inject secondary current in increasing amount to the relay and measure the
minimum current that the relay starts to pick up, and the minimum
operating current that the relay operates.

3. After the relay contacts are made, reduce the injected current slowly and
measure the minimum reset current when the relay resets to its normal
position.

4. With the O/L relay PSM at 100% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current
at 2 times the rated value and measure the operating time. Repeat the
test at 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current.

5. Repeat the above test at any other relay settings as directed during the
test.

6. With the E/F relay PSM at 20% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current
at 2 times, 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current and measure
the operating time. Repeat the test at any other relay settings as directed
during the test.

7. Compare the measured operating times and the theoretical nominal

operating times read from the manufacturer's published relay characteristic
curves.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/25 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

8. Record the relay settings being left at the end of the test.

F. Polarity Check

1. Carry out polarity check to verify all CTs are correctly connected.

G. Functional Tests

1. Carry out functional tests to check that all control circuits are correctly
wired, and that all control schemes specified are fully incorporated.

2. Carry out mechanical operation tests of switchgears to verify that all

switching mechanisms are functional, and all drawout type switchgears are
correctly aligned.

H. EMC Test

1. If required, carry out EMC tests for the whole assembly in accordance with
IEC61000-4 standards as appropriate if EMC certification for the EMI
susceptible equipment are not available.

3.5 Site Acceptance Tests (SAT)

A. General

1. Perform tests to verify that the complete installation will meet the
requirements of this Specification. Develop full test schedules for the
approval in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.

B. Visual Checks

1. Carry out visual inspection of the general construction of the LMCP, the
busbar system, switchgear, instrumentation, cabling provisions, etc. to
determine if the LMCP is ready for further testing and subsequent delivery
to site.

C. Verification of Measuring Instrument Accuracy

1. With the secondary injection test set connected to the ammeter terminals,
inject currents ranging from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%.
Compare the meter readings with the calibrated ammeter readings.

2. With a 3-phase variac connected to the voltmeter terminals, vary the

voltage from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%. Compare the
meter readings with the calibrated voltmeter readings.

3. Follow manufacturer's instructions for the calibration of voltage, current

and power transducers.

4. With a 3-phase variac connected to the under-voltage relay circuit, vary

the supply voltage gradually to record the drop-off and pick-up voltages of
the relay.

D. Dielectric Test & Insulation Test

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/26 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1. With all switching devices in open positions, carry out 1000V meggar test
for phase to phase, phase to neutral, and phase to earth and neutral to
earth to measure the insulation resistance.

2. Repeat the above test with all switching devices in closed position.

3. Apply 2kV AC between all live parts and the exposed conductive parts (i.e.
between L1+L2+L3+N and E) for 60 seconds and measure the leakage
current.

4. Repeat the above test between each pole and all the other poles
connected to the exposed conductive parts (ie between L1 and
L2+L3+N+E, L2 and L1+L3+N+E, L3 and L1+L2+N+E, N and
L1+L2+L3+E).

5. The test voltage at the moment of application shall not exceed 1000V and
shall then be increased steadily within a few seconds to 2000V and
maintained for 60 seconds.

6. Prior to the HV test, disconnect all electrical equipment which are designed
for a lower test voltage, and current-consuming apparatus such as
measuring instruments in which the application of the test voltage would
cause the flow of a current.

7. Repeat the meggar test with all switching devices in closed position after
the HV test.

E. Polarity Check

Carry out polarity check to verify all CTs are correctly connected.

F. Functional Tests

1. Carry out functional tests to check that all control circuits are correctly
wired, and that all control schemes specified are fully incorporated.

2. Carry out mechanical operation tests of switchgears to verify that all

switching mechanisms are functional, and all drawout type switchgears are
correctly aligned.

3.6 Routine Test and Inspection During Maintenance Period

A. The following test shall be carry out for every six months during Maintenance
Period and for each time a test report shall be submitted for record.

1. Insulation Test

2. Functional Test

B. At the end of the Maintenance Period, an Inspection and Test Report shall be
submitted within two weeks before the completion of the Maintenance Period.
Such Inspection and Test Report shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:

1. Insulation Test

3. Functional Test

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/27 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

4. The “LMCP” is operated in good condition.

5. The work carried out and any adjustments made during Maintenance
Period.

6. Any recommendation on the necessary improvement or rectification on the

“LMCP”.

C. The test and inspection shall be carried out with the prior approval if such would
require shut-down of the “LMCP”. Where dictates, the work shall be carried out at any
time outside normal hours as required.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.28(AC)/28 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.30 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONER

1 GENERAL

1.1 Description

This Section specifies furnishing and installing of factory built computer room air
conditioner with cabinet, fan, coil, filter section and remote air cooled condenser. ce

1.2 General Requirements

A. Provide computer room air conditioner with quantity, duty and dimensions shown
in the Equipment Schedule.

B. Provide covers to the inlet and outlet openings of the coolers and condensers.

C. Protect units from either mechanical or corrosive damages during construction.

Fins with minor damage shall be combed straight. Units with extensive damage shall
be rejected.

D. Provide all necessary equipment, structural steel for hoisting,

delivery and proper installation of units.

E. Store all material in a place free from moisture and cement dust, salty
atmosphere, etc., to avoid positioning of the surface coating of the material and
caulking up the internal voids of the insulation.

F. All factory applied acoustical an thermal insulation, including facing and adhesive
shall be fire-resistant and to conform to requirements of NFPA and local codes.

G. Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion resistant materials

and assembly methods must be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against
galvanic interaction.

H. The design maximum cooling rate shall be achieved at the maximum ambient
conditions indicated.

I. The noise generated by the remote air condense shall satisfy the
latest requirement of EPD.

1.3 Quality Requirements

A. Reference Codes and Specifications :

i. ARI standard 575

ii. ARI standard 210

iii. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities

B. Computer room air conditioner shall be the product of a

manufacturer who normally supplies this type of equipment and who can
show evidence that ten installations approximately the same capacity that have
been in successful operation for at least five years.

C. Nameplates : Securely attach plate on each air conditioner showing

manufacturer’s name, serial, model numbers and data of manufacturer.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.30(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

1.4 Submittals

A. Submit shop drawings to show plans, elevations, and sections; dimensions of

equipment; electrical wiring diagram, controls, piping connection arrangements,
floor requirements, mounting and fixing details.

B. Submit manufacturer’s data and characteristic curves to indicate total

cooling loads, compressor motor rating, electrical characteristic and consumption,
sequence of operation available static pressure, air flow rate, filter efficiency,
humidifier capacity, electric heater capacity, condensing air flow rate,
maximum refrigerant pipe run between indoor and outdoor units.

C. Submit equipment sound levels in each of the eight octave bands based on reading
taken and reported in accordance with ARI 575 and at 50% and 100% of full
capacity.

D. Submit manufacturer’s printed operation and maintenance instructions in

bound form, and describe operating procedures and maintenance sequences.

E. Submit a complete list of all spares and accessories as recommended by the

manufacturer.

F. Submit reports of factory and field tests and certificates and show results of
operating tests.

G. Mounting and fixing details shall include details and dimensions of bases, fixing
bolts, supporting steelwork, flexible connections, vibration isolators and
any builder's work requirement.

2 PRODUCT

2.1 General

A. Furnish complete factory fabricated assembly including centrifugal fans, coils,

remote air cooled condenser, filters, all temperature controls, humidifiers,
electric heaters, motors, cabinets insulation, drain pans, condensate pumps,
drives and accessories.

B. The unit shall be built to the highest engineering and manufacturing standards and
shall be completely tested before shipment. The air cooled unit shall be configured
for down discharge of conditioned air with draw-thru pattern to provide
uniform air distribution over the entire face of the coil.

C. The electrical system shall conform to National Electrical Code

requirements. The control circuit shall be 24volts AC, wired in accordance with
NEC Class requirements. The Control circuit wire shall not be smaller than 18
gauge AWG. All wiring shall be neatly wrapped or run in conduit and routed in
bundles. Each wire in the unit (except jumpers less than six inches
long) shall be numbered at each end for ease of service tracing.
All electrically actuated components shall be easily accessible from the front of the
unit without reaching over exposed high voltage components or rotating parts.
Each high voltage circuit shall be individually branch circuit fused on all three
phases. Main power shall be connected to a power distribution block mounted on
the electrical panel. All compressors and motor devices shall have thermal and
short circuit protection. Line voltage and 24volt control circuit wiring shall
be routed in separate bundles.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.30(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

The electrical box shall be at least four feet above the floor for service convenience
and shall include all contractors, starters, fuses, terminal boards, and
transformers required for operation of the unit and shall allow full service access
without disrupting the air pattern through the unit.

2.2 Electric Reheat

A. The unit shall have electric resistance heaters sized with the proper amount of
stages of reheat to offset the sensible cooling capacity in the
dehumidification mode and also maintain the desired temperature set point.

B. The reheat elements shall be of low watt density, tabular finned construction with a
non-corrosive metal sheath.

C. Each state of electric system shall be identical to prevent the possibility of uneven
phase balance.

D. The reheat elements shall be electrically and thermally protected in accordance

with UL requirements.

2.3 Humidifier

A. The humidifier shall be a self-contained steam generating type complete with water
level control and auto-drain function with a disposable cylinder
constructed of high temperature plastic and containing lattice electrodes.

B. The unit shall be design to operate without chemical additives on ordinary tap water,
and shall have a fully automatic, solid state, energy-saving control
circuit to control the humidifier output and automatically compensate
for changing water conditions via controlled flush and fill logic.

C. The control system will allow the humidifier to operate with any water conditions
without changing electrode spacings or cylinders and still provide maximum cylinder
life.

D. The humidification system shall require no cleaning or maintenance during the

cylinder life.

E. The humidification control system will give the service personnel a visual alert that
the humidifier canister requires changing.

F. The steam shall be discharged into the evaporator coil air bypass
through a calibrated discharge tube designed to equally distribute the
steam into the air stream without condensation.

G. The unit shall have adequate air bypass to support all the added humidification
moisture without exceeding 80% RH in the bypass air stream to preclude
condensation in the cold air stream and under the raised floor.

2.4 Blower

A. The unit shall be configured for draw-thru air pattern to provide uniform airflow over
the entire face area of the coil. The unit shall have DWDI blowers of the
centrifugal type, both dynamically and statically balanced. The blowers shall
operate in the Class 1 range and shall be belt driven with dual drive belts.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.30(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. The speed of the blowers shall be adjustable by means of a variable pitch motor
pulley. Belts shall be sized for 200% of the motor horsepower rating, and shall be
oil and heat resistant and static conducting.

C. The blowers shall have corrosion protected, painted steel housings and galvanized
wheels.

D. The blower shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and

selected for L 10 life expectancy of not less than 60,000 hours.
The blower shaft shall be clod finished centerless ground solid steel,
treated for rust protection. The shaft shall conform to ASTM A-108.

E. The entire blower assembly shall be mounted on a vibration

isolated sub-assembly designed to minimize any potential vibration transmission
to the unit's frame.

F. The blower motor shall be mounted on an adjustable base,

provided with a locking assembly to prevent motor play. The motor shall
be 1,450RPM and shall have copper windings, phase isolation and shall
be UL component recognized, and CSA review without objection. The
motors shall have a minimum NEMA service factor of 1.15 as applied.

2.5 Filtration

A. The unit shall have 40% efficient filters as measured by ASHRAE

standard 52. The filters shall be 100mm deep with full depth
filter pleats. Filters shall be UL Class 2. Furnace type filters shall
not be acceptable.

B. Filter access shall be either from the end or the top of the unit or downflow unit
(front filter access on upflow units).

C. An adjustable air pressure differential switch to sense the pressure drop across the
filters shall be provided. Upon sensing excessive pressure drop, the
switch shall activate the alarm circuit of the microprocessor and
display a clogged filter message simultaneous with an audible alarm.

2.6 Finish

A. The unit shall be electrostatically painted and baked to ensure proper surface
adhesion, panels shall have textured finish and the color shall be to the satisfaction
of the Architect.

2.7 Frame

A. The frame shall be made of ASTM structural angle steel to provide maximum
strength.

B. Internal steel structural and mounting frame parts and sheet metal pieces shall be
welded. External panels shall be mounted with captivated cabinet latches and
shall be quickly and easily removable for internal access.

C. The panels shall be formed and welded from furniture steel and
insulated with 25mm thick, 24kg/m3 having a coefficient of heat transmission
equal or less than 0.9W/m 2°C.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.30(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.8 Condensate pump and drain pan

A. The unit shall be supplied with a factory wired and piped condensate pump, with a
water reservoir and automatic pump relay, and shall be capable of
overcoming 5m of head pressure. All parts in contact with the water shall be
non-corrosive material to prevent degradation of performance.

B. In addition to the primary stainless steel drain pan, the unit shall have a bottom
secondary water tight emergency drain pan and shall be provided with a thread
flange for water pipe connection.

2.9 Control

The control system shall be a field programmable, self-calibrating, micro-

processor controller based with a forty-character alpha-display to provide all
system function and alarm data.

A. Temperature Anticipation – controller shall anticipate and adjust to

changing room conditions to minimize the rate of change of temperature and
energy consumption.

B. On Board Operator Instructions – the factory mounted alpha-numeric

display shall indicate a step-by-step trouble shooting procedure for per-selected
alarm conditions. It shall also provide built in prompting instructions for field
configuration of the controller to the customer’s specifications.

C. Run Times – controller shall store in memory and display on demand, the running
hours of the motor devices (blower, compressor and 3-way valves on
chilled water or prefree cool units), and humidifier.

D. Self Diagnostics – controller shall display both the microprocessor control output
signal and the mode of operation that room conditions require. The system shall
self-check the microprocessor memory and display the microprocessor status.

E. Restricted Program Access – the microprocessor shall have restricted program

access to prevent unauthorized modification of system set points and
the system configuration options. The level of access shall be field selectable.

F. Easy Service – the microprocessor shall be mounted in an aluminium enclosure

inside the air conditioner and shall be connected to all of the units
wiring via a single edge connector to allow easy installation and
removal. The microprocessor shall have individual microfuses for each
controller output to a system contactor.

G. Remote Communication – the microprocessor shall have a serial port

output for connection to a multi-controller or PC computer for humerous remote
control options.

H. Primary/Secondary Operation – each microprocessor shall have the

capability of switching to a secondary unit upon any of 8 field selectable alarm
signals.

I. The computer air conditioner shall be arranged so that when there is a fire or the
return air temperature exceeding a predetermined value, the air conditioner shall be
turned off. When the fire signal is cleared, the air conditioner shall be re-started
manually.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.30(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.10 Coil

A. The evaporator coil shall be of a Prism (A-frame) configuration with

copper tubes, aluminium fins and galvanized steel end plates.

B. The coil shall be cross-circuited to provide 60% of total cooling

capacity when either compressor is operating.

C. The refrigerant shall be distributed over the entire face of the coil
from either of the compressors.

D. The coil shall be raised above an insulated stainless steel condensate pan.

E. The pressure drop across the coil shall not exceed 50kPa.

2.11 Remote Air Cooled Condenser

A. The remote air cooled condenser shall be supplied with a field-

mounted, weatherproof control box, incorporating all the fan actuators,
fan speed control pressure switches, terminal boards and pressure
switch(es) required to provide head pressure regulation down to an
ambient of 0°C.

B. The condenser motors shall have permanently lubricated sealed ball

bearings, with inherent overload protection. Motors shall be mounted inside the
condenser casing for weather protection.

C. The condenser coil shall have aluminium fins bonded to copper tubes and shall
have full collars that completely cover the copper tubes. The coil shall also be
designed for counter flow for high heat transfer efficiency. The condenser will
include a sub-cooling circuit for lower condensing temperatures. Headers and
connections shall be copper and shall be factory split to provide an
independent condenser circuit for each compressor. The coil shall be pressure
tested, sealed, and pressurized for shipment.

D. The direct drive fan blades shall be aluminium, and shall be protected by a heavy
gauge, steel wire, zinc plated, irradiate dipped fan guard. Each fan section shall
be separated by full width baffles to prevent bypass air.

2.12 Compressor

A. The compressors shall be hermetically sealed and designed for heat

pump duty. They shall be supplied with rotalock service valves, suction and
discharge charging ports, shut-off valves, crankcase heater, reversible oil pump,
three phase short-circuit protection and thermal overload protection.

B. Compressors shall be fully sealed with no gaskets or seals to eliminate the

possibility of refrigerant or oil leaking into the computer facility.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.30(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.13 Refrigerant System

A. The refrigeration system shall include : pump down solenoids, thermal

expansion valves with equalizers, pre-sized and factory set, sight
glasses with replaceable moisture indicators, refrigerant drier-strainers, and
high and low safety pressure switches. Refrigerant relief valve shall be supplied
for field installation in remote air cooled systems.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily
serviceable.

B. Provide supporting beams, platforms, hangers, spring isolators, etc.,

required for the proper installation of equipment as recommended by the
manufacturer and shown on the Drawings.

C. Install the air-conditioner according the instruction recommended by the

manufacture.

D. Electrical connections are specified in ‘Electrical Works’ Section.

E. After installation, adjust fans to operate without noticeable vibration.

F. Arrange belt guards to permit the use of tachometer, oiling and testing with the
guards in place.

G. Use double wall insulated sheet metal to fill all open spaces
between coils – casing enclosure and filters – casing enclosure to prevent by
passing of untreated air.

H. Mount fans so that the centre line of the fan inlet is on the centre line of the air
treatment equipment both horizontally and vertically. Maximum transitional slope
to the fan outlet shall be 40o.

I. Furnish sufficient butyl sealant and self-drilling fasteners for a complete installation.

J. Unless shown differently on the Drawings or where required for clearance,

construct all casings with constant cross section. Arrange air treatment
equipment within casing to give the most direct air flow to the centre line of the
fan.

K. Install test wells made up of a brass nipple welded into the duct or casing and a cap
on the downstream side of each coil and fan.

L. Install separate connections between dissimilar metals by dielectric insulation.

M. After welds on galvanized materials are completed and tested apply one coat of
primer and one coat of structural aluminium finish paint to each joint. Follow
manufacturer's recommendation.

N. Completely remove grease, rust, oil and other foreign substances from metal to be
welded. Do not burn through the metal.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.30(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

O. Mount and arrange components to permit expansion without strain on tubes,

headers or casing and with all guides and supports necessary to
insure proper alignment and unimpaired drainage.

P. Do not support piping connection from water coil.

Q. Make supply and return connections to headers to give counter flow of air and
water.

R. Pitch coil 12.7mm per meter toward outlet for drainage.

S. Support stacked coils so each coil can be removed without disturbing remaining
coils.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.30(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.31 ELECTRICAL WIRING IN CONDUITS AND TRUNKINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

A. Complete conduit/trunking system, power circuits for motors and associated

control circuits shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and as specified in
this Specification.1

B. All cables shall be of low emission of smoke and corrosive gases characteristics
(LSOH) comply with IEC 61304-2 and IEC 60754-1.

1.02 Particular Requirements on Quality Assurance

A. All conduits, trunkings and associated accessories of the PVC type shall be of the
same manufacture to facilitate interchangeability and to eliminate problems of
different manufacturing tolerances.

1.03 Submittals

As a minimum, submit the following for approval at the appropriate stages of the Works:

A. Detailed schedule of equipment and components, manufacturer's data and

samples.

B. Detailed and co-ordinated working drawings on the works described herein.

C. Builder's works requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Metallic Conduits and Conduit Accessories

A. All conduits, except flexible conduits, shall be heavy gauge, screwed, hot-dip
galvanized welded steel complying with IEC 61386-21 and the classification shall
be as below:

Properties Description Classification

Resistance to Heavy compression strength 4
compression
Resistance to impact Heavy impact strength 4
Resistance against High protection inside and outside 4
corrosion
All conduit fittings and components shall comply with IEC 61386-21.

B. Flexible conduit and fittings shall comply with IEC 61386-23 and shall be
galvanized water-tight pattern, flame retardant PVC oversheathed, fitted with
sweated brass nickel plated adaptors at each end and with a separate earth wire
enclosed within the conduit. However, neither oversheath of PVC nor materials
with low emission of smoke and corrosive gas characteristics shall be required for
installations within ventilated ceiling void.

The flexible conduit adaptor shall comprise two parts, an inner core and an outer
ferrule.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.31(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

The inner core screws into the bore of the conduit together with an outer ferrule
which caps off the end of the conduit, so that the adaptor can provide an
extremely strong joint. The core shall lock against the outer ferrule and isolate
any sharp cut edges in the conduit.

C. No conduit shall be of less than 20mm diameter.

D. Circular pattern conduit boxes shall be malleable iron with long spouts internally
threaded incorporating a shoulder for the proper butting of conduits of 20mm and
25mm diameter. Deep pattern boxes shall be adopted for concealed system
within structure and shallow pattern boxes shall be adopted for surface mounted
system. All conduit boxes shall have a brass earth terminal fitted in the base.

E. Rectangular pattern adaptable boxes shall be used for conduits of 32mm

diameter and larger. Adaptable boxes shall be of cast iron not less than 50mm
deep and of such dimensions as will enable the largest size cable, for which the
conduit run is suitable, to be drawn in without excessive bending of the cables.
Provide covers of the same gauge with brass fixing screws. All such boxes shall
be drilled for holes according to the conduit entry required.

F. Conduit outlet boxes, for socket outlets, lighting switches, etc., shall be of hot-
dipped galvanized steel complete with adjustable lug, ample knockouts, and
brass earth terminals fitted in the base, and shall comply with IEC 60670-1.

G. Distance saddles for fixing conduits shall be malleable cast iron, designed to
space the conduits approximately 10mm from the surface to be mounted on.

H. Surface mounting type outlet boxes shall be used for surface conduits installation
as specified herein.

I. All conduit entries to adaptable boxes, outlet boxes and switchgear shall be made
with coupling and hexagon male bush.

J. All flexible conduits shall be covered with contoured flame retardant PVC sheath
and fitted with sweated brass nickel plated adaptors at each end. The adaptors
shall be made to screw onto the flexible tubing and also into the conduit. The
adaptor shall be brazed to the metallic tubing, otherwise it is likely to become
detached and expose the cables to mechanical damage.

K. All boxes and conduit accessories shall be fully weatherproof when used in
outdoor locations. Weatherproof boxes and conduit accessories shall also be
used in locations other than outdoor when so specified on the Drawings.

L. Steel conduits and couplers shall be hot-dip zinc coated or sheradized both inside
and outside against corrosion and shall be tested to comply with IEC 61386-1.

M. Steel or ferrous conduit fittings shall be hot-dip zinc coated or sheradized both
inside and outside against corrosion and shall be tested to comply with IEC
61386-1.

O. Metal boxes complete with covers for the enclosure of electrical accessories shall
have heavy protection both inside and outside in accordance with IEC 60670-1
(e.g. hot-dip galvanized coating or sheradizing).

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.31(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.02 Metallic Cable Trunkings

A. Trunkings and fittings shall comply with IEC 61084-1.

B. Cable trunkings shall be manufactured in minimum lengths of 2m from

galvanised sheet steel. The thickness of material of metal trunking shall be as
the following table:

Nominal Size Min. Thickness

(mm x mm) (mm)

50 x 50 1.0
75 x 50 1.2
75 x 75 1.2
100 x 75 1.2
100 x 100 1.4
150 x 100 1.4
150 x 150 1.6

C. Covers of the cable trunkings shall be of the quick fix pattern with centre captive
screw. Other fixing arrangement will not be accepted.

D. Provide vertical run trunkings with pin racks inside the trunkings to support the
weight of the cables, and to enable the cables to be secured during installation.
These pin racks shall consist of steel pins sheathed with insulating material and
shall be mounted on backing-plates at intervals of 3m.

E. Terminate trunking with end flanges which shall be bolted direct to distribution
boards, or apparatus. Connecting pieces shall be used and bolted with cadmiun-
plated mushroom head steel screws, nuts and vibration resistant locking washers.

F. Each trunking joint shall have a tinned copper bond bolted to each adjacent
trunking to ensure electrical continuity.

2.03 PVC Conduits and Conduit Accessories

A. PVC conduits shall comply with IEC 61386-21 and PVC conduit fittings shall
comply with IEC 61386-1 and other associated Parts of the Standard. Conduits
shall have classification as below:

Properties Description Classification

Resistance to Heavy compression strength 4
compression
Resistance to impact Heavy impact strength 4
Lower temperature -5 °C 2
range
Upper temperature +60 °C 1
range

B. No conduit shall be of less than 20mm diameter.

C. All PVC conduit accessories shall comply with BS4607, as applicable.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.31(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. Where appropriate, conduit junction boxes shall be of the circular pattern with
appropriate spout entries.

E. All plastic boxes including adaptable boxes, surface boxes for the enclosure of
electrical accessories or wiring cables shall be made from insulating materials ,
heavy duty and shall comply with IEC 60670-1, complete with adjustable lug,
ample knockouts, and brass earth terminals fitted in the base. The dimensions
of the plastic boxes shall be such that they are inter-changeable with steel boxes.
The minimum wall thickness of boxes shall be 2mm.

F. All boxes and conduit accessories shall be fully weatherproof when used in
outdoor locations. Weatherproof boxes and conduit accessories shall also be
used in locations other than outdoor when so specified on the Drawings.

G. PVC flexible conduits shall not be used. Flexible conduits shall be metallic.PVC
Cable Trunkings

A. All-insulated trunking shall be heavy duty, clip-on lid type complying with the
relevant BS requirements. Any non-standard trunking accessories shall be
fabricated by the same manufacturer.

2.04 PVC Insulated Cables

A. Unless otherwise specified, install power and control circuits in conduits and
trunkings.

B. Cables of this type shall be 450/750V grade complying with BS6004 or IEC227,
copper core and PVC insulated.

C. Conductors shall be plain annealed copper conductors complying with BS6360 or

IEC228.

D. The cables shall comply with BS4066: Part 1 or IEC332-1 for flame retardance.

E. The current carrying capacities and voltage drops of cables shall be in

accordance with those tabulated under Appendix 6 of the Code of Practice for the
Electricity (Wiring) Regulations, with ratings adjusted to suit local and site
conditions.

F. The minimum size of cables shall be as specified below, unless otherwise

specified.

Power: 2.5 sq.mm

Control: 1.5 sq.mm

2.05 Flexible Cords

A. Flexible cords shall be 450/750V grade, multi-stranded copper conductors, high

temperature, PVC insulated with flame retardant white circular LSOH oversheath
to IEC227.

B. The minimum size of conductors shall be 1.5 sq.mm for control, and 2.5 sq.mm
for power.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.31(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2.06 LSOH Insulated Cables

A. Unless otherwise specified, install final circuits and control circuits in conduits and
trunkings.

B. Cable of this type shall be 450 750V grade complying with BS7211, copper core
and LSOH insulated.

C. Conductors shall be plain annealed copper conductors complying with BS6360 or

IEC 228.

D. The material for insulation shall be of low emission of smoke and corrosive gases
characteristic when affect by five. The Cable shall by type test to the following
five performance requirements:
(i) Flame propagation : IEC 60332-1-1
(ii) Smoke emission : IEC 61034-2005
(iii) Acid gas emission : IEC 60754-1994

2.07 Indentification of Cable Core

A. Each core of a power cable shall be identified continuously throughout its entire
length.

B. The identification of cable core shall comply with the Code of Practice for the
Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.

C. Core Identification of Power Cable

Function of Core Colour Code

Phase conductor of a single phase circuit Brown

Phase conductor of a three phase circuit Brown/ Black/ Grey according to

phase concerned.

Neutral conductor Blue

Core used as protective conductor shall have

an exclusive colour identification of green-
and-yellow.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Metallic Conduits and Conduit Accessories

A. Conduit system within false ceiling void, electrical and mechanical plant rooms
shall be surface mounted on wall or ceiling slab.

B. Conduit system in any other areas shall be carried out in concealed conduit.

C. Conduits cast in concrete shall be so formed that the radial thickness of concrete
or screed surrounding the cross-section of the completed conduit is not less than
15mm at every point. As far as possible, parallel conduits cast in concrete shall
be separated by a spacing of not less than 25mm.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.31(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

D. All surface mounted conduits shall be run neatly on the surface of the building
and truly vertical and horizontal, substantially supported and shall be fixed with
spacing saddles at intervals not exceeding 1.2m.

E. Where there are several conduits running in parallel, they shall be arranged to
avoid crossing at points where they take different directions.

F. Where conduits are laid direct on the shuttering of the reinforced concrete slab,
deep pattern circular conduit boxes shall be used to raise the run of conduit to
between the top and bottom reinforcement. Attendance shall be provided whilst
the concrete pouring or screeding operation is being carried out in order to avoid
damage being caused to the conduits and also to ensure that the conduit work is
in sound condition, properly and efficiently maintained during this installation
period.

G. Particular care shall be taken when setting out conduit runs to outlet points which
are to be fitted to furniture and equipment. Close co-ordination shall be
exercised to ascertain exact details of furniture and fittings constructions in order
that conduit work shall wherever possible be concealed.

H. Conduits installed in chases of walls and floors shall be firmly secured by wrought
iron pipe hooks or crumpets and these fixings shall in themselves be sufficient to
hold the conduits in place. A wire mesh shall also be provided on top of the
conduit to maintain plaster bonding.

I. Adaptable boxes shall be provided immediately after every two bends, or after a
bend plus a total maximum straight run of 10m or after a maximum straight run
of 15m to permit easy draw-in of cables.

J. All conduit systems shall be arranged, wherever possible, to be self-draining to

conduit outlet point.

K. All conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and

watertight after installation. All joints shall be formed by screwing into threaded
couplers. Plain slip or pin-grip sockets shall not be used.

L. During the building construction, all open ends of conduit termination and conduit
boxes shall be plugged with wooden plugs to prevent ingress of concrete, plaster
and foreign materials into the conduit system.

M. Before wiring, all wooden plugs shall be removed and the conduit system shall be
thoroughly swabbed through to clean out all dirt, burrs and moisture.

N. Where conduits terminate at boxes, trunkings and accessories not fitted with
spout entries, they shall be terminated by means of smooth bore male brass
bushes, compression washers and sockets to obviate damage to the cables.

O. All sets of bends in conduit runs shall be formed on site in bending machines,
inspection bends and tees may be permitted at columns, where large bends shall
be avoided.

P. The inner radius of every conduit bend shall be not less than 2.5 times the
outside diameter of the conduit.

Q. Any damage to the finishes of all conduits (including threads cut at site) shall be
made good and shall be painted with two coats of good quality lead paint and
finished with high grade cold galvanized paint.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.31(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

R. Telescopic conduit system shall be employed where conduits passing structural

joints of the building. A separate circuit protective conductor shall be installed to
maintain an effective electrical continuity across the structural joint. The circuit
protective conductor shall have a cross-sectional area rated to suit the largest
current carrying conductor drawn into the conduit.

S. Where flexible conduit is employed, the length of the flexible conduit shall not
exceed 2m and shall be provided with an internal earth continuity conductor of
size not less than 2.5 sq.mm copper cored, PVC sheathed cable to ensure the
earth continuity of the installation between the two ends of the flexible conduit.

T. Where a conduit is exposed to different temperatures (either by surrounding air

conditions or by virtue of the surrounding medium with which it is in contact) at
any particular time, the section of the conduit at the higher temperature shall be
isolated from the section at the lower temperature by means of a conduit box
filled with an approved permanent plastic compound, after completion and testing
of all wiring. Such a condition would arise if a conduit running in a warmed
building is run to exterior points.

U. Surface mounted conduits shall be painted in accordance with requirements

specified in other secion of this Specification.

3.02 Metallic Trunking System

A. Trunking shall be supported on walls or suspended from ceiling at intervals of

1.25m to 1.5m, and shall be truly vertical and horizontal so that no visible sag is
observed when loaded with cables. At the suspension point, the trunking shall
be reinforced by a plate or washer of minimum thickness 3mm whose cross-
sectional area shall not be less than half that of the trunking.

B. Vertical trunkings shall be fitted with supporting devices to prevent movement of

cables as well as strain on cables due to cable weight.

C. In every vertical trunking, internal barriers shall be provided so as to prevent the

air at the top of the channel from attaining an excessively high temperature.
The distance between barriers shall be the distance between floors or 5m
whichever is the less.

D. Where trunking crosses expansion joints, an approved trunking system shall be

used which will allow for expansion and maintain earth continuity.

E. Every entry to finished trunking shall be placed so as to prevent the ingress of

water, or be protected against such ingress.

F. All frayed and sharp edges shall be removed from trunking before installation.

G. Conduit entry to trunking shall be by a galvanized coupling and brass male bush.

H. Knockouts shall not be provided, and trunkings shall be drilled on site. After
cutting, the sharp edges of the trunking shall be smoothed to prevent abrasion of
cables and shall be painted with anticorrosive paint while the work proceeds.

I. In positions where cables may fall out when the cover is removed, the trunking
shall be fitted with cable retaining bars or other suitable cable holding devices.

J. All trunkings shall be painted in accordance with the requirements specified in

other section of this Specification.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.31(AC)/7 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3.03 PVC Conduits and Conduit Accessories

A. All conduits shall be jointed and terminated in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Permanent adhesive shall be used where rigid water-tight joints are
required, in conjunction with standard couplers and accessories. Flexible
adhesive shall be used where expansion facilities are required in long conduit
runs, in conjunction with expansion couplers.

B. Conduits up to 25mm diameter may bend cold with the appropriate bending
spring (obtained from the conduit manufacturer) inserted internally. The inner
radius of every conduit bend shall be not less than 2.5 times the outside diameter
of the conduit.

C. Where bending larger size conduits, the section to be bent shall be heated
uniformly until it is pliable. When the conduit is well heated, it shall be bent
around a suitable former with the appropriate bending spring inserted internally.

D. Adequate allowance shall be made for linear expansion and contraction of the
conduits under normal working temperature. Expansion couplers shall be used
on all straight runs of conduit exceeding 6m in length. Conduit shall be free to
slide within saddles.

E. Special consideration shall be given to the fixing of accessories in situation where

the temperature fluctuates excessively. Oversized or slotted fixing holes shall
be used.

F. Conduits shall be supported with saddles at a distance not exceeding 1.2m in

accessible positions. Where working temperatures tend to be high, the spacing
shall be reduced accordingly.

G. Notwithstanding the above, the works carried out shall be strictly in accordance
with the requirements as specified for the metallic conduits and conduit
accessories hereabove, wherever applicable.

3.04 PVC Cable Trunkings

A. Trunkings shall be suspended with stirrup type support at a maximum of 1.0m

intervals.

B. Expansion joints with gaps, shall be incorporated in all runs. External couplings
with elongated slots and fixing holes shall be drilled oversize to give freedom for
linear movements.

C. Notwithstanding the above, the works carried out shall be strictly in accordance
with the requirements as specified for the metallic cable trunking hereabove,
wherever applicable.

3.05 Power and Control Circuits Cabling

A. Conduit system and trunking system shall be completely erected before cabling.

B. The maximum number of cables that can be accommodated in a given size of

conduit/trunking shall be in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.31(AC)/8 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. In conduit or trunking system, where outlets for Category 1 and Category 2

circuits, as defined in the IEE Wiring Regulations, are mounted in or on common
boxes, the cables and connections of the two categories of circuits shall be
partitioned by means of rigidly fixed screens or barriers.

D. All wiring shall be carried out in one continuous length between terminal points.
No intermediate joints or connectors will be allowed in any such cables.

E. Cables for each power and control circuit in trunking system shall be individually
bunched and tied together.

F. Where cables are installed in trunking which pass through floors and walls,
suitable internal fire-resistant barriers shall be provided to prevent the spread of
fire.

G. Where cables pass through holes in metalwork, precautions shall be taken or

prevent abrasion of the cables on any sharp edges.

H. Where appropriate, final connections to fixed equipment shall be by means of

PVC cables in flexible conduits as specified.

I. Exposed ends of conductors of 6 sq.mm and above, where not provided with
cable sockets, shall have their individual strand sweated solid before connection
to apparatus terminals.

J. Cables shall be fed into the conduit in such a manner as to prevent any cables
crossing, and also to avoid them being pulled against the sides of the opening of
the draw-in box. The drawing-in shall be assisted by rubbing chalk on the
cables.

3.06 Power Circuits/Control Circuits Earthing

A. Where cables are to be installed in PVC conduit and trunking system, each power
and control circuit shall be provided with its circuit protective conductor. The
minimum cross-sectional area of the circuit protective conductor shall be chosen
according to Table 54G of the IEE Wiring Regulations. The circuit protective
conductor of each circuit shall be run along with its associated circuit. The live
conductors and the circuit protective conductor of each circuit shall be
individually bunched and tied together within conduit system.

B. Where cables are to be installed in metallic conduit and trunking system, each
power or control circuit shall be provided with its circuit protective conductor.
The minimum cross-sectional area of the circuit protective conductor shall be
chosen according to Table 54G of the IEE Wiring Regulations. The circuit
protective conductor of each circuit shall be run along with its associated circuit.
The live conductors and the circuit protective conductor of each circuit shall be
individually bunched and tied together within conduit system.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.31(AC)/9 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.32 EARTHING FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

A. This Section of the Specification covers the design, supply, installation, testing,
commissioning and setting to work of complete earthing network as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The Electrical Sub-Contractor will provide an earthing network with the incoming
power feeders to this Contractor’s MCC and LMCPs. This Sub-Contractor shall
provide all earthing connections thereon.

C. The LV electrical earthing system provided by the Electrical Sub-Contractor will

conform to the TT system as described in the IEE Wiring Regulations.

1.02 Submittals

As a minimum, the following shall be submitted for review at the appropriate stages of
the Works:

A. Detailed schedule of equipment and components, manufacturer’s data and

samples.

B. Design and calculations on the earthing systems as specified.

C. Builder’s works requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Networks shall be formed from high conductivity annealed copper tapes

complying with BSEN13601, or single core LSOH insulated copper cables as
specified, where appropriate.

B. Copper tapes with LSOH oversheath shall be provided where indicated on the
Drawings.

C. All copper tape clips, holdfasts, clamps, etc. shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer of the copper tapes and rods.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Connections

A. Joints in the copper tapes shall be by exothermal welding such that the resistance
of the section containing the joint shall not exceed that of an equivalent length of
unjointed conductor. Any joint so made may be required to be tested to prove
compliance with these requirements.

B. The contact faces of all protective conductors shall be cleaned before connections
are made.

C. No drilling of the earth bar shall be permitted except in terminations.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.32(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3.02 Networks

A. Earthing networks for the earthing system shall be as specified hereafter and as
shown on the Drawings.

B. Earthing strip shall be flat copper tapes as specified. Fixing to buildings shall be
by means of naval brass clamps with brass screws and plastic wall plugs.
Conductors shall run only in vertical and horizontal directions. Changes of
direction in the plane of the conductions shall be by right-angle joints. Folding of
the conductor will not be accepted.

3.03 LV Electrical Earthing Requirements

A. An earthing bed will be provided by others for LV electrical earthing, the resulting
earth resistance will not be greater than 0.3 ohm.

B. All incoming power feeders to the LMCPs and MCC provided by others will be
supplied with suitably sized circuit protective conductors. This Sub-Contractor
shall accept these circuit protective conductors and effectively bond to the LMCPs
or MCC. The earthing network shall be further extended thereon, bonding all the
motors, control equipment, associated exposed conductive parts and extraneous
conductive parts of the mechanical equipments provided by the Sub-Contractor.

C. The electrical earthing system shall be installed both vertically and horizontally
and shall form a network bonding all LMCPs, MCC, control panels, motors, air-
ducts, metallic pipework, and all exposed conductive parts and extraneous
conductive parts to the building’s main earth bar.

This requirement does not apply in the following instances: -

- Steel reinforced concrete poles in which the steel reinforcement is not

accessible.

- Exposed conductive parts which owing to their reduced dimensions or their

disposition cannot be gripped or cannot be contacted by a major surface of
the human body in excess of 50mm by 50mm, provided that connection of
these parts to a protective conductor cannot readily be made or cannot be
reliably maintained. This item applies to small isolated metal parts such
as bolts, rivets, nameplates and cable clips.

- Fixing screws for non-metallic accessories provided that there is no

appreciable risk of the screws coming into contact with live parts.

- Short lengths of metal conduit for mechanical protection of cables having a

non-metallic sheath.

D. All exposed conductive part (e.g. motor frames) shall be effectively connected in a
manner that is reviewed without objection to the earth terminals of the LMCPs or
MCC. The circuit protective conductors shall be LSOH insulated single core
copper cables or high conductivity annealed copper tapes specified, and shall have
the same route as the cable trays. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum cross-
sectional area of the circuit protective conductors shall be selected in accordance
with Table 11 of Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.32(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

E. All metallic sheaths and armour of the cables shall be effectively bonded at both
ends to the apparatus which shall in turn be bonded to the earthing busbars
provided.

F. Earthing connections for all items of equipment shall be made between the
equipment and the distribution board feeding it and as specified.

G. All connection between circuit protective conductors and apparatus shall be by

bolts or studs so arranged that the resistance between the apparatus and the earth
conductor shall not exceed 0.1 ohm.

H. Particular care shall be taken on cable termination boxes to ensure that the cable
sheath and armour is adequately bonded to the frame of the item of plant to which
the cable is connected. If the earth continuity through the cable termination
gland is inadequate, a special copper connection shall be made between the
apparatus frame and the cable sheath and armour.

I. Main equipotential bonding conductors shall be provided and shall connect to the
main earth bar all the extraneous conductive parts including the following :-

- main service pipes and ductings,

- risers of central heating and air-conditioning system.

The main equipotential bonding conductors shall be of 25sq.mm high conductivity

annealed copper tapes as specified.

J. Local supplementary bonding conductors shall be provided between

simultaneously accessible (i.e. within 2.5m) exposed conductive parts of
equipment, between exposed conductive parts and simultaneously accessible
extraneous conductive parts, and between simultaneously accessible extraneous
conductive parts. The bonding conductors shall be PVC insulated single core
copper cables and shall be sized in accordance with Clause 547-03 of the IEE
Wiring Regulations. The sections of metallic air-ducts adjacent to the fan motor
is a typical example of extraneous conductive part.

K. All equipment equipotential bondings in areas other than plant rooms and within
false ceiling shall be concealed. Any remedial work required afterwards due to
bad connection, open circuit, etc. shall be borne by the Sub-Contractor.

L. In the case where metallic trunking and conduits are adopted along the whole of
the routes of the current carrying conductors, the additional circuit protective
conductors as specified in item D above shall still be required.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.32(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.33 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description

This section specifies the testing, commissioning and balancing of all air and water
system.

1.02 General Requirements

A. In addition to all commissioning and testing called for elsewhere in this

Specification, carry out all necessary testing and commissioning procedures
comprising tests at maker's Works, site tests during construction, commissioning
and acceptance tests all as specified in this Section.

B. All tests shall be witnessed by the Architect/Engineer or his representative. Not

less than fourteen days notice shall be given for this purpose.

C. All tests shall be properly certified in a manner to be agreed and triplicate copies
of all certificates shall be issued on completion.

Only when the installations have been so certified and all test figures and other
relevant information have been recorded in the prescribed manner and accepted
shall the works be considered fit for handling over to the Employer.

D. This Contract shall include all costs associated with the above mentioned testing
and commissioning procedures including the cost of making good any defects
arising out of such tests and having the work re-tested. Such costs shall also
include the provision of all necessary instruments and test points etc.

E. Equipment shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during operation.

Should these be excessive and not within normal acceptable standards, adequate
vibration isolation and sound attenuation shall be provided without additional cost
and to the satisfaction of Architect/Engineer.

F. MVAC, ATC and BMS systems shall be installed, tested and commissioned in
accordance with manufactuers recommendations and local regulations.

1.03 Quality Requirements

A. The Contractor shall show at least five years experience in testing and balancing
of air and water systems.

B. Instrument Calibration: All instruments required for air and water balance shall be
checked for calibration prior to using on this project.

C. Perform tests, adjust, and balance when outside conditions are approximate to
design conditions as shown for heating and cooling function.

D. Reference Codes and Specifications:

1. The appropriate British Standard or BS Code of Practice.

2. ASHRAE latest "Systems Handbook" chapter on "Testing, Adjusting and

Balancing".

3. Relevant CIBSE commissioning Codes.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/1* May 2019
Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

4. ASHRAE noise criteria curves.

5. Building Energy Code (BEC)

E. Testing and Commissioning shall comply with the requirements of EMSD as

stipulated in the latest version of Technical Guidelines for Connection to District
Cooling System.

1.04 Submittals

A. Submit organization chart of testing and balancing team.

B. Submit complete schedule and program of all testing and commissioning

activities.

C. Design and submit the procedures for testing and commissioning.

D. Submit proposed formats and records for testing and commissioning reporting.

1.05 System Temperatures and Working/Test Pressures

A. Water side services supplied shall have the temperatures and minimum
working/test pressures as scheduled below unless otherwise specified on
Drawings :-

Service Temperature Minimum Working/Test

°C Pressures
kPa (Gauge)
Chilled water circuit 6 1600/2400
Condenser Water 38 1000/1500
Make up water 15 1000/1500
Condensate drain 12 800/1200
Refrigerant 4 2270/3100
Feed and Expansion 25 1000/1500

B. Pressure rating of water side services shall be not less than the actual working
pressure and the test pressure shall be not less than 1.5 times of the actual
working pressure.

1.06 Tests at Manufacturer's Works

A. The following equipment shall be pressure tested at the manufacturers' works at

the test pressures listed in Clause 1.05 of this Section for a period of not less than
two hours and test certificates in triplicate shall be submitted proving that each
plant item has withstood the specified test without leakage or loss of pressures:

1. Evaporator and condensers

2. Cooling coils

3. Fan coil units

4. Valves
WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/2* May 2019
Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

B. All water circulating pumps and air fans shall be tested at the manufacturers'
works and test certificates in triplicate shall be submitted proving that each plant
item has achieved the specified performance. Pumps shall be tested to ISO
9906.

1.07 Site Tests During Construction

The following pressure tests shall be carried out on site in convenient sections during
the construction of the Works, before any insulation has been applied. Before the tests
are carried out, remove any equipment liable to damage and provide and fix all
necessary blank flanges etc.

A. Ductwork

1. Test the installed ductwork as per BEC and other specified area. Testing
procedure shall refer to DW/143 specification of HVCA.

2. No pressure tests are required for low pressure ductwork as per DW/144
classification but all such systems shall be inspected for air tightness.

B. Chilled Water Pipework

Chilled water pipework shall be hydraulically pressure tested to minimum 1.5

times of the total working pressure and such pressure shall be maintained for a
period of not less than 24 hours without loss of pressure to ensure that the pipes
are free from leak. Report of the results of hydraulic pressure test shall be
submitted by this sub-contratcor to EMSD or the operator for approval.

C. Water Pipework

All water pipework shall be hydraulically pressure tested to the pressure listed
under Clause 1.05 of this Section of the Specification for a period of not less than
twelve hours without leakage or loss of pressure.

D. Refrigerant Pipework

All refrigerant pipework shall be air tested to the pressures listed under 1.05 of
this section of the specification for a period of not less than six hours without
leakage or loss of pressure.

E. Water Tanks

All open top tanks shall be subjected to a standing leak test for twenty-four hours
(no leakage shall be permitted).

1.08 Preliminary Commissioning Checks

A. Ensure that all equipment is thoroughly cleaned, lubricated and checked for
serviceability immediately before setting to work. Particular attention is drawn to
the removal of building debris from the air systems, motors, fan bearings and
pipework systems.

B. Special attention is drawn to the need for thoroughly flushing out all pipework
systems (including compressed air pipework) to ensure that all foreign matter is
removed.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/3* May 2019

Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

C. All automatic controls and safety devices shall be inspected and checked for
serviceability before the working fluid of electricity is applied to the system.

1.09 Testing of Electrical Systems

Refer to 'Electrical Works' Section of this Specification.

1.10 Commissioning

When the various installations have been completed (but before the "Date of
Completion") and the preliminary commissioning checks carried out, set to work,
regulate and calibrate the entire installation. Special attention shall be paid to the
following items:-

A. That all valves, dampers, switches, controls etc. are regulated and capable of
proper operation and in the case of valves that they are capable of tight shut off.

B. That all apparatus is silent in accordance with the requirements of this

Specification.

C. That all instruments and transducers are correctly calibrated and read accurately.

D. That all services are tested in accordance with the details in the relevant clauses
of this Specification.

E. Each air handling and ventilation plant is to be operated with the air volumes for
each individual space measured, regulated and correctly related.

F. Operate compressors, pumps, cooler heater batteries etc. to ensure that all
control systems are functioning correctly and are properly sequenced or
interlocked.

G. Arrange for all major plant items to be fully commissioned by the Manufacturer as
specified elsewhere in this Specification.

H. Provide T&C reports and illustrate the installation can satisfactorily perform to the
requirement on the energy efficiency and energy conservation as stipulated in the
BEC.

1.11 Balancing

A. Submit test and instrument location plans. After initial balancing measurements,
submit shop drawings for additional equipment (such as balancing dampers,
pressure taps, balancing cocks and butterfly valves, etc.) required to effect proper
air and water balance.

B. Submit three copies of the complete air and water balance report for evaluation
and review. Report shall include but not be limited to the following data for each
system balanced.

1. Types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments.

2. Air balance reports:

a. As Table 1 of this Section.

b. Velocity tests of main and branch ducts:

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/4* May 2019

Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

- Duct size

- Number of velocity readings

- Duct average velocity

- Total volume of flow, cu.m/s.

c. Individual outlets and inlets:

- Outlet and inlet identification (Location and number

designation)

- Manufacturer and type.

- Effective face area factor, core area, or neck area in sq.m.

- Required and resultant test velocities in m/s.

- Required and resultant test quantities in cu.m/s.

- Deflector settings.

d. Supply register:

Temperature and velocity traverse at the centerline for each supply

register. The traverse consists of simultaneous readings at:

- One and one half meters above the floor level at 1, 2, 3, 4

meters from registers.

- At the register.

e. Noise criteria levels:

8 Octave band noise level spectrums in areas 1.5m above floor

level at a number of points as directed.

3. Water balance reports:

As Table 2, 3 of this Section.

1.12 Final Acceptance Tests

Following commissioning of the entire installation, carry out final acceptance tests
(before the "Date of Completion") in accordance with a programme to be agreed.

Should the results of the acceptance tests show that plant, systems and/or equipment
fail to perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures as given in this
Specification or as accepted in the Tender, if necessary the equipment shall be
adjusted, modified and replaced at the Sub-contractor’s cost in order that the required
performance be obtained. Should it be necessary for the Contractor to attend to items
of plant as above described, he will be responsible as to cost for any damage or
deterioration to the building or other services consequent on such attendance.

Acceptance tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that the installed systems are
achieving the design intent:-

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/5* May 2019

Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

A. Test on Water Pumps

The developed head of each circulating pumps shall be listed and checked
against the performance curve to demonstrate that the design flow rate is being
achieved. Current drawn shall be listed and checked against the efficiency and
meets the Specification.

B. Test on Water Circulation Systems

The water pressure drop across each item of hydraulic equipment e.g. strainers,
cooling coil, etc. shall be listed and checked against manufacturer's data.

In addition to the measurement of flow rate at each flow meter, the regulation of
each main and sub water circuit shall be checked by pressure and/or temperature
differential test.

C. Ventilation Fans

The air pressure differential across each fan shall be listed and checked against
the performance curve to demonstrate that the design flow rate is being
achieved.

D. Air Handling Units / Primary Air Handling Units

The air pressure differential across each section of each air handling unit shall be
listed and checked against manufacturer's data. ON/OFF coil conditions and all
other performance data shall be listed and checked against manufacturers' data.

E. Air System

Air flow rates shall be checked for all louvres, grilles and diffusers, all main and
branch ducts.

F. VAV / CAV Box

Air flow, acoustic and control performance shall be tested and vertified against
the manufacturer’s data and control block diagram.

G. Fan Coil Units

The equipement performance data shall be listed and checked against the
manufacturer’s data.

H. Electric Duct Heaters

The acceptance test shall be a steady load heat and shall prove that each heater
supplied meets the requirements in respect of :-

1. heating output capacity

2. steps of operation of heating elements

3. air pressure differential across each section of each heater.

4. control and instrumentation.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/6* May 2019

Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

I. Other Tests

Other relevant tests included but not limited to the followings:-

1. Energy performance test for each system to verify the actual performance.

2. IAQ test as per EPD’s guideline.

3. External and internal noise test as per the specicalist requirements.

4. Full load test for main A/C plant to verify the capacity and performance.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01 Testing Equipment

A. Provide all equipment required for the commissioning and testing, including but
not limited to the following:-

1. Octave band sound meter

2. Sling psychrometer

3. Tachometer

4. Mercury in glass thermometers

5. Pitot tube and included gauge-manometer

6. Electronic rotating vane anemometer

7. Velometer

8. Insulation megger

9. Ammeter

10. Voltmeter

11. Cable test kit

12. Pump pressure test unit

B. All instruments shall have been recalibrated within three months of the start of
commissioning on testing.

C. All commissioning equipment shall be the products of professional manufacturers

who are experienced in the manufacture and calibration of such equipment.

D. Agree with Architect and Engineer to provide any additional equipment (such as
balancing dampers, pressure taps, balancing cocks and butterfly valves, etc.)
required to effect proper air and water balance before site installation. Any claim
for abortive and double handling works shall not be entertained due to late
reportings from this Contract.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 General
WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/7* May 2019
Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

A. Provide, maintain and pay all costs for equipment, instruments and operating
personnel required for tests.

B. Make final adjustments or balancing to equipment or systems as required for

acceptable operating conditions and to meet specified performance.

C. Recommend to replace or revise the equipment, systems or work found deficient

during tests.

D. Air balancing and testing shall not begin until systems has been completed and in
full working order. All air and water systems shall be put into operation as
required and shall continue the operation of same during each working day of
testing.

3.02 Pre-test Requirements

A. Before operating any equipment or systems, make a thorough check to

determine that systems have been flushed and cleaned as required and
equipment have been properly installed, lubricated and serviced. Check factory
instructions to see that installations have been made accordingly and that
recommended lubricants have been used.

B. Use particular care in lubricating bearings to avoid damage by over-lubrication

and blowing out seals. Check equipment for Installation. Repair damaged
equipment or replace with new equipment.

C. After completion of requirements above and immediately before starting

completion tests. Clean, replace or renew air filter media.

D. Clean pipes free of scale and thoroughly flush piping systems. Provide temporary
bypass for all water coils to prevent flushing water from passing through coils,
clean all strainers and valves. Fill all systems with the media required and
remove air from, the water systems by operating the air vents.

E. Clean all debris from the inside of all air handling equipment and plenums and
then vacuum clean small particles of rubbish and dust before operation of the
equipment and before installing outlet and inlet grilles, registers and diffusers.

3.03 Balancing and Performance Tests

A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least fourteen days in advance of starting these

test.

B. Upon completion of pre-test requirements, or at such time prior to completion as

determined by the Architect/Engineer operate and test mechanical equipment and
systems for at least five consecutive eight-hour days to demonstrate satisfactory
overall operation of system.

C. Adjust and balance all air-handling and water systems and appurtenances
applicable to those systems to deliver the air and water quantities as specified
and accepted. Separate tests shall be conducted to verify all modes of operation
for all stations. Make final tests after all necessary system modifications are
completed. Seal instrument tests holes upon completion of the balancing
operation.

1. Test and adjust each air outlet and inlet to within plus or minus 10% of
design requirements.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/8* May 2019

Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

2. Test and adjust each fan air discharge to within plus 10% of design
requirements.

D. Air Balance:

1. Perform air quantity measurements in main and branch ducts by pitot tube
traverse of the entire cross-sectional area of the duct. Use inclined
manometers (draft gauge) or magnahelic gauges for measurements in
ducts having velocities of 5.1m per second or more. Use
micromanometers, hook gauges or similar low pressure instruments in
ducts having velocities of less than 5.1m per second. Seal openings in
ducts for pitot tube insertion with snap-in plugs after air balance is
completed.

2. Perform air quantity measurements at outlets and inlets using direct

reading velocity meters in accordance with the register and grille
manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Obtain total air quantities by adjustments of fan speeds. Use volume or

splitter dampers to adjust branch duct air quantities. After air balance is
complete, mark damper positions permanently so that they can be restored
to their correct position if disturbed at any time.

4. Air quantity adjustment by means of outlet deflectors, grilles, or air scoops

will not be permitted.

5. After air quantity balance at each register, adjust the supply register bars,
during the cooling season, to obtain the best distribution pattern.

E. Water Balance:

1. Perform water measurements, to balance flow, using annubar tubes and

portable flow meters.

2. Set automatic control valves to full flow conditions through coils during
balancing procedure.

3. Determine pump capacities by differential pressure measurements. Adjust

water circuits using balancing cocks or automatic flow control valves. After
balance is complete, mark balancing cock positions permanently so that
they may be returned to their correct position if disturbed.

4. After balancing, take running current readings at all circulating pumps.

Correct any pump motor which is overloaded and at no additional cost to
the Employer.

F. If required operating conditions cannot be obtained for above tests, place

equipment in proper condition for long shutdown or until such time as post-
contract completion tests or preseason start-up can be made as specified herein.
Provide periodic checks as required and conform to manufacturer's
recommendations for such shutdown.

G. Post-contract Completion Tests: If required operating conditions cannot be

obtained at time of completion tests due to outdoor season temperatures or
indoor operations, return to job site when requested and operate equipment and
systems at such time of year when outdoor temperatures and indoor operations
will permit proper loading of equipment and systems as required provided,

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/9* May 2019

Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

however, that such tests will be completed during the guarantee period. After
notification, seven calendar days will be allowed to start tests.

H. Pre-season Start-up: When required during the DLP, start up for early ventilating,
cooling or heating season use, equipment and systems that have remained shut
down immediately after completion tests and that have not performed full load
Contract and post-contract completion tests.

3.04 Rejection of Plant

Any item of plant or component which fails to comply with the requirements of this
Specification in any respect whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or
on completion at Site may be rejected either in whole or in part as they consider
necessary. After adjustment or modification if so directed, submit the items for further
inspection and/or tests. Plant or components with defects of such a nature to that the
requirements of this Specification, shall be replaced without additional cost and to the
satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.

3.05 Maintenance and Operation Period

A. The Maintenance and Operation Period for the purpose of this Contract shall be a
period of twelve months from the date of Practical Completion. During this period,
provide without charge labour and materials for the routine maintenance required
to properly maintain and operate all works installed under this Contract on a
continuous 24 hours a day operational basis, and services report must be
submitted for reference. The maintenance scheme at the aforesaid period shall
be submitted for review.

B. During the Maintenance and Operation Period, facilities of 24 hours 'call-out' shall
be provided whereby at any time of day or night. Skilful men shall be sent to
repair any equipment that has broken down.

C. At the completion of the Maintenance and Operation Period, the plant including
all filters, condensers, etc. shall be cleaned and operational to a standard equal to
that as if the system was unused.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/10* May 2019

Tender Addendum No.1
E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Design Data Installed Field Test Results

- Flow, cu.m/s - Manufacturer - Flow, cu.m/s
- Static pressure at fan discharge - Size and unit ref. number - Static pressure at fan discharge, pascal.
- Motor kW - Arrangement, discharge - Fan speed, rpm.
- Percent fresh air - Class - Fan motor operating current
- Fan rpm - Motor kW, volt/phase/Hz, full load current, - Fan motor operating brake kW.
speed.
- Fan motor kW - Entering coils, Temperature db°C and
wboC.
- Leaving coils, Temperature db°C and
wb°C.

Table 1 : Air Handling Units and Fans

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/11 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Design Data Installed Field Test Results

- Capacity, l/s - Manufacturer - Capacity, l/s
- Head, kPa - Size and unit ref. no. - Discharge pressure (full flow, design flow
and no flow), kPa
- Speed, rpm - Type - Suction pressure (full flow, design flow and
no flow), kPa
- Pump, motor brake kW - Motor kW, Volt/phase/Hz, full load current, - Plot tested points on pump characteristic
speed curves.
- Temp. of incoming water, °C - Operating head, kPa
- Temp. of outgoing water, °C - Design flow, amp
- Full flow current, amp
- No flow current, amp
- Calculated brake, kW

Table 2 : Pumps

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/12 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

Design Field Test

Cooling capacity: Coil identification unit ref. no.
- Sensible Required water temp. drop corrected for actual test conditions.
- Latent (cooling only)
Water, l/s Entering and leaving water temp. °C
Entering and leaving water temp. °C Entering air temp. db°C/wb°C
Entering air temp. db°C/wb°C Leaving air temp db°C/wb°C
Leaving air temp. db°C/wb°C Pressure drop, kPa
Pressure drop, kPa Control valve:
- liters per second
- pressure drop, kPa

Table 3 : Cooling Coil

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.33(AC)/13 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

SECTION 3.34 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS ON TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF

ELECTRICAL WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

This Section covers particular requirements on the testing and commissioning of the
complete electrical installation to determine its full compliance with the Specification
and design intent. It shall be read in conjunction with other sections of the
Specification.

PART 2 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS (FAT)

2.01 General

Carry out the following minimum tests to provide assurance that the
equipment/plant/material being supplied will meet the performance requirements of this
Specification. Where applicable, all tests shall be carried out in a manner as set down
in relevant BS. The list provided is an indicative minimum of the tests required.
Develop and submit full test schedules, procedures, circuit diagrams for approval in
accordance with the requirements of the other sections of the Specification. Use
standard testing forms attached to the Specification as appropriate, otherwise, develop
and submit testing forms for approval.

2.02 MCC and LMCPs

A. Visual Checks

1. Carry out visual inspection of the general construction of the MCC and
LMCPs, the busbar system, switchgear, instrumentation, cabling
provisions, etc. to determine if the MCC and LMCPs are ready for further
testing and subsequent delivery to site.

B. Verification of Measuring Instrument Accuracy

1. With the secondary injection test set connected to the ammeter terminals,
inject currents ranging from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%.
Compare the meter readings with the calibrated ammeter readings.

2. With a 3-phase variac connected to the voltmeter terminals, vary the

voltage from 0 to 100% of the rated value in steps of 25%. Compare the
meter readings with the calibrated voltmeter readings.

3. Follow manufacturer's instructions for the calibration of voltage, current

and power transducers.

4. With a 3-phase variac connected to the under-voltage relay circuit, vary

the supply voltage gradually to record the drop-off and pick-up voltages of
the relay.

C. Dielectric Test

1. With all switching devices in open positions, carry out 1000V meggar test
for phase to phase, phase to neutral, and phase to earth to measure the
insulation resistance.

2. Repeat the above test with all switching devices in closed position.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.34(AC)/1 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

3. Apply 2kV AC between all live parts and the exposed conductive parts (ie
between L1+L2+L3+N and E) for 60 seconds and measure the leakage
current.

4. Repeat the above test between each pole and all the other poles
connected to the exposed conductive parts (ie between L1 and
L2+L3+N+E, L2 and L1+L3+N+E, L3 and L1+L2+N+E, N and
L1+L2+L3+E).

5. The test voltage at the moment of application shall not exceed 1000V and
shall then be increased steadily within a few seconds to 2000V and
maintained for 60 seconds.

6. Prior to the HV test, disconnect all electrical equipment which are

designed for a lower test voltage, and current-consuming apparatus such
as measuring instruments in which the application of the test voltage
would cause the flow of a current.

7. Repeat the meggar test with all switching devices in closed position after
the HV test.

D. Primary Injection Test

1. Record the following information for every circuit being tested:-

a. Circuit number.

b. Make, type, serial number, CT ratio, class, burden of every PCT and
MCT.

2. Inject primary current at the rated value to individual phase and neutral
conductors and measure the secondary current of the associated CT to be
tested.

3. Repeat the above measurement with primary current set at 50% of the
rated value.

E. Secondary Injection Test

1. Record the following information for every circuit being tested:-

a. Circuit number.

b. Make, type, serial number, rated current, trip coil voltage of every
O/C and E/F relay.

c. Nominal full load current and CT ratio of the associated PCT.

2. Inject secondary current in increasing amount to the relay and measure the
minimum current that the relay starts to pick up, and the minimum
operating current that the relay operates.

3. After the relay contacts are made, reduce the injected current slowly and
measure the minimum reset current when the relay resets to its normal
position.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.34(AC)/2 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

4. With the O/L relay PSM at 100% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current
at 2 times the rated value and measure the operating time. Repeat the
test at 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current.

5. Repeat the above test at any other relay settings as directed during the test.

6. With the E/F relay PSM at 20% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current at
2 times, 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current and measure the
operating time. Repeat the test at any other relay settings as directed
during the test.

7. Compare the measured operating times and the theorectical nominal

operating times read from the manufacturer's published relay characteristic
curves.

8. Record the relay settings being left at the end of the test.

F. Battery Test

1. Under fully charged condition, open the input switchgear to the battery
charger. Record the battery voltage against time and operate the ACBs
and controlgear to verify that the battery provided is adequate for its
intended duty.

2. After the battery discharge test, resume the power supply to the battery
charger. Record the charging voltage and charging current against time to
verify that the battery charger and battery provided is adequate for its
intended duty.

G. Functional Tests

1. Carry out functional tests to check that all control circuits are correctly
wired, and that all control schemes specified are fully incorporated.

2. Carry out mechanical operation tests of switchgears to verify that all

switching mechanisms are functional, and all drawout type switchgears are
correctly aligned.

PART 3 ON-SITE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

3.01 At appropriate stages of the installation, inspection and testing prior to the energising of
equipment, carry out insulation tests and submit records for approval.

3.02 At appropriate stages of the installation and prior to operational testing, carry out
potential tests of equipment and submit records for approval.

3.03 Carry out operational tests of all electrical equipment in proper staged phases prior to
energising and submit records for approval.

3.04 Develop a complete and detailed plan for the site testing of the power supply systems
beginning with the incoming breakers and following a logical plan which will allow
energisation of the system in a safe and secure manner and to interface and co-
ordinate with the other electrical and mechanical installations. For example, the
battery charger and batteries shall be checked prior to furnishing the DC control power
for the circuit breakers.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.34(AC)/3 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

The circuit breaker control shall be operationally checked for all local control, including
testing up to interface terminal points for signals and control interconnection to other
system or installation prior to carrying out operational tests of the circuit breaker.

3.05 Carry out surveillance and security check of the power supply systems including
padlocking or otherwise maintaining control of the power supply, padlocking of
switchgear and circuit breaker units, distribution switchboards, etc. throughout all
energisation stages of the installation. Co-ordinate with the other specialist contractors
and sub-contractors to assure no downstream cables or other electrical equipment is
energised before being tested and before other specialist contractors' and sub-
contractors' facilities are ready and secure. This requirement shall remain in force for
each part of the system until such a time that the complete installation is certified
complete in writing by the Employer's Authorized Representative.

3.06 Take precautionary measures during testing and the method of tests shall be such that
no danger to persons or property can occur even if the circuit being tested is defective.

PART 4 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS (SAT)

4.01 General

4.01.1 Perform tests to verify that the complete installation will meet the requirements of this
Specification. Develop full test schedules for the approval in accordance with the
requirements of the Specification.

4.01.2 SAT shall show, inter alia, the following as a minimum:

A. All equipment, cabling, etc. are electrically and mechanically safe.

B. All interlocks, isolators and door and cover securing mechanisms are properly
fitted and adjusted.

C. All exposed metal work is properly bonded and earthed in accordance with IEE
Wiring Regulations, relevant BSCP and statutory requirements and that all
connections and points required to be earthed for safety and satisfactory
operation are properly earthed in accordance with the manufacturer's
requirements.

D. All cables, cores and terminations are properly made off, secure, properly
supported and correctly identified and coloured.

E. All phases, polarities, neutral and common connections are correctly switched as
required, that power is correctly available at all points and that voltage and
frequency at all equipment are correct and in accordance with requirement for
correct working.

F. All supplies are properly fused, or otherwise protected to give satisfactory

discrimination and safe disconnection under fault conditions.

G. All contacts are properly aligned and not subject to excessive wear or erosion.

H. All protective covers are properly fitted, all warning and designating labels are
correct and in position and the inside of all boxes and cubicles are clean and free
of "swarf" and cable strippings.

I. Batteries, if provided, are properly ventilated, installed, connected and fitted, and
that battery chargers are working correctly.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.34(AC)/4 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

J. Insulation resistance of all cabling and equipment is not less than that required by
BS and IEE Wiring Regulations.

K. All instruments and meters are energised with correct polarity and working
properly.

L. All fault indications and alarms are working correctly.

M. All essential equipment fed from battery systems continues to function correctly
and without disturbance during all supply failure, restoration and standby
sequences.

N. All interlocks, sequences and protection for normal and emergency operations
are in order.

O. Compliance of performance as required by Code of Practice for the Electricity

(Wiring) Regulations.

4.01.3 The list provided below is an indicative minimum of the tests required.

4.02 Cables

A. Continuity Test.

B. Insulation Resistance Test.

C. Earthing Test.

D. Polarity Test.

4.03 MCC and LMCPs

A. Visual Checks

1. Carry out visual inspection of the general construction of the MCC and
LMCPs, the busbar system, switchgear, instrumentation, cabling
provisions, etc. to determine if the MCC and LMCPs are ready for further
testing and subsequent delivery to site.

B. Dielectric Test

1. With all switching devices in open positions, carry out 1000V meggar test
for phase to earth, phase to phase, phase to neutral, and phase to earth to
measure the insulation resistance.

2. Repeat the above test with all switching devices in closed position.

3. Apply 2kV AC between all live parts and the exposed conductive parts (ie
between L1+L2+L3+N and E) for 60 seconds and measure the leakage
current.

4. Repeat the above test between each pole and all the other poles
connected to the exposed conductive parts (ie between L1 and
L2+L3+N+E, L2 and L1+L3+N+E, L3 and L1+L2+N+E, N and
L1+L2+L3+E).

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.34(AC)/5 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

5. The test voltage at the moment of application shall not exceed 1000V and
shall then be increased steadily within a few seconds to 2000V and
maintained for 60 seconds.

6. Prior to the HV test, disconnect all electrical equipment which are

designed for a lower test voltage, and current-consuming apparatus such
as measuring instruments in which the application of the test voltage
would cause the flow of a current.

7. Repeat the meggar test with all switching devices in closed position after
the HV test.

C. Secondary Injection Test

1. Record the following information for every circuit being tested:-

a. Circuit number.

b. Make, type, serial number, rated current, trip coil voltage of every
O/C and E/F relay.

c. Nominal full load current and CT ratio of the associated PCT.

2. Inject secondary current in increasing amount to the relay and measure

the minimum current that the relay starts to pick up, and the minimum
operating current that the relay operates.

3. After the relay contacts are made, reduce the injected current slowly and
measure the minimum reset current when the relay resets to its normal
position.

4. With the O/L relay PSM at 100% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current
at 2 times the rated value and measure the operating time. Repeat the
test at 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current.

5. Repeat the above test at any other relay settings as directed during the
test.

6. With the E/F relay PSM at 20% and TMS at 1.0, inject secondary current
at 2 times, 5 times and 10 times the rated secondary current and measure
the operating time. Repeat the test at any other relay settings as directed
during the test.

7. Compare the measured operating times and the theorectical nominal

operating times read from the manufacturer's published relay
characteristic curves.

8. Record the relay settings being left at the end of the test.

D. Functional Tests

1. Carry out functional tests to check that all control circuits are correctly
wired, and that all control schemes specified are fully incorporated.

2. Carry out mechanical operation tests of switchgears to verify that all

switching mechanisms are functional, and all drawout type switchgears are
correctly aligned.

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.34(AC)/6 April 2019

E&M PACKAGE CONTRACT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR PROPOSED COMMERCIAL DEVELOPMENT
AT N.K.I.L. NO. 6557, KAI TAK AREA 1E SITE 2 HVAC INSTALLATION

4.04 LV System

Carry out tests for the following items, where relevant, in the sequence indicated.

A. Continuity of each power and control circuit conductors.

B. Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary equipment

bonding.

C. Insulation resistance.

D. Insulation of site-built assemblies.

E. Protection by electrical separation.

F. Polarity.

G. Earth fault loop impedence.

H. Functions of all items of equipment

WSP (ASIA) LTD. TS 3.34(AC)/7 April 2019